The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPeconic School Rehabilitation - Phase 1 ImprovementsTOWN OF SOUTHOLD "PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE 1 IMPROVEMENTS"~[ CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION SOUTHOLD, SUFFOLK COUNTY, NEW YORK LKMA Project No: 09011.000 Prepared For: TOWN OF SOUTHOLD 53095 Main Road Southold, New York 11971 Prepared By: L.K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. Consulting Engineers 437 South Country Road Brookhaven, New York t 1719 (631) 286-8668 MAY-B?-L~ 1~7:~ F12019: TD:7GS~i~'I5 P.~?~ ADDENDUM NO. 1 TOWN OF $OUTHOLD SUFFOLK COUNTY, NEW YORK PECONIC SCHOOL - PHASE I SITE IMPROVEMENTS TO: ALL Contractors FROM: LK. McLean Associates, P.C. DATE: . May 7, 2009 Acknowledge rcccipt of this Addcndmn No. 1 by in~rting ils number and date in thc placc provided for sarn~ in the Propo~l Package, Page 7 o'r 8. Failure to do so may subject tlg bidder to disqualification. This addendum .forms prat of th~ Contr~t Documents and modifies ~om &s follows: THE INCLUSION OF ~ FOLLOWING SECTION SHALL BE INSERTISl) ~ THE 'qNSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS" SECTION OF Tli~ BID PACKAGE. NOT COVERED UNDER WICKS LAW MONETARY THRESHOLD Each bidder on a public work contract, where the preparation of separate specifications is not required0 under General Municipal Law, Section 101 (WICKES LAW), shall sub.it with its bid a separate sealed list that names each subcontractor that the bidder will use to perform work on the contract and the agreed-upon amount to be ~aid to each. for: (a) plumbing and gas fitting, (b) steam heating, hot water heating, ventilating and air conditionin~ apparatus and (c) electric wirin~ and standard illuminating fixtures. After low bid is announced, the sealed list of subcontractors subm/tted with such low bid shall be opened and the names of such subcontractors shall be announced and thereafter any change of subcontractor or agreed-upon amount to be paid to each shall require the approval of the publlc owner, u~on a showing presented to the public owner of legitimate construction need for such change, which shall be open to public inspection. Legitimate construction need shall include, but not be limited to, a change in project specifications, a change in construction material costs, a chan~e to subcontractor status, or the subcontractor has become o~herwise unwilling, unable or unavailable to perform the subcontract. The sealed lists of subcontractors sub~itted by all other bidders shall be returned to. .them%lnopened after the contract award. THE CURRENT TIIRF~HOLD IS CONTRACTS IN EXCESS OF $1,5~0~000. PLEASE NOTE THAT TI-IR LANGUAGE USED IN SECTION 30 OF THE BID PACKAGE'S "GENERAL COND£1'IONS" IS IN CONFLICT WITH THE ABOVE REFERENCED SECTION OF THE N~W YORK STATE LABOR LAW. TllEREFORE, PLEASE ICNORE ANY REFERENCE TO SUBCONTRACTORS IN SECTION 30 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS. ADDENDUM NO, 1 - Page I of I TOWN OF SOUTHOLD 53095 MAIN ROAD, SOUTHOLD, NEW YORK 11971 PHONE: 631-765-1800/FAX: 631-765-6145 INVITATION TO BID NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN THAT SEALED PROPOSALS ARE SOUGHT AND REQUESTED FOR THE FOLLOWING: BID NAME: SOUTHOLD TOWN - "PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE ONE IMPROVEMENTS" Definite specifications may be obtained at the Southold Town Clerk's Office beginning MAY 7, 2009 PLACE OF OPENING: DATE OF OPENING: TIME OF OPENING: TOWN OF SOUTHOLD TOWN CLERKS OFFICE 53095 MAIN ROAD SOUTHOLD, NY 11971 MAY 28, 2009 10:00AM CONTACT PERSON: JAMES RICHTER R.A., TOWN ENGINEER, 631-765-1560 TECHNICAL QUESTIONS: CHRISTOPHER F. DWYER, LKMA 631-286-8668, PLEASE REFER TO QUESTIONS PAGE Q-1. VENDORS MUST SUBMIT BID IN SEALED ENVELOPE. PLEASE PRINT ON THE FACE OF ENVELOPE: 1) NAME & ADDRESS OF BIDDER 2) BID NAME BID MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY A 5 % BID SECURITY. It is the bidder's responsibility to read the attached Bid Specifications, Instructions to Bidders, and General Conditions, which outline bidding rules of the Town of Southold. Upon submission of bid, it is understood that the bidder has read, fully understands and will comply with said GENERAL CONDITIONS and specification requirements. The Town of Southold requires that this document be returned intact and that it be filled out completely. Please do not remove any pages from this bid package, and make a copy of the bid document for your records. A non-refundable fee of $25.00 will be charged for plans and specifications. Payment can be made by either money order, cash or check (payable to the Town of Southold). The Town of Southold welcomes and encourages minority and women-owned businesses to participate in the bidding process. TABLE OF CONTENTS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS Title Page Invitation to Bid Table of Contents Instructions to Bidders NYS Wage Rates Standard Insurance Requirements General Conditions Conditions of Contract Proposal Form Package Itemized Proposal Qualification of Bidders Contract Agreement Questions Page Specifications General Construction Drawings (Separate) lB-1 thru IB-6 SIR-1 thru SIR-2 GC-1 thru GC-12 CC-1 thru CC-18 Proposal Form Package 1-8 PF-1A thru PF-1G QS-1 thru QS-4 A-1 thru A-3 Q-1 Divisions 1, 2, 3.4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 15B, 16 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INDEX 1. Receipt and Opening of Bids 2. Form, Preparation and Presentation of Proposal 3. Bid Security 4. Qualifications of Bidders 5. Rejection of Bids 6. Bidders Responsibility 7. Construction Terms and Conditions 8. Security for Faithful Performance 9. Bid Reservations 10. Non-Collusive Statement 11. Addenda and Interpretations 12. Method of Award 13. Single Price Bid Analysis 14. Municipal Exempt Status 15. Labor Law 16. Wage Rates 17. Insurance Required by the Town of Southold 18. Quantities INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS The Town of Southold invites bids on the forms herein provided for the Town of Southold "Peconic School Rehabilitation- Phase One improvements" in Peconic, New York. Sealed bids shall be received by the Town Clerk of the Town of Southold at 53095 Main Road, Southold, New York no later than 10:00 AM prevailing time on Thursday, May 28, 2009 at which time they will be opened and publicly read aloud. All bids received after the time stated for the opening in the Notice to Bidders may not be considered and will be returned unopened to the bidder. The bidder assumes the risk of any delay in the mail or in the handling of the mail by employees of the Town. Whether sent by mail or by means of personal delivery, the bidder assumes responsibility for having his bid deposited on time at the place specified. Faxed bids will not be accepted. 2. FORM~ PREPARATION AND PRESENTATION OF PROPOSAL The Proposal Form as issued by the Town Clerk shall be completely filled in, in black ink or typed on the original bid form. No photocopies will be accepted. All blank spaces for bid prices must be filled in, in both words and figures, with a total or gross sum for which the bid is made. All lines must have an indication of the bidder's response whether it be "0", "N/A", "No Charge", or a dollar figure. All lines must be filled in to indicate bidder's acknowledgement of the request. Bids that do not have all applicable lines filled in on the bid proposal form may be disqualified as a non-responsive bid. We cannot assume there is "no charge" when lines are left empty. Bids that contain any omission, erasure, alteration, addition or items not called for in the itemized bid form or that contain irregularities of any kind will not be accepted. In case of discrepancy between the unit price and total amount bid for any item, the unit price, as expressed in words, shall govern. The following two items will automatically render a bid unacceptable to the Town of Southold: a. Failure to sign bid proposal page. b. Failure to include necessary hid security deposit (as required). It shall be fully understood that any deviations from the inclusion of the above items will be grounds to see the bid as non-compliant and will not be considered for award. 3. BID SECURITY (a) The Bid must be accompanied by a certified check on a solvent bank or trust company with its principal place of business in New York State, or an acceptable bid bond, in an amount equal to not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount bid, made payable to the Town of Southold (herein identified as Owner), as assurance that the bid is made in good faith. The certified checks or bid bonds of unsuccessful bidders will be returned after execution of the Contract between the Owner and the successful bidder; the certified check or bid bond of the successful bidder will be retained until filing and approval of the Performance Bond and until completion of five percent (5%) of the work under the Contract. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (b) The successful bidder, upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the Contract and bonds required within ten (10) days after the date of notice of the acceptance of his bid, shall forfeit to the Owner, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security he deposited with his bid. 4. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS (a) Forms for qualifications of bidders, giving evidence of sufficient facilities, equipment, experience and financial ability to insure completion of the work are provided with the bid specification package, and shall be filled out by the contractor and returned with the bid submission. (b) Information contained in any statement of financial ability shall be not more than thirty days old at the time of submission. (c) The Town reserves the right to make such investigation as it may deem necessary or advisable to determine any bidder's ability to do the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the Town, on request, all data and information pertinent thereto. The Town reserves the right to reject any bid if such investigation fails to satisfy the Town that the bidder is fully qualified to do the work. Financial instability of a bidder may be cause for non-award. 5. REJECTION OF BIDS (a) The TOWN BOARD reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted in the quaiifications statement or an investigation of such bidder fails to satisfy the TOWN BOARD that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Conditional bids will be considered informal and will be rejected. (b) The TOWN BOARD reserves the right to reject any and all bids, in whole or in part, to waive any informality in any or all bids, and to accept the bid or part thereof which it deems most favorable to the Town after all bids have been examined and/or checked. 6. BIDDERS RESPONSIBILITY (a) Bidders are cautioned not to submit bids until after having inspected the site of the proposed improvement and having made themselves familiar with local conditions. The attention of persons intending to submit bids is specifically called to the paragraph of the Contract which debars a Contractor from pleading misunderstanding or deception because of estimates or quantities, character, location or other conditions surrounding the same. Special attention is called to the notes on the Plans or in the itemized form of bid, which are made a part of this Contract, which may alter or revise the Specifications for the particular contract. (b) No representation is made as to the existence or nonexistence of groundwater, which may in any way impede the work, proposed to be accomplished. Each bidder shall fully inform himself as to groundwater and sub-surface conditions prior to submitting his bid. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (c) The submission of a bid will be construed to mean that the bidder is fully informed as to the extent, cost, and character of the materials, labor, and equipment required to complete the proposed job in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, including all other expenses incidental thereto. (d) Bidders must examine the Plans and Specifications and exercise their own judgement as to the nature and amount of the whole of the work to be done, and for the bid prices, must assume all risks of variance by whomsoever made in computation or statement of amounts or quantities necessary to fully complete the work in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. (e) The Bidder shall assume all risks and responsibility and shall complete the work in whatever material and under whatever conditions he may encounter or create, without extra cost to the Town. (f) No pleas of ignorance or misunderstanding of conditions that exist or that may hereafter exist, or of conditions or difficulties that may be encountered in the execution of the work under this Contract, as a result of failure to make the necessary examinations and investigations, will be to fulfill in every detail all of the requirements of the Contract Documents, or will be accepted as a basis for any claims whatsoever for extra compensation, or for an extension of time. 7. CONSTRUCTION TERMS AND CONDITIONS The successful bidder is warned that the work specified in the Conditions of Contract, together with the Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form, General Conditions, Plans, Specifications and instructions of the Engineer or his duly authorized representative will be rigidly enforced. 8. SECURITY FOR FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE AND MAINTENANCE The successful bidder shall be required to execute a Performance Bond equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the amount bid, such bonds to be executed by a New York licensed insurance carrier/surety company with an A rating or better from A.M. Best & Co. and acceptable to the Owner; or bonds secured by collateral; or securities approved by the Owner. The Performance Bond shall be written so as to remain in full force and effect as a maintenance bond for a period of not less than one (1) year after the date of final acceptance of the work. The successful bidder, upon failure to execute and deliver the bonds required within ten (10) days after the date of notice of award, shall forfeit to the Owner, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited with his bid, and he will be liable for and he agrees to pay to the Owner on demand, the difference between the price bid and the price for which such contract shall subsequently be relet including the cost of such reletting less the amount of such deposit. No plea of m/stake in such accepted bid shall be available to the bidder for recovery of his deposit or as a defense to any action upon accepted bid unless said mistake can be proven by documentary evidence acceptable to the Town. After approval of the bonds and execution of the Contract and after ten (10) percent of the work has been completed, the bid security accompanying the bid will be returned. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 9. BID RESERVATIONS Bids submitted shall remain in effect for forty-five (45) days past the date of bid opening. This period may be extended, for the benefit of the Town, by mutual agreement between the Bidder and the Town Clerk. 10. NON-COLLUSIVE STATEMENT The form of non-collusion bidding certification contained in the proposal package must be executed by the Bidder and submitted with the proposal. The submission of this statement certifies that the prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. 11. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS Every request for information or interpretation of the Contract Documents or Drawings must be addressed in writing to the Clerk Town of Southold 53095 Route 25 P.O. Box 1179 Southold, N.Y. 11971, and to be given any consideration, must be received at least five (5) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Any such interpretations or supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda, and will be mailed or faxed to all prospective bidders. The failure of any bidder to receive any such addenda will not relieve the bidder of any obligation under his bid as submitted. Any addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents. 12. METHOD OF AWARD The bid will be awarded to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder, as will best promote the public interest, taking into consideration the reliability of the bidder, the quality of the materials, equipment, or supplies to be furnished, and conformity with the specifications. 13. SINGLE PRICE BID ANALYSIS In the event a single bid is received, the Town will conduct a price analysis of the bid price prior to the award of the contract. 14. MUNICIPAL EXEMPT STATUS The Town is exempt from the payment of Federal, State and local taxes. Taxes must not be included in proposal prices. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 15. LABOR LAW The Contractor and each and every subcontractor performing work at the site of the project to which this Contract relates shall comply with the applicable provisions of the Labor Law, as amended, of the State of New York. Attention is called to certain provisions of the Labor Law, as set forth in the Conditions of Contract, Paragraph 11, which are hereby referred to and made a part hereof. 16. WAGE RATES The rates of wages determined by the New York State Industrial Commissioner pursuant to the Labor Law, which shall be paid on this project, are set forth heroin following the Instructions to Bidders. Contractors and subcontractors are required to submit to the Town, within thirty days after issuance of the first payroll, and every thirty days thereafter, a transcript of the original payroll records, subscribed and affirmed as tree under the penalties of perjury. 17. INSURANCE REQUIRED BY THE TOWN OF SOUTHOLD The successful bidder will be required to procure and pay for the following types of insurance, as set forth in more detail herein following the Instructions to Bidders in the Standard Insurance requirements Section. (a)Comprehensive Automobile Policy (b)Comprehensive General Liability (c)Excess/Umbrella Insurance (d)Workmen's Compensation Insurance (e)Disability Insurance and Unemployment Insurance 18. QUANTITIES Any quantities set forth in the bid specifications are approximations only. No guarantee is made for any quantities stated. Payment shall be on the basis of actual quantities supplied or the actual work done at the unit prices quoted. David A. Paterson, Governor Town of Southhold Michael Sheedy, Architect L K McLean Associates 437 South Country Road Brookhaven NY 11719 Schedule Year Date Requested PRC# M. Patricia Smith, Commissioner 2008 through 2009 03/19/2009 2009002520 Location Project ID# Project Type Peconic Lane School Phase One Improvements-Repair portions of walls and ceilings, replace HVAC, electrical, including lights, fire suppression, fire alarms, carpeting, introducing interior stair chair lift, exterior PREVAILING WAGE SCHEDULE FOR ARTICLE 8 PUBLIC WORK PROJECT Attached is the current schedule(s) of the prevailing wage rates and prevailing hourly supplements for the project referenced above. A unique Prevailing Wage Case Number (PRC#) has been assigned to the schedule(s) for your project. The schedule is effective from July 2008 through June 2009. All updates, corrections, posted on the 1st business day of each month, and future copies of the annual determination are available on the Department's website www.labor.state.ny.us. Updated PDF copies of your schedule can be accessed by entering your assigned PRC# at the proper location on the website. It is the responsibility of the contracting agency or its agent to annex and make part, the attached schedule, to the specifications for this project, when it is advertised for bids and/or to forward said schedules to the successful bidder(s), immediately upon receipt, in order to insure the proper payment of wages. Please refer to the "General Provisions of Laws Covering Workers on Public Work Contracts" provided with this schedule, for the specific details relating to other responsibilities of the Department of Jurisdiction. Upon completion or cancellation of this project, enter the required information and mail OR fax this form to the office shown at the bottom of this notice, OR fill out the electronic version via the NYSDOL website. NOTICE OF COMPLETION / CANCELLATION OF PROJECT Date Completed: Date Cancelled: Name & Title of Representative: Phone: (518) 457-5589 Fax: (518) 485-1870 W. Averell Harriman State Office Campus, Bldg. 12, Room 130, Albany, NY 12240 www.labor.state.ny.us. PW 200 PWAsk@labor.state.ny.us General Provisions of Laws Covering Workers on Article 8 Public Work Contracts Introduction The Labor Law requires public work contractors and subcontractors to pay laborers, workers, or mechanics employed in the performance of a public work contract not less than the prevailing rate of wage and supplements (fringe benefits) in the locality where the work is performed. Responsibilities of the Department of Jurisdiction A Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) includes a state department, agency, board or commission: a county, city, town or village; a school district, board of education or board of cooperative educational services; a sewer, water, fire, improvement and other district corporation; a public benefit corporation; and a public authority awarding a public work contract. The Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) awarding a public work contract MUST obtain a Prevailing Rate Schedule listing the hourly rates of wages and supplements due the workers to be emp oyed on a publ c work project. This schedule may be obtained by completing and forwarding a "Request for wage and Supplement Information" form (PW 39) to the Bureau of Public Work. The Prevailing Rate Schedule MUST be included in the specifications for the contract to be awarded and is deemed part of the public work contract. Upon the awarding of the contract, the law requires that the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) furnish the following information to the Bureau: the name and address of the contractor, the date the contract was let and the approximate dollar value of the contract. To facilitate compliance with this provision of the Labor Law, a copy of the Department's "Notice of Contract Award" form (PW 16) is provided with the original Prevailing Rate Schedule. The Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) is required to notify the Bureau of the completion or cancellation of any public work project. The Department's PW 200 form is provided for that purpose. Hours No ~aborer, worker, or mechanic in the employ of a contractor or subcontractor engaged in the performance of any public work project shall be permitted to work more than eight hours in any day or more than five days in any week, except in cases of extraordinary emergency. The contractor and the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) may apply to the Bureau of Public Work for a dispensation permitting workers to work additional hours or days per week on a particular public work project. Wages and Supplements The wages and supplements to be paid and/or provided to laborers, workers, and mechanics employed on a public work project shall be not less than those listed in the current Prevailing Rate Schedule for the locality where the work is performed. If a prime contractor on a public work project has not been provided with a Prevailing Rate Schedule, the contractor must notify the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) who in turn must request an original Prevailing Rate Schedule form the Bureau of Public Work. Requests may be submitted by: mail to NYSDOL, Bureau of Public Work, State Office Bldg. Campus, Bldg. 12, Rm. 130, Albany, NY 12240; Fax to Bureau of Public Work (518) 485-1870; or electronically at the NYSDOL website www.labor.state.ny.us. Upon receiving the original schedule, the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) is REQUIRED to provide complete copies to all prime contractors who in turn MUST, by law, provide copies of all applicable county schedules to each subcontractor and obtain from each subcontractor, an affidavit certifying such schedules were received. If the original schedule expired, the contractor may obtain a copy of the new annual determination from the NYSDOL website www.labor.state, ny.us. The Commissioner of Labor makes an annual determination of the prevailing rates. This determination is in effect from July 1st through June 30th of the following year. The annual determination is available on the NYSDOL website www.labor.state, ny.us. Payrolls and Payroll Records Every contractor and subcontractor MUST keep original payrolls or transcripts subscribed and affirmed as true under penalty of perjury. Payrolls must be maintained for at least three (3) years from the project's date of completion. At a minimum, payrolls must show the following information for each person employed on a public work project: Name, Social Security number, Classification(s) in which the worker was employed, Hourly wage rate(s) paid, Supplements paid or provide, and Daily and weekly number of hours worked in each classification. Every contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency), within thirty (30) days after issuance of its first payroll and every thirty (30) days thereafter, a transcript of the original payrolls, subscribed and affirmed as true under penalty of perjury. The Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) shall receive and maintain such payrolls. In addition, the Commissioner of Labor may require contractors to furnish, with ten (10) days of a request, payroll records sworn to as their validity and accuracy for public work and private work. Payroll records include, by are not limited to time cards, work description sheets, proof that supplements were provided, cancelled payroll checks and payrolls. Failure to provide the requested information within the allotted ten (10) days will result in the withholding of up to 25% of the contract, not to exceed $100,000.00. If the contractor or subcontractor does not maintain a place of business in New York State and the amount of the contract exceeds $25,000.00, payroll records and certifications must be kept on the project worksite. The prime contractor is responsible for any underpayments of prevailing wages or supplements by any subcontractor. All contractors or their subcontractors shall provide to their subcontractors a copy of the Prevailing Rate Schedule specified in the public work contract as well as any subsequently issued schedules. A failure to provide these schedules by a contractor or subcontractor is a violation of Article 8, Section 220-a of the Labor Law. All subcontractors engaged by a public work project contractor or its subcontractor, upon receipt of the original schedule and any subsequently issued schedules, shall provide to such contractor a verified statement attesting that the subcontractor has received the Prevailing Rate Schedule and will pay or provide the applicable rates of wages and supplements specified therein. (See NYS Labor Laws, Article 8. Section 220-a). Determination of Prevailing Wage and Supplement Rate Updates Applicable to All Counties The wages and supplements contained in the annual determination become effective July 1st whether or not the new determination has been received by a given contractor. Care should be taken to review the rates for obvious errors. Any corrections should be brought to the Department's attention immediately. It is the responsibility of the public work contractor to use the proper rates. If there is a question on the proper classification to be used, please call the district office located nearest the project. Any errors in the annual determination will be corrected and posted to the NYSDOL website on the first business day of each month. Contractors are responsible for paying these updated rates as well, retroactive to July 1st. When you review the schedule for a particular occupation, your attention should be directed to the dates above the column of rates. These are the dates for which a given set of rates is effective. To the extent possible, the Department posts rates in its possession that cover periods of time beyond the July 1st to June 30th time frame covered by a particular annual determination. Rates that extend beyond that instant time period are informational ONLY and may be updated in future annual determinations that actually cover the then appropriate July 1st to June 30th time period. Withholding of Payments When a complaint is filed with the Commissioner of Labor alleging the failure of a contractor or subcontractor to pay or provide the prevailing wages or supplements, or when the Commissioner of Labor believes that unpaid wages or supplements may be due, payments on the public work contract shall be withheld from the pdme contractor in a sufficient amount to satisfy the alleged unpaid wages and supplements, including interest and civil penalty, pending a final determination. When the Bureau of Public Work finds that a contractor or subcontractor on a public work project failed to pay or provide the requisite prevailing wages or supplements, the Bureau is authorized by Sections 220-b of the Labor Law to so notify the financial officer of the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) that awarded the public work contract. Such officer MUST then withhold or cause to be withheld from any payment due the prime contractor on account of such contract the amount indicated by the Bureau as sufficient to satisfy the unpaid wages and supplements, including interest and any civil penalty that may be assessed by the Commissioner of Labor. The withholding continues until there is a final determination of the underpayment by the Commissioner of Labor or by the court in the event a legal proceeding is instituted for review of the determination of the Commissioner of Labor. The Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) shall comply with this order of the Commissioner of Labor or of the court with respect to the release of the funds so withheld. Summary of Notice Posting Requirements The current Prevailing Rate Schedule must be posted in a prominent and accessible place on the site of the public work project. The prevailing wage schedule must be encased in, or constructed of, materials capable of withstanding adverse weather conditions and be titled "PREVAILING RATE OF WAGES" in letters no smaller than two (2) inches by two (2) inches. Every employer providing workers, compensation insurance and disability benefits must post notices of such coverage in the format prescribed by the Workers. Compensation Board in a conspicuous place on the jobsite. Every employer subject to the NYS Human Rights Law must conspicuously post at its offices, places of employment, or employment training centers, notices furnished by the State Division of Human Rights. Employers liable for contributions under the Unemployment Insurance Law must conspicuously post on the jobsite notices furnished by the NYS Department of Labor. Apprentices Employees cannot be paid apprentice rates unless they are individually registered in a program registered with the NYS Commissioner of Labor. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeyworkers in any craft classification can be no greater than the statewide building trade ratios promulgated by the Department of Labor and included with the Prevailing Rate Schedule. An employee listed on a payroll as an apprentice who is not registered as above or is performing work outside the classification of work for which the apprentice is indentured, must be paid the prevailing journeyworker's wage rate for the classification of work the employee is actually performing. NYSDOL Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220-3, require that only apprentices individually registered with the NYS Department of Labor may be paid apprenticeship rates on a public work project. No other Federal or State Agency of office registers apprentices in New York State. Persons wishing to vedfy the apprentice registration of any person must do so in writing by mail, to the NYSDOL Office of Employability Development / Apprenticeship Training, State Office Bldg. Campus, Bldg. 12, Albany, NY 12240 or by Fax to NYSDOL Apprenticeship Training (518) 457-7154. All requests for verification must include the name and social security number of the person for whom the information is requested. The only conclusive proof of individual apprentice registration is written verification from the NYSDOL Apprenticeship Training Albany Central office. Neither Federal nor State Apprenticeship Training offices outside of Albany can provide conclusive registration information. It should be noted that the existence of a registered apprenticeship program is not conclusive proof that any person is registered in that program. Furthermore, the existence or possession of wallet cards, identification cards, or copies of state forms is not conclusive proof of the registration of any person as an apprentice. Interest and Penalties In the event that an underpayment of wages and/or supplements is found: Interest shall be assessed at the rate then in effect as prescribed by the Superintendent of Banks pursuant to section 14-a of the Banking Law, per annum from the date of underpayment to the date restitution is made. A Civil Penalty may also be assessed, not to exceed 25% of the total of wages, supplements, and interest due. Debarment Any contractor or subcontractor and/or its successor shall be ineligible to submit a bid on or be awarded any public work contract or subcontract with any state, municipal corporation or public body for a period of five (5) years when: Two (2) willful determinations have been rendered against that contractor or subcontractor and/or its successor within any consecutive six (6) year period. There is any willful determination that involves the falsification of payroll records or the kickback of wages or supplements. Criminal Sanctions Willful violations of the Prevailing Wage Law (Article 8 and Article 9 of the Labor Law) constitute a misdemeanor punishable by fine or imprisonment, or both. Discrimination No employee or applicant for employment may be discriminated against on account of age, race, creed, color, national origin, sex, disability or marital status. No contractor, subcontractor nor any person acting on its behalf, shall by reason of race, creed, color, disability, sex or national origin discriminate against any citizen of the State of New York who is qualified and available to perform the work to which the employment relates (NYS Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220-e(a)). No contractor, subcontractor, nor any person acting on its behalf, shall in any manner, discriminate against or intimidate any employee on account of race, creed, color, disability, sex, or national origin (NYS Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220- e(b) ). The Human Rights Law also prohibits discrimination in employment because of age, marital status, or religion. There may be deducted from the amount payable to the contractor under the contract a penalty of $50.00 for each calendar day during which such person was discriminated against or intimidated in violation of the provision of the contract (NYS Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220-e(c) ). The contract may be cancelled or terminated by the State or municipality. All monies due or to become due thereunder may be forfeited for a second or any subsequent violation of the terms or conditions of the anti-discrimination sections of the contract (NYS Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220-e(d) ). Every employer subject to the New York State Human Rights Law must conspicuously post at its offices, places of employment, or employment training centers notices furnished by the State Division of Human Rights. Workers' Compensation In accordance with Section 142 of the State Finance Law, the contractor shall maintain coverage during the life of the contract for the benefit of such employees as required by the provisions of the New York State Workers' Compensation Law. A contractor who is awarded a public work contract must provide proof of workers' compensation coverage pdor to being allowed to begin work. The insurance policy must be issued by a company authorized to provide workers' compensation coverage in New York State. Proof of coverage must be on form C-105.2 (Certificate of Workers' Compensation Insurance) and must name this agency as a certificate holder. If New York State coverage is added to an existing out-of-state policy, it can only be added to a policy from a company authorized to wdte workers' compensation coverage in this state. The coverage must be listed under item 3A of the information page. The contractor must maintain proof that subcontractors doing work covered under this contract secured and maintained a workers' compensation policy for all employees working in New York State. Every employer providing worker's compensation insurance and disability benefits must post notices of such coverage in the format prescribed by the Workers' Compensation Board in a conspicuous place on the jobsite. Unemployment Insurance Employers liable for contributions under the Unemployment Insurance Law must conspicuously post on the jobsite notices furnished by the New York State Department of Labor. David A. Paterson, Governor Town of Southhold Michael Sheedy, Architect L K McLean Associates 437 South Country Road Brookhaven NY 11719 Schedule Year Date Requested PRC# M. Patricia Smith, Commissioner 2008through 2009 03/19/2009 2009002520 Location Peconic Lane School Project ID# Project Type Phase One Improvements-Repair portions of walls and ceilings rep ace HVAC, e ectrical including lights fire suppression, fire alarms, carpeting, ntroducing interior stair char ft, exter or Notice of Contract Award New York State Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220.3a requires that certain information regarding the awarding of public work contracts, be furnished to the Commissioner of Labor. One "Notice of Contract Award" (PW 16, which may be photocopied), MUST be completed for EACH prime contractor on the above referenced project. Upon notifying the successful bidder(s) of this contract, enter the required information and mail OR fax this form to the office shown at the bottom of this notice, OR fill out the electronic version via the NYSDOL website. Contractor Information All information must be supplied Federal Employer Identification Number: Name: Address: City: Amount of Contract: Approximate Starting Date: Approximate Completion Date: State: Zip: Contract Type: [ ] (01) General Construction [ ] (02) HeatingNentilation [ ] (03) Electrical [ ] (04) Plumbing [ ] (05) Other: Phone: (518)457-5589 Fax: (518)485-1870 W. Averell Harriman State Office Campus, Bldg. 12, Room 130, Albany, NY 12240 www.labor.state.ny.us. PW 16 PWAsk@labor.state.ny.us IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR CONTRACTORS & CONTRACTING AGENCIES Social Security Numbers on Certified Payrolls The Department of Labor is cognizant of the concerns of the potential for misuse or inadvertent disclosure of social security numbers. Identity theft is a growing problem and we are sympathetic to contractors' concerns with regard to inclusion of this information on payrolls if another identifier will suffice. For these reasons, the substitution of the use of the last four di,qits of the social security number on certified payrolls submitted to contracting agencies on public work projects is now acceptable to the Department of Labor. NOTE: This change does not affect the Department's ability to request and receive the entire social security number from employers during the course of its public work / prevailing wage investigations. To all State Departments, Agency Heads and Public Benefit Corporations IMPORTANT NOTICE REGARDING PUBLIC WORK ENFORCEMENT FUND Budget Policy & Reporting Manual B-610 Public Work Enforcement Fund effective date December 7, 2005 1. Purpose and Scope: This Item describes the Public Work Enforcement Fund (the Fund, PWEF) and its relevance to State agencies and public benefit corporations engaged in construction or reconstruction contracts, and announces the recently-enacted increase to the percentage of the dollar value of such contracts that must be deposited into the Fund. This item also describes the roles of the following entities with respect to the Fund: New York State Department of Labor (DOL), The Office of the State of Comptroller (OSC), and State agencies and public benefit corporations. 2. Background and Statutory References: DOL uses the Fund to enforce the State's Labor Law as it relates to contracts for construction or reconstruction as defined in subdivision two of Section 220 of the Labor Law. State agencies and public benefit corporations participating in such contracts are required to make payments to the Fund. Chapter 511 of the Laws of 1995 (as amended by Chapter 513 of the Laws of 1997, Chapter 655 of the Laws of 1999, Chapter 376 of the Laws of 2003 and Chapter 407 of the Laws of 2005) established the Fund. 3. Procedures and Agency Responsibilities: The Fund is supported by transfers and deposits based on the value of contracts for construction and reconstruction, as defined in subdivision two of Section 220 of the Labor Law, into which all State agencies and public benefit corporations enter. Chapter 407 of the Laws of 2005 increased the amount required to be provided to this fund to .10 of one-percent of the total cost of each such contract, to be calculated at the time agencies or public benefit corporations enter into a new contract or if a contract is amended. The provisions of this bill became effective August 2, 2005. To all State Departments, Agency Heads and Public Benefit Corporations IMPORTANT NOTICE REGARDING PUBLIC WORK ENFORCEMENT FUND OSC will report to DOL on all construction-related ("D") contracts approved during the month, including contract amendments, and then DOL will bill agencies the appropriate assessment monthly. An agency may then make a determination if any of the billed contracts are exempt and so note on the bill submitted back to DOL. For any instance where an agency is unsure ifa contract is or is not exempt, they can call the Bureau of Public Work at the number noted below for a determination. Payment by check or journal voucher is due to DOL within thirty days from the date of the billing. DOL will verify the amounts and forward them to OSC for processing. For those contracts which are not approved or administered by the Comptroller, monthly reports and payments for deposit into the Public Work Enforcement Fund must be provided to the Administrative Finance Bureau at the DOL within 30 days of the end of each month or on a payment schedule mutually agreed upon with DOL. Reports should contain the following information: Name and billing address of State agency or public benefit corporation; State agency or public benefit corporation contact and phone number; Name and address of contractor receiving the award; Contract number and effective dates; Contract amount and PWEF assessment charge (if contract amount has been amended, reflect increase or decrease to original contract and the adjustment in the PWEF charge); and Brief description of the work to be performed under each contract. Checks and Journal Vouchers, payable to the "New York State Department of Labor" should be sent to: Department of Labor Administrative Finance Bureau-PWEF Unit Building 12, Room 464 State Office Campus Albany, NY 12240 Any questions regarding billing should be directed to NYSDOL's Administrative Finance Bureau-PWEF Unit at (518) 457-3624 and any questions regarding Public Work Contracts should be directed to the Bureau of Public Work at (518) 457-5589. NEW LEGISLATION Effective February 24, 2008 WORKER NOTIFICATION - A9052 - S6240 This provision is an addition to the existing prevailing wage rate law, Labor Law §220, paragraph a of subdivision 3-a. It requires contractors and subcontractors to provide written notice to all laborers, workers or mechanics of the prevailing wage rate for their particular job classification on each pay stub*. It also requires contractors and subcontractors to post a notice at the beginning of the performance of every public work contract on each job site that includes the telephone number and address for the Department of Labor and a statement informing laborers, workers or mechanics of their right to contact the Department of Labor if he/she is not receiving the proper prevailing rate of wages and/or supplements for his/her particular job classification. The required notification will be provided with each wage schedule, may be downloaded from our website www./abor, state, n¥.us or made available upon request by contacting the Bureau of Public Work at 518-457-5589. * In the event that the required information will not fit on the pay stub, an accompanying sheet or attachment of the information will suffice. PUBLIC WORK PROJECT Chapter 629 of the Labor Laws of 2007 Contractor Name: Any worker, laborer, or mechanic employed on this project is entitled to receive the prevailing wage and supplements rate for the classification at which he/she is working. These wages are set by law and must be posted at the work site. They can also be found at www. labor, state, n¥.us If you feel that you have not received proper wages or benefits, please call our nearest office. * Albany Binghamton Buffalo Garden City New York City (518) 457-2744 (607) 721-8005 (716) 847-7159 (516) 228-3915 (212) 775-3568 Newburgh Patchogue Rochester Syracuse Utica White Plains (845) 568-5398 (631) 687-4886 (585) 258-4505 (315) 428-4056 (315) 793-2314 (914) 997-9507 * For New York City government agency construction projects, please contact the Office of the NYC Comptroller at (212) 669-4443, www. comptroller, nyc. gov- click on Bureau of Labor Law. Project Location: STATE OF NEW YORK David A. Paterson, Governor DEPARTMENT OF LABOR M. Patricia Smith, Commissioner NEW LEGISLATION Effective July 18, 2008 OSHA 10-hour Construction Safety and Health Course- S1537-A This provision is an addition to the existing prevailing wage rate law, Labor Law §220, section 220-h. It requires that on all public work projects of at least $250,000.00, all laborers, workers and mechanics working on the site, be certified as having successfully completed the OSHA 1 O-hour construction safety and health course. It further requires that the advertised bids and contracts for every public work contract of at least $250,000.00, contain a provision of this requirement. NOTE: The OSHA 10 Legislation does not apply to projects advertised for bid prior to July 18, 2008 AND only applies to workers on a public work project that are required under Article 8 to receive the prevailing wage. Rules and regulations will be promulgated and posted on NYSDOL website www.labor, state.ny.us when finalized. the Page 1 of 1 Where to find OSHA 10-hour Construction Course 1. OSHA Training Institute Education Centers: Rochester Institute of Technology OSHA Education Center Rochester, NY Donna Winter Fax (585) 475-6292 E-mail: dlwtpo~rit.edu (866) 385-7470 Ext. 2919 www.rit.cdu/-outreach/course.php3?CourselD 54 Atlantic OSHA Training Center UMDNJ - School of Public Health Piscataway, NJ Janet Crooks Fax (732) 235-9460 E-mail: crooksje(~umdni.edu (732) 235-9455 https://ophp.umdni.edu/wconnect/ShowSchedule.awp%-GROUP-AOTCON-10- Keene State College Manchester, NH Leslie Singleton E-mail: Isingletin(c~keene.edu (800) 449-6742 www.kcene.edu/courses/print/courses osha.cfm 2. List of trainers and training schedules for OSHA outreach training at: www.OutreachTrainers.org 3. NYS Department of Labor website for scheduled outreach training at: www.labor.state.ny.us/workerprotection/safeWhealthYDOSH ONSITE CONSULI'ATION.shtm Page 2 of 2 Requirements for OSHA 10 Compliance Chapter 282 of the Laws of 2007, codified as Labor Law 220-h will take effect on July 18, 2008. The statute provides as follows: The advertised specifications for every contract for public work of $250,000.00 or more must contain a provision requiring that every worker employed in the performance of a public work contract shall be certified as having completed an OSHA 10 safety training course. The clear intent of this provision is to require that all employees of public work contractors receive such training "prior to the performing any work on the project." The Bureau will enforce the statute as follows: All contractors and sub contractors must attach a copy of proof of completion of the OSHA 10 course to the first certified payroll submitted to the contracting agency and on each succeeding payroll where any new or additional employee is first listed. Proof of completion may include but is not limited to: · copies of bona fide course completion card; · training roster, attendance record of other documentation from the certified trainer pending the issuance of the card. · other valid proof **A certification by the employer attesting that all employees have completed such course is not sufficient proof that the course has been completed. Any questions regarding this statute may be directed to the New York State Department of Labor, Bureau of Public Work at 518-485-5696. Page 1 of 1 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Introduction to the Prevailing Rate Schedule Information About Prevailing Rate Schedule This information is provided to assist you in the interpretation of particular requirements for each classification of worker contained in the attached Schedule of Prevailing Rates. Classification It is the duty of the Commissioner of Labor to make the proper classification of workers taking into account whether the work is heavy and highway, building, sewer and water, tunnel work, or residential, and to make a determination of wages and supplements to be paid or provided. It is the responsibilit,/.of the public work contractor to use the ID~roper rate. If there is a question on the proper classification to be used, please call the district omce located nearest the project. District omce locations and phone numbers are listed below. Prevailing Wage Schedules are issued separately for "General Construction Projects" and "Residential Construction Projects" on a county- by-county bas~s. General Construction Rates apply to projects such as: Buildings, Heavy & Highway, and Tunnel and Water & Sewer rates. Residential Construction Rates generally apply to construction, reconstruction, repair, alteration, or demolition of one family, two family, row housing, or rental type units intended for res~denfial use. Some rates listed in the Residential Construction Rate Schedule have a very limited applicability listed along with the rate. Rates for occupations or locations not shown on the residential schedule must be obtained from the General Construction Rate Schedule. Please contact the local Bureau of Public Work office before using Residential Rate Schedules, to ensure that the project meets the required criteria. Paid Holidays Paid Holidays are days for which an eligible employee receives a regular day's pay, but is not required to perform work. If an employee works on a day listed as a paid holiday, this remuneration is in addibon to paymentof the required prevailing rate for the work actually performed. Overtime At a minimum all work performed on a public work project in excess of eight hours in any one day or more than five days in an~ workweek is overtime. However the specific overtime requirements for each trade or occupation on a public work project may differ. Specit~c overtime requirements for each trade or occupation are contained n the prevai ng rate schedules. Overtime holiday pay is the premium pay that is required for work performed on specified holidays. It is only required where the employee actually performs work on such holidays. The applicable holidays are listed under HOLIDAYS: OVERTIME. The required rate of pay for these covered holidays can be found in the OVERTIME PAY sec[ion listings for each classification. Supplemental Benefits Particular attention should be given to the supplemental benefit requirements. Although in most cases the payment or provision of supplements is for each hour worked, some classifications require the payment or provision of supplements for each hour paid (including pa~dholidays on which no work is performed) and/or may require supplements to be paid or provided at a premium rate for premium hours worked. Effective Dates When you review the schedule for aparficular occupation your attention should be directed to the dates above the column of rates. These are the dates for which a given set ot rates is effective. The rate listed is valid until the next effective rate change or until the new annual determination which takes effect on July 1 of each year. All contractors and subcontractors are required to.R. ay the current prevailing rates of wages and supplements. If you have any questions please contact the Bureau of Public Work or visit the New York State Department of Labor website (www.labor. state.ny.us) for current wage rate information. Apprentice Training Ratios The following are the allowable ratios of registered Apprentices to Journey-workers. For example, the ratio 1:1,1:3 indicates the allowable initial ratio is one Apprentice to one Joumeyworker. The Journeyworker must be in place on the project before an Apprentice is allowed. Then three additiona/Journeyworkers are needed before a second Apprentice is allowed. The last ratio repeats indefinitely. Therefore, three more Joureeyworkers must be present before a third Apprentice can be hired, and so on. Please call Apprentice Training Central Office at (518) 457-6820 if you have any questions. Title (Trade) Ratio Boilermaker 1:1,1:3 Mason 1:1,1:4 Carpenter 1:1,1:4 Electrical (Outside) Lineman 1:1,1:2 Electrician (Inside) 1:1,1:3 Page 18 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by lhe New York State Department of Labor Lest Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Elevator/Escalator Construction & Modernizer 1:1,1:2 Glazier 1:1,1:3 Insulation & Asbestos Worker 1:1,1:4 Iron Worker 1:1,1:6 Laborer 1:1,1:3 Op Engineer 1:1,1:5 Painter 1:1,1:3 Plumber & Steamfitter 1:1,1:3 Roofer 1:1,1:2 Sheet Metal Worker 1:1,1:3 Sprinkler Fitter 1:1,1:2 If you have any questions concerning the attached schedule or would like additional information, please contac~ the nearest BUREAU of PUBLIC WORK District Office or write to: New York State Department of Labor Bureau of Public Work State Office Campus, Bldg. 12 Albany, NY 12240 District Office Locations: Bureau of Public Work - Albany Bureau of Public Work - Binghamton Bureau of Public Work - Buffalo Bureau of Public Work - Garden City Bureau of Public Work - Newburgh Bureau of Public Work - New York City Bureau of Public Work - Patchogue Bureau of Public Work - Rochester Bureau of Public Work - Syracuse Bureau of Public Work - Utica Bureau of Public Work - White Plains Bureau of Public Work - Central Office Telephone # 518-457-2744 607-721-8005 716-847-7159 516-228-3915 845-568-5287 212-775-3568 631-687-4883 585-258-4505 315-428-4056 315-793-2314 914-997-9507 518-457-5589 FAX# 518-485-0240 607-721-8004 716-847-7650 516-794-3518 845-568-5332 212-775-3579 631-687-4904 585-258-4708 315-428-4671 315-793-2514 914-997-9523 518-485-1870 Page 19 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Suffolk County General Construction Asbestos Worker 03101/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Asbestos Worker ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 Abestos Worker Removal & Abatement Only* $28.00 NOTE: *On Mechanical Systems that are NOT to be SCRAPPED. SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Abestos Worker Removal & Abatement Only $10.85 OVERTIME PAY See (B, B2, K) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6) on HOLIDAY PAGE NOTE: Easter Paid at Time and One-half IF worked REGISTERED APPRENTICES Apprentice Removal & Abatement Only: 1000 hour terms at the following percentage of Journeyman's rates. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 78% 80% 83% 89% DISTRICT 9 Supplemental Benefits: (per Hour worked) Apprentice Removal & Abatement Only $10.65 9-12a - Removal Only Boilermaker 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Boilermaker DISTRICT 4 ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Dutchess, Kings, Nassau, New York, Orange, Putnam, Queens, Richmond, Rockland, Suffolk, Sullivan, Ulster, Westchester WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 01/01/2009 12/31/2008 06/30/2009 Boilermaker $ 44.98 $ 45.89 Repairs & Renovation SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: BoilerMaker Repairs & Renovation* $44.98 $ 45.89 07/01/2008 01/01/2009 12/31/2008 06/30/2009 48% of Hourly 48% of Houdy Wage Paid + Wage Paid + $ 8.09 $ 8.33 NOTE: "Hourly Wage Paid" shall include any and all premium(s) pay. *Same as Boilermaker (Includes replacement of parts and repairs & renovation of an existing unit). OVERTIME PAY See (D, O) on OVERTIME PAGE Page 20 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County HOLIDAY Paid: See (8, 16, 23, 24) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 11, 12, 15, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE NOTE: *Employee must work in pay week to receive Holiday Pay. **Boilermarker gets 4 times the hourly wage rate for working on Labor Day. ***Repairs & Renovation see (B,E,Q) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES (1/2) Year Terms at the following pecentage of Boilermaker's Wage 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 65% 65% 70% 75% 80% 85% 90% 95% Supplemental Benefits Per Hour: 07/01/2008 01/01/2009 12/31/2008 06/30/2009 Boilermaker 48% of Hourly 48% of Hourly Apprentice(s) Wage Paid + Wage Paid + $ 8.09 $ 8.33 Repairs & Renovation* Apprentice(s) $48% of Hourly Wage Paid + $ 8.09 NOTE: "Houdy Wage Paid" shall include any and all premium(s) pay. *Includes replacement of pads and repairs & renovation of an existing unit. 4-5 · Carpenter 03/0112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Carpenter DISTRICT 9 ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Rockland, Westchester PARTIAL COUNTIES Orange: South of but including the following, Waterlco Mills, SlateHill, New Hampton, Goshen, Blooming Grove, Mountainville, east to the Hudson River. Putnam: South of but including the following, Cold Spring, TompkinsCorner, Mahopac, Croton Falls, east to Connecticut border. Suffolk: West of Port Jefferson and Patchoque Road to Route 112 tothe Atlantic Ocean. WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 Core Drilling: Driller $ 29.56 Assistant Driller 24.59 Note: Hazardous Waste Pay Differential: For Level C, an addifiona110% above wage rate per hour For Level B, an additional 10% above wage rate per hour For Level A, an additional 10% above wage rate per hour Note: When required to work on water: an additional $ 0.50 per hour. SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per hour paid: Driller $10.36 Assistant 10.36 OVERTIME PAY OVERTIME: HOLIDAY See (B,E,K*,P,R**) on OVERTIME PAGE. Page 21 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County HOLIDAY: Paid: Over[ime: See (5,6) on HOLIDAY PAGE. * See (5,6) on HOLIDAY PAGE. ** See (8,10,11,13) on HOLIDAY PAGE. Assistant: One (1) year increments at the following pementage of Assistant wages. This is not an apprenticeship for Driller. 1st Year 2nd Year 3rd Year 70% 80% 90% 4th Year 100% 9-1536-CoreDriller Carpenter 03101/2009 · JOB DESCRIPTION Carpenter ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Timberman $ 39.50 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per hour paid: Timberman $ 38.14 OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, E2, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: Paid: for 1st & 2nd yr. Apprentices Overtime: REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages per hour: ( 1 ) year terms: 1st 40% See (18,19) on HOLIDAY PAGE. See (516,11,13116,18,19,25) See (5,6,11,13,16,18,19,25) on HOLIDAY PAGE. DISTRICT 9 2nd 3rd 4th 50% 655 80% Supplemental benefits per hour: Apprentices $ 25.14 9-1536 Carpenter 03101/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Carpenter ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Putnam, Queens, Richmond, Rockland, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 Building Millwright $ 43.69 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per hour paid: Millwright $ 42.35 OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, E2, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE Page 22 DISTRICT 9 prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County HOLIDAY Paid: Paid: for 1st & 2nd yr. Apprentices Ove~ime REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages per hour: (1) year terms: See (18,19) on HOLIDAY PAGE. See (5,6,11,13,16,18,19,25) See (5,6,11,13,16,18,19,25) on HOLIDAY PAGE. 1st. 2nd. 3rd. 4th. $24.02 $28.39 $32.76 $41.50 Supplemental benefits per hour: (1) year terms: 1st. 2nd. 3rd. 4th. $25.32 $28.07 $31.82 $36.36 9-740.1 Carpenter 0310112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Carpenter DISTRICT 9 ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Dutchess, Kings, Nassau, New York, Orange, Putnam, Queens, Richmond, Rockland, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 Marine Construction: Marine Diver $ 54.63 MD.Tender 39.18 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per hour paid: Journeyman $ 38.14 OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, E2, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: Paid: for 1st & 2nd yr. Apprentices Overtime: REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wager per hour: (1) year terms: 1st $17.23 See (18,19) on HOLIDAY PAGE. See (5,6,10,11,13,16,18,19) See (5,6,10,11,13,16,18,19)on HOLIDAY PAGE. 2nd 3rd 4th $21.54 $28.00 $34.46 Supplemental benefits per hour: Page 23 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/0112008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Apprentices $ 25.11 9-1456MC Carpenter 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Carpenter DISTRICT 9 ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Dutchess, Kings, Nassau, New York, Orange, Putnam, Queens, Richmond, Rockland, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 Carpet/Resilient Floor Coverer $ 43.02 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per hour paid: Floor Coverer $ 36.04 OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (18, 19)on HOLIDAY PAGE. Paid: for 1st & 2nd yr. Apprentices See (5, 6,11,13,16,18,19,25) Overtime: See (5,6,11,13,16,18,19,25) on HOLIDAY PAGE. REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wage per hour: (1) year terms: 1st. 2nd. 3rd. $17.21 $21.51 $27.96 4th. $34.42 Supplemental benefits per hour: Apprentices $ 24.26 9-2287 Carpenter 0310'112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Carpenter ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Putnam, Queens, Richmond, Rockland, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 Piledriver $ 43.08 Dockbuilder $ 43.08 DISTRICT 9 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Perhourpaid: Journeyrean $ 36.04 Page 24 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County OVERTIME PAY See (B, E2, O) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (18,19)on HOLIDAY PAGE. Paid: for let & 2nd yr. Apprentices See (5,6,11,13,16,18,19,25) Overtime: See (5,6,11,13,16,18,19,25)on HOLIDAY PAGE. REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages per hour: (1)year terms: 1st. 2nd. 3rd. 4th. $17.23 $21.54 $28.00 $34.46 Supplemental benefits per hour: Apprentices $ 23.10 9-1456 Carpenter - Building / Heavy&Highway JOB DESCRIPTION Carpenter- Building / Heavy&Highway ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 03/0112009 DISTRICT 4 Building Carpenter Heavy Highway Carpenter SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 $ 36.63 $ 36.63 07/01/2007 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 40% 55% 65% 75% Supplemental Benefits Per Hour: 07/01/2008 All Apprentice Terms $17.07 Electdcian 0310112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Electrician ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES DISTRICT 4 Page 25 4-Reg. Council Nass/Suff Both Carpenter Categories $ 30.62 OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (18, 19) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 16, 23, 24, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES One(1 ) Year Terms at the following pecentage of Journeymans Wage Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Oepar[ment of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County PerHour: Tree Trimmer/ Line Clearance Specialist SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: Tree Trimmed Line Clearance Specialist 07/01/2008- 12/31/2008 $ 25.57 0~01/2008- 12/31/2008 19.0% of Hourly Wage Paid + $ 5.33 NOTE: "Houdy Wage Paid" shall include any and all premium(s) pay OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, P) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Pard: See (5, 6, 8, 16, 23, 24, 25, 26) on HOLIDAY PAGE NOTE: Time and One Half the Hourly Rate plus Holiday Pay if Worked 01/01/2009 $ 26.46 01/01/2009 20.5% of Houdy Wage Paid + $ 5.48 4-1049/Tree Electrician 03101/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Electrician ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: Telephone & Intergrated Tele- Data Sytems Electrician 07/01/2008 $ 31.80 DISTRICT 4 "PLEASE NOTE" This rate classification applies to ALL Voice,Data & Video work.: Excluding Fire Alarm Systems and Energy Managment Systems (HVAC Controls), in those cases the regular Electrician rate applies. To ensure proper use of this rate please call the Garden City District Office at (516)228-3915. SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Electrician 47.5% of Hourly Wage Paid + $ 3.90 NOTE: "Hourly Wage Paid" shall include any and all premium(s) pay OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, E2, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 15, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE 4-25tela Electrician 03101/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Electrician ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 E~ectrcian Electrical Maintenance $ 34.90 Page 26 DISTRICT 4 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County "PLEASE NOTE" Applicable to "EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS" including, but not limited to TRAFFIC SIGNALS & STREET LIGHTING. Not used for addons. SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Electrcian 35.5% of Hourly Wage Paid + $ 5.28 NOTE: "Hourly Wage Paid" shall include any and ali premium(s) pay OVERTIME PAY See (B, E2, H) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 15, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES One(l) Year Term(s) at the following Percentage of Journeyman(s) Wage: 1st Yr 2nd Yr 3rd Yr 4th Yr 5th Yr 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% Supplemental Benefits per hour Apprentice(s) 35.5% of Houdy Wage Paid + $ 5.28 NOTE: "Hourly Wage Paid" shall include any and all premium(s) pay 4-25m Electrician 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Electrician ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008- 04/25/2009 04~24/2009 Elec[rician $ 44.75 $ 45.75 Fire Alarm $ 44.75 $ 45.75 HVAC Controls $ 44.75 $ 45.75 DISTRICT 4 PUMP & TANK WORK Electrcian $ 35.20 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008- 04/24/2009 Electrcian 04/25/2009 28~0% of Houdy 16.0% of Houdy Wage Paid + Wage Paid + $16.31 $ 22.69 NOTE: "Hourly Wage Paid" shall include any and all premium(s) OVERTIME PAY Page 27 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County See (B, E, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 15, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES One(1 ) Year Terms at the following Pemetage of Journeyman(s) Wage 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 35% 40% 45% 50% 60% 70% Supplemental Benefits per hour Apprentice(s) 1st Term 15% of Houdy 3% of Houdy Wage Paid + Wage Paid + $ 2.36 $ 4.54 2nd Term 15% of Hourly 3% of Hourly Wage Paid + Wage Paid + $ 4.30 $ 6.79 3rdTerm 28.0% of Houdy 16.0% of Hourly Wage Paid + Wage Paid + $ 7.34 $10.21 4th Term 28.0% of Hourly 16.0% of Houdy Wage Paid + Wage Paid + $ 8.17 $11.35 5th Term 28.0% of Hourly 16.0% of Houdy Wage Paid + Wage Paid + $ 9.78 $13.61 6th Term 28.0% of Hourly 16.0% of Hourly Wage Paid + Wage Paid + $11.42 $15.68 NOTE: "Hourly Wage Paid" shall include any and all premium(s) pay 4-25 Electrician Lineman 03/0112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Electdcian Lineman ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES For Utility Distribution & Transmission Line Construction Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Lineman/Splicer $ 39.50 Marerial Man 34.37 Heavy Equip. Operator 31.60 Groundman 32.70 Flagman 17.78 DISTRICT 4 Undergmnd Natural Gasline Mechanic (2" or Less) 07/01/2008 Journeyman U.G.Mech. $ 31.81 Page 28 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: Utility Distribution & Transmission Line Construction 07/01/2008 All Classifications 24% of Hourly Wage Paid + $ 6.40 Underground Natural Gas Mechanic Journeyman U.G.Mech. 07/01/2008 12% of Hourly Wage Paid + $ 5.96 NOTE: "Hourly Wage Paid" shall include any and all premium(s) pay OVERTIME PAY See (B, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE See (B,G,P) for Natural Gas Mechanic HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 8, 16, 23, 25, 26) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (I) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES 1000 hour Periods at the following Percentage of Journeyman's Wage. 1st. 2nd. 3rd. 4th. 5th. 6th. 7th. 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% 85% 90% 4-1049 Line/Gas Elevator Constructor 0310112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Elevator Constructor DISTRICT 9 ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk PARTIAL COUNTIES Rockland: Entire County except for the Township of Stony Point Westchester: Entire County except for the Townships of Bedford, Lewisboro, Cortland, Mt. Kisco, North Salem, Pound Ridge, Somers and Yorktown. WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 Elevator Constructor $ 48.19 Elevator Constructor Modern. & Service $ 38.46 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per hour: 07/01/2008 Elevator Constructor $ 21.82 Modern./Service $ 21.67 OVERTIME PAY Constructor. See ( C, O ) on OVERT{ME PAGE. Modern./Service See ( B, H ) on OVERTIME PAGE. Pa9e 29 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County When a service contract requires two 8-hour shifts, Mon-Sat, worker assigned to each of the double shies shall work 8 hours per day, 6 days per week for a total of 48 hours. Worker shall be paid for 52 hours at single rate. Any worker who works less than 48 hours shall have his premium prorated. HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 9, 11, 15, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 9, 11, 15, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES WAGES: Per Hour 07/01/2008 One (1) year terms at the following rate Elevator Constructor 1st Term $ 21.66 2nd Term $ 26.51 3rd Term $ 31.32 4th Term $ 36.14 Modern./Service 1st Term $ 21.15 2nd Term $ 21.66 3rd Term $ 25.00 4th Term $ 28.85 Supplemental Benefits per hour paid: One (1) year term at the following dollar amount Elevator Constructor: 1st Term $18.18 2nd Term $18.55 3rd Term $19.28 4th Term $ 20.01 Modern/& Service: 1st Term $18.11 2nd Term $18.47 3rd Term $19.20 4th Term $19.91 9-1 Glazier 03101/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Glazier DISTRICT 9 ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Dutchess, Kings, Nassau, New York, Orange, Putnam, Queens, Richmond, Rockland, Suffolk, Sullivan, Ulster, Westchester WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008- 05/01/2009 04/30/2009 Glazier $ 45.05 Additional $ 3.40/hour Scaffolding $ 46.05 Additional $ 3.40/hour Repair & Maintenance: Glazier $ 25.85 Additional $1.25/hour Repair & Maintenance- All repair & maintenance work on a particular building, whenever performed, where the total cumulative contract value is under $100,000.00. SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per hour paid: Journeyman .... $ 22.84 Glazier Page 30 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Repair & Maintenance**: $12.79 OVERTIME PAY OVERTIME: See (C*,D*O) on OVERTIME PAGE. * Denotes if an optional 8th hour is required same will be at the regular rate of pay. If 9th hour is worked then both hours or more ( 8th and 9th or more ) will be at the double time rate of pay. ** For Repair & Maintenance see ( B,F, P) on overtime page. HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE The Following are paid holidays for the Repair & Maintenance Class: New Years day, Presidents day, Memorial day, Independents day, Labor day, Thanksgiving day, Day after Thanksgiving, and Christmas day. REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wage per hour: (1) year terms at the following wage rates. 1st term... $15.25 2nd term... $ 22.55 3rd term... $ 28~25 4th term... $ 36.05 Supplemental Benefits: (Per hour worked) 1st term .... $10.57 2nd term .... $15.71 3rd term .... $17,13 4th term .... $19.99 40% of Journeymans wage 50% ............. 60% ................ 9-1281 (DC9 NYC) Insulator - Heat & Frost 0310112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Insulator- Heat& Frost ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 Heat, Frost & Asbestos Insulator(s) $ 46.86 DISTRICT 9 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: Insulator(s) $ 27.11 OVERTIME PAY See (C, O, V) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 11, 15, 16, 25, 26) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages: Apprentice Insulator(s) 1 year terms at the following percentage of Journeyman's rates. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 40% 60% 70% 80% Page 31 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York Stale Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Supplemental Benefits per hour: Apprentice Insulator(s) Same % as for Wage of $27.11 9-12 Ironworker 0310112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Ironworker ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Wages: (Per Hour) 07/01/2008 Structural ..... $ 38.65 Riggers ..... $ 38.65 Machinery Movers ..... $ 38.65 Machinery Erectors ..... $ 38.65 DISTRICT g SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS PerHour: Journeyman.. $ 51.00 OVERTIME PAY See (B*,E**,Q,V) on OVERTIME PAGE. * Time and one-half shall be paid for all work in excess of (8) eight hours at the end of a work day to a maximum of two hours on any regular work day (the ninth (9th) and tenth (10th) hours of work)and double time shall be paid for all work thereafter. ** Time and one-half shall be paid for all work on Saturday up to eight (8) hours and double time shall be paid for all work thereafter. HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 18, 19) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages: (Per Hour) Six (6) month terms at the following wage rate. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th $20.42 21.02 21.02 21.62 21.62 21.62 Supplemental Benefits: (Per Hour) * Applies to all Apprentices. $ 36.00* 9-40/361-Str Ironworker 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Ironworker Page 32 DISTRICT 9 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Depadn~ent of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk, Westchester PARTIAL COUNTIES Rockland: Southern Section WAGES Per hour; 07/01/2008 Reinforcing & Metal Lathing... $ 45.57 Shift Work: Off-hour shifts must begin after 3:30pm, and end before 7:00am Wage: $ 57.57 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per hour paid: Journeyman $ 30.96* * Only $19.50 of the total Supplemental Benefits Amount subject to time one half or double time as per overtime code "V"). OVERTIME PAY OVERTIME: See (A*,E*,Q,V) on OVERTIME PAGE. * All overtime in excess of ten (10)hours shall be paid at double wage. HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 11, 13, 18, 19, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wage per hour: (1) year terms at the following wage rates: 1 st 2nd 3rd $ 26.90 $ 30.97 $ 35.50 Supplemental Benefits per hour paid: 1st 2nd 3rd $ 23.33 $ 24.88 $ 25.93 9~.6Reinf Ironworker 0310112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Ironworker ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 DISTRICT g Ornamental $ 39.15 Chain Link Fence $ 39.15 Guide Rail Installation $ 39.15 Shift Work: Minimum duration of 5 days. Monday thru Fdday: When two or three shifts are employed, each shift shall work 7 hour days and be paid for 10 1/2 hours. Shifts not completing the full 7 hours shall be paid 1 1/2 times the straight-time rate for the hours worked. Saturday, Sunday, Holidays: Page 33 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County When two or three shifts are employed, each shift shall work 7 hour days and be paid for 15 3/4 houm. Shifts not completing the full 7 hours shall be paid 2 1/4 times the straight-time rate for the hours worked. SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per hour paid: 07/01/2008 Journeyman: OVERTIME PAY OVERTIME: $ 38.32 See (A*,D1,E**,Q,V) on OVERTIME PAGE. *Time and one-half shall be paid for all work in excess of seven (7) hours at the end of a work day to a maximum of two (2) hours on any regular work da (8th & 9th hours of work) and double time shall be paid for all work thereafter. **Time and one-half shall be paid for all work on Saturday up to seven (7) houm and double time shall be paid for all work thereafter. HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES 1st term represents first 1-4 months, thereafter (1/2) year terms at the following percentage of Journeyman's wage. APPRENTICES: 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 0th 60% 65% 70% 80% 85% 95% Supplemental Benefits per hour paid: 07/01/2008 1st Term $ 23.92 2nd Term $ 25.72 3rdTerm $ 27.52 4th Term $ 31.12 5th Term $ 32.92 6thTerm $ 36.52 9-580-Or Ironworker 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Ironworker ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 Derrickman/Rigger $ 48.00 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Journeyman $ 27.38 DISTRICT 9 OVERTIME PAY OVERTIME See (A*,D1,E**,Q,V) on OVERTIME PAGE. *Time and one-half shall be paid for all work in excess of seven (7) hours at the end of a work day to a maximum of two hours on any regular work day (the eighth (8th) and ninth (9) hours of work) and double time shall be paid for all work thereafter. **Time and one-half shall be paid for all work on Saturday up to seven (7) hours and double time shall be paid for all work thereafter. HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 10) on HOLIDAY PAGE HOLIDAY: Page 34 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Paid: ........ See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE. Overtime:....See (5*, 6', 8**, 24***, 25**) on HOLIDAY PAGE. *No work shall be performed on this day, except in cases of emergency. Such work shall be done at double time rate of pay. **Double time rate of pay. ***Work stops at schedule lunch break with full day's pay. REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wage per hour: (1/2) year terms at the following percentage of journeyman's wage. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 50% 50% 70% 80% 90% Supplemental benefits per hour paid: Registered Apprentice 1st year All others 50% of journeyman's rate 75% of journeyman's rate 6th 90% 9-197D/R Laborer - Building 03/0112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Laborer- Building ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 DISTRICT 4 Building Laborer $ 28.75 Asbestos Abatement Worker (Re-Roofing see Roofer) SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: $ 29.00 07/01/2008 Building Laborer $ 23.42 Asbestos Worker $11.10 OVERTIME PAY See lA, E, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Regular Hours Work Terms (Not Available for Abatment Work) TERM #1 1 hr to 1000hrs TERM #2 1001hrs to 2000hrs TERM ~ 2001hrs to 3000hrs TERM #4 3001hrs to 4000hrs Wages per hour: APPRENTICES (Not Allowed on Abatment Work) TERM #1 $16.00 TERM ¢Y2 18.75 TERM #3 21.25 TERM ¢h~ 24.00 Supplemental Benefits per hour: APPRENTICES Page 35 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County TERM #1 $11.83 TERM #2 13.33 TERM k~3 14.11 TERM ~ 14.61 4-66 Laborer - Heavy&Highway 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Laborer- Heavy&Highway DISTRICT 4 ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Laborer (Heavy/Highway): GROUP # 1: Asphalt Rakers and Formsetters. GROUP # 2: Asphalt Shovelers, Roller Boys and Tampers. GROUP # 3: Basic Laborer, Power Tool, Trackmen, Landscape, Pipelayer, Jackhammer and Concrete, Traffic Control Personnel. WAGES PER HOUR: 07/01/2008 GROUP # 1 $ 32.71 GROUP # 2 $ 31.80 GROUP # 3 $ 29.05 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 ALL GROUPS $ 22.83 After Forty (40)paid Hours in a work Week $14,62 OVERTIME PAY See (B, E2, F) on OVERTIME PAGE NOTE: NOTE: HOLIDAY Paid: Overtime: Premium Pay of 25% of wage for all Straight time hours on all New York State D.O.T. and other Goverment Mandated Off-Shift Work Hazardous Material Work add an Additional 10% of Hourly Rate See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES One (1) Year Terms at the following Pecentage of the Journeyman's Wage 1st 2nd 80% 90% Supplemental Benefits per hour: APPRENTICES After Forty (40)paid Hours in a work Week $ 22.83 $14.62 4-1298 Mason 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Mason ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk Page 36 DISTRICT 9 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County WAGES Per Hour: Brick/Blocklayer SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: Brick/Block Layer 07/01/2008 $ 44.99 07/01/2008 $ 20.61 OVERTIME PAY See (A, E, E2, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See 1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See 5, 6, 25) on HOL DAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES (750 Hour) Terms at the following Wage rate per hour I st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 500hrs 500hrs $21.76 $25.79 $29.82 $33.86 $37.89 $39.91 Supplemental Benefits per hour: All Apprentices $11.38 9-1Brk Mason - Building 03101/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Mason- Building DISTRICT 9 ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Orange, Putnam, Queens, Richmond, Rockland, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per hour: 12/01/2008 07/01/2008 Building: Tile Finisher $ 36.77 $ 37.68 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Journeyman $ 20.65 $ 21.40 OVERTIME PAY See (A, E, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 10, 11, 15, 16) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages: (per hour paid) ( 750 hour ) terms at the following pementages of journeyman's wage. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 50% 55% 65% 70% 75% 85% 90% 95% Supprementat Benefits: (per hour paid) (750) hour terms at the following percentages of journeyman's wage: Apprentices. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 50% 55% 65% 70% 75% 85% 90% 95% Page 37 9-7/88-tf Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Mason - Building 03101/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Mason- Building ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 Building:Marble Restoration Marble, Stone, etc & Polisher $ 36.36 Marble, Stone, etc Finishers $18.91 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Journeyman: 07/01/2008 DISTRICT 9 01/01/2009 $ 36.26 $ 18.94 01/01/2009 Polisher $19.20 $19.80 Finisher $ 9.50 $10.47 OVERTIME PAY See (A, E, Q, V) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (*5, 6, 11, 15)on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 11, 15) on HOLIDAY PAGE * Journeymen receive 1/2 days pay for Labor Day. Cleaner, Maintenance and 1ST three terms of Apprentices see ( 5, 8, 11, 15 )on HOLIDAY PAGE. All others See ( 1 ) on HOLIDAY PAGE. REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages: (per hour worked) Polisher: 900 hour terms at the following percentage of Journeyman's wage. Term: 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Hours: 1- 901- 1801- 2701- 900 1800 2700 3600 70% 80% 90% 100% Finisher: 750 hour terms at the following percentage of Journeyman's wage. Term: 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th Hours: 1- 751- 1501- 2251- 3001- 3751- 4501- 750 1500 2250 3000 3750 4500 5250 70% 74% 78% 82% 88% 96% 100% Supplemental Benefits: (per hour worked) Polisher: 07/01/2008 01/01/2009 Term wage % of $6.50 plus $12.70 Term wage % of $6.50 plus $13.30 Finisher: $ 9.50 $10.47 9-7/24 · Mason ~ Building 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Mason- Building DISTRICT 9 Page 38 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 ~ 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Orange, Putnam, Queens, Richmond, Rockland, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 12/01/2008 Building: Tile Setters $ 45.32 $ 46.83 Shift Work: 12:01am Monday- 12:00midnight Friday $ 56.65 $ 58.53 12:01am Saturday- 12:midnight Saturday $ 67.98 $ 70.24 12:01am Sunday- 12:00midnight Sunday $ 90.64 $ 93.66 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Journeyman: $ 24.15 $ 24.65 OVERTIME PAY See (A, E, Q, *V) on OVERTIME PAGE *Applicable to Shift Work ONLY HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 10, 11, 15, 16)on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wage per hour: (750 hr)terms at the following wage rates. Term: 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th Hours: 1- 751- 1501- 2251- 3001- 3751- 750 1500 2250 3000 3750 4500 7th 8th 9th 4501- 5251- 6001- 5250 6000 6750 Wages: $22.73 25.18 29.93 32.26 34.72 39.47 41.82 44.10 45.32 Supplemental Benefits perhourpaid: Term: 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th Houm: 1- 751- 1501- 2251- 3001- 3751- 750 1500 2250 3000 3750 4500 7th 8th 9th 4501- 5251- 6001- 5250 6000 6750 Supps. $12.00 13.03 15.23 16.37 17.38 19.58 20.70 21.90 24.15 9-7/52 Mason - Buildin.q 03101/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Mason - Building ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Building: 07/01/2008 Mosaic & Terrazzo Mechanic $41.72 Mosaic & Terrazzo Finisher $40.26 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS 01/01/2009 $ 42.14 $ 40.65 OVERTIME PAY See (A, E, Q, V) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Page 39 DISTRICT 9 Journeyman: $28.26 $ 29.26 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by lhe New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 111 15, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wage per hour: (750 Hour) terms at the following percentage of the Terrazzo Mechanic's wage. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 1- 751- 1501- 2251- 3001- 3751- 750 1500 2250 3000 3750 4500 50% 55% 65% 70% 75% 85% Supplemental benefits per hour paid: (750 hour) terms at the following percentage of Terrazzo Mechanic's benefit. 7th 4501- 5250 90% 8th 5251- 6000 95% 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 1- 751- 1501- 2251- 3001- 3751- 4501- 5251- 750 1500 2250 3000 3750 4500 5250 6000 50% 55% 65% 70% 75% 85% 90% 95% 9-7/3 Mason o Building / Heavy&Highway JOB DESCRIPTION Mason - Building / Heavy&Highway ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk WAGES NOTE: Shall include but not limited to Precast concrete slabs (London Walks) Marble and Granite pavers 2'x 2' or larger. DISTRICT 9 0310112009 Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Stone Setter $ 56.34 Stone Tender $ 35.63 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Stone Setter $ 22.03 Stone Tender $16.33 OVERTIME PAY See (*C, **E, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE * On weekdays the eighth (8th) and ninth (9th) hours are time and one-half all work thereafter is paid at double the houdy rate. ** The first seven (7) hours on Saturday is paid at time and one-half all work thereafter is paid at double the hourly rate. HOLIDAY Paid: See (8, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Stone Setter(750 hour) terms at the following wage rate per hour: 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th term term term term term term $28.34 $32.78 $37.33 $41.87 $46.42 $48.69 Supplemental Benefits for all terms 07/01/2008 $13.86 Page 40 9-1Stn Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Mason - Building I Heavy&Highway 03101/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Mason - Building / Heavy&Highway DISTRICT 9 ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk WAGES Shall include but not limited to: fired clay brick pavers, pressed concrete pavers, cobbie stone, asphalt pavers. "All Flagging, Granite, Marble and Conrete Slabs 2'x2'or larger see Stone Mason Classification." WAGES: (per hour) 07/01/2008 Journeyman $44.99 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Journeyman $20.61 OVERTIME PAY See (A, E, E2, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES (750 Hour) Terms at the following Wage Rate Per Hour: 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 500hrs 500hrs $ 21.76 $ 25.79 $ 29.82 $ 33.86 $ 37.89 $ 39.91 Supplemental Benefit Per Hour: All Apprentice Terms $ 20.61 9-1 Paver Mason - Building / Heavy&Highway JOB DESCRIPTION Mason - Building / Heavy&Highway ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per hour: 07/01/2008 01/01/2009 Marble-Finisher $ 40.75 $ 41.30 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Journeyman $ 23.73 $ 24.33 OVERTIME PAY See (C, O, V) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (*2) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 11, 15, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE * 1/2 Day for Labor Day. REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages: 750 hour terms at the following percentage of Journeyman's wage. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 1- 751- 1501- 2251- 3001- 3751- 4501- 750 1500 2250 3000 3750 4500 5250 50% 55% 65% 70% 75% 85% 90% Supplemental Benefits: 07/01/2008 01/01/2009 Page 41 DISTRICT 9 8th 5251- 6000 95% 03/01/2009 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York Stale Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County lst-6th terms $13.90 + term $14.50 + term wage % of $9.83 wage % of $9.83 7th and 8th terms $23.73 $24.33 9-7/20-MR Mason - Heavy&Highway 0310112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Mason- Heavy&Highway DISTRICT 9 ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 (MASON) Pointer, Cleaner & Caulkem $ 37.39 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Pointer, Cleaners & $ 20.11 Caulkem OVERTIME PAY See (B, E2, H) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See {1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See {5, 6) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages: (Per hour) One (1) year terms at the following wage rates. tst 2nd 07/01/2008 $19.61 $ 22.72 Apprentices Supplemental Benefits: (per hour paid) 3rd $ 27.95 4th $ 34.38 07/01/2008 I st 2nd 3rd 4th $ 2.80 $ 7.00 $ 9.50 $ 9.50 9-1PCC Mason - Heavy&Highway JOB DESCRIPTION Mason - Heavy&Highway ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffotk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Cement Mason $ 47.50 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Cement Mason $ 26.80 OVERTIME PAY See (C, O, V) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 11, 13, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES ( I ) year terms at the following wage rates. DISTRICT 9 Page 42 03/01/2009 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County 1st Term $ 23.75 2nd Term $ 28.50 3rd Term $ 33.25 Supplement Benefits per hour paid: Apprentices: 1st term $ 20.84 2nd term $ 23.44 3rd term $ 26.02 9-780 Operating Engineer - Building 03/0112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Operating Engineer- Building DISTRICT 4 ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES BUILDING CATEGORIES: CLASS "AA "CRANES: Crane, Truck Crane, Derrick, Dragline, Dredge, Crawler Crane, Tower Crane & Pile Driver. CLASS "A": Asphalt Spreader, Backhoe Crawler, Boiler, Boring Machine, Cherry Picker (over 50 tons), Concrete Pump, Gradall, Grader, Hoist,Loading Machine (10 yds. or more), Milling Machine, Power Winch - Stone Setting/Structural Steel & Truck Mounted, Powerhouse, Road Paver, Scoop-Carryall-Scraper in Tandem, Shovel, Sideboom Tractor, Stone Spreader (self*propelled), Tank Work, Tower Crane Engineer. CLASS "B": Backhoe, Boom Truck, Bulldozer, Boring Machine/Auger, Cherry Picker (under 50 Tons), Conveyor-Multi, Dinkey Locomotive, Fork Lift, Hoist (2 Drum), Loading Machine & Front Loader, Mulch Machine (Machine Fed), Power Winches (Not Included in Class "A"), Asphalt Roller, Hydraulic Pump with Boring Machine, Scoop, Carryall, Scaper, Maintenance Man on Tower Crane, Trenching Machine, Vermeer Cutter, Work Boat. CLASS nc": Curb Machine, Maintenance Engineer (Small Equip. & Well Point), Field Mechanic, Milling Machine (Small), Pulvi Mixer, Pumps (all), Roller (did), Ridge Cutter, Vac-AII, Shotblaster, Striping Machine, Interior Hoist, Concrete Finish Machine, ConcreteSpreader, Conveyer, Curing Machine, Hoist (one drum). CLASS "D": Concrete Breaker, Concrete Saw/Cutter, Fork Life or Walk Behind (power operated), Generator, Hydra Hammer, Compactors (mechanical or hand operated), Pin Puller, Pot[able Heaters, Power Booms, Power Buggies, Pump (double action diaphragm). CLASS "E": Batching Plant, Generator, Grinder, Mixer, Mulching Machine, Oiler, Pump (gypsum), Pump (single action diaphragm), Stump Chipper, Track Tamper, Tractor (caterpiller or wheel), Vibrator, Deckhand on Workboat. 07/01/2008 Class "AA" $ 52.28 Cranes: Boom length over 100 feet add $1.00 per hour "150" "$1.50"" "250 .... $ 2.00 .... "350 .... $ 3.00 .... Class "A" $ 46.04* *Add $3.50 for Hazardous Waste Work Class "B" $ 43.65* *Add $2.50 for Hazardous Waste Work Class "C" $ 42.06* *Add $1.50 for Hazardous Waste Work Class "D" $ 38.85 Class "E" $ 37.24 Page 43 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06~30~2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 ALL CLASSES $ 28.29 NOTE: Overtime Rate $ 23.05 OVERTIME PAY See (D, O) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 8, 9, 15, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 9, 15, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE "NOTE": Employee must be employed day before and day after a holiday to receive holiday pay. REGISTERED APPRENTICES One(l) Year Terms at the following Rate: 07/01/2008 1st Term $ 20.84 2nd Term 21.67 3rd Term 22.33 Supplemental Benefits per hour: APPRENTICES Note: OVERTIME AMOUNT $15.89 5.85 4-138 Operating Engineer - Building / Heavy&Highway JOB DESCRIPTION Operating Engineer- Building / Heavy&Highway ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008- 07/31/2008 08/01/2008 Well Driller $ 29.00 $ 29.00 + $1.16 Well Driller Helper 25.52 25.52 + $1.03 Hazardous Waste Differential Added to Hourly Wage: LevelA $ 3.00 $ 3.00 Level B 2.00 2.00 Level C 1.00 1.00 Monitoring Well Work Add to Hourly Wage: Level A $ 3.00 $ 3.00 Level B 2.00 2.00 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008- 07/31/2008 $10% of straight time rate plus $9.55 (NOTE) Additional $2.25 for Premium Time Page 44 Well Driller Well Drller Helper DISTRICT 4 08/01/2008 10% of straight time rate plus $ 9.55 Additional $ 2.88 for Premium Time 03101/2009 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, G, P) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 16, 23) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 16, 23) on HOLIDAY PAGE 4-138well Operating Engineer - Heavy&Highway JOB DESCRIPTION Operating Engineer- Heavy&Highway ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Party Chief - One who directs a survey party Instrument Man - One who runs the instrument and assists Party Chief Rodman - One who holds the rod and in general, assists the survey party Categories cover GPS & Under Ground Surveying Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Heavy Highway/Building Party Chief $ 49.11 + $3.41/Hr Instrument Man 37.01 + $2.83/Hr Rodman 32.63 + $2.62/Hr Steel Erection Party Chief $51.03 + $2.63 Instrument Man 40.30 + $2.25 Rodman 27.86 + $1.80 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Heavy Highway/Building $ 21.64 Steel Erection $ 22.58 OVERTIME PAY See (B, *E, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE * Doubletime paid on the 9th hour on Saturday. HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE DISTRICT 4 0310tl2009 4-15D-N/S co. Operating Engineer- Heavy&Highway 03/0112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Operating Engineer- Heavy&Highway DISTRICT 4 ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES HEAVY/HIGHWAY CATEGORIES: CLASS "AA" CRANES: Crane, Truck Crane, Derrick, Dragline, Dredge, Crawler Crane, Tower Crane, Pile Driver. CLASS "A": Asphalt Spreader, Backhoe Crawler, Boiler Cherrypicker (over 50 tons), Concrete Pump, Grader, Gradall, Hoist Loading Machine 10 yds. or more), Milling Machine, Power Winch-Stone Setting/Structural Steel or Truck Mounted, Powerhouse, Road Paver, Scoop-Carryall-Scaper in Tandem, Shovel, Sideboom Tractor, Stone Spreader (self propelled), Tank Work, Track Alignment Machine. CLASS"B": Page 45 prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York Slate Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Backhoe, Boom Truck, Bulldozer, Boring Machine/Auger, Cherry Picker (under 50 tons), Conveyor-Multi, Dinky Locomotive, Fork Lift, Hoist (2 dram), Loading Machine & Front Loader, Mulch Machine (machine fed), Power Winches (all others not included in CLASS A), Asphalt Roller, Hydraulic Pump with Boring Machine, Scoop, Carryall, Scaper, Maintenance Man on Tower Crane, Trenching Machine, Vermeer Cutter, Work Boat. CLASS "C": Curb Machine, Maintenance Engineer (Small Equip. & Well Point), Field Mechanic, Milling Machine (Small), Pulvi-Mixer, Pumps, Roller (Di[t), Vac-AII, Welding/Burning, Compressor (Structural Steel & 2 or more Batteries), Concrete Finish Machine, Concrete Spreader, Conveyor, Curing Machine, Fireman, Hoist (One Drum), Ridge Cutter, Striping Machine, Welding Machine (Structural Steel & Pile Work). CLASS "D": Compressor (Pile,Crane,Stone Setting), Concrete Saw Cutter/Breaker, Work Lift (Walk Behind,Power Operated), Generator (Pile Work),Hydra Hammer, Hand Operated Compactor, Pin Puller, Portable Heater, Powered Broom/Buggy/Grinder, Pump (Single Action-1 to 3 Inches/Gypsum/Double Action Diaphragm), Hand Trenching Machine, Welding Machine. CLASS "E": Batching Plant, Generator, Grinder, Mixer, Mulching Machine, Oiler, Pump (Centrifugal up to 3 In.), Root Cutter, Stump Chipper, Oiler on Tower Crane, Track Tamper, Tractor, Vibrator, Deckhand on Work Boat. 07/01/2008 Class "AA" Cranes: Boom Length over 100 feet add $1.00 per hour "150 .... $1.50 .... "250" "$2.00 .... "350" "$3.00 .... $ 53.56 Class "A" *Add $3.50 for Hazardous Waste Work. $ 47.31' Class "B" *Add $2.50 for Hazardous Waste Work. $ 44.14' Class "C" *Add $1.50 for Hazardous Waste Work $ 42.54* Class"D" $ 39.33 Class"E" $ 37.74 "NOTE": PREMIUM PAY of 25% on straight time hours for NEW YORK STATE- D.O.T. and other GOVERNMENTAL MANDATED off-shift work. SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 ALL CLASSES $ 27.39 Note: OVERTIME AMOUNT $ 23.05 OVERTIME PAY See (D, O) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 8, 9, 15, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 9, 15) on HOLIDAY PAGE "NOTE": Employee must be employed day before and day after a holiday to receive holiday pay. REGISTERED APPRENTICES One(l) Year Terms at the following Rate: 1st Term $ 20.84 2nd Term 21.67 3rd Term 22.33 APPRENTICES $15.89 Note: OVERTIME AMOUNT 5.85 Page 46 4-138 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Operatin_q Engineer- Marine Construction 03/0112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Operating Engineer- Marine Construction DISTRICT 4 ENTIRE COUNTIES A bany Allegany, Bronx, Broeme Cattaraugus, Cayuga, Chautauqua Chemung, Chenango, Clinton, Columbia, Cortland, Delaware, Dutchess, Erie, Essex, Franklin, Fu ton, Genesee, Greene, Hamilton, Herkimer, Jefferson, Kings, Lewis, Livingston, Madison, Monroe, Montgomery, Nassau, New York, Niagara, Oneida, Onondaga, Ontario, Orange, Orleans, Oswego, Otsego, Putnam, Queens, Rensselaer, Richmond, Rockland Saratoga, Schenectady, Schoharie, Schuyler, Seneca, St. Lawrence, Steuben, Suffolk, Sullivan, Tioga, Tompkins, Ulster, Warren, Washington, Wayne, Westchester, Wyom eg, Yates WAGES Per Hour: DIPPER,CLAMSHELL DREDGES 07/0112008- 10/01/2008 & HYDRAULIC DREDGES 09/30/2008 CLASS A Operator, Leverman, Lead Dredgeman $ 32.09 $ 32.89 CLASS B Spider/Spill Barge Operator, Tug Operator(overl000hp), Operatodl, Fill Placer, Derrick Operator, Engineer, Chief Mate, Electrician, Chief Welder, Maintenance Engineer Certified Welder, Boat Operator(licensed) $27.94 $ 28.49 $ 26.29 $ 26.84 CLASS C Drag Barge Operator, Steward, Mate, Assistant Fill Placer, Welder (please add) Boat Operator $ 25.49 $ 26.14 $ 0.51 $ 0.06 $ 24.79 $ 25.29 $ 20.64 $ 21.09 $ 0.09 $ 0.09 CLASS D Shoreman, Deckhand, Rodman, Scowman, Cook, Messman, Porter/Janitor Oiler(please add) SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: THE FOLLOWING SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS APPLY TO ALL CATEGORIES 07/01/2008- 10/01/2008 09/30/2008 All Classes A & B (overtime hours add) $ 7.80 plus $ 8.05 plus 7% of straight 7% of straight time wage time wage $ O.63 $ O.63 All Class C $ 7.50 plus $ 7.75 plus 7% of straight 7% of straight time wage time wage (overtime hours add) $ 0.48 $ 0.48 Ail Class D $ 7.20 plus $ 7.45 plus 7% of straight 7% of straight Page 47 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County time wage (overtime houm add) $ 0.23 OVERTIME PAY See (B, F, R) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 15, 26) on HOLIDAY PAGE time wage $ 0.23 4-25a-MarConst Operatin;I EnQineer - Trenchless Pipe Rehab 03/0112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Operating Engineer- Trenchless Pipe Rehab DISTRICT 4 ENTIRE COUNTIES Albany, Allegany, Bronx, Broome, Cattaraugus, Cayuga, Chautauqua, Chemung, Chenango, Clinton, Columbia, Cortland, Delaware, Dutchess, Erie, Essex, Franklin, Fulton, Genesee, Greene Hamilton Herkimer, Jefferson, Kings Lewis, Livingston, Madison, Monroe, Montgomery, Nassau, New York, N agara, One da, Onondaga, Ontar o, Orange, Orleans, Oswego, Otsego, Putnam, Queens, Rensselaer, Richmond, Rockland, Saratoga, Schenectady, Schohade, Schuyler, Seneca, St. Lawrence, Steuben, Suffolk, Sullivan, Tioga, Tompkins, Ulster, Warren, Washington, Wayne, Westchester, Wyoming, Yates WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 DSET/DSSET Operator $ 31.50 Robotic Unit Operator 31.50 DDCC Injection Operator 31.50 Technician/Equipment Operator 27.00 AM LinedHydra Seal Installer 27.00 Hobas Pipe, Polyethyene Pipe or Pull and Inflate Liner Inst. 27.00 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour Worked All Classifacations $11.34 OVERTIME PAY See (B, H) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 8, 9, 15, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES At One Year Terms (Per Hour) Fimt Year $16.00 Second Year 16.75 Third Year 17.25 Fourlh Year 18.00 Supplemental Benifit (Per Hour Worked) All Terms $11.34 4-138TrchPReh Painter 031011200q JOB DESCRIPTION Painter ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk Page 48 DISTRICT 9 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Depar[ment of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County WAGES Per hour: Drywall Taper SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per hour worked: 07/01/2008 $ 35.00 Journeyman $ 20.84 OVERTIME PAY See (A, H) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (4, 5, 6, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages(per Hour) 07/01/2008 I st Year $13.25 2nd Year 17.50 3rd Year 21.00 4th Year 28.00 Suppemental Benefits: (per Hour) 1st year $ 9.82 2nd Year 12.32 3rd year 14.74 4th year 19.42 9-NYDCT9-DWT Painter 0310t/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Painter ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Putnam, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES (Per hour) 07/01/2008 Brush $ 35.00 Spray & Scaffold 38.00 Fire Escape 38.00 Decorator 38.00 Paperhanger/Wall Coverer 36.83 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS ( per hour worked ) 07/01/2008 Paperhanger $ 24.15 All others 20.94 OVERTIME PAY See (A, H) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Indentured after 5/31/93 ( 1 ) year terms at the following wage rate. (per hour) Appr 1st term... $13.25 Appr 2nd term... 17.50 Appr 3rd term... 21.00 Appr 4th term... 28.00 DISTRICT 9 Page 49 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PHC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Spplemental benefis: (per Hour worked) Appr 1st term... Appr 2nd term... Appr 3rd term... Appr 4th term... $ 9.82 12.32 14.74 19.42 9-NYDC9-B/S Painter - Heavy&Highway 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Painter- Heavy&Highway ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008- 10/01/2008 09/30/2008 Structural Steel $ 44.00 $ 45.25 Bridge Painting 44.00 45,25 Power Tool/Compressor 50.00 51.25 DISTRICT 4 "NOTE" Bridge Painting Contracts, ALL WORKERS on and off the bridge(including fiagmen) are to be paid Painting Rate. The Contract must be ONLY for Bridge Painting. SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008- 10/01/08 09/30/2008 Painters/ All Classifications $ 27.66 $ 28.31 OVERTIME PAY See (A, F, R) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages per hour: One(l) Year Terms at the following Percentage of the Journeyman(s) Wage: 1st Term 40% 2nd Term 60% 3rd Term 80% 4-DC9/NS-BrSS Supplemental Benefits per hour: Apprantice(s) 1st Term $ 27.66 $ 28.31 2nd Term 27.66 28.31 3rd Term 27.66 28.31 Painter - Line Striping 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Painter- Line Striping DISTRICT 9 ENTIRE COUNTIES Albany, Bronx, Clinton, Columbia, Dutchess, Essex, Franklin Fulton, Greene, Hamilton, K ngs, Montgomery, Nassau, New York, Orange, Putnam, Queens, Rensselaer, Richmond, Rockland, Saratoga, Schenectady, Schoharie, Suffolk, Sullivan, Ulster, Warren, Washington, Westchester WAGES Per hour: Painter (Striping-Highway): 07/01/2008 Page 50 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Striping-Machine Operator* $ 25.53 Linerman Thermoplastic $ 30.79 Note: * Includes but is not limited to: Positioning of cones and directing of traffic using hand held devices. Excludes the Driver/Operator of equipment used in the maintenance and protection of traffic safety SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per hour paid: Journeyman: OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, P, S) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: Ovedime: 07/01/2008 $ 9.97 + 7% of wage See (5, 20) on HOLIDAY PAGE See (5, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16, 17, 20, 21,22) on HOLIDAY PAGE 9~8N28A-LS Painter - Metal Polisher 03101/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Painter- Metal Polisher DISTRICT 9 ENTIRE COUNTIES Albany, Allegany, Bronx, Broome, Cattaraugus, Cayuga, Chautauqua, Chemung, Chenango, Clinton, Columbia, Cortland, Delaware, Dutchess, Erie, Essex, Franklin, Fulton, Genesee, Greene, Hamilton, Herkimer, Jefferson, Kings, Lewis, Livingston, Madison, Monroe, Montgomery, Nassau New York, Niagara, Oneida, Onondaga, Ontario, Orange, Orleans, Oswego, Otsego, Putnam, Queens, Rensselaer, Richmond,Rockland, Saratoga, Schenectady, Schoharie, Schuy er, Seneca, St. Lawrence, Steuben, Suffolk, Sullivan, Tioga, Tompkins, Ulster, Warren, Washington, Wayne, Westchester, Wyoming, Yates WAGES 07/01/2008 Metal Polisher $ 23.10' *Note: All workers shall be paid an additional premium in an amount equal to twenty (20%) percent of their basic straight time rate of pay for all time worked on hanging scaffolds and on standing scaffolds while working more than 34 feet offthe ground. Such premium are to be paid on top of their straight time or overtime, whichever is applicable. This also applies to employees erecting scaffolding. SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Journeyman: $11.02 OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, Q, T) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 11, 15, 16, 25, 26) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 9, 11, 15, 16, 25, 26) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES 55% of Basic Polisher Rate 9-8N28~MP Plasterer 03/0112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Plasterer ENTIRE COUNTIES Kings, Nassau, Queens, Suffolk PARTIAL COUNTIES New York: Includes work in all ~slands Jn New York City, except Manhattan. WAGES Per hour: Building: Plaste rer/Traditional SUPPLEMENTAL SENEFITS Per hour worked: Journeyman 07/01/2008 $ 35.53 $ 21.80 DISTRICT 9 Page 51 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, E2, Q) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 8, 11, 13, 25, 26) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages: (per hour) ( 1 ) year terms at the following % journeyman's wage rate. First year: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 40% 45% Second year: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 55% 60% Third year: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 70% 75% Supplemental Benefits: (per hour paid): (1) year term broken down into six month periods: 1st year: 1st six months $ 8.37 2nd six months 9.35 3rd six months 11.35 4th six months 12.33 5th six months 14.33 6th six months 15.33 9-530-Z1 Plumber 0310112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Plumber ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Plumber/ PUMP & TANK $ 42.24 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Plumber $18.57 DISTRICT 4 OVERTIME PAY See (B, N, V) on OVERTIME PAGE (V) Sunday & Holidays Only HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES One(l) Year Terms at the Following Wage Per Hour: 07/01/2008 lstTerm $ 9.77 2ndTerm 15.37 3rdTerm 20.96 4th Term 26.80 Page 52 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Depar[ment of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Supplemental Benefits per hour: 1st Term $ 8.39 2nd Term 8.89 3rd Term 9.39 4th Term 9.64 4-200 Pump & Tank Plumber 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Plumber ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008- 05/01/2009 04/31/2009 Plumber MAINTENANCE ONLY $26.73 28.07 (NOTE) Maintenance: Correction of preblem(s)with the existing fixture or group of fixtures, preventive repairs or servicing of said fixtures. SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008- 05/01/2009 04/31/2009 DISTRICT 4 Plumber $9.00 $9.40 MAINTENANCE ONLY OVERTIME PAY See (B, J) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See 1)on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See 5, 6, 15, 16) on HOL DAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES One(1 ) Year Terms, WAGES Per Hour as Follows: 07/01/2008- 05/01/2009 04131/2009 1st term $13.61 $14.29 2nd term $14.65 $15.38 3rd term $15.74 $16.53 4th term $16.88 $17.72 5th term $18.06 $18.96 SUPPLEMENTS PER HOUR 1st term $7.55 $7.90 2nd term $7.55 $7.90 3rd term $7.55 $7.90 4th term $7.55 $7.90 5th term $7.55 $7.90 4-200 Maintance Plumber 0310112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Plumber Page 53 DISTRICT 4 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: Plumber 07/01/2008- 10/31/2008 $ 46.98 11/01/2008 $ 47.73 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: Plumber $ 24.68 $ 25.43 OVERTIME PAY See (A, O, V) on OVERTIME PAGE CODE "V" is only for SUNDAYS and HOLIDAYS WORKED HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 15, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES One(l) Year Terms at the following percentage of Plumbers Rate: 1st Term 2nd Term 3rd Term 30% 40% 50% 4th Term 60% 5th Term 7O% Supplemental Benefits per hour: 07/01/2008- 10/31/2008 11/01/2008 1st Term $12.89 $12.89 2nd Term 15.14 15.14 3rd Term 16.78 16.78 4th Term 17.78 17.78 5th Term 18.78 19.28 4-200 Roofer 03/0'1/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Roofer ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Rate Per Hour Roofer/Waterproofer 07/01/2008- 10/01/2008 09/30/2008 $ 37.75 addl. $2.50 DISTRICT 4 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: Roofer/Waterproofer 0751/2008- 0~30~008 $ 22.62 10/01/2008 22.62 Page 54 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County OVERTIME PAY Per Hour: NEW ROOF SEE (B,E,Q) RE-ROOF SEE (B,E,E2,Q) HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 13, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES (1) Year terms at the following pecentage of Roofers/Waterproofers Wage 1 st 2nd 3rd 4th 40% 50% 70% 80% Supplemental Benefits per hour: 1st Term $ 2.00 2nd Term 6.00 3rd Term 12.35 4th Term 17.31 4-154 Sheetmetal Worker 03/01 ~2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Sheetmetal Worker ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/0112008- 07/31/2008 Sheetmetal Worker $ 43.69 DISTRICT 4 08/01/2008- 02/01/2009 01/31/2009 $ 45.44 $ 46.44 For Temporary Operation or Maintenance of Fans is 80% of Above Wage Rate SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008- 07/31/2008 08/01/2008- 02/01/2009 01/31/2009 Sheetmetal Worker $ 35.26 $ 35.26 $ 36.01 OVERTIME PAY See (A, O) on OVERTIME PAGE For Fan Maintenance See Codes B & O HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 11, 15, 16, 25, 26) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Per Hour: (1/2) Year Terms at the following percentage of journeyman's hourly wage: 1st 2nd 3rd 30% 35% 40% 4th 45% 5th 6th 7th 8th 50% 55% 60% 70% Page 55 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County Supplemental Benefits per hour: 1st Term $14.41 2nd Term 16.25 3rd Term 17.84 4th Term 19.44 5th Term 21.01 6th Term 22.48 7th Term 24.41 8th Term 28.19 4-28 Sheetmetal Worker 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Sheetmetal Worker ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Rockland, Suffolk, Westchester WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008- 07/16/2008 07/15/2008 SIGN ERECTOR $36,80 $38.25 DISTRICT 9 *NOTE: Overhead Highway Signs and Structurally Supported Signs (See IRON WORKER CLASS) SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS PER HOUR 07/01/2008- 07/16/2008 07/15/2008 $23.59 25.20 OVERTIME PAY See (A, F, S) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 11, 12, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wage per hour: 07/01/2008 Half (1/2) year terms at the following rate(s): 1st 2nd 3rd 35% 4O% 45% 4th 50% 5th 55% 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% Supplemental Benefits per hour paid: Half (1/2) year terms at the following dollar amount Page 56 07~1/2008- 07/16/2008 0~1~2008 1st $6.77 $7.21 2nd $7.67 $8.17 3rd $8.58 $9.14 4th $9.47 $10.10 5th $12.79 $13.58 6th $14.66 $15.41 7th $15.84 $16.65 8th $17.04 $17.92 9th $18.65 $19.59 10th $20.19 $21.19 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Depailment of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County 9-137-SE Steamfitter 0310112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Steamfitter ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour 07/01/2008 Steam Fitter $ 45.67 Sprinkler Fitter 45.67 For Work on Temporary Heat & Air Conditioning 34.32 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour Steamfitter $ 39.88 Sprinkler Fitter 39.88 DISTRICT 9 (For Work on Temporary Heat & Air conditioning). $ 29.02 OVERTIME PAY See (C, *D, O, V) on OVERTIME PAGE (*D) ON ALL HVAC AND MECHANICAL CONTRACTS THAT DO NOT EXCEED $15,000,000.00 and ON ALL FIRE PROTECTION/SPRINKLER CONTRACTS THAT DO NOT EXCEED $1,500,00.00 HOLIDAY Paid: See (1) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 11, 15, 16, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE REGISTERED APPRENTICES Wages per hour worked: ( 1 ) year terms at the following percentage of Journeyman's wage. Apprentices: 1 st 2nd 40% 50% 3rd 4th 5th 65% 80% 85% Suppelmental Benefits: (1) year term at the following dollar amounts: Apprentices: 07/01/2007 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th $15.79 $19.53 $25.15 $30.75 $32.63 9-638A-StmSpFtr Steamfitter 03/01/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Steamfitter ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Steamfitter/Maintance $ 32.45 Refrigeration, NC, Oil Burner and Stoker Service and Installations, limited on Refrigeration to combined compressors up to five (5) horsepower, and on NC Heating and Air Cooling to combined compressors up to ten (10) horsepower. Page 57 DISTRICT 9 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour Steamfitter/Maintance 07101/2008 $ 7.71 OVERTIME PAY OVERTIME:....See ( B, E, Q*, S** ) on OVERTIME PAGE. HOLIDAY HOLIDAY: Paid: ........ See ( 2, 6, 9, 10, 11, 15, 17, 26,Memorial Day) on HOLIDAY PAGE. Overtime:.... * ( 2, 6, 9, 15, 17 ) · * ( 10, 11, 26, Memorial Day ) 9-638B-StmFtrRef Survey Crew Consulting 03101/2009 JOB DESCRIPTION Survey Crew Consulting DISTRICT 9 ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Putnam, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk, Westchester PARTIAL COUNTIES Dutchess: Only the portion south of the north city line in Poughkeepsie. WAGES Feasibility and preliminary design surveying, line and grade surveying for inspection or supervision of construction when performed under a Consulting Engineer agreement. Categories cover GPS & underground surveying. WAGES: (per hour) 07/01/2007 Survey Rates: Party Chief ..... $ 29.82 Instrument Man.. $ 25.01 Rodman .......... $ 21.95 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS (per hour paid) Journeyman ...... $11.70 OVERTIME PAY OVERTIME:.... See ( B, E*, Q, V ) ON OVERTIME PAGE. *Doubletime paid on the 9th hour on Saturday. HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 7, 11, 16) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (5, 6, 7, 11, 16) on HOLIDAY PAGE 9-15dconsult Teamster - Building I Heavy&Highway JOB DESCRIPTION Teamster- Building / Heavy&Highway ENTIRE COUNTIES Bronx, Kings, Nassau, New York, Queens, Richmond, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 Truck Driver, Chauffeur Trailers $ 26.33 Straight Jobs 26,03 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 All Classifications $19.20 DISTRICT 4 Page 58 03/01/2009 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Suffolk County OVERTIME PAY See (B, L, S, S1) on OVERTIME PAGE HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 26) on HOLIDAY PAGE Employee must work Two(2) Days in Holiday Week 4-282.Demo Teamster - Delivery of Asphalt & Concrete JOB DESCRIPTION Teamster - Delivery of Asphalt & Concrete ENTIRE COUNTIES Nassau, Suffolk WAGES Per Hour: 07/01/2008 "TRUCK DRIVER" Asphalt Delivery $ 32.885 Concrete Delivery 32.885 ADDITIONS Per Day: Three(3) Axle Tractors and Trailers: $10.00 Heavy Equipment and Tag-Along Trailers: 10.00 Boom Truck Drivers: 8.00 SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS Per Hour: 07/01/2008 "TRUCK DRIVER" All Classifications $ 27.05 OVERTIME PAY See (B, E, Q, R, T) on OVERTIME PAGE (NOTE) PREMIUM PAY of 25% on straight time hours for New York State D.O.T. and or other GOVERNMENTAL MANDATED off shift work. HOLIDAY Paid: See (5, 6, 11, 12, 15, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE Overtime: See (11, 12, 15, 25) on HOLIDAY PAGE Employee must Work TWO(2) Days in Holiday Week. 5,6,13 Paid at Triple if Worked. DISTRICT 4 03101/2009 4-282ns Welder 0310112009 JOB DESCRIPTION Welder DISTRICT 1 ENTIRE COUNTIES Albany, Allegany, Bronx, Breome, Cattaraugus, Cayuga, Chautauqua, Chemung, Chenaego, Clinton, Columbia, Cortland, Delaware, Dutchess, Erie, Essex, Franklin, Fulton, Genesee, Greene, Hamilton, Herkimer, Jefferson, Kings, Lewis, Livingston, Madison, Monroe, Montgomery, Nassau, New York, Niagara, Oneida, Onondaga, Ontario, Orange, Orleans, Oswego, Otsego, Putnam, Queens, Rensselaer, Richmond, Rockland, Saratoga, Schenectady, Schoharie, Schuyler, Seneca, St, Lawrence, Steuben, Suffolk, Sullivan, Tioga, Tompkins, Ulster, Warren, Washington, Wayne, Westchester, Wyoming, Yates WAGES Per hour 07/01/2008 Welder (To be paid the same rate of the mechanic pedorming the work) OVERTIME PAY HOLIDAY -As Per Trade Page 59 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 200900252~ Overtime Codes Following is an explanation of the code(s) listed in the OVERTIME section of each classification contained in the attached schedule. Additional requirements may also be listed in the HOLIDAY section. (A) (AA) (B) (B1) (B2) (c) (cl) (D1) (E) (El) (E3) (E2) (E4) (F (G (H (I (J (K (L (M (N (o (P (Q (R (S (Sl (T) Time and one half of the houdy rate after 7 houm per day Time and one half of the hourly rate after 7 and one half hours per day Time and one half of the hourly rate after 8 hours per day Time and one half of the houdy rate for the 9th & 10th hours week days and the 1st 8 hours on Saturday. Double the hourly rate for all additional hours Time and one half of the houdy rate after 40 hours per week Double the hourly rate after 7 hours per day Double the hourly rate after 7 and one half hours per day Double the hourly rate after 8 hours per day Double the hourly rate after 9 hours per day Time and one half of the hourly rate on Saturday Time and one half 1st 4 hours on Saturday Double the hourly rate all additional Saturday hours Between November 1st and March 3rd Saturday may be used as a make-up day at straight time when a day is lost during that week due to inclement weather, provided a given employee has worked between 16 and 32 hours that week Saturday may be used as a make-up day at straight time when a day is lost during that week due to inclement weather Saturday and Sunday may be used as a make-up day at straight time when a day is lost during that week due to inclement weather Time and one half of the houdy rate on Saturday and Sunday Time and one half of the hourly rate on Saturday and Holidays Time and one half of the houdy rate on Saturday, Sunday, and Holidays Time and one half of the houdy rate on Sunday Time and one half of the hourly rate on Sunday and Hotidays Time and one half of the hourly rate on Holidays Double the hourly rate on Saturday Double the houdy rate on Saturday and Sunday Double the hourly rate on Saturday and Holidays Double the hourly rate on Saturday, Sunday1 and Holidays Double the hourly rate on Sunday Double the hourly rate on Sunday and Holidays Double the hourly rate on Holidays Two and one half times the hourly rate for Holidays, if worked Two and one half times the hourly rate the first 8 hours on Sunday or Holidays One and one half times the hourly rate all additional hours. Triple the hourly rate for Holidays, if worked Page 60 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07101/2008 - 06/30~2009 Published by the New York State Department of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 ( U ) Four times the hourly rate for Holidays, if worked ( V ) Including benefits at SAME PREMIUM as shown for overtime ( W ) Time and one half for benefits on all overtime hours. NOTE:BENEFITS are PER HOUR WORKED,for each hour worked, unless otherwise noted Page 61 Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2008 - 06/30/2009 Published by the New York State Depar[ment of Labor Last Published on Mar 01 2009 PRC Number 2009002520 Holiday Codes PAID Holidays: Paid, Holiday. s a,re da~/s for which an, eligible employee receives a regu ar day's pa)/, but is not required to perform work. If an employee WORKS on a (]ay ~isteo as a paid holiuay, this remuneration is in addibon to paymenzof the required prevailing rate for the work actually performed, OVERTIME Holiday Pay: Overtime holiday pay is the premium pay that is re§u red for work performed on specified holidays. It is only required where the employee ac[ually performs work on such holidays. The applicable holidays are listed under HOLIDAYS: OVERTIME, The required rate of pay for these covered holidays can be found in the OVERTIME PAY section listings for each classification. Following is an explanation of the code(s) listed in the HOL DAY sect on of each classification contained in the attached schedule. The Holidays as listed below are to be paid at the wage rates at which the employee is normally classified, ( I ) None ( 2 ) Labor Day ( 3 ) Memorial Day and Labor Day ( 4 ) Memorial Day and July 4th ( 5 ) Memorial Day, July 4th, and Labor Day ( 6 ) New Year's, Thanksgiving, and Christmas ( 7 ) Lincoln's Birthday, Washington's Birthday, and Veterans Day ( 8 ) Good Friday ( 9 ) Lincoln's Birthday ( 10 ) Washington's Birthday ( 11 ) Columbus Day ( 12 ) Election Day ( 13 ) Presidential Election Day ( 14 ) 1/2 Day on Presidential Elecfion Oay ( 15 ) Veterans Day ( 16 ) Day after Thanksgiving ( 17 ) July 4th ( 18 ) 1/2 Day before Christmas ( 19 ) 1/2 Day before New Years ( 20 ) Thanksgiving ( 21 ) New Year's Day ( 22 ) Christmas ( 23 ) Day before Christmas ( 24 ) Day before New Year's ( 25 ) Presidents' Day ( 26 ) Martin Luther King, Jr. Day Page 62 BUREAU OF PUBLIC WORK STATE OFFICE BUILDING CAMPUS ALBANY, NY 12240 REQUEST FOR WAGE AND SUPPLEMENT INFORMATION: REQUIRED BY ARTICLES 8 AND 9 OF THE LABOR LAW Fax (5'18) 485-'1870 or mail this form for new schedules or for determination for additional occupations. THIS FORM MUST BE TYPED SUBMITTED BY: (CHECK ONE) [] CONTRACTING AGENCY [] ARCHITECT OR ENGINEERING FIRM [] PUBLIC WORK DISTRICT OFFICE DATE: A. PUBLIC WORK CONTRACT TO BE LET BY: (Enter Data Pertaining to Contracting Agency) 1. Name and complete address ( [] check if new or change): Telephone: ( ) Fax: ( ) E-Mail: 3. SEND REPLY TO I[] check if new or change) Name and complete address: Telephone: ( ) Fax:( ) E-Mail: B. PROJECT PARTICULARS 5. Project Title Description of Work Contract Identification Number Note: For NYS units, the OSC Contract No. Nature of Project - Check One: [] 1. New Buildin~ [] 2. Addition to Existing Structure [] 3. Heavy and Highway Construction (New and Repair) [] 4. New Sewer or Waterline [] 5. Other New Construction (Explain) [] 6. Other Reconstruction, Maintenance, Repair or Alteration [] 7. Demolition [] 8. Building Service Contract 9. Name and Title of Requester 2. NY State Units (see Item 5) [] 01 DOT [] 02 OCS [] 03 Dormitory Authority [] 04 State University Construction Fund [] 05 SUNY/Colleges [] 06 Mental Hygiene Facilities Corp. [] 07 OTHER N.Y. STATE UNIT [] 08 City [] 09 Local School District [] 10 Special Local District, i.e., Fire, Sewer, Waler Distdct [] 11 Village [] 12 Town [] 13 County [] 14 Other Non-N.Y. State (Describe) 4. SERVICE REQUIRED. Check appropriate box and provide project information. [] New Schedule of Wages and Supplements. APPROXIMATE BID DATE: [] Additional Occupation and/or Redetermination PRC NUMBER ISSUED PREVIOUSLY FOR THIS PROJECT: OFFICE USE ONLY 6. Location of Project: Location on Site Route No/Street Address Village or City Town County 8. OCCUPATION FOR PROJECT: [] Construction Building, Heavy Highway/Sewer/Water [] Tunnel [] Residential [] Landscape Maintenance [] Elevator maintenance [] Exterminators, Fumigators Signature [] Guards, Watchmen [] Janitors, Porters, Cleaners [] Moving furniture and equipment [] Trashand refuse removal [] Window cleaners [] Other (Describe) OFFICE USE ONLY Locality Designations: I I SEE PAGE TWO FOR LAWS RELATING TO PUBLIC WORK CONTRACTS I I I I PW-39 (03- 07) I I I I I I I NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF LABOR Bureau of Public Work - Debarment List LIST OF EMPLOYERS INELIGIBLE TO BID ON OR BE AWARDED ANY PUBLIC WORK CONTRACT Under Article 8 and Article 9 of the NYS Labor Law, a contractor, sub-contractor and/or its successor shall be debarred and ineligible to submit a bid on or be awarded any public work or public building service contract/sub-contract with the state, any municipal corporation or public body for a period of five (5) years from the date of debarment when: · Two (2) final determinations have been rendered within any consecutive six-year (6) period determining that such contractor, sub-contractor and/or its successor has WILLFULLY failed to pay the prevailing wage and/or supplements · One (1) final determination involves falsification of payroll records or the kickback of wages and/or supplements NOTE: The agency issuing the determination and providing the information, is denoted under the heading 'Fiscal Officer'. DOL = NYS Dept. of Labor; NYC = New York City Comptroller's Office; AG = NYS Attorney General's Office; DA = County District Attorney's Office. A list of those barred from bidding, or being awarded, any public work contract or subcontract with the State, under section 141-b of the Workers' Compensation Law, may be obtained at the following link, on the NYS DOL Website: https://dbr.labor.state.ny.us/EDList/searchPaqe.do NYSDOL Bureau of Public Work Debarment List - Article 8 03/02/2009 AGENCy FIMml Offk~r 6SWFE~N EMPLOYER NAME EMPLOYER ADDaE~ DEBARMENT DEBARMENT DBA NAME ~I'ART DATE END DATE DOL AG ..... 1355 4/A GENERAL 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 CONSTRUCTION CORP. BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL DOL ..... 3983 A & D CONTRACTING CORP, 15 PINE AIRE DRIVE 08/01/2005 05/01/2010 BAY SHORE NY 11706 DOL DOL ..... 7478 A & T GENERAL 3 ALAN B SHEPARD PLACE 12/11/2006 12/11/2011 CONSTRUCTION INC. YONKERS NY 10705 DOL DOL *****9254 A A GENERAL 1765 MT. READ BOULEVARD 10/18/2004 10/18/2009 CONTRACTORS INC. ROCHESTER NY 14606 DOL SOL ..... 0635 ABOVE ALL PUMP REPAIR 360 KNICKERBOCKER 10/20/2008 10/20/2013 CORP AVENUE BATAVIA NY 11716 DOL NYC ..... 8758 ACC CONSTRUCTION CORP. 6 EAST 32ND ST - 7TH FL 05/25/2006 05/25/2011 NEW YORK NY 10016 DOL NYC ..... 5022 ACE DRYWALL SYSTEMS 194 ASHLAND PLACE 05/06/2008 03/06/2013 INC. BROOKLYN NY 11217 DOL DOL ..... 3012 ADAM DECKMAN BECKMAN 154 POND VIEW PARKWAY 04/1 5/2007 04/1 0/2012 PAINTING ROCHESTER NY 14612 DOL DOL ****'5116 ALJAA CONSTRUCTION 3755 SENECA STREET 12/14/2005 12/14/2010 CORPORATION WEST SENECA NY 14403 COL DOL ALL TOWNS MECHANICAL BARRY 18 EAST SUNRISE HIGHWAY 01/21/2008 01/21/2013 MORRIS FREEPORT NY 11758 DOL DOL .... '3101 ALLSTATE CONCRETE 635 MIDLAND AVENUE 07/09/2007 07/09/2012 CUTTING, INC. GARFIELD NJ 07026 DOL DOL ..... 5918 AMERICAN WEATHERTITE. PO BOX 208 03/08/2005 05/28/2010 INC, CLIFTON NJ 07110 DOL AG AMODIO RUSSO 14 BRAYRON ROAD 06/01/2005 06/01/2010 CARMEL NY 10512 DOL AG ANASTASIA ANTHOULIS AKA STACEY 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 GOUZOS BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL DOL ..... 0860 ANDREA STEVENS STEVENS 2458 EAST RIVER ROAD 01/23/2008 01/26/2013 TRUCKING CORTLAND NY 13045 DOL AG ANDRES ALVAREZ 372 NORTH MAIN STREET 12/24/2004 12/24/2009 LODI NJ 07644 DOL DOL ANNE M DIPIZIO 217 STRASMER ROAD 12/14/2005 12/14/2010 DEPEW NY 14043 DOL DOL ..... 7262 ANS WELDING CORP 111 DALE STREET 00/09/2004 06/09/2009 WEST BABYLON NY 11704 DOL AG **"*7327 ANTHOS CONTRACTING 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 CORP BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL DOL ..... 2725 ARAGONA OONSTRGCTION 5755 NEWHOUSE ROAD 10/10/2007 10/10/2012 CORP EAST AMHERST NY 14051 DOL DOL ..... 8482 ARGO CONTRACTING CORP 5752 WEST WEBB ROAD 05/21/2008 05/21/2013 YOUNGSTOWN OH 44515 DOL DOL ARTHUR C OSUORAH PO SOX 1295 02/15/2008 02/15/2013 BUFFALO NY 14215 DOL DOL ..... 8027 ARTHUR DESIGN PO BOX 1295 02/15/2008 02/15/2013 ENGINEERS & ASSOCIATES BUFFALO NY 14215 DOL DA ..... 5761 AZTEC PLUMBING & 153 BAYWOODS LANE 03/19/2007 03/19/2012 HEATING CORP BAY SHORE NY 11706 DOL DOL ..... 3559 B & Z DEVELOPMENT INC BEN-ZV~ 19 WEST STREET 02/22/2005 02/22/2010 ENTERPRISE I SPRING VALLEY NY 10977 S INC DOL DOL ***"*7828 BALLAGH GENERAL 250 KNEELANO AVENUE 07/09/2007 07/09/2012 CONTRACTING INC YONKERS NY 10705 DOL DOL ..... 1498 BAT-JAC CONSTRUCTION 62 NEULIST AVENUE 07/17/2004 07/17/2009 /NC PORT WASHINGTON NY 11050 DOL DOE ..... 3524 SAT~JAC CONTRACTING INC 62 NEULIST AVENUE 07/17/200~ 07/17/2009 PORT WASHINGTON NY 11050 DOL DOL BAT-JAC ~NC 62 NEUUST AVENUE 07/17/2004 07/17/2009 PORT WASHINGTON NY 11050 DOL DOL BEATRICE ORTEGA 764 BRADY AVE - APT 531 55/01/2008 05/21/2013 BRONX NY 10462 DOL DOL *****3559 BEN-ZVY ENTERPRISES INC, 19 WEST STREET 02/22/2005 02/22/2010 SPRING VALLEY NY 10977 DOL DOL BERNADETTE GORMALLY 250 KNEELAND AVENUE 07/09/2007 07/09/2012 YONKERS NY 10705 DOL NYC BERNARD COHNEN 193 HARWOOD PLACE 05/14/2008 05/14/2013 PARAMUS NJ 07652 DOL DOL ..... 5455 BEST OF FRIENDS OF 425 HAMILTON STREET 01/24/2006 01/24/2011 SCHENECTADY CONSTR CO SCHENECTADY NY 12305 DOL DOL ..... 9890 BE3~Y JOE FRAZIER NOBLE 23960 WHITE ROAD 02/14/2008 02/14/2013 CONSTRUCTI WATERTOWN NY 13601 ON GROUP DOL DOL ..... 0818 BLASTEC INC MILLER 121 LINCOLN AVENUE 02/21/2008 02/21/2013 SANDBLASTI ROCHESTER NY 14611 NG& PAINTING Page I of 8 NYSDOL Bureau of Public Work Debarment List - Article 8 03/02/2009 DOL DOL ..... 8501 BLOCKHEAD CONCRETE & P O SOX 71 09/03/2008 09/03/2013 PAVING INC CHEEKTOWAGA NY 14225 COL COL ..... 0289 C J H INC 22 BLACK HAWK ROAD 06/10/2005 06/10/2010 PINE BUSH NY 12566 COL COL *****9286 CALl BROTHERS INC 1223 PARK STREET 09/12/2007 09/12/2012 PEEKSKILL NY 10566 DOL NYC ..... 4437 CAPPRY CONTRACTING 1081 CONEY ISLAND AVENUE 02/09/2006 02/09/2011 MGMT. CORP BROOKLYN NY 11230 COL DOL ****'9721 CATENARY CONSTRUCTION 112 HUDSON AVENUE 0W14/2006 02/14/2011 CORP ROCHESTER NY 14605 DOL COL CHARLES J PARDEE 261 BALL ROAD 03/16/2004 03/16/2009 HASTINGS NY 13076 DOL DOL CHARLES MARANGOUDAKIS 25 WOODHILL LANE 08/16/2005 08/16/2010 MANHASSEST NY 11030 DOL DOL CHARLES MURDOUGH 203 KELLY DRIVE 03/23/2008 03/29/2013 EAST AURORA NY 14052 COL DOL CHESTER A BEDELL 1233 WALT WHITMAN ROAD 04/29/2008 04/29/2013 MELVILLE NY 11747 COL COL CHRISTINA J HOEK 22 SLACK HAW ROAD 06/10/2005 06/10/2010 PINE BUSH NY 12566 DOL COL CHRISTOPHER NICHOLSON 91 NEWMAN PLACE 10/19/2006 10/19/2011 BUFFALO NY 14210 DOL AG ..... 7344 COLUMBUS GENERAL 914 NEWKIRK AVENUE 19/16/2004 19/16/2009 CONSTRUCTION INC BROOKLYN NY 11230 COL DOL *****7064 COMMERCIAL STEEL, INC. 65 CORPORATE PARK DRIVE 03/16/2004 03/16~009 CENTRAL SQUARE NY 13036 COL COL ..... 6866 COMMERCIAL SYSTEM 91 NEWMAN PLACB 10/19/2006 10/19/2011 CONSTRUCTION BUFFALO NY 14210 COL AG ..... 0033 CORINTHIAN 372 NORTH MAIN STREET 12/24/2004 12/24/2009 CONSTRUCTION CO INC LODi NJ 07644 DOL NYC ..... 8777 CROSSLAND ELECTRICAL 846 EAST 52ND STREET 12/19/2008 12/29/2013 SYSTEMS INC BROOKLYN NY 11203 DOL COL ..... 6339 D J FLOORS INC 9276 VIA CIMATO DR[VE 08/29/2007 09/29/2012 CLARENCE CENTER NY 14032 COL DOL ..... 7064 DALTON STEEL INC PARDEE 187 U S ROUTE 11 03/12~004 03/12/2009 CONSTRUCTI CENTRAL SQUARE NY 13036 ON DOL DOL DEANNA J REED 5900 MUD MILL RD-BOX 949 09/02~2{~8 09/02/2013 BREWERTON NY 13029 COL COL ..... 3012 DECKMAN PAINTING 154 POND VIEW PARKWAY 04/16~007 04/16/2012 ROCHESTER NY 14612 COL DOL DENNIS LOUNSRURY C/O DENNIS LOUNSSURY 05/27/2004 05/27/2009 BLD P O BOX 220BULVILLE NY 10915 COL COL ..... 8702 DENNIS LOUNSBURY AKA P O BOX 220 05/27/2004 05/27/2009 BUILDERS INC LOUNSBURY BULVILLE NY 10915 ERECTORS INC DOL DOL *****7523 DEPOALO AND SON BLDG 286 MORRIS ROAD 07/12/2004 07/12/2009 CONTRACTORS INC SCHENECTADY NY 12303 DOL COL ..... 7157 CG PIPELINE INC 312 HALSEYVILLE ROAD 09/06/2006 09/06/2011 ITHACA NY 14850 DOL COL ..... 3218 DIAMOND'D' 5270 TRANSIT ROAD 19/14/2005 19/14/2010 CONSTRUCTION CORP DEPEW NY 14043 COL COL ****'1415 DIRACON COMMERCIAL 310 MAPLE AVENUE 09/18/2004 05/16/2009 CONTRACTORS NEW HAMPTON NY 10958 DOL COL ..... 3364 DJH MECHANICAL 155 KINGSBRIDGE ROAD 09/01/20~6 09/01/2011 ASSOCIATES LTD EAST MOUNT VERNON NY 10552 DOL DOL DOMINIC ANTONUCCl 1939 TOWN LINE ROAD 19/18/2004 10/19/2009 HILTON NY 14468 COL COL ..... 5881 DON ADAMS ROOFING INC 472 COMMERCE STREET 1 ~07/2005 12/07/2010 HAWTHORNE NY 10532 COL DOL DONALD SCHWENDLER 9276 VIA CIMATO DRIVE 08/29/2007 09/29/2012 CLARENCE CENTER NY 14032 COL DOL ..... 6148 DOT CONSTRUCTION OF NY 765 BRADY AVE - APT 631 05/21/2008 05/21/2013 INC BRONX NY 10468 DOL DOL DOUGLAS MCEWEN 121 LINCOLN AVENUE 02/21/2008 02/21/2013 ROCHESTER NY 14611 COL COL DOUGLAS S GRIFFEN 312 HALSEYVlLLE ROAD 09/06/2006 09/06/2011 ITHACA NY 14850 DOL DOL ..... 1693 E GREEN RESTORATION & 117 HAWLEY STREET 06/21/2004 06/21/2009 ROOFING INC BINGHAMTON NY 13901 COL DOL EDWARD SUBEH I CHELSEA COURT 10/06/2008 10/06/2013 ATLANTIC CITY NJ 08401 COL DOL ELIYHU BENYAMIN 303 TEN EYCK STREET 03/05/2005 03/05/2010 BROOKLYN NY 11206 COL AG ..... 3233 EMEIS & EMEIS GENERAL 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 CONTRACTING CORP BROOKLYN NY 11232 Page 2 of 8 NYSDOL Bureau of Public Work Debarment List - Article 8 03/02/2009 DOL DOL ..... 0780 EMES HEATING & PLUMBING 5 EMES LANE 01/20/2002 01/20/3002 CONTR MONSEY NY 10952 DOL DOL ..... 8008 ENJEM'S INCORPORATED 111 SOUTH MAIN STREET 03/04/2004 03/04/2009 HERKIMER NY 13350 DOL DOL ..... 5677 ENVIROCLEAN SERVICES 4245 UNION ROAD - STE 210 09/07/2004 09/07/2009 LLC BUFFALO NY 14225 DOL DOL EREZ BEN-ZVY 19 WEST STREET 02/22/2005 02/22/2010 SPRING VALLEY NY 10977 DOL DOL ESCO INSTALLERS LLC 1 CHELSEA COURT 10/06/2008 10/06/2013 ATLANTIC CITY NJ 08401 DOL DOL ..... 0329 FAULKS PLUMBING HEATING 3 UPTON STREET 06/10/2008 06/10/2013 & AIR CONDITIONING INC HILTON NY 14468 DOL NYC ***"2505 FLORENCE XVI CENTURY 120 GLEN HEAD ROAD 09/03/2005 08/09/2010 MARBLE INC GLEN HEAD NY 11545 DOL DOL ..... 2474 FLOWER CITY ASBESTOS 850 ST PAUL STREET 06/18/2004 09/18/2009 INC ROCHESTER NY 14605 DOL DOL *****7832 FLOWER CITY INSULATION 137 YORKTON STREET 08/03/2004 06/03/2009 SALES & CONTRACTORS WEBSTER NY 14580 DOL DOL ..... 7975 FORD CONSTRUCTION INC 18-18 26TH STREET 07/19/2005 07/18/2010 ASTORIA NY 11102 DOL DOL FORD MASONRY 18-18 26TH STREET 07/19/2005 07/19/2010 ASTORIA NY 11102 DOL DOL FRANCIS (FRANK) OSCIER 3677 SENECA STREET 09/09/2008 09/09/2013 WEST SENECA NY 14224 DOL DOL FRANCIS ENJEM 111 SOUTH MAIN STREET 03/04/2004 03/04/2009 HERK~MER NY 13350 DOL NYC FRANK (FRANCIS) OSClER 3677 SENECA STREET 09/09/2008 09/03/2013 WEST SENECA NY 14224 DOL NYC FRANK BAKER 24 EDNA DRIVE 06/14/2008 05/14/2013 SYOSS ET NY 11791 DOL DOL ..... 0128 FRANK J TUCEK & SON INC 92 NORTH ROUTE 9W 01/29/2007 01/29/2012 CONGERS NY 10920 DOL DOL FRANK LORENE JR 13 CHEVIOT LANE 10/18/2005 10/18/2010 ROCHESTER NY 14624 DOL DOL ..... 9832 G A FALCONE 253 COMMONWEALTH 08/07/2007 08/07/2012 CONSTRUCTION INC AVENUE BUFFALO NY 14216 DOL DOL ..... 7088 GBA CONTRACTING CORP 4015 215T AVENUE 01/11/2008 01/11/2013 ASTORIA NY 11105 DOL AG GEORGE BEGAKIS 57-16 157TH STREET 10/04/2006 10/04/2011 FLUSHING NY 11355 DOL NYC GEORGE LUCEY 150 KINGS STREET 01/19/1998 01/19/2998 BROOKLYN NY 11231 DOL AG GERARD IPPOL~TO 563 MUNCEY ROAD 07/14/2008 07/14/2013 WEST ISLIP NY 11795 DOL AG GERASIMO ANDRIANIS 22-15 47TH STREET 06/09/2006 09/03/2011 ASTORIA NY 11105 DOL DOL GREG SURACI 364 BLEAKER ROAD 10/29/2007 10/25/2012 ROCHESTER NY 14609 DOL DOL GREGORY KLOEPFER 248 LEIN ROAD 10/09/2004 10/09/2009 WEST SENECA NY 14224 DOL DOL GRIOGORIOS BELLOS 4015 215T AVENUE 01/11/2008 01/11/2013 ASTORIA NY 11105 DOL DOL HALEEM ZlHENNI 3 ALAN B SHEPARD PLACE 1 2/11/2006 12/11/2011 YONKERS NY 10705 DOL AG HARRISON JARVIS 132 W 129TH ST - STE 4W 08/12/2004 08/12/2009 NEW YORK NY 10027 DOL DOL ..... 0080 HI-AMP ELECTRICAL 265-12 HILLSIDE AVENUE 02215/2008 02/15/2013 CONTRACTING CORP FLORAL PARK NY 11004 DOL AG ****'1841 HOWARD K ENTERPRISE INC 219/02 NORTHERN 04/14/2CO5 04~14/2010 BOULEVARD FLUSHING NY 11361 DOL AG HOWARD KlM 75 WEST EDSALL 04/14/2305 0~14/2010 BOULEVARD PALISADES PARK NJ DOL DOL lES ENVIRONMENTAL INC 1655 ELMWOOD AVENUE 10/05/2004 10/05/2009 CRANSTON RI 02910 DOL DOL ..... 6293 IMPRESSIVE CONCRETE 264A SUBURBAN AVENUE 12/18/2007 12/18/2012 CORP DEER PARK NY 11729 DOL DOL ..... 8898 IN-TECN CONSTRUCTION 8346 BREWERTON ROAD 07/06/2007 07/06/2012 INC CICERO NY 13039 DOL NYC *****7728 INTEGRITY CONSTRUCTION 7615 MYRTLE AVENUE 02/16/2007 02/15/2012 & CONSULTING SERVS GLENDALE NY 11385 DOL DOL ..... 8266 INTERNATIONAL 2 STAFFORD COURT 10/06/2004 1 0/05/2009 ENVIRONMENTAL CRANSTON RI 02920 RESOURCES DOL DOL ..... 8266 INTERNATIONAL INTERNATION 2 STAFFORD COURT 10/05/2004 1 0/09/2009 ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES AL CRANSTON RI 02920 INC ENVIRONMEN TAL RESOURCES DOL DOL *****0488 INTERWORKS SYSTEMS, 1233 WALT WHITMAN ROAD 04/29/2008 04/29/2013 INC. MELVILLE NY 11747 Page 3 of 8 NYSDOL Bureau of Public Work Debarment List o Article 8 03/02/2009 DOL DOL IVAN TORRES 11 PLYMOUTH ROAD 02/15/200~ 02/15/2013 DIX HILLS NY 11746 DOL AG ..... 0663 J B C CONTRACTING CO. 346 PROSPECT AVE- 1ST FL 03/23/2005 03/23/2010 INC. BROOKLYN NY 11215 DOL AG ..... 0280 J B C CONTRACTING 346 PROSPECT AVE. - 1 ST F 03/23/2005 03/23/2010 COMPANY BROOKLYN NY 11215 DOL DOL *****4003 J BARR CONSTRUCTION 119-51 METROPOLITAN AVE 12/14/2004 12/14/2009 CORP BROOKLYN NY 11415 DOL DOL ..... 7357 J C MCCASHION 84 FREDERICKS AVENUE 04/1 3/2006 04/13/2011 CONSTRUCTION INC ALBANY NY 12205 DOL DOL JAMES NEY JR 1655 ELMWOOD AVENUE 10/05/2004 10/05/2009 CRANSTON RI 02910 DOL AG ..... 1562 JANS GENERAL 131 47'rH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 CONSTRUCTION CORP. BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL DOL JASON ASBURY 22562 SEA BASS DRIVE 10/10/2007 10/10/2012 BOCA RATON EL 33428 DOL DOL JAY MEYER 239 MARSH DRIVE 02/20/2007 02/20/2012 DEWlTF NY 13214 DOL DOL J EANE~FE CALICCHIA 1223 PARK STREET 09/12/2007 09/12/2012 PEEKSKILL NY 10566 DOL DOL JEFF LOUNSBURY C/O DENNIS LOUNSBURY 05/27/2004 05/27/2009 BLD P O BOX 220BULVILLE NY 10915 DOL DOL JOHN B DUGAN 121 LINCOLN AVENUE 02/21/2008 02/21/2013 ROCHESTER NY 14611 DOL DA JOHN BIAS 153 BAYWOCDS LANE 03/18/2007 03/19/2012 BAY SHORE NY 11706 DOL AG JOHN BRADFORD 6614 FURNACE ROAD 12/22/2004 12/22/2009 ONTARIO NY 14519 DOL NYC JOHN O'SHEA 4350 BULLARD AVENUE 01/28/2008 01/28/2013 BRONX NY 10466 DOL DOL ..... 5970 JOHN PREVETE FRAMING JOHN 320 RIDGE ROAD 03/26/2008 03/26/2013 AND JOHN PREVETE PREVETE WEST MILFORD NJ 07480 FRAMING INC DOL DOL JOSEPH CALICCHIA 1223 PARK STREET 09/12/2007 09/12/2012 PEEKSKILL NY 10566 DOL DOL JOSEPH DIPIZIO 5270 TRANSIT ROAD 19/14/2005 12/14/2010 DEPEW NY 14043 DOL NYC JRC ARIS ELECTRIC 516 EAST 51 ST STREET 09/13/2004 09/13~2009 CONTRACTORS BROOKLYN NY 11236 DOL NYC ..... 9418 JRC ELECTRIC CONTROL 516 EAST 51ST STREET 09/13/2004 09/13/2009 SERVICE, INC, BROOKLYN NY 11236 DOL DOL JULIUS AND GITA BEHREND 5 EMES LANE 11/20/2002 11/20/3002 MONSEY NY 10952 DOL DOL ..... 9422 JUNKYARD CONSTRUCTION 2068 ANTHONY AVENUE 12/26/2007 12/26/2012 CORP. BRONX NY 10457 DOL DOL ..... 3810 K M MARTELL 57 CROSS ROAD 06/25/2007 06/25/2012 CONSTRUCTION, INC. MIDDLETOWN NY 10940 DOL DOL ..... 8993 K M R ENTERPRISES 10 STUFFLE STREET 12~0/2006 12/20/2011 CROPSEYVILLE NY 12052 DOL DOL ..... 8648 K-STAR CONSTRUCTION 42 48 161ST STREET 12/11/2006 12/11/2011 CORP FLUSHING NY 11358 DOL NYC KAZIMIERZ KONOPSKI 194 ASHLAND PLACE 02/06/2008 00/06/2013 BROOKLYN NY 11217 DOL AG KEFCAL CONSTRUCTION, 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 INC. BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL NYC ..... 4923 KELLY"S SHEET METAL, INC. 1426 ATLANTIC AVENUE 12/22/2007 12/28/2012 BROOKLYN NY 11216 DOL DOL KENNETH MERZ 62 NEULIST AVENUE 07/17/2004 07/17/2009 PORT WASHINGTON NY 11050 DOL DOL KENNETH W~ GRIFFIN 101 LILL STREET 09/01/2006 05/01/2011 ROCHESTER NY 14621 DOL DOL KEVIN MARTELL 57 CROSS ROAD 06/26/2007 06/25/2012 MICDLETOWN NY 10940 DOL DOL ..... 4359 KLOEPFER'S FLOOR 248 LEIN ROAD 10/06/2004 10/06/2009 COVERING WEST SENECA NY 14224 DOL AG ..... 3318 KOSMAR CONTRACTING 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 CORP. BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL DOL KRIS CLARKSON 2484 CATON ROAD 00/20/2007 06/23/2012 CORNING NY 14830 DOL DOL ..... 3496 L & T PLUMBING CORP. 367 VETERANS MEMORIAL 01/11/2005 01/11/2010 HWY COMMACK NY 11725 OOL DOL ..... 546Z LABAR ENTERPRISES OF LABARBERA 2121 EMPIRE BOULEVARD 04/16/2005 04/18/2010 ROCHESTER, INC. EXCAVATING WEBSTER NY 14580 INC DOL DOL ..... ~62 LABARBERA EXCAVATING 2121 EMPIRE BOULEVARD 04/18/2005 04/16/2010 INC WEBSTER NY 14580 DOL NYC ..... 8816 LAKE CONSTRUCTION AND 150 KINGS STREET 06/10/1998 08/19/2998 DEVELOPMENT BROOKLYN NY 11231 CORPORATION Page 4 of 8 NYSDOL Bureau of Public Work Debarment List - Article 8 03/02/2009 DOL DOL ..... 9~28 LANCET ARCH INC 112 HUDSON AVENUE 02/14~006 02/14/2011 ROCHESTER NY 14605 DOL COL LARRY FRANGOS 5752 WEST WEBB ROAD 05/21/2008 05/21/2013 YOUNGSTOWN OH 44515 COL DOL ..... 0256 LIBERTY PAINTING 183 LORFIELD DRIVE 12/08/2005 12/08/2010 COMPANY INC SNYDER NY 14226 DOL AG ..... 5102 LIBERTY TREE SERVICE, INC. 563 MUNCEY ROAD 07/14/2008 07/14/2013 WEST ISLIP NY 11795 DOL DOL ..... 6651 LIGHTNING FAST LABOR 150 NORTH CHESTNUT 05/01/2006 05/01/2011 FORCE SERVICES, INC+ STREET ROCHESTER NY 14604 DOL COL .... '4981 LOBENE PAINTING, INC. 13 CHEVIOT LANE 10/18/2005 10/18/2010 ROCHESTER NY 14624 DOL AG ..... 4654 LOOK UNDER THE CARPET P O BOX686 12/15/2005 12/15/2010 SERVICES INC BUFFALO NY 142S0 COL COL *****5953 LPC CONTRACTING iNC 1205 MCBRIDE AVENUE 98/27/2007 08/27/2012 WEST PATFERSON NJ 07424 DOL DOL ..... 3105 LTS CONSTRUCTION INC 24 MILLER STREET 06/30/2004 06~30/2009 ROCHESTER NY 14605 DOL DOL ..... 6714 M & S PIPELINE EXCAVATION 784 CONKLIN ROAD 05/05/2004 05/05/2009 COMPANY INC BINGHAMTON NY 13~)3 COL DOL ..... 9875 M & S STRIPING [NC 73 INDUSTRIAL PARK SLVD 01/10/2007 01/10/2012 ELMIRA NY 14901 COL COL ..... 9688 M K PAINTING INC 4157 SEVENTH STREET 05/14/2007 05/14/2012 Page 5 of 8 NYSDOL Bureau of Public Work Debarment List - Article 8 03/02/2009 DOL DOL ..... 2213 NEUSS CONSTRUCTION. INC. 1191 ROUTE 9W - SUITE #C6 09/06/2006 09/06/2011 MARLBORO NY 12542 DOL DOL NICK NITIS 3 ALaN B SHEPARD PLACE 12/11/2006 12/11/2011 YONKERS NY 10705 DOL DOL ..... 9890 NOBLE CONSTRUCTION 23960 WHITE ROAD 02/14/2008 02/14/2013 WATERTOWN NY 13601 DOL DOL ..... 7771 NORTHEAST 105 PINE STREET APT. 2 05/14/2007 05/14/2012 TECHNOLOGIES EAST ROCHESTER NY 14445 DOL DOL ****'1833 NORTHEASTERN SUPREME 65 BENEDICT STREET 03/02/2007 03/02/2012 FLOOR CO.,INC CASTLETON NY 12033 DOL AG ..... 9457 NU-LOOK PAINTING & 151-60 7TH AVENUE 08/04/2004 08/04/2009 WALLPAPERING, INC. WHITESTONE NY 11357 DOL AG ..... 1641 OLYMPIA MECHANICAL 3624 12TH AVENUE O8/16/2005 05/18/2010 PIPING & HEATING, INC. BROOKLYN NY 11218 DOL DOL ..... 1803 OMNI CONTRACTING 3 ALAN B. SHEPARD PLACE 12/11/2006 12/11/2011 COMPANY, INC. YONKERS NY 10705 DOL NYC ..... 3855 OT &T INC 36-28 23RD STREET 01/16/2008 05/14/2013 LONG ISLAND CITY NY 11106 DOL DOL ****'8727 P & H SUPPLY COMPANY IN( 241-A HARRISON AVENUE 01/15/2004 05/25/2009 HARRISON NY 10528 DOL AG ..... 5133 P&T IRON WORKS 59 PLAIN AVENUE 06/01/2005 06/O1/2010 NEW ROCHELLE NY 10801 DOL DOL ..... 6527 PACHYDERM ENTERPRISEE 1537 UNION STREET 06/24/2004 05/24/2009 INC. SCHENECTADY NY 12309 DOL NYC ****'9833 PARADISE CONSTRUCTION 6814 8TH AVENUE 19/03/2007 12/03/2012 CORP BROOKLYN NY 11220 DOL DOL ..... 3039 PARAGON PLATE GLASS, 210 FACTORY STREET 11/07/2006 11/07/2011 INC. WATERTOWN NY 13601 DOL DOL PATRICK BURNS 19 E. CAYUGA STREET 05/16/2008 05/15/2013 OSWEGO NY 13126 DOL DOL PATRICK SHAUGHNESSY 88 REDWOOD DRIVE 05/16/2008 05/16/2013 ROCHESTER NY 14617 DOL DOL PERRY JACOBS 736 SHERMAN DRIVE 12/04/2005 12/04/2010 BOX 8015UTICA NY 13505 DOL AG PETER GOUZOS 131 47TH STREET 01/26/8C07 01/25/2012 BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL DOL ..... 6164 PETRT & PEq-RT INC 7 SCHUYLER STREET 06/21/2005 03/21/2010 BELMONT NY 14813 DOL DOL ..... 9167 PRECISION SITE WORK, INC. 736 SHERMAN DRIVE 12/04/2005 12/04/2010 BOX 8015UTICA NY 13505 DOL DOL ..... 9359 PRECISION STEEL P O BOX 948 09/02/2008 09/02/2013 ERECTORS INC BREWERTON NY 13029 DOL DOL ..... 2326 PUTNAM CONSTRUCTION 29 PHYLIS AVENUE 09/03/2008 09/03/2013 COMPANY OF WESTERN NY BUFFALO NY 14215 DOL DOL ..... 7438 R & H COMMERCIAL 102 WILLOW AVENUE 05/20/2007 06/20/2012 FLOORING, INC. WATKINS GLEN NY 14891 DOL DOL ..... 1596 R & T SUPREME SPORTS 66 RYBKA ROAD 03/02/2007 03/02/2012 FLOORING, LLC STUYVESANT FALLS NY 12174 DOL DA ..... 0358 R & W FACILITY CARE 485 ATLANTIC AVENUE 11/22/2005 11/22/2010 SYSTEMS INC BROOKLYN NY 11217 DOL DOL ..... 1629 R S CONSTRUCTION 571 MILES SQUARE ROAD 04/04/2007 04/04/2012 COMPANY LLC YONKERS NY 10701 DOL AG ..... 2625 RAINBOW RENOVATIONS. 35-44 CRESCENT STREET 03/03/2006 08/03/2011 INC. LONG ISLAND CITY NY 11106 DOL DOL REBECCA GATTO-WOOD 310 MAPLE AVENUE 05/16/2004 05/15/2009 NEW HAMPTON NY 10958 GOL DOL ..... 7294 REDWOOD FLOORING. INC, 88 REDWOOD DRIVE 05/16/2008 06/16/2013 ROCHESTER NY 14617 DOL DOL ROBBYE BISSESAR 89-51 SPRINGFIELD BLVD 01/11/2003 01/11/3003 QUEENS VILLAGE NY 11427 BOL DOL ROBERT DEMONTE 367 VETERANS MEMORIAL 01/10/2005 01/19/2010 HWY COMMACK NY 11725 DOL DOL ROBERT DIMARSICO 1233 WALT WHITMAN ROAD 04/29/2008 04/29/2013 MELVILLE NY 11747 DOL DOL ROBERT O'HANLON 635 MIDLAND AVENUE 07/09/2007 07/09/2012 GARFIELD NJ 07026 DOL DOL ROBERT STEVENSON 571 MILES SQUARE ROAD 04/04/2007 04~34/2012 YONKERS NY 10701 DOL DOL ROBERT W, METZGAR KiNG 11365 CENTER ROAD 04/04/2005 04/04/2010 MACHINE SHERIDAN NY 14135 DOL DOL ..... 3467 ROCKERS AND NOOKERS 207 RIVERVIEW ROAD 16/23/20~7 10/23/2012 LLC REXFORD NY 12148 DOL DOL ROGER A HOEK JR 22 BLACK HAW ROAD 06/10/2005 05/10/2015 PINE BUSH NY 12566 DOL DOL ROSARIO CARRUBBA 5755 NEWHOUSE ROAD 10/10/2007 10/10/2012 EAST AMHERST NY 14051 DOL DOL RUDOLPH NEUSS 8 FAR HORIZONS DRIVE 09/06/2005 09/06/2011 NEWBURGH NY 12550 DOL AG ..... 2326 RUSMAR ENVIRONMENTAL 703 ATLANTIC AVENUE 12/22/20~4 12/22/2009 SERVICES CORP. ROCHESTER NY 14609 Page 6 of 8 NYSDOL Bureau of Public Work Debarment List - Article 8 03/02/2009 DOL DOL RUSSELL TUPPER 8346 BREWERTON ROAD 07/06/2007 07/06/2012 CICERO NY 13039 DOL NYC ..... 0987 SCHWARTZ ELECTRIC 89 WALKER STREET 01/04/2008 01/04/2013 CONTRACTORS INC NEW YORK NY 10013 DOL DOL ****'6348 SEABUSY ENTERPRISES LLC 22562 SEA BASS DRIVE 10/10/2007 10/10/2012 BOCA RATON FL 33428 DOL NYC ..... 8252 SEVERN TRENT 16337 PARK ROW 01/12/2007 01/12/2012 ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES HOUSTON TX 77084 INC DOL DOL ..... 0415 SIGNAL CONSTRUCTION LLC 199 GRIDER STREET 11/14/2006 11/14/2011 BUFFALO NY 14215 DOL DOL *****8489 SIGNATURE SEALCOATING & 345 LIVINGSTON AVENUE 04/04/2007 04/04/2012 STRIPPING SERVICE JAMESTOWN NY 14702 DOL DOL ..... 9397 SKY COMMUNICATIONS, INC, PO BOX 278 02/20/2007 02/2(3/2012 DEWIer NY 13214 DOL AG SN CONTRACTING CORP 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL AG ..... 7480 SNA CONTRACTING CORP 131 47TH STREET 01/26/2007 01/25/2012 BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL AG ..... 2738 SNA CONTRACTING CORP. 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL AG SOLOMON WERZBERGER 56 LYNCREST DRIVE 08/18/2005 08/18/2010 MONSEY NY 10952 DOL DOL ..... 9822 SOUTHWESTERN GENERAL 1586 GOWANS ROAD 10/08/2004 10/08/2009 CONTRACTING INC ANGOLA NY 14006 DOL DOL ..... 0918 SPECTRUM CONTRACTING 875 THIRD AVENUE 12/11/2006 12/11/2011 GROUP INC NEW YORK NY 10022 DOL AG ..... 1355 SPIRIDON ANTHOULIS 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL AG STACEY GOUZOS 131 47'r'H STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL DOL ..... 3496 STAR INTERNATIONAL INC 89-51 SPRINGFIELD BLVD 08/11/2003 08/11/3003 QUEENS VILLAGE NY 11427 DOL NYC .... *6650 START ELEVATOR 4350 BULLARD AVENUE 01/28/2008 01/28/2013 CONSTRUCTION, INC. BRONX NY 10466 DOL NYC .... *3896 START ELEVATOR 4350 BULLARD AVENUE 01/28/2C08 01/28/2013 MAINTENANCE, INC, BRONX NY 10466 DOL NYC ..... 1216 START ELEVATOR REPAIR, 4350 BULLARD AVENUE 01/28/2008 01/28/2013 INC. BRONX NY 10466 DOL NYC ..... 2101 START ELEVATOR, INC. 4350 BULLARD AVENUE 91/28/2008 01/28/2013 SRONX NY 10466 DOL DOL STEVE J NICTAS C/O J BARR CONS. 12/14/2004 12/14/2009 119-51 METROPOLITAN AVE JAMAICA NY 11415 DOL DOL STEVE MENZER 62 NEULIST AVENUE 07/17/2004 87/17/2009 PORT WASHINGTON NY 11050 DOL AG STEVEN TISCHLER 1465 46TH STREET 08/18/2005 08/18/2010 BROOKLYN NY 11212 DOL DOL ..... 5966 SUPREME SPORT 66 BENEDICT STREET 03/02/2007 03/02/2012 SURFACES, INC. CASTLETON NY 12033 DOL DOL ..... 2036 S[JRACl ENTERPRISES INC 364 BLEAKER ROAD 10/25/2007 10/25/2012 ROCHESTER NY 14609 DOL AG TAO GENERAL 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 CONTRACTORS ~NC BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL AG TARCISIO FERREIRA 151-60 7TH AVENUE 08/04/2004 08/04/2009 WHITESTONE NY 11357 DOL AG TF PAINTING CORP 151-60 7TH AVENUE 08/04/2004 08/04/2009 WHITESTONE NY 11357 DOL DOL THEODORE F FAULKS 18 FIREWEED TRAIL 06/10/2008 06/10/2013 HILTON NY 14468 DOL DOL THOMAS E. MOONEY 164 WINSLOW STREET 11/07/2006 11/07/2011 WATERTOWN NY 13601 DOL DOL THOMAS GORMALLY 250 KNEELAND AVENUE 07/09/2907 07/09/2012 YONKERS NY 10705 DOL DOL THOMAS L. SMALLS LTS 24 MILLER STREET 06/30/2004 06/30/2009 CONSTRUCTI ROCHESTER NY 14605 ON DOL DOL ****'5306 THOMAS MASONRY & 803 WEST AVE - SUITE 207 08/18/2004 05/16/2009 CONCRETE INC ROCHESTER NY 14611 DOL DOL *****3284 THOMAS MASONRY 955 BUFFALO ROAD 08/18/2004 08/18/2009 ENTERPRISE INC ROCHESTER NY 14624 DOL DOL *****3983 TOMMASO ALLOCCA 15 PINE AIRE DRIVE 08/01/2005 08/01/2010 BAY SHORE NY 117C6 DOL DOL ..... 5550 TOPO-METRIC9 INC 432 PARK AVENUE SOUTH 04/22/2004 04/22/2009 NEW YORK NY 10016 DOL DOL ..... 0680 TOPOR CONTRACTING INC 153 FILLMORE AVENUE 04/27/2004 04/27/2009 BUFFALO NY 14210 DOL DOL ..... 5905 TRI-STATE BUILDING 108 SPARROW RIDGE ROAD 05/24/2004 05/24/2009 CONTRACTORS INC CARMEL NY 10512 DOL DOL ****'9640 TROPIC CONSTRUCTION 59-45 56TH AVENUE 08/15/2005 08/1 5/2010 CORP MASPETH NY 11378 Page 7 of 8 NYSDOL Bureau of Public Work Debarment List - Article 8 03/02/2009 DOL DOL ..... 8430 TROPIC ROOFING CORP, 59-45 56TH AVENUE 06/16/2005 08/16/2010 MASPETH NY 11378 DOL AG ..... 3868 TWO BY FOUR CARPENTRY 132 W 129TH ST-STE 4W 08/12/2004 08/12/2009 & CONSTR INC NEW YORK NY 10027 DOL NYC ..... 5184 UDDIN USA CORP 663 DEGRAW STREET 05/17/2007 05/17/2012 BROOKLYN NY 11217 DOL AG UN HAK KlM 75 WEST EDSALL 04/14/2005 04/14/2010 BOULEVARD PALISADES PARK NJ DOL DOL ..... 8663 URBAN-SUBURBAN 3 LUCON DRIVE 06/20/2007 06/20/2012 RECREATION INC DEER PARK NY 11728 DOL DA VASIMOS TSIMITRAS 235 91ST STREET 11/27/2006 11/27/2011 BROOKLYN NY 11209 DOL NYC *****5466 VIVA VICTORIA 10317 90TH STREET 06/12/2006 06/12/2011 ENTERPRISES LTD OZONE PARK NY 11417 DOL DOL ..... 0725 W & B MECHANICAL CORP 303 TEN EYCK STREET 03/05/2005 03/05/2010 BROOKLYN NY 11206 DOL DOL ..... 6854 W J GRINDER ROOFING 1765 MT READ BOULEVARD 10/18/2004 10/18/2009 ROCHESTER NY 14606 DOL DOL ..... 0329 WET PAINT CO. OF OSWEGO, 19 E. CAYUGA STREET 05/15/2008 05/15/2013 INC OSWEGO NY 13126 DOL DOL WHITE AND BLUE SHEET 303 TEN EYCK STREET 03/05/2005 03/05/2010 METAL INC. BROOKLYN NY 11206 DOL COL ..... 3561 WILEY DEVELOPMENT CO 235 NORTHAMPTON STREET 08/11/2004 08/11/2009 INC BUFFALO NY 14208 DOL DOL WiLLiAM PUTNAM 50 RIDGE ROAD 09/03/2008 09/03/2013 BUFFALO NY 14215 DOL DA W~LLIAM TSIMITRAS 235 91 ST STREET 11/27/2006 11/27/2011 BROOKLYN NY 11209 DOL DOL WILLIE JONES 1567 UNION STREET 05/24/2004 05/24/2009 SCHENECTADY NY 12309 DOL DOL WINSTON J. GOINS, SR. 87 MALLING DRIVE 05/01/20(~6 05/01/2011 ROCHESTER NY 14621 DOL DOL ..... 6118 WINTECH CONTRACTING INC 1950 E MAIN ST- STE 205A 07/23/2004 07/22/2009 MOHEGAN LAKE NY 10547 DOL AG YANG GENERAL 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 CONTRACTING LTD BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL AG ..... 0288 YIN CONSTRUCTION LTD 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 BROOKLYN NY 11232 DOL AG ..... 1564 ZARBEN GENERAL 131 47TH STREET 01/25/2007 01/25/2012 CONSTRUCTION INC BROOKLYN NY 11232 OOL DOL ZEPHENIAH DAVIS 2068 ANTHONY AVENUE 12/26/2007 12/26/2012 BRONX NY 10457 Page 8 of 8 STANDARD INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS TOWN OF SOUTHOLD CONTRACT INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS INSURANCE IDENTIFICATION: THE BID NUMBER IS TO APPEAR ON ALL INSURANCE CERTIFICATES INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: The Corporation/Contractor/Agency/Consultant, is an independent contractor and covenants and agrees that it, its agents, servants and/or employees will neither hold itself/themselves out as, nor claim to be an employee, servant or agent of the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD, and that it, its agents and employees will not make claim, demand or application to or for any right or privilege applicable to an officer or employee of the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD including, but not limited to Worker's Compensation coverage, Unemployment Insurance benefits, Social Security coverage or retirement membership or credit. INSURANCE: Contractor/vendor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained ail insurance required under the following paragraphs, and the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD has approved such insurance. WORKERS' COMPENSATION: Contractor/vendor shall take out and maintain during the life of this contract, such insurance as will protect both the owner and the contractor from claims under worker's compensation acts and amendments thereto and from any other claims for property damage and for personal injury including death, which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations by contractor or by any other party directly or indirectly employed by the contractor. Copy of Certificate to be provided to the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD. DISABILITY INSURANCE & UNEMPLOYMENT INSURANCE: Contractor/vendor shall take out and maintain during the entire term of the contract any disability benefits and unemployment insurance as required by law. Copy of Certificate to be provided to the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD. GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: The contractor/vendor shall take out and maintain during the life of the contract, such bodily injury liability and property damage liability insurance as shall protect him and the Town from claims for damages for bodily injury including accidental death, as well as from claims for property damage which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor/vendor to maintain such insurance in amounts sufficient to fully protect himself and the Town, but in no instance shall amounts be less than those set forth below. These amounts are specified only to establish the minimum coverage acceptable. Bodily injury liability and property damage liability insurance in an amount not less than $1,000,000 (one million dollars) for damages on account of any one accident, and in an amount of not less than $2,000,000 (two million dollars) on account of all accidents (general aggregate). EXCESS/UMBRELLA INSURANCE: The contractor/vendor shall take out and maintain during the life of the project an excess/umbrella insurance policy in an amount of not less than $2,000,000 (Five million dollars) each occurrence and aggregate. OTHER CONDITIONS OF COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: 1. Coverage shall be written on commercial general liability form. 2. Coverage shall include: SIR- 1 STANDARDINSURANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Contractual liability B. Independent contractors C. Products and completed operations AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE: Automobile bodily injury liability and property damage liability insurance shall be provided by the contractor/vendor with a minimum combined single limit (CSL) of $1,000,000 (one million dollars). OTHER CONDITIONS OF AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE: Coverage shall include: A. All owned vehicles B. Hired car and non-ownership liability coverage C. Statutory no-fault coverage ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS OF INSURANCE: 1. Contractor/vendor shall submit copies of any or all required insurance policies as and when requested by the Town. 2. If any of the contractor's/vendor's policies of insurance are cancelled or not renewed during the life of the contract, immediate notice of cancellation of non-renewal shall be delivered to the Town no less than 10 days prior to the date and time of cancellation or non-renewal. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE: The contractor/vendor shall file with the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD prior to commencing work under this contract, a certificate of insurance. 1. Certificate of insurance shall include: A. Name and address of insured B. Issue date of certificate C. Insurance company name D. Type of coverage in effect E. Policy number F. Inception and expiration dates of policies included G. Limits of liability for all policies on certificate. included on certificate Description of operations/locations/etc. Box must. include the statement: "THE TOWN OF SOUTHOLD IS LISTED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED" CERTIFICATE HOLDER SHALL BE LISTED AS: TOWN OF SOUTHOLD 53095 MAIN ROAD PO BOX 1179 SOUTHOLD, NEW YORK 11971 e If the contractor's/vendor's insurance policies should be non-renewed, cancelled or expire during the life of the contact, the Town shall be provided with a new certificate indicating the replacement policy information as requested above. Thirty days (30) prior written notice to the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD for cancellation is applicable. SIR - 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS INDEX 1. Definitions of Terms 2. Standards of Workmanship 3. Samples 4. Manufactured Materials 5. Laboratory 6. Shop Drawings 7. Permits 8. Plans and Specifications 9. Cutting, Patching and Digging 10. Errors, Omissions and Discrepancies 11. Temporary Toilet 12. Proper Method of Work and Proper Materials 13. Inspection 14. Waiver 15. Water and Electric Power 16. Machinery and Equipment 17. Maintenance 18. Schedule of Operations 19. Right to Use Work 20. Notice of Warning 21. Waming Signs 22. Accident Prevention 23. Damages 24. Maintenance of Traffic 25. Final Site Cleaning 26. Protection of Land Markers, Trees, Shrubs, and Property 27. Protection of Utilities 28. No Damages for Delay 29. Record Keeping 30. Subcontractors and Suppliers 31. Penal Law GC- 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. DEFINITIONS OF TERMS: Whenever the following words and expressions are used in the Specifications, it is understood that they have the meaning defined below: PLANS: All official drawings or reproductions of drawings pertaining to the work or to any structure connected therewith. SPECIFICATIONS: The body of directions, requirements, descriptions, etc. contained in this document, together with all documents of any description and agreements made (or to be made) pertaining to the methods or manner of performing the work and/or to the quantities and quality of materials to be furnished and accepted under this Contract. OWNER: Shall mean Town Board, Town of Southold. ENGINEER (ARCHITECT): L.K. McLean Associates as engaged by the Owner and duly authorized to represent the Owner in the execution of the work covered by the consultants and assistants engaged by the Owner and the Engineer to the extent of the particular duties entrusted to them. CONTRACT: Collectively, the Contract executed by the Owner and the Contractor, Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form, Conditions of Contract, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Construction Drawings, Addenda, Performance Bonds, and all supplemental agreements made or to be made. CONTRACTOR: The party of the second part hereto, whether corporation, firm or individual, or any combination thereof, and successor, personal representatives, executors, administrators and assigns, and any person, firm or corporation who or which shall at any time be substituted in place of the second part under this Contract. INSPECTOR: An authorized representative of the Owner or his Engineer assigned to make any and ail necessary inspections of the work performed and the materials furnished by the Contract. MATERIALS: Any approved materials acceptable to the Engineer and conforming to the requirements of these Specifications. WORK: All of the work proposed to be accomplished at the site of the project, and all such other work as is in any manner required to accomplish the complete project. This includes ail plant, labor, materials, supplies, equipment and other facilities and acts necessary or proper or incidental to the carrying out and completion of the terms of this Contract. The term "work performed" shall be construed to include the material delivered to and suitably stored at the site of the project. 2. STANDARDS OF WORKMANSHIP: The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail or an apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done and materials to be furnished shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice observed in the latest current construction work is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of first quality is to be used in this connection and all interpretations of these Specifications shall be made upon this basis. GC - 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS 3. SAMPLES: The Contractor shall furnish for approval, all samples as directed. The work shall be in accordance with approved samples. Samples shall be submitted in ample time so as to prevent delay in fabrication or ordering of materials, allowing for a reasonable time for the Engineer to consider the samples submitted and, if necessary, to permit a resubmission of samples to the Engineer until approval is given. Work and material shall be furnished and executed in accordance with approved samples, in every aspect. Each sample shall be labeled, bearing material, name and quality, Contractor's name, date and other pertinent data. Unless otherwise specified, samples shall be in duplicate and of adequate size to show quality, type, color, range and finish and texture of material. Materials shall not be ordered until approval is received in writing from Engineer. 4. MANUFACTURED MATERIALS: Where several materials are specified by name, the Engineer shall have the right, before execution of the Contract, to require any and all bidders to state the materials upon which they based their bid. Where any materials are specified by name or trade name, or by catalog number of a company or companies, the Contractor shall furnish the article mentioned unless approval of the Engineer is obtained in writing for a substitution. Should Contractor desire to substitute another material for one or more specified by name, he shall apply in writing for such permission and state credit or extra involved. He shall also provide supporting data and samples for Engineer's consideration. Unless particularly specified otherwise, all manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, assembled, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer and including the necessary preparation to properly install the work. Where reference is made to manufacturer's directions, the Contractor shall submit such directions to the Engineer as required. The materials used in construction shall be disposed as not to endanger the work, and so that full access may at ail times be had to partly completed work and structures and they shall be so disposed as to cause no injury to those having access to the work or any of the units. All labor shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their respective trades. Standards of work required throughout shall be of such grades as will bring first-class results only. The type of labor employed by the Contractor shall be such as will insure the uninterrupted continuity of the entire work, without conflict of any kind. 5. LABORATORY: Laboratories shall be designated by the Engineer for testing the materials to be used under the Contract. Where tests are made by other than the designated laboratories, two certified copies showing correctly the chemical analysis and physical tests shall be furnished to the Engineer. 6. SHOP DRAWINGS: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) copies of all shop drawings and schedules and no work shall be fabricated until his approval has been given. All shop drawings submitted to the Engineer must be in English, and must bear the Contractor's stamp of GC - 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS approval evidencing that the drawings have been checked. The Contractor will make any corrections in the drawings required by the Engineer and will file with the Engineer four corrected copies. Approval by the Engineer of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for (a) errors of any sort in shop or setting drawings or schedules; or (b) deviations from Plans and Specifications unless the Contractor, at the time of submission of said drawings and schedules, has given notice to the Engineer of any such deviations. 7. PERMITS: 7.1 Municipal: All work in connection with the installation of pipes or other underground structures of a like nature either within or without the limits of the highway, shall follow all the provisions as contained heroin together with the provisions, as they apply, of the Highway Law, Roads Opening, Section 149, and Section 198 Town Law, with all subsequent changes, additions or corrections thereto. The following additional permits when required under law shall also be obtained by the Owner: (1) (2) (3) NYSDEC permit(s) Town Division of Environmental Protection U.S. Army Corp of Engineers The Contractor shall give all notices, and comply with all laws, ordinances, roles, regulations and conditions of the permits, bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn and specified, and shall be responsible for acquisition of all pertinent information necessary for such compliance. The Contractor shall be responsible for: (1) Coordinating all building department and other department and agency inspections and approvals, (2) Obtaining U.L. approvals, (3) Health Department inspections and approvals, (4) Obtaining final certificate of occupancy. On projects involving multiple contracts, it shall be the responsibility of the "General Contractor" to coordinate with the building department and other agencies and to obtain the certificate of occupancy. It shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractors (prime contractors other than the G.C.) to coordinate inspections and approvals of that part of the project, which falls within the scope of their contract with the G.C., and/or as may be appropriate, directly with the approving agency. In the event that one or more of the contractors on a multi-contract project fails to perform the work in a timely manner, thereby causing undue delay in the completion of the project, and the issuance of the certificate of occupancy, the owner shall in that event, have the option to exercise "The owners right to stop work or terminate contract" as provided for in the conditions of the contract. Pipes and Underground Structures: All work in connection with the installation of pipes or other underground structures of a like nature either within or without the limits of the highway, shall follow all the provisions, as they apply, of the Highway Law, Roads opening, Section 149, and Section 198 Town Law, with all subsequent changes, additions or corrections thereto. GC - 4 GENERAL CONDITIONS Any work to be performed within the Town Highway right-of-way will require a Town Highway Department road-opening permit. Obtaining of the permit and subsequent release/approval shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Acceptance of the contractor's performance bond in lieu of the Contractors road-opening bond shall be at the option of the Highway Department. 7.2 Suffolk County: All permits required for opening County roads and making connections with County drains will be obtained by the Owner. A copy of the perm/t, which must be kept on the job at all times, will be supplied to the Contractor. The Contractor will not be permitted to open any County road or make any connection to any County drain until he has been supplied with this permit. (a) Department of Public Works All permits required for opening County roads and making connections with County drains, will be obtained by the Owner. A Copy of the permit, which must be kept on the job at all times, will be supplied to the Contractor. The Contractor will not be permitted to open any County road or make any connection to any County drain until he has been supplied with this permit. The Contractor shall be responsible for conformance to all conditions of the permit and for the subsequent release/approval. 7.3 State of New York: The Contractor shall obtain all necessary New York State highway permits whenever the Contract requires any work to be done within or upon existing State highway right-of- ways. These permits shall be obtained from the District Office in Hauppauge prior to the performance of the work. Upon application for the permit, the Contractor will be required to supply the following: (1) Tl~ee (3) copies of a sketch or print showing description and location of the proposed work. The Engineer will supply these prints to the Contractor. (2) Contingent liability insurance for the State (in addition to his own liability insurance) shall be furnished in amounts and manner as required by the State of New York. The contingent protective liability and completed operations liability insurance policy to cover: "The people of the State of New York and/or the Superintendent of Public Works covering liability arising with respect to all operations through highway permits by permittee or by anyone acting by, through or for the permittee, including omissions and supervisory acts of the State", in the amount of personal injury (including death) and property damage as required. 8. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The Contractor will be furnished with five sets of Plans and Specifications giving all the details and dimensions necessary for carrying out the work. One copy of Plans and Specifications furnished to the Contractor must be kept constantly on the site. Anything shown on the Plans and not mentioned in the Specifications or mentioned in the GC - 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS Specifications and not shown on the Plans and all the work and materials necessary for the completion of the work according to the intent and meaning of the Contract shall be furnished, performed and done as if the same were both mentioned in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. Any conflict or inconsistency between the Plans and Specifications, or any discrepancy between the figures and scale of Drawings, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer, whose decision thereon shall be conclusive. In the event the meaning of any portion of the Specifications or Drawings or any supplementary drawings or instructions of the Engineer is doubtful, the same shall be understood to call for the best type of construction, both as to materials and workmanship, which reasonably can be interpreted. All materials and workmanship must be strictly in accordance with the Specifications. The Plans show approximate size, arrangement and location of the proposed work. The Engineer will give base lines, grades, shapes and dimensions and the Contractor shall constmct the work exactly in accordance with such instructions of the Engineer subject, however, to change as provided for under the headings "Changes and Alterations" and "Compensation to be Paid to the Contractor". Additional copies of Plans and Specifications, when requested, will be furnished to the Contractor at cost of reproduction. The Contractor shall furnish to each of the subcontractors and materialmen such copies of the Contract Documents as may be required for their work. 9. CUTTING, PATCHING AND DIGGING: The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by work of other contractors shown upon or reasonably implied by Drawings and Specifications for the completed structure, and he shall make good after them as Engineer may direct. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. The Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, digging or otherwise, and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor save with the consent of the Engineer. 10. ERRORS, OMISSIONS AND DISCREPANCIES: a) If any errors, omissions or discrepancies appear in the drawings, Specifications or other documents, the Contractor shall, within ten days from receiving such Drawings, Specifications or documents, notify the Engineer in writing of such errors or omissions. In the event of the Contractor's failing to give such notice, he will be held responsible for the results of any such errors or omissions and the cost of rectifying the same. GC - 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS b) If, in the opinion of the Contractor, any work is shown on Drawings, or details, or is specified in such a manner as will make it impossible to produce a first class piece of work, or should discrepancies appear between the Drawings and/or Specifications, he shall refer the same to the Engineer for interpretation before proceeding with the work. If the Contractor fails to make such references to the Engineer, no excuse will thereafter be entertained for failure to carry out the work in satisfactory manner as directed. c) Should a conflict occur in or between the Drawings and Specifications and/or existing conditions, the Contractor shall be deemed to have estimated on the more expensive way of doing the work, unless he shall have asked for and obtained a decision in writing from the Engineer, before the submission of bids, as to which method or material will produce the results to the best interest of the Town. 11. TEMPORARY TOILET: The Contractor shall provide and maintain a sanitary temporary toilet where directed by the Engineer. The temporary toilet shall be enclosed and weatherproof and kept in a sanitary condition at all times. Upon removal of the temporary outside toilet, the vault shall be disinfected, filled and all evidence of the toilet removed from the site. 12. PROPER METHOD OF WORK AND PROPER MATERIALS: The Engineer shall have the power in general to direct the order and sequence of the work, which shall be such as to permit the entire work under this Contract to be begun and to proceed as rapidly as possible and such as to bring the several parts of the work to a successful completion at about the same time. If at any time before the commencement or during the progress of the work the materials and appliances used or to be used appear to the Engineer as insufficient or improper for assuring the quality of the work required, or the required rate of progress, he may order the Contractor to increase their efficiency or to improve their character, and the failure of the Engineer to demand any increase of such efficiency or improvement shall not release the Contractor from his obligation to secure the quality of work or the rate of progress specified. During freezing or inclement weather, no work shall be done except such as can be done satisfactorily and in a manner to secure first-class construction throughout. All work shall be done in such a manner as will properly protect and support existing permanent structures, pipe lines, etc. 13. INSPECTION: Inspectors shall be authorized to inspect all work done on materials furnished. Such inspections may extend to all parts of the work and to the preparation or manufacture of the materials to be used. In case of any dispute arising between the Contractor and the Inspector as to materials furnished or the manner of performing the work, the Inspector shall have the authority to reject material or suspend the work until the question at issue shall be referred to and decided by the Engineer. The Inspector shall not be authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, relax or release any requirements of these Specifications, nor to approve or accept any portion of the work, nor to issue instruction contrary to the Plans and Specifications. The Inspector shall in no case act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor or interfere with the management of the work by the latter. GC - 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS Any advice, which the Inspector may give the Contractor, shall in no way be construed as binding the Engineer nor the Owner in any way nor releasing the Contractor from the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. The Contractor shall be conclusively presumed to be acquainted with all existing conditions and to guarantee that all work and materials shall, upon final completion of the work, be turned over to the Owner in a complete and perfect condition and he shall be responsible for the proper care, maintenance and protection of all work and material until his entire Contract is completed and all work and materials found in good condition and accepted. The Contractor will be held responsible for the entire work until completed and accepted by the Engineer and the Owner. The Contractor shall, at ail times, provide the Owners, Engineer, assistants and inspectors under him with necessary facilities for determining both on the work and at the places of manufacture, that all work being performed and ail materials being manufactured are strictly in accord with the Contract. Until acceptance of work by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the work including action of the elements or any other cause whatsoever. The Contractor shall continuously and adequately protect the work against damage from any cause. 14. WAIVER: Neither the inspection by the Owner or Engineer or any part of their employees nor any order, measurement or certificate by the Engineer nor any order by the Owner for the payment of any money nor any payment for or acceptance of, the whole or any part of the work by the Engineer or the Owner nor any extension of time nor any possession taken by the Owner or its employees shall operate as a waiver of any provision of this Contract or of any power herein reserved to the Owner or any right to damages herein provided; nor shall any waiver of any breach of the Contract constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach. Any remedy provided in this Contract shall be construed as cumulative; that is in addition to each and every remedy herein provided. 15. WATER AND ELECTRIC POWER: All water and electric power supply for construction purposes must be provided by the Contractor. The cost shall be borne by the Contractor. 16. MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT: All machinery, equipment, tracks and vehicles used in the prosecution of the work or in connection therewith, shall at all times be in proper working condition. The Contractor shall be responsible for curtailing noise, smoke, fumes or any other nuisance resulting from his operations. He shall, upon written notification from the Engineer, make any repairs, replacements, adjustments, additions, and furnish mufflers when necessary to fulfill these requirements. 17. MAINTENANCE: If, within one year from the date of issuance of the Final Certificate, any portion of the work shall, in the opinion of the Owner, require repairing, replacing, or rebuilding, the Contractor shall start such repairs within five (5) days after the receipt of notice from the Owner, and if the Contractor shall fail or neglect to start such repairs within the said five (5) days, the Owner may employ such other person or persons as they deem proper to make such repairs and GC - 8 GENERAL CONDITIONS pay the expense thereof out of any sum retained by them, provided nothing herein contained shall limit the liability of the Contractor or his Surety to the Owner for nonperformance of the Contractor's obligations at any time. 18. SCHEDULE OF OPERATIONS: Within 5 days after the signing of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit a proposed program of operations, showing clearly how he proposes to conduct the work so as to bring about the completion of his work within the time limit specified. This program shall outline the proposed sequence of operations, the rates of progress and the dates when his work will be sufficiently advanced to permit the installation of work under this Contract. 19. RIGHT TO USE WORK: The Owner may enter upon and use the whole or any portion of the work, which may be in condition to use any time previous to its final acceptance by the Owner. Such use shall not constitute or be evidence of acceptance by the Owner or the Engineer of the whole or any part of the material furnished or work performed under the Contract. 20. NOTICE OF WARNING: If the Contractor shall fail to make prompt payment to persons supplying labor or materials for the work, or refuse or fail to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials or refuse or fail to prosecute the work or any part thereof with such diligence as will insure its completion within the period herein specified (or any duly authorized extension thereof) or fail to complete the work within said period or fail or refuse to regard laws, ordinances, codes, instmctions of the Engineer, then the Engineer shall forward by registered mail to the Contractor, at the address given in the Contract, a Notice of Warning, and in the event the Contractor fails to comply with said Notice of Warning within five (5) days from receipt thereof, the Owner shall have the right to terminate the Contract. 21. WARNING SIGNS: Contractor shall provide and maintain proper luminous warning and detour signs where directed by the Engineer. Obstructions such as stored materials, equipment and excavations shall be marked with not less than two lights, which shall be not more than 4 feet apart. All lights shall be kept burning from one-half hour before sunset to until one-half hour after sunrise. 22. ACCIDENT PREVENTION: During the performance of the work, the Contractor shall exercise all reasonable precautions for the protection of persons and property. The safety provisions of applicable laws, building and construction codes shall be observed. Machinery, equipment and all other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the safety provisions of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction published by the Associated General Contractors of America to the extent that such provisions are not inconsistent with Federal, State or Municipal laws or regulations. If any operation, practice or condition is deemed by the Engineer to be unsafe, he shall notify the Contractor in writing to take corrective action. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, any operation, practice or condition shall be promptly discontinued and before the affected part of the work is resumed, remedial action taken. The Owner reserves the right to remedy any neglect on the part of Contractor as regards the GC - 9 GENERAL CONDITIONS protection of the work which may come to its attention, after 24 hours' notice in writing; except that in cases of emergency it shall have the right to remedy any neglect without notice, and in either case to deduct the cost of such remedy from money due the Contractor. Nothing in the foregoing paragraphs shall be construed as relieving the Contractor from full responsibility at all times for safe prosecution of the work. 23. DAMAGES: The Contractor shall pay and make good all losses or damages arising out of any cause connected with the Contract and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all claims and any and all liability or responsibility of every nature and kind for any loss, damage or injury which may be brought against the Owner or any of its officers or agents, by reason of, or connected with the work or materials furnished under the Contract and shall pay all costs and expenses of every kind, character, and nature whatever, occurring upon or arising out of the Contract. 24. MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC: All work under this Contract is to be completed within the time indicated in the Contract Agreement or as extended by the Owner. If in the meantime it should become necessary, because of the lateness of the season, or any other reason to stop the work, the Contractor shall at his own expense, open proper drainage ditches, erect temporary structures where necessary, prepare the roads so them will be minimum interference with traffic, set up and maintain a competent organization as directed by the Engineer, to keep the highways in first class condition for traffic, and take every precaution to prevent any damage or unreasonable deterioration of the work during the time it is closed. 25. FINAL SITE CLEARING: Before final payment will be approved, the Contractor shall prepare the construction areas as follows: All basins, manholes and pipe as constructed shall be cleaned free from accumulated construction dirt, silt, form work, etc., and all proper restoration as called for in the items of the Specifications shall be complete in every detail. The Contractor shall clean all construction areas free from accumulated forms, excavation fill, construction materials and construction shanties. All areas shall be completed in every detail and shall be broom cleaned from excess dirt and materials. 26. PROTECTION OF LAND MARKERS~ TREES, SHRUBS~ AND PROPERTY: Wherever in the conduct of the work, a monument marking a point of public or private survey is encountered or brought to view by excavation, the fact shall at once be communicated to the Engineer. In no case shall the Contractor remove the same until the location for resetting shall have been made by the Engineer. All monuments or land markings exposed to view when the work is first undertaken shall be carefully preserved and the greatest care exercised to prevent injury to or disturbance of position of the same. The unit price of all items shall include the cost of restoring to its former condition any sidewalks or curbs, as well as restoring any trees, shmbs or lawns that may be damaged during this construction. No additional payment will be made. The Contractor is required at his own expense to obtain any and all permits for use of private property if he uses such property for storage, transportation or accomplishment of the work under GC- 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS the Contract. Private property shall be cleaned up neatly, any damage repaired and premises restored to their original condition. 27. PROTECTION OF UTILITIES: The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the existence of structures of municipal and other public service corporations on or adjoining the site of the work, and give reasonable opportunity to and cooperation with the owners of these utilities in the work of reconstructing or altering them. Such reconstruction and alteration shall be so conducted as to delay or interfere as little as practicable with the work of the Contractor. Any additional cost of various items of work because of these utilities shall be included in the price bid for these items. The Engineer shall direct the public utility corporations to shift or remove those utility structures that may be necessary to permit the Contractor to carry out the work in accordance with the Plans. The Contractor shall not remove or cause to be removed, any structure or part of a structure owned by a public utility corporation without the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall cooperate with the public utility corporation whose structures (aerial, surface or subsurface) are within the limits of or along the outside of the right-of-way, to make it possible for them to maintain uninterrupted service. The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a way as to delay or interfere as little as practicable with the work of the utility corporation. 28. NO DAMAGES FOR DELAY: Notwithstanding any other provisions to this Contract, the Contractor agrees to make no claim for damages for delay in the performance of this Contract occasioned by any act of the Town or any of its representatives, and agrees that any such claim shall be fully compensated for by an extension of time to complete performance of the work as provided herein. This provision shall not apply to any act or omission to act of the Town or any of its representatives, wherein the same is done in bad faith and with deliberate intent to delay the Contractor in the performance of this Contract. 29. RECORD KEEPING: The Contractor shall establish and maintain complete and accurate books, records, documents, accounts and other evidence directly pertinent to performance under this contract (hereinafter the "records"). The records must be kept for the balance of the contract term and for six (6) years thereafter. 30. SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPI.I~RS: Within five days after receipt from the Engineer of notice to begin work, the Contractor will furnish written notice of names of ail subcontractors to be employed on the project and the general items of work to be done by them. Simultaneously, the Contractor shall furnish written notice of the names of suppliers of materials to be used on the project. The Owner may disapprove for good cause any subcontractor or material supplier selected by the Contractor by giving written notice of its disapproval within five (5) days after receiving the names of subcontractors and material suppliers, to the Contractor who shall thereupon promptly notify the Owner of the names of the subcontractor or material supplier selected in replacement which shall again be subject to approval by the Owner. 31. PENAL LAW: Attention is called to Section 1918 of the Penal Law as follows: Construction or blasting near pipes conveying combustible gas GC - 11 GENERAL CONDITIONS No person shall discharge explosives in the ground, nor shall any person other than a state or county employee regularly engaged in the maintenance and repair thereof excavate in any then existing street, highway, or public place, unless notice thereof in writing shall have been given at least seventy-two hours in advance to the person, corporation or municipality engaged in the distribution of gas in such territory. The person having direction or control of such work shall give such notice, and further he shall ascertain whether there is within one hundred feet in such street, highway or public place, or in the case of a proposed discharge of explosives within a radius of two hundred feet of such discharge, any pipe of any other person, corporation or municipality conveying combustible gas, and if thereby any such pipe, he shall also give such notice to any other such person, corporation or municipality. Provided, however, that in any emergency involving danger to life, health, or property it shall be lawful to excavate without using explosives if the notices prescribed herein are given as soon as reasonably possible, and to discharge explosives to protect a person or persons from an immediate and substantial danger of death or serious personal injury if such notices are given before any such discharge is undertaken. Any such work shall be performed in such manner as to avoid danger to any pipe conveying combustible gas. Any violation of the provisions of this section shall be a misdemeanor. GC- 12 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. INDEX Contract Documents and Definitions Scope of the Work Compensation to be paid to the Contractor Time of Essence Commencement of Work Time of Completion Liquidated Damages for Delays Extension of Time. No Waiver Weather Contract Security Laws and Ordinances Qualifications for Employment Non-Discrimination Payment of Employees Estimates and Payments Acceptance of Final Payment Constitutes Release Construction Reports Inspection and Tests Plans and Specifications: Interpretations Subsurface Conditions Found Different Contractor's Title to Materials Superintendence by Contractor Protection of Work, Persons and Property Representations of Contractor Patent Rights Authority of the Engineer Changes and Alterations Correction of Work Weather Conditions The Owner's Right to Withhold Payments The Owner's Right to Stop Work or Terminate Contract Contractor's Right to Stop Work or Terminate Contract Responsibility for Work Use of Premises and Removal of Debris Suits of Law Power of the Contractor to Act in an Emergency Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Subletting, Successor and Assigns General Municipal Law Clause Grades, Lines, Levels, and Surveys Insurance Requirements Foreign Contractors Lien Law Refusal to Waive Immunity Exemption from Sales and Use Tax CC- 1 CONDITIONS OFCONTRACT 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND DEFINITIONS The Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form, Conditions of Contract, General Conditions, Specifications, Form of Contract, Construction Drawings, together with any Addenda, shall form part of this Contract, and the provisions thereof shall be as binding upon the parties hereto, as if they were herein fully set forth. The table of contents, titles, heading, headlines, and marginal notes contained herein are solely to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect, limit or cast light upon the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Whenever the term "Contract Documents" is used, it shall mean and include the Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form, Conditions of Contract, General Conditions, Specifications, Form of Contract, Construction Drawings and any Addenda. In case of any conflict or inconsistency between the provisions of the Contract and those of the Specifications, the provisions of this Contract shall govern. Extra Work: The term "extra work", as used herein, refers to and includes all work required by the Owner, which in the judgement of the Engineer involves changes in or additions to work required by the Plans, Specifications and any Addenda in their present form and which is not covered by a specific unit price in the Form of Bid. Subcontractor: The term "subcontractor" shall mean any person, firm, or corporation supplying labor and material for work at the site of the project but not including the parties to this Contract. Notice: The term "notice", as used herein, shall mean and include written notice. Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served when delivered to, or at last known business address of, the person, firm or corporation for whom intended, or his, their, or its duly authorized agents, representatives, or officer, or when enclosed in a postage prepaid wrapper or envelope addressed to such person, firm or corporation at his, their or its last known business address and deposited in a United States mailbox. Directed, Required, Approved, Acceptable: Whenever they refer to the work or its performance, "directed", "required", "permitted", "ordered", "designated", "prescribed", and words of like import shall imply the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Engineer, and "approved", "satisfied", or "satisfactory", "in the judgement of", and words of like import, shall mean approved, or acceptable to, or satisfactory to, or in the judgement of the Engineer. 2. SCOPE OF THE WORK The Contractor will fumish all plant, labor, materials, supplies, equipment and other facilities and things necessary or proper for, or incidental to, the work contemplated by this Contract as required by, and in strict accordance with the applicable Plans, Specifications and Addenda prepared by the Engineer and/or required by, and in strict accordance with, such changes as are ordered and approved pursuant to this Contract, and will perform all other obligations imposed on him by this Contract. CC - 2 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 3. COMPENSATION TO BE PAID TO THE CONTRACTOR (a) Agreed Prices: It is understood and agreed that the Contractor will accept as payment in full the summation of products of the actual quantities in place upon the completion of the work, as determined by the Engineer's measurements, by the unit prices bid, no allowance being made for anticipated profit or for reasons of variations from the estimated quantities set forth in the Form of Bid. (b) Extra Work: The Owner may, at any time, by a written order and without notice to the Sureties, require the performance of such extra work or changes in the work as it may find necessary or desirable. The amount of compensation to be paid to the Contractor for any extra work, as so ordered, shall be determined as follows: 1) By such applicable unit prices, if any, as set forth in the Contract; or 2) If no such unit prices are set forth, then by unit price or by a lump sum mutually agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor; or 3) If no such unit prices are so set forth and if the parties cannot agree upon unit prices or a lump sum; then by actual net cost in money to the Contractor of the materials, permits, wages of applied labor, premiums for Workmen's Compensation Insurance, payroll taxes required by law, rental for plant and equipment used (excluding small tools) to which total cost will be added twenty (20) percent as full compensation for all other items of profit, costs and expenses, including administration, overhead, superintendence, insurance, insurance other than Workmen's Compensation Insurance, materials used in temporary structures, allowances made by the Contractor to subcontractors, additional premiums upon the performance bond of the Contractor and the use of small tools. 4. TIME OF ESSENCE INASMUCH AS THE PROVISIONS OF THIS CONTRACT RELATING TO THE TIME OF PERFORMANCE AND COMPLETION OF THE WORK ARE FOR THE PURPOSE OF ENABLING THE TOWN TO PROCEED WITH THE CONSTRUCTION OF A PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH A PREDETERMINED PROGRAM, SUCH PROVISIONS ARE OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 5. COMMENCEMENT OF WORK The Contractor agrees that he will commence work immediately on and not later than ten (10) days after signing of the Contract. 6. TIME OF COMPLETION The time of completion of the entire contract work shall be SIXTEEN (16) WEEKS from the date the contract is signed by all parties. The date of such completion shall be the date of the Certification of Completion herein specified. The entire work must be satisfactorily completed so that the project improvements are available to the Town for use. CC - 3 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT The Owner reserves the right to order the Contractor to suspend operations, when in the opinion of the Engineer, improper weather conditions make such action advisable, and to order the Contractor to resume operations when weather and ground conditions permit. The days during which such suspension of work is in force are not chargeable against the specified completion date. 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAYS The time limit being essential to and of the essence of this Contract, the Contractor hereby agrees that the Owner shall be, and is hereby authorized to deduct and retain out of the money which may be due or may become due to said Contractor under this agreement, the sum of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) per day which amount is hereby agreed upon, fixed and determined by the parties hereto as the liquidated damages, including overhead charges, services, inspectors wages and interest on the money invested, that the Owner will suffer by reason of such default, for each and every day during which the aforesaid work may be incomplete over and beyond the time herein stipulated for its completion in 6 - Time of Completion, provided, however, that the Owner shall have the right to extend the time for the completion of said work. 8. EXTENSIONS OF TIME. NO WAIVER If the Contractor shall be delayed in the completion of his work by reason of unforeseeable causes beyond his control and without his fault or negligence, including but not restricted to, acts of God or of the public enemy, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, riots, civil commotion's or freight embargoes, the period herein above specified for completion of his work shall be extended by such time as shall be fixed by the Owner. No such extension of time shall be considered a waiver by the Owner of its right to terminate the Contract for abandonment or delay by the Contractor as hereinafter provided, or relieve the Contractor from full responsibility for performance of his obligations hereunder. 9. WEATHER During unsuitable weather, all work must stop when such work would be subject to injury and the Contractor shall transfer his men and materials to those parts of the work where weather conditions will not have any effect on the workmanship. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any damages on account of such damages or suspension, and he must protect any work that might be injured by the elements and make good any work that is injured. 10. CONTRACT SECURITY (a) The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond, or other acceptable security, equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the amount of the bid as security for the faithful performance of the Contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection with this Contract. The Performance Bond shall be written so as to remain in full force and effect as a maintenance bond for a period of not less than one (1) year after the date of acceptance of the work by the Engineer. CC - 4 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (b) Additional or Substitute Bond: If at any time the Owner shall be or become dissatisfied with any surety or sureties, or if for any other reason such bond shall cease to be adequate security to the Owner, the Contractor shall within five (5) days after notice from the Owner to do so, substitute an acceptable bond in such form and sum and signed by such other surety as may be satisfactory to the Owner. The premiums on such bonds shall be made until the new surety shall have been qualified. 11. LAWS AND ORDINANCES In the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall comply and obey all federal, state, county and local laws, ordinances, codes and regulations relating to the performance of the Contract, including but not limited to, labor employed thereon, materials supplied, obstructing streets and highways, maintaining signals, storing, handling and use of explosives and all other general ordinances and state statutes affecting him or his employees or his work hereunder in his relations with the Municipality or any other persons, and also all laws, codes, ordinances controlling or limiting the Contractor while engaged in executing the work under the Contract. As a condition of the Contract, the Contractor shall and does hereby agree to comply with all requirements of the labor laws of the State of New York. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Sections 291- 299 of the Executive Law and Civil Rights Law, shall fumish all information and reports deemed necessary by the State Commission for Human Rights, the Attorney General and the Industrial Commissioner for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such sections of the Executive Law and Civil Rights Law. The Contract may be forthwith cancelled, terminated or suspended, in whole or in part, by the contracting agency upon the basis of a finding made by the State Commission for Human Rights that the Contractor has not complied with these laws. The Contractor hereby expressly agrees to comply with all the provisions of the Labor Law and any and all amendments thereto, insofar as the same are applicable to this Contract. The Labor Law, as amended, provides that no laborer, workman or mechanic in the employ of the Contractor, subcontractor or other person doing or contracting to do the whole or a part of the work contemplated by this Contract, shall be permitted or required to work more than eight (8) hours in any one (1) calendar day, except in cases of extraordinary emergency caused by fire, flood or danger to life or property; that no such person shall be employed more than eight (8) hours in any day or more than five (5) days in any week expect in such emergency; that the wages to be paid for a legal day's work as herein before defined, to laborers, workmen or mechanics upon the work called for under this Contract or upon any material used upon, or in connection therewith, shall not be less than the prevailing rate for a day's work in the same trade or occupation in the locality within the state where such work is to be done and each laborer, workman or mechanic employed by the Contractor, subcontractor or other person about or upon the work shall be paid the wages herein provided; that employees engaged in the construction, maintenance, and repair of highways and in water works construction outside the limits of cities CC - 5 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT and villages are no longer exempt from the provisions of the Labor Law which require the payment of the prevailing rate of wages and the eight (8) hour day. Section 222 of the Labor Law, as amended by Chapters 556 and 557 of the Laws of 1933, provides that preference in employment shall be given to citizens of the State of New York who have been residents of Suffolk County for at least six (6) consecutive months immediately prior to the commencement of their employment. Each person so employed shall furnish satisfactory proof of residence in accordance with roles adopted by the Industrial Commissioner. Persons other than citizens of the State of New York shall be employed only when such citizens are not available. Section 222 further provides that upon the demand of the State Industrial Commissioner, the Contractor shall furnish a list of names and addresses of all his subcontractors and further provides that a violation of this section shall constitute a misdemeanor and shall be punishable by a fine of not less than Fifty Dollars ($50.00) nor mom than Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) or by imprisonment for not less than thirty nor more than ninety days, or both fine and imprisonment. Section 220-A of the Labor Law, as amended by Chapter 472 of the Laws of 1932, provides that before payment is made by or on behalf of the State of any city, county, town or village or other civil division of the state of any sums due on account of a contract for a public improvement, it is the duty of the Comptroller or the financial officer of the Municipal Corporation to require the Contractor and each and every subcontractor to file a certified statement in writing, in satisfactory form, certifying to the amounts then due and owing to any and all laborers for daily or weekly wages on account of labor performed upon the work of the Contractor, setting forth therein the names of the persons whose wages are unpaid and the amount due each respectively. Section 220-B of the Labor Law, as so amended, provides that any interested person who shall have previously filed a protest in writing objecting to the amounts due or to become due to him for daily or weekly wages for labor performed on the public improvement for which the Contract was entered into, or if for any mason, it rnay be deemed advisable, the Comptroller of the State or financial officer of the Municipal Corporation may deduct from the whole amount of any payment on account thereof of the sums or sum admitted by any contractor or subcontractor in such statement or statements so filed to be due and owing by him on account of labor performed and may withhold the amount so deducted for the benefit of the laborers for daily or weekly wages, whose wages are unpaid as shown by the verified statements filed by any contractor or subcontractor and may pay directly to any person the amount or amounts so shown to be due for such wages. Section 220-C of the Labor Law, as so amended, provides the penalty for making of a false oath or verification. Section 220-D of the Labor Law provides that the advertised Specifications for every contract for the construction, reconstruction, maintenance and/or repair of highways to which the State, county, town and/or village is a party shall contain a provision stating the minimum rate of hourly wage that can be paid, as shall be designated by the Industrial Commissioner, to the laborers employed in the performance of the Contract either by the Contractor, subcontractor or other person doing or contracting to do the whole or part of the work contemplated by the CC - 6 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT Contract, and the Contract shall contain a stipulation that such laborers shall be paid not less than such hourly minimum rate of wage. Any person or corporation that willfully pays, after entering into such Contract, less than such stipulated minimum hourly wage scale Shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and upon conviction, shall be punished for a first offense by a fine of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) or by imprisonment for not more than thirty (30) days, or both by fine and imprisonment; for a second offense by a fine of One Thousand Dollars ($1,000.00) and in addition thereto, the Contract on which the violation has occurred shall be forfeited, and no such person or corporation shall be entitled to receive any sum nor shall any officer, agent or employee of the State pay the same or authorize its payment from the funds under his charge or control to any person or corporation for work done upon any contract, on which the Contractor has been convicted of second offense in violation of the provisions of this section. The minimum wage rates established by the Industrial Commissioner, State of New York, for this Contract are set forth herein above as part of "Instructions to Bidders". 12. QUALIFICATIONS FOR EMPLOYMENT No person under the age of sixteen (16) years and no person currently serving sentence in a penal or correctional institution shall be employed to perform any work on the project under this Contract. No person whose age or physical condition is such as to make his employment dangerous to his health or safety or to the health or safety of others, shall be employed to perform any work on this project; provided, however, that such restrictions shall not operate against the employment of physically handicapped persons, otherwise employable, where each person may be safely assigned to work which they can ably perform. 13. NON-DISCRIMINATION There shall be no discrimination because of race, creed, color, national origin, age or sex in the employment of persons for work under this Contract, whether performed by the Contractor or any subcontractor. Neither shall the Contractor and subcontractor or any person acting on behalf of the Contractor or subcontractor discriminate in any manner against or intimidate any employee hired for the performance of work under this Contract on account of race, creed, color, national origin, age or sex. There may be deducted from the amount payable to the Contractor by the Owner under this Contract a penalty of Five Dollars ($5.00) for each person for each calendar day during which such person was discriminated against or intimidated in violation of the provisions of this paragraph; provided that for a second or any subsequent violation of the terms of this paragraph, this Contact may be canceled or terminated by the Owner and all monies due or to become due hereunder may be forfeited. 14. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES The Contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this Contract in full (less deductions made mandatory by law) in cash (or any agreed upon method by the Employee) and not less often than once each week. CC- 7 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 15. ESTIMATES & PAYMENTS (a) Monthly: At the end of each calendar month during the progress of the work, the Engineer shall make an approximate estimate of the work satisfactorily done, based upon the prices set forth in the Proposal Form. In consideration of the work done, the Owner will pay or cause to be paid to the Contractor the amount estimated by the Engineer as due him less five (5) percent. The making of any such estimate or payment made thereon shall not be taken or constmed as an acceptance by the Owner of any work so estimated and paid for. The five percent (5%) of the amount of the monthly estimate remaining unpaid will be retained by the Owner as a guarantee that the Contractor will faithfully and completely fulfill all obligations imposed by the Contract and Specifications, and against any damages caused the Owner by reason of any failure on the part of the Contractor to fulfill all conditions and obligations herein contained. (b) Final Estimate: One month after the completion and acceptance of the work specified and contracted for, the Engineer will make a final estimate of all the work done. Thereafter, the Owner will pay the full amount, less prior payments, less any amounts retained to complete the work according to the provisions of the Specifications, less any money paid by the Owner by mason of said Contractor having failed to carry out faithfully and completely ail the obligations and requirements herein contained. Upon final settlement, according to the conditions herein specified and not until such settlement shall have been made, will the Contractor be relieved from the obligations assumed in the Contract. (c) Measurement for Payment: The Engineer shall make due measurement of work done during the progress of the work and his estimate shall be final and conclusive evidence of the amounts of work performed by the Contractor under, and by virtue of, this agreement and shall be taken as full measure of compensation to be received by the Contractor. When requested by the Contractor, the Engineer shall measure, remeasure or re-estimate any portion of the work, but the expense of such remeasurement or re-estimating shall, unless material error be proved, be paid for by the Contractor. (d) No payments will be made for materials delivered to the site which have not been incorporated into the work. (e) Contractors and subcontractors are required to submit to the Town, within thirty days after issuance's of the first payroll, and every thirty days thereafter, a transcript of the original payroll record, subscribed and affirmed as tme under the penalties of perjury. 16. ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT CONSTITUTES RELEASE The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be, and shall operate as a release to the Owner from all claims and all liabilities to the Contractor for all the things done or furnished in connection with this work and for every act and neglect of the Owner and others relating to or arising out of, this work, excepting the Contractor's claims for interest upon the final payment, if this payment be improperly delayed. No payment, however, final or otherwise, shall operate to CC- 8 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT release the Contractor or his sureties from any obligations under this Contract or the Performance Bond. 17. CONSTRUCTION REPORTS The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer prior to commencing any work under this Contract, a detailed schedule and plan of operations indicating the manner in which the Contractor proposes to prosecute the work and a time schedule therefor. Such schedules are not intended to bind the Contractor to a pre-determined plan or procedure, but rather to enable the Engineer to coordinate the work of the Contractor with work required of, and to be performed by others. The detailed schedule shall include a list of the subcontractors and material suppliers he proposes to use on the work. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with periodic estimates for partial payments as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents, and in addition thereto will furnish the Engineer with a detailed estimate for final payment. Prior to being eligible to receive the final payment under this Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with substantial proof that all bills for services rendered and materials supplied have been paid. The enumeration of the above repons in no way relieves the Contractor of his responsibility under existing Federal or State Laws of filing such other repons with agencies as may be required by such existing laws or regulations. 18. INSPECTION AND TESTS All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and test by the Engineer at any time during the construction and at any and all places where manufacturing of materials used and/or construction is carried on. Without additional charge, Contractor shall furnish promptly all reasonable facilities, labor and materials necessary to make any tests required by the Engineer and/or required by the Specifications. If at any time before final acceptance of the entire work, the Engineer considers necessary or advisable an examination of any portion of the work already completed, by removing or tearing out the same, the Contractor shall upon request, furnish promptly all necessary facilities, labor and materials for such examination. If such work is found to be defective in any material respect, due to the fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, or if any work shall be covered over without the approval or consent of the Engineer, whether or not the same shall be defective, the Contractor shall be liable for the expense for such examination and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such approval and consent shall have been given and such work is found to meet the requirements of this Contract, the Contractor shall be recompensed for the expense of such CC - 9 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT examination and reconstruction in the manner herein provided for the payment of cost of extra work. The selection of laboratories and/or agencies for the inspection and tests of supplies, materials or equipment shall be subject to the approval of or designated by the Owner. Satisfactory documentary evidence that the material has passed the required inspection and tests must be furnished to the Engineer prior to the incorporation of the material in the work. Any rejected work will be removed from the site of the project completely at the expense of the Contractor. 19. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: INTERPRETATIONS The Contractor shall keep at the site of the work one copy of the Plans and Specifications signed and identified by the Engineer. Anything shown on the Plans and not mentioned in the Specifications or mentioned in the Specifications and not shown in the Plans shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. In case of any conflict or inconsistency between the Plans and Specifications, the Specifications shall govern. Any discrepancy between the figures and drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer whose decision thereon shall be conclusive. 20. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS FOUND DIFFERENT Should the Contractor encounter subsurface conditions at the site materially differing from those shown on the Plans or indicated in the Specifications, he shall immediately give notice to the Engineer of such conditions, before they are disturbed; the Engineer shall thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if he finds that they materially differ from those shown on the Plans or indicated on the Specifications, he shall at once make such changes in the Plans and/or Specifications as he may find necessary. Any increase or decrease of cost resulting from such changes will be adjusted in the manner provided herein for adjustment as to extra and/or additional work and changes. 21. CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIALS No materials or supplies for the work shall be pumhased by the Contractor or any subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. The Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the work. 22. SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR At the site of the work, the Contractor shall give his constant, personal attention to the work or employ a construction superintendent or foreman who shall have full authority to act for the Contractor. It is understood that such representative shall be acceptable to the Engineer and shall be one who can be continued in that capacity for the particular job involved unless he ceases to be on the Contractor's payroll. The Contractor's superintendent and foreman must be able to read and speak the English language. CC- 10 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 23. PROTECTION OF WORK~ PERSONS AND PROPERTY Precaution shall be exemised at all times for the proper protection of all persons, property and work. The Contractor shall give notice to the owners of utilities which may serve the area and request their assistance in predetermining the location and depth of various pipes, conduits, manholes, and other underground facilities. The safety provisions of applicable laws, building and construction codes shall be observed. Machinery, equipment and all hazards shall be guarded or eliminated in accordance with the safety provisions of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction published by the Associated General Contractors of America, to the extent that such provisions are not in contravention of applicable law. The Contractor shall furnish entirely at his own expense any and all additional safety measures deemed necessary by the Owner or his Engineer to adequately safeguard the traveling public. The Contractor shall, at all hours of the day, safely guard and protect his own work and adjacent property from any damage and shall replace or make good any such damage, loss or injury, unless such be caused directly by errors contained in the Contract Documents, or by the Owner or its duly authorized representatives. The Contractor shall provide and maintain such watchmen, barriers, lights, flares and other signals at his own expense, as will effectively prevent any accident in consequence of his work for which the Owner might be liable. The Contractor shall be liable for all injuries or damage caused by his act or neglect, or that of his employees. The Contractor shall take particular care to avoid the blocking of fire hydrants, fire alarm boxes, letterboxes, traffic signals or other visible devices maintained for the use of the public. 24. REPRESENTATIONS OF CONTRACTOR The Contractor represents and warrants: (a) That he is financially solvent and that he is experienced in, and competent to, perform the type of work involved under this Contract and able to furnish the plant, materials, supplies and/or equipment to be furnished for the work; and (b) That he is familiar with all Federal, State and Municipal Law, ordinances and regulations which may in any way affect the work of those employed hereunder, including but not limited to any special acts relating to the work; and (c) That such work required by these Contract Documents as is to be done by him can be satisfactorily constructed and used for the purpose for which is intended and that such construction will not injure any person or damage any property; and (d) That he has carefully examined the Plans, Specifications and the site of the work, and that from his own investigations he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the character, location, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials, structures and CC- 11 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT utilities likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the work, the general local conditions which may in any way affect the work or its performance. 25. PATENT RIGHTS As part of his obligation hereunder and without any additional compensation, the Contractor will pay for any patent fees or royalties required in respect to the work or any part thereof and will fully indemnify the Owner or his Engineer for any loss on account of any infringement of patent rights unless prior to his use in the work a particular process or a product of a particular manufacturer he notifies the Engineer in writing that such process or product is an infringement of a patent. 26. AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER In the performance of the work, the Contractor shall abide by all orders and directions and requirements of the Engineer and shall perform work to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at such time and places, by such methods, and in such manner and sequence as he may require. The Engineer shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of all parts of the work, shall interpret the Plans, Specifications, Contract Documents and any extra work orders and shall decide all other questions in connection with the work. Upon request, the Engineer shall confirm in writing any oral orders, directions, requirements or determinations. The enumeration herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents of particular instance in which the opinion, judgement, discretion or determination of the Engineer shall control or in which work shall be performed to his satisfaction or subject to his approval or inspection, shall not imply that only matters similar to those enumerated shall be so governed and performed, but without exception all the work shall be governed and so performed. 27. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Owner, upon the Engineers reeormnendation, reserves the right to make alterations in location, line, grade, plan, form or dimensions of the work, or any part thereof, either before or after the commencement of construction. If such alterations diminish the amount of work to be done, no claim for damages or anticipated profits will be warranted on the work, which may be dispensed with. If such alterations increase the amount of work, such increases shall be paid for according to the quantity of work actually done and at the prices for such work as contained in the schedule of prices. 28. CORRECTION OF WORK All work and all materials whether incorporated into the work or not, all processes of manufacture and ail methods of construction shall be at all times and places subject to the inspection of the Engineer who shall be the final judge of quality, materials, processes of manufacture and methods of construction suitable for the purpose for which they are used. Should they fail to meet his approval, they shall be forthwith reconstructed, made good and replaced and/or corrected as the case may be, by the Contractor, at his own expense. CC- 12 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not desirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor hereunder shall be reduced by such amount as in the judgement of the Engineer shall be equitable. The Contractor expressly warrants that his work shall be free from any defects in materials or workmanship and agrees to correct any defects, which may appear within one year following the final completion of the work. Neither the acceptance of the completed work nor payment therefor shall operate to release the Contractor or his sureties from any obligations under or upon this Contract or the Performance Bond. 29. WEATHER CONDITIONS In the event of temporary suspension of work or during inclement weather or whenever the Engineer shall direct, the Contractor will, and will cause his subcontractors to protect carefully his and their work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If in the opinion of the Engineer any work or material shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any of his subcontractors to protect his or their work, such work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 30. THE OWNER'S RIGHT TO WITHHOLD PAYMENTS The Owner may withhold from the Contractor so much of any approved payments due him as may, in the judgement of the Owner, be necessary: (a) To assure the payment of just claims then due and unpaid of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work; (b) To protect the Owner from loss due to defective work not remedied; or (c) To protect the Owner from loss due to injury to persons or damage to the work or property of other contractors or subcontractors or others, caused by the act or neglect of the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. The Owner shall have the right, as agent for the Contractor to apply such amounts so withheld in such manner as the Owner may deem proper to satisfy such claims or to secure such protection. Such applications of such money shall be deemed payments for the account of the Contractor. 31. THE OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT (a) The Contractor shall be adjudged bankrupt or make an assignment for the benefit of creditors; or (b) A receiver or liquidator shall be appointed for the Contractor for any of his property and shall CC - 13 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT not be dismissed within 20 days after such appointment, or the proceedings in connection therewith shall not be stayed on appeal within the said 20 days; or (c) The Contractor shall refuse or fail, after notice or warning from the Engineer, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials; or (d) The Contractor shall refuse or fail to prosecute the work or any part thereof with such diligence as will insure its completion within the periods herein specified (or any duly authorized extension thereof) or shall fail to complete the work within said periods; or (e) The Contractor shall fail to make prompt payments to persons supplying labor or materials for the work; or (f) The Contractor shall fail or refuse to regard laws, ordinances or the instructions of the Engineer or otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provisions of this Contract; then and in any such event, the Owner, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy it may have, may by seven (7) days' notice to the Contractor, terminate the employment of the Contractor and his rights to proceed either as to the entire work or (at the option of the Owner) as to any portion thereof as to which delay shall have occurred, and may take possession of the work and complete the work by contract or otherwise, as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case, the Contractor will not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the compensation to be paid the Contractor hereunder shall exceed the expense of so completing the work (including compensation for additional managerial, administrative and inspection services and any damages for delay), such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor and his sureties shall be liable to the Owner for such excess. If the right of the Contractor to proceed with the work is so terminated, the Owner may take possession of and utilize in completing the work, such materials, appliances, supplies, plant and equipment as may be on the site of the work and necessary thereofi If the Owner does not so terminate the right of the Contractor to proceed, the Contractor shall continue to work. 32. CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT If the work shall be stopped by order of the Court or other public authority for a period of three (3) months without act or fault of the Contractor or any of his agents, servants, employees or subcontractors, the Contractor may, upon ten (10) days notice to the Owner, discontinue his performance of the work and/or terminate the Contract; in which event, the liability of the Owner to the Contractor shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 31. The Contractor shall not be obligated to pay to the Owner any excess of the expense of completing the work over the unpaid balance of the compensation to be paid to the Contractor hereunder. 33. RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK The Contractor agrees to be responsible for the entire work embraced in this Contract until its completion and final acceptance, and that any unfaithful or imperfect work that may become damaged from any cause either by act of commission or omission to properly guard and protect CC- 14 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT the work that may be discovered at any time before the completion and acceptance shall be removed and replaced by good and satisfactory work without any charge to the Owner, and that such removal and replacement will be performed immediately on the requirement of the Engineer, notwithstanding the fact that it may have been overlooked by the proper inspector, and partial payment made thereon. It is fully understood by the Contractor that the inspection of the work shall not relieve him of any obligation to do sound and reliable work as herein prescribed, and that any omission to disapprove any work by the Engineer at or before the time of partial payment or other estimate shall not be construed to be acceptance of any defective work. 34. USE OF PREMISES AND REMOVAL OF DEBRIS The Contractor expressly undertakes at his own expense: (a) To store his apparatus, materials, supplies and equipment in such orderly fashion at the site of the work as will not unduly interfere with the progress of his work or the work of any of his subcontractors; (b) To frequently clean up all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials and debris caused by the operations to the end that at all times, the site of the work shall present a neat, orderly and workmanlike appearance; (c) Before final payment hereunder to remove all surplus material, temporary structures, plants of any description and debris of every nature resulting from his operations. 35. SUITS OF LAW The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from and against all suits, claims, demands or actions for any injury sustained or alleged to be sustained by any party or parties in connection with the construction of the work or any part thereof, or any commission or omission of the contractor, his employees or agents of any subcontractor, and in case of any such action shall be brought against the Owner, the Contractor shall immediately take charge of and defend the same at his own cost and expense. 36. POWER OF THE CONTRACTOR TO ACT IN AN EMERGENCY In case of an emergency, which threatens loss or injury to property and/or safety of life, the Contractor will be permitted to act as he sees fit without previous instructions from the Engineer. He shall notify the Engineer thereof immediately and any compensation claimed by the Contractor due to extra work made necessary because of his acts in such emergency shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Where the Contractor has not taken action but has notified the Engineer of an emergency indicating injury to persons or damage to adjoining property or to the work being accomplished under this Contract, then upon authorization from the Engineer to prevent such threatened injury or damage, he shall act as instructed by the Engineer. The amount of reimbursement claimed by the Contractor on account of any such action shall be determined in the manner provided herein for the payment of extra work. CC - 15 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 37. PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW DEEMED INSERTED Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall read and be enforced as though it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party the Contract shall be forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 38. SUBLETTING, SUCCESSOR AND ASSIGNS The Contractor shall not sublet any part of the work under this Contract nor assign any money due him hereunder without first obtaining the written consent of the Owner. This Contract shall insure the benefit of and shall be binding upon the parties hereunder and upon their respective successors and assigns, but neither party shall assign or transfer his interest herein in whole or in part without consent of the other. 39. GENERAL MUNICIPAL LAW CLAUSE Pursuant to the provisions of Section 103-a of the General Municipal Law, in the event that the Bidder or any member, partner, director or officer of the Bidder, should refuse, when called before a grand jury to testify conceming any transaction or contract had with the State, any political subdivision thereof, a public authority or any public Department, agency or official of the State or of any political subdivision thereof or of a public authority, to sign a waiver of immunity against subsequent criminal prosecution or to answer any relevant question concerning such transaction or contract, such person, and any firm, partnership, or corporation of which he is a member, partner, director or officer shall be disqualified from thereafter selling to or submitting bids to or receiving awards from or entering into any contracts with any municipal corporation or any public Department, agency or official thereof for goods, work or services for a period of five (5) years after such refusal, and any and all contracts made with any municipal corporation or any public Department, agency or official thereof on or after the first day of July, 1959, by such person, and by any firm, partnership or corporation of which he is a member, partner, director or officer may be cancelled or terminated by the municipal corporation without incurring any penalty or damages on account of such cancellation or termination, but any monies owing by the municipal corporation for goods delivered or work done prior to the cancellation or termination shall be paid. 40. GRADES, LINES, LEVELS AND SURVEYS The Engineer shall furnish the Contractor with the basic horizontal and vertical controls from which the Contractor shall transfer and stake his lines and grades and for their accuracy. The Engineer will establish the basic horizontal and vertical controls at the start of the work, and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to safeguard such controls; and if, in the opinion of the Engineer, these controls are damaged or destroyed either in whole or in part, the Contractor shall pay the cost of having the damaged controls verified, checked, corrected or replaced. CC - 16 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 41. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall not commence work until the Town has approved all the insurance required under this Contract as required immediately following the Instructions to Bidders. Additionally, the Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Town of Southold from and against all losses and all claims, demands, payments, suits, actions, recoveries and judgments of every kind or nature, brought or recovered against the Town of Southold by reason of any act or omission of the Contractor, his agent or employees in the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit any subcontractor to commence any work under this contract until satisfactory proof of carriage of the required insurance has been posted with and approved by the Town. 42. FOREIGN CONTRACTORS Foreign Contractors must comply with the provisions of Articles 9A and 16 of the Tax Law, as amended, prior to submission of a bid for the performance of this work. The certificate of the New York State Tax Commission to the effect that all taxes have been paid by the foreign contractor shall be conclusive proof of the payment of taxes. The term "foreign contractor" as used in this subdivision means in the case of an individual, a person who is a legal resident of another state or foreign country; and in the case of a foreign corporation, one organized under the laws of a state other than the State of New York. 43. LIEN LAW Attention of all persons submitting bids is specifically called to the provisions of Section 25, Subdivision 5, Section 25A and 25B of the Lien Law, as amended, in relation to funds being received by a contractor for a public improvement declared to constitute trust funds in the hands of such Contractor to be applied first to the payment of certain claims. 44. REFUSAL TO WAIVE IMMUNITY Pursuant to the provisions of Section 103-A of the General Municipal Law, in the event that the bidder or any member, partner, director or officer of the bidder, should refuse when called before a grand jury to testify concerning any transaction or contract had with the State, any political subdivision thereof, a public authority or with any public department, agency or official of the State or of any political subdivision thereof or of an authority, to sign a waiver of immunity against subsequent criminal prosecution or to answer any relevant question concerning such transaction or contract, such person, and any firm, partnership or corporation of which he is a member, partner, finn director or officer shall be disqualified from thereafter selling to or submitting bids to or receiving awards from or entering into any contracts with any municipal corporation or any public department, agency, or official thereof, for goods, work or services, for a period of five (5) years after such refusal, and any and all contracts made with any municipal corporation or any public department, agency, or official thereof on or after the first day of July, 1959, by such person and any firm, partnership or corporation of which he is a member, partner, director or officer may be cancelled or terminated by the municipal corporation without CC- 17 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT incurring any penalty or damages on account of such cancellation or termination, but any monies owing by the municipal corporation for goods delivered or work done prior to the cancellation or termination shall be paid. 45. EXEMPTION FROM SALES AND USE TAXES In accordance with Chapter 513 of the laws of 1974 adopted by the New York State Legislature, amending Section 1115 (a) of the tax law, specifically paragraphs 15 and 16, political subdivisions, as described in subdivision (a) paragraph (L) of section 1116 of the tax laws, of the State of New York are exempt from the payment of sales and use taxes imposed on tangible personal property within the limitations specified in tax law 1115 (a) (15) and (16). (15) Tangible personal property sold to a contractor, subcontractor or repairman for use in erecting a structure or building of an organization described in subdivision (a) of section 1116, or adding to, altering or improving real property, property or land of such an organization, as the terms real property, property and land are defined in the real property tax law; provided, however, no exemption shall exist under this paragraph unless such tangible personal property is to become an integral component part of such structure, building or real property. (16) Tangible personal property sold to a contractor or repairman for use in maintaining, servicing or repairing real property, or land of an organization described in subdivision (a) of section 1116, as the terms real property, property or land are defined in the real property tax law; provided, however, no exemption shall exist under this paragraph unless such tangible personal property is to become an integral component part of such structure, building or real property. Contractors entering into Contract with the Town of Southold shall be exempt from payment of sales and use tax as described above. Procedures and forms are available to the Contractor direct from the Instructions and Interpretations Unit, State of New York, Department of Taxation and Finance, State Campus, Albany, New York, 12227. CC - 18 Town of Southold PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION-PHASE 1 IMPROVEMENTS PROPOSAL PACKAGE BID OPENS: REMINDER NOTE!!!: VENDORS MUST RETURN THIS DOCUMENT INTACT AND FILLED OUT COMPLETELY!! (Do Not Sign the Contract Agreement. It is included only for informational purposes, and will be signed by the successful bidder after award of contract.) All line items on the Proposal Form must be filled in! All lines must have an indication of the bidder's response whether it is a dollar figure or No Bid. Please DO NOT remove any pages from this bid package!!! Thank you ! Proposal Package 1 of 8 BIDDER'S CHECK LIST Your response to our above referenced bid will be considered unresponsive and will be rejected if the following forms are not included at the time of the bid opening. Notarized Affidavit of Non-Collusion as required by NYS Law. A Bid Deposit in the amount of Five Percent of Bid Price as required in the Invitation to Bid. As per specifications, the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD requires a current insurance certificate, with the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD listed as additional insured, to be on file in the Town Clerk's Office. You will be given ten (10) business days from notice of award to supply this form or the bid will be rescinded. Vendor Information Sheet and Address Record Form. Assumed Name Certification. Bidder's Qualification Statement. NOTE: Please do NOT sign the Contract Agreement. It is included only for informational purposes, and will be signed by the successful bidder after award of the contract. Proposal Package 2 of 8 VENDOR NAME: VENDOR INFORMATION SHEET TYPE OF ENTITY:CORP. PARTNERSHIP FEDERAL EMPLOYEE ID #: OR SOCIAL SECURITY #: DATE OF ORGANIZATION: IF APPLICABLE: DATE FILED: STATE FILED: If a non-publicly owned Corporation: CORPORATION NAME: LIST PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS: (5% of outstanding shares) INDIVIDUAL LIST OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS: NAME TITLE If a partnership: PARTNERSHIP NAME: LIST PARTNERS NAMES: Proposal Package 3 of 8 MAIL BID TO: VENDOR NAME: ADDRESS: CONTACT: ADDRESS RECORD FORM TELEPHONE: E-MAIL: FAX: ONLY if different - MAIL PURCHASE ORDER TO: ADDRESS: TELEPHONE: CONTACT: FAX: ONLY if different - MAIL PAYMENT TO: ADDRESS: E-MAIL: TELEPHONE: CONTACT: FAX: E-MAIL: Proposal Package 4 of 8 VENDOR NAME: ASSUMED NAME CERTIFICATION *If the business is conducted under an assumed name, a copy of the certificate required to be filed under the New York general business law must be attached. ASSUMED NAME: If the bidder is an individual, the bid must be signed by that individual; if the bidder is a corporation, by an officer of the corporation, or other person authorized by resolution of the board of directors, and in such case a copy of the resolution must be attached; if a partnership, by one of the partners or other person authorized by a writing signed by at least one general partner and submitted with the bid or previously filed with the Town Clerk. The submission of this constitutes a certification that no Town Officer has any interest therein. (Note: In the event that any Town Officer has any such interest, the full nature thereof should be disclosed below. It is not forbidden that individuals working for the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD or other municipality bid on contracts only that such interest be revealed when they do bid.) INSURANCE STATEMENT Bidder agrees as follows - please mark appropriate box: Insurance Certificate as requested is attached I certify that I can supply insurance as specified if awarded the bid [~ Insurance Certificate filed on DATE FAILURE TO PROVIDE SPECIFIED INSURANCE SHALL DISQUALIFY BIDDER. AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE Proposal Package 5 of 8 AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION I hereby attest that I am the person responsible within my firm for the final decision as to the prices(s) and amount of this bid or, if not, that I have written authorization, enclosed herewith, from that person to make the statements set out below on his or her behalf and on behalf of my firm. I further attest that: 1. The price(s) and amount of this bid have been arrived at independently, without consultation, communication or agreement for the purpose of restricting competition with any other contractor, bidder or potential bidder. 2. Neither the price(s), nor the amount of this bid, have been disclosed to any other firm or person who is a bidder or potential bidder on this project, and will not be so disclosed prior to bid opening. ~l. No attempt has been made or will be made to solicit, cause or induce any firm or person to refrain from bidding on this project, or to submit a bid higher than the bid of this firm, or any intentionally high or non-competitive bid or other form of complementary bid. 4. The bid of my firm is made in good faith and not pursuant to any agreement or discussion with, or inducement from any firm or person to submit a complementary bid. $. My firm has not offered or entered into a subcontract or agreement regarding the purchase of materials or services from any other firm or person, or offered, promised or paid cash or anything of value to any firm or person, whether in connection with this or any other project, in consideration for an agreement or promise by an firm or person to refrain from bidding or to submit a complementary bid on this project. 6. My firm has not accepted or been promised any subcontract or agreement regarding the sale of materials or services to any firm or person, and has not been promised or paid cash or anything of value by any firm or person, whether in connection with this or any project, in consideration for my firm's submitting a complementary bid, or agreeing to do so, on this project. 7. I have made a diligent inquiry of all members, officers, employees, and agents of my firm with responsibilities relating to the preparation, approval or submission of my firm's bid on this project and have been advised by each of them that he or she has not participated in any communication, consultation, discussion, agreement, collusion, act or other conduct inconsistent with any of the statements and representations made in this affidavit. The person signing this bid, under the penalties of perjury, affirms the truth thereof. Signature & Company Position Type Name & Company Position Company Name Date Signed Federal I.D. Number SWORN TO BEFORE ME THIS NOTARY: DAY OF · 20 NOTARY PUBL1C Proposal Package 6 of 8 PROPOSAL FORM PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION-PHASE 1 IMPROVEMENTS VENDOR NAME: VENDOR ADDRESS: TELEPHONE NUMBER: FAX: The undersigned bidder has carefully examined the Contract Documents and will provide all necessary labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as necessary and called for in the said Contract Documents in the manner prescribed therein and in said Contract, and in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer, at the prices listed on the attached Bid Proposal Form. If the bidder is an individual, the bid must be signed by that individual; if the bidder is a corporation, the bid must be signed by an officer of the corporation, or other person authorized by resolution of the board of directors, and in such case a copy of the resolution must be attached; if a partnership, by one of the partners or other person authorized by a writing signed by at least one general partner and submitted with the bid documents. The submission of this constitutes a certification that no Town Officer has any interest therein. (Note: In the event that any Town Officer has any such interest, the full nature thereof should be disclosed below. It is not forbidden that individuals working for the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD or other municipalities bid on contracts, but only that such interest be revealed when they do bid.) The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda (if none were issued please write N/A below): Addendum No. Dated Proposal Package 7 of 8 AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE PRINT NAME TITLE DATE ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATE OF NEW YORK, COUNTY OF ) SS.: On the .day of in the year 2009 before me, the undersigned, personally appeared, , personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the individual(s) whose name(s) is (are) subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument, the individual(s), or the person upon behalf of which the individual(s) acted, executed the instrument. NOTARY PUBLIC Proposal Package 8 of 8 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS Contract 'A' - Abatement of Building Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold LKMA #: 09011.00 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED UNIT DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Written in Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS General Conditions & Site Mobilization A1 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents Abatement (Includes Demobilization) A2 I LS for /LS Dollars Cents Contract 'A' - Abatement of Buildin~ TOTAL Dollars Cents WRITFEN IN WORDS Total all Pay Items TOTAL BASE BID (Add NI Items) NOTE: The Town of Southold reserves the right to increase, decrease, or eliminate in its entirety any or all items prior to or after award of the bid. Each contract containing estimated quantities and lump sum items will be awarded to that responsible bidder whose combination of Total Estimated Bid (Base Bid) and selected alternates is the lowest number of dollars, unless bids are rejected. PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS Contract 'B' - General Construction Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold LKMA #: 09011.00 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED UNIT DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Written in Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS General Conditions & Site Mobilization B1 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents Exterior Concrete Ramp and Handrails - Complete B2 1 LS for NOT IN CONTRACT (N.I.C.) /LS N.I,C. Dollars Cents Entry Door Modifications B3 I LS for /LS Dollars Cents Chair Lift B4 I LS 'for /LS Dollars Cents Interior Repairs/Restoration B5 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents Interior Painting B6 I LS for NOT IN CONTRACT (N.I.C.) /LS N.I.C. Dollars Cents PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS Contract 'B' - General Construction Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold LKMA #: 09011.00 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED UNIT DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Written in Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS Flooring Replacement B7 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents Bathroom Restorations (Men's & Women's) B8 I LS for /LS Dollars Cents Bathroom Restoration at Administration Office B8a I LS for /LS Dollars Cents Structural Improvements (replace valley rafter columns) B9 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents Insulation BIO I LS for /LS Dollars Cents Exterior Brick Repairs/Work with Unit Ventilators Bll 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS Contract 'B' - General Construction Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold LKMA #: 09011.00 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Written in Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS Electrical - Interior Ughting Complete (incl. select demolition) B12 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents ElectricaJ - Exterior Ughfing Complete (incl. select demolition) B 13 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents Electrical - Distribution, Switches and Controls Complete w/demo B14 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents Fire Alarm Modifications B 15 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents HVAC - Demolition B16 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents HVAC - Boiler Replacement (Oil Fired) B17 1 LS for /LS Dollam Cents itemized Proposal for: PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS Contract 'B' - General Construction Town of Southold LKMA #: 09011.00 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Written in Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS HVAC - Distribution Systems (heat and a/c & ventilstion) - Complete B18 1 LS for /LS Dollam Cents Plumbing - Domestic Water Distribution and Water Heater B19 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents F']re Suppression System - complete B20 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents Water Service & RPZ installa~on B21 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents Electdc Service Upgrade to bldg B22 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS Contract 'B' - General Construction Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold LKMA #: 09011.00 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Wdtten in Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS 3ommunications / Network Systems B23 1 LS for NOT IN CONTRACT (N.I.C.) /LS N.I.C. Dollars Cents Contract 'B' - General Construction TOTAL Dollars Cents WRI'I'TE N IN WORDS Total all Pay Items TOTAL BASE BID (Add All Items) NOTE: The Town of Southold reserves the dght to increase, decrease, or eliminate in its entirety any or all items prior to or after award of the bid. Each contract containing estimated quantities and lump sum items will be awarded to that responsible bidder whose combination of Total Estimated Bid (Base Bid) and selected alternates is the lowest number of dollam, unless bids are rejected. Itemized Proposal for: PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS Contract 'B' - General Construction Town of Southold LKMA #: 09011.00 HVAC - Boiler Replacement w/Gas Piping (Gas Fired & Oil fired)) ALT 1 1 LS for /LS Dollars Cents Gas Sen/me to Building ALTla 1 LS for NOT IN CONTRACT (N.I.C.} /LS N.I.C. Dollars Cents Geothermal Complete ALT2 I LS for /LB Dollars Cents NOTE: The Town of Southold reserves the right to increase, decrease, or eliminate in its entirety any or all items prior to or after award of the bid. Each contract containing estimated quantities and lump sum items will be awarded to that responsible bidder whose combination of Total Estimated Bid (Base Bid) and selected alternates is the lowest number of dollars, unless bids are rejected. Town of Southold BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT The signatory of this questionnaire certifies under oath the troth and correctness of all statements and of all answers to interrogatories hereinafter made. SUBMITTED BY: FIRM NAME: A Corporation A Partnership or Entity An Individual PRINCIPAL OFFICE: PRINCIPAL OFFICERS: TITLE NAME ADDRESS BACKGROUND PROFESSION/TRADE 1. How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name? 2. You normally perform what percent of the work with your own forces? List trades that you organization normally performs below: 3. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? __ why. · If so, note where and 4. Are there any claims, judgments, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your firm or its officers? If yes, please provide details. QS-1 5. Has your firm requested arbitration or filed any lawsuits with regard to construction contracts within the last five years? If yes, please provide details. 6. List the major construction projects your organization has underway at this date: Name of: Engineer/ Project Owner Architect Contract Pement Scheduled Name Telephone # Telephone # Amount Complete Completion 7. List five major projects you organization has completed in the past five years: Name of: Engineer/ Work Done Project Owner Architect Contract Date of With Own Fomes Name Telephone # Telephone# Amount Completion % of Work QS-2 8. List the construction experience of the principal individuals of your organization (particularly the anticipated project supervisors): Individual's Name Present Type of Work Position Years of For Which In What Of Office Experience Responsible Capacity 9. Do you have, or can you obtain, sufficient labor and equipment to commence work when required and complete the work within the Contract Time? 10. Bank References: 11. Trade Association Membership: 12. Has your firm ever been investigated by the New York State Department of Labor for prevailing wage rate violations? If yes, when? What was the outcome of the investigation? QS-3 13. Attach current state of financial conditions showing assets, liabilities and net worth. Failure to attach the required documentation may be considered non-responsive on the part of the Bidder and may result in rejection of the Bidder's Proposal. STATE OF ) COUNTY OF ) being duly sworn deposes and says that he is the of contractor and that answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. (Signature of person who signed bid) Sworn to before me this day of ,2009 Notary Public Commission Expiration Date: QS -4 CONTRACT AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT made this day of AD Two Thousand and Nine by and between the Town of Southold, party of the first part (hereinafter called the Owner), and , party of the second part (hereinafter called Contractor). WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the premises and the agreements herein contained, and the payments herein provided to be made, the parties hereto agree as follows: FIRST: The Contractor shall perform all labor, and furnish all the materials, equipment, tools, and implements and will well and faithfully perform and complete the entire work of constructing the PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION-PHASE 1 IMPROVEMENTS AS DESCRIBED 1N THE Contract Documents made and prepared by the Town of Southold, and L.K. McLean Associates, P.C., the project engineers, and as set forth in the Contractor's Bid dated May 28, 2009, and in strict and entire conformity and in accordance with the Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form (Bid), Performance Bond, Conditions of Contract, General Conditions, Detailed Specifications, Contract Drawings, Addenda, and this Agreement, hereto annexed and made a part hereof, and hereinafter collectively referred to as "Contract Documents". SECOND: In Consideration of the Contractor performing this Contract in the manner herein stated and as stated in the Contract Documents, the Owner promises and agrees to pay or cause to be paid to the Contractor the sums of money mentioned in said Contract Documents in the manner and under the conditions therein provided. THIRD: The Contractor covenants and agrees that, anything in this Contract or in the Contract Documents to be contrary notwithstanding, or regardless of any matter, thing, contingency of condition unforeseen or otherwise, present or future, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any additional or further sums of money than the amounts in said Contract Documents provided; and the failure of the Owner or its agents to insist upon strict performance of any of the terms, covenants, agreements, provisions or conditions in this Agreement or in the Contract Documents, on any one or more instances, shall not be construed as a waiver or relinquishment for the future of any such terms, covenants, agreements, provisions and conditions and the same shall be and remain in full force and effect with power and authority on the part of the Owner to enforce the same or cause the same to be enfomed at any time, without prejudice to any other fights which the Owner may have against the Contactor under this Agreement or the Contract Documents. Terms used in the Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. A-1 Neither Owner nor Contractor shall, without the prior written consent of the other, assign or sublet in whole or part his interest under any of the Contact Documents; and, specifically, Contractor shall not assign any monies due or to become due without the prior written consent of the Owner. Owner and Contractor each binds himself, his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of the other party hereto in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents constitute the entire agreement between Owner and Contractor and may only be altered, amended or repealed by a duly executed written instrument signed by both parties. iN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement the day and year first above written. Total Bid Written in Words $ Written in Figures TOWN OF SOUTHOLD CONTRACTOR Dollars BY Scott A. Russell, Supervisor BY TITLE BY Town Attorney (CORPORATE SEAL) A-2 ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATE OF NEW YORK, COUNTY OF ) SS.: On the day of in the year 2009 before me, the undersigned, personally appeared, , personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the individual(s) whose name(s) is (are) subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument, the individual(s), or the person upon behalf of which the individual(s) acted, executed the instrument. NOTARY PUBLIC STATE OF NEW YORK, COUNTY OF )SS.; On the .day of in the year 2009 before me, the undersigned, personally appeared, , personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the individual(s) whose name(s) is (are) subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument, the individual(s), or the person upon behalf of which the individual(s) acted, executed the instrument. NOTARY PUBLIC A-3 ALL QUESTIONS PERTAINING TO THIS SOLICITATION MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING. (Please use this form and fax to 631-286-6314 to the attention of Christopher Dwyer. We will respond as soon as possible.) Date.' Company Name-' Contact Name.' Fax No.: Telephone No.: Q-1 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION-PHASE ONE IMPROVEMENTS GENERAL The-work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION NO. 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Included in this Division are the following sections: 01010 General - Includes Summary of Work 01025 Measurement and Payment 01500 Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls 01501 Health & Safety Provisions DMSION 1 - Page 1 of 20 DMSION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01010 - GENERAL SITE The site of the proposed PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION -PHASE ONE IMPROVEMENTS is located in the Village of Peconic, Town of Southold, County of Suffolk, State of New York and more particularly shown on the Contract Drawings. SCOPE OF WORK TO BE DONE The work to be performed under this Contract shall include all labor, materials, equipment, services and incidentals required to perform the proposed site improvements as indicated in the Specifications, shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as approved by the Engineer. Bo In general, the work for Contract "A" shall include but not be limited to the following two (2) contract items: General Conditions & Site Mobilization Abatement (includes demobilization) Co In general, the work for Contract "B" shall include but not be limited to the following twenty six (26) contract items: 1. General Conditions & Site Mobilization 2. Exterior Concrete Ramp and Handrails-Complete 3. Entry Door Modifications 4. Chair Lift 5. Interior Repairs/Restoration 6. Interior Painting 7. Flooring Replacement 8. Bathroom Restorations (Men's & Women's) 8a. Bathroom Restoration at Administration Office ' 9. Structural Improvements (replace valley rafter columns) 10. Insulation 11. Exterior Brick Repairs/Work with Unit Ventilators 12. Electrical- Interior Lighting 13. Electrical-Exterior Lighting 14. Electrical- Distribution, Switches and Controls 15. Fire Alarm Modifications 16. HVAC-Demolition 17. HVAC- Boiler Replacement (Oil Fired) 18. HVAC-Distribution Systems (heat and a/c) - Complete 19. I-IVAC-Roof top fan replacements 20. Plumbing- Domestic Water Distribution and Water Heater 21. Fire Suppression System-complete DIVISION 1 - Page 2 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. Water Service & RPZ installation Gas Service to Building Electric Service Upgrades Communications/Network Systems Existing Well Modifications Without restricting the generality of the foregoing and for the convenience of each Contractor, the items of work are specified under the Standard 16 Uniform Divisions of the Construction Specifications Institute as follows: 1. General Requirements 3. Concrete 5. Metals (not used) 7. Thermal and Moisture Protection 9. Finishes 11. Equipment (not used) 13. Special Construction (not used) 1SA H.V.A.C. 16. Electrical 2. Site Work 4. Masonry 6. Wood 8. Doors & Finish Hardware 10. Specialties 12. Furnishings (not used) 14. Conveying Systems (not used) 15B. Plumbing E. The work covered under these Divisions shall be bid under one (1) contract: Contract A - General Construction Contract B - HVAC (Not Used) Contract C - Plumbing (Not Used) Contract D - Electrical (Not Used) The Contractor shall be responsible for any coordination involving his contractual construction. The Contractor shall submit a computer generated critical point method schedule indicating all items of work under his contract and in accordance with the associated work. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to update the schedule as required. SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall make or provide any shop drawings, cuts or samples which the Engineer may require for the approval of details and to show the construction as it will be installed. No shop drawing shall be issued or used until it has been approved by the Engineer or his representative. After approval, no changes or deviations shall be made without written notice being sent to the Engineer. The Engineer's approval shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Drawings or Specifications unless he has, in writing, called the Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors or omissions of any sort in the Shop Drawing or schedule. The Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of each requested item to the Engineer for approval unless directed otherwise. DIVISION 1 - Page 3 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUPERINTENDENCE AND WORKMEN The Contractor shall give his constant personal attention to the work while it is in progress, and he shall place it in charge of a competent and reliable superintendent, who shall have authority to act for the Contractor, and who shall be acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, employ labor and equipment which shall be sufficient to prosecute the work to full completion in the manner and time specified. All workmen must have sufficient skill and experience in such work to properly and satisfactorily perform it and operate the equipment involved. Any person employed by the Contractor whom the Engineer may deem incompetent or unfit to perform the work, shall be at once discharged and shall not be again employed. INSPECTION All proposed work under this Contract shall be performed during and with Engineer's approval. The Contractor is advised to inspect carefully the full premises and consult with the Engineer regarding any items of construction or reconstruction that may be questionable. MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC The Contractor shall so conduct his operations as to interfere to the least extent practicable with the passage of vehicles, pedestrians and all other kinds of public traffic; and he must take every precaution against accidents happening to said vehicles, pedestrians and other traffic because of his operations. The Contractor shall enforce regulations and restrictions as may be necessary or required for the protection of fire, accidents, property damage and public nuisance. He shall provide and maintain such toilet facilities at or adjacent to the site as may be required. The Contractor shall erect and maintain such signs, channel and obstruction markers and barricades as may be required for the protection of traffic. The Contractor shall not deposit or store any equipment or materials within the Site Area except with written permission from the Engineer. All maintenance and protection of traffic performed on this contract shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the New York State Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIF~q Ao The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the existence of structures of municipal and other public service corporations on or adjoining the site of the work and give reasonable oppormuity to and cooperation with the owners of these utilities in the work of reconstructing or altering them. Such reconstruction and alteration shall be so conducted as to delay or interfere as little as practicable with the work of the Contractor. Any additional cost of various items of work because of these utilities shall be included in the price bid for these items. Bo The Engineer shall direct the public utility corporations to shift or remove those utility structures that may be necessary to permit the Contractor to can'y out the work in accordance with the Plans. The Contractor shall not remove or cause to be removed, any structure owned DMSION 1 - Page 4 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS by a public utility corporation without the approval of the Engineer. C. The Contractor shall cooperate with the public utility corporation whose structures (aerial, surface or subsurface) are within the limits of or along the outside of the right- of-way, to m~e it possible for them to maintain uninterrupted service. The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a way as to delay or interfere as little as practicable with the work of the utility corporation. GRADES~ LINES~ LEVELS AND SURVEYS A. The Owner's Engineer will establish one (1) bench mark and location of the work lines as reference points for the Contractor. B. The reference points shall be maintained by the Contractor. All other required lines, levels, grades, etc., shall be furnished by the Contractor from the reference points. C. Re-establishment of the reference points by the Engineer for the Contractor shall be done at the Con~'actor's expense. The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as shown on the drawings, and he shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the aforementioned to the Engineer before commencing work. Commencement of work shall be corrected by the Contractor at his expense. LABOP~ LAWS AND WORKMANSHIP All Contractors and Subcontractors employed upon the work shall and will be required to conform to the Labors Laws of the State of New York, the Occupation Safety and Health Act of the various acts amendatory and supplementary thereto; and to all other laws, ordinances and legal requirements applicable thereto. All labor shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their respective trades. The standards of the work required throughout shall be of such grade as will bring results of the first class only. OUALIFICATIONS Ail bidders must have been established in the type of construction of whichever Prime Contract they are submitting a bid for as specified in the Contract Documents for a period of at least five (5) years. On request, bidders must furnish a list of a minimum of five (5) projects of similar type construction that was built by them in the Nassau - Suffolk area. List must contain name, address and telephone number of client's Engineer for which each project was undertaken by Contract. A minimum of five (5) of the projects must have been built for municipal clients. APPROVAL OF SUBCONTRACTORS DIVISION 1 - Page 5 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Ao No Subcontractors shall be employed on the work unless prior approval has been given by the Engineer. The Contract shall, within five (5) days after signing of the Contract, submit a list of proposed Subcontractors to the Engineer for approval. The list shall contain fn-m names, names of all principals and addresses and projects completed by each Subcontractor and names, addresses and telephone numbers of the particular project's Engineer for which the Subcontractor on the aforementioned project list must have been of similar nature. A minimum of five (5) projects for each proposed Subcontractor must be submitted. If for any reason a Subcontractor must be discharged from work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to discharge, stating the reasons, and shall provide the Engineer with the name and qualifications of the replacement Subcontractor for approval by the Engineer. This action is deemed necessary to maintain continuity of the work and to nfinimize project disruptions. All costs due to slowdown of the project for such reasons shall be borne by the Contractor. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS Where reference is made in these Specifications to a society, the portion referred to shall be read into and shall be a part of this Contract and Specifications. Materials, methods and equipment shall conform to the latest A.S.T.M., A.W.P.A., A.S.A., N.E.C., I.E.S., etc. Specifications as may relate to or govern the construction work. TEMPORARY OFFICE AND STORAGE SHED This Contractor shall, at all times, provide and maintain a watertight office where directed, for his use and the use of his Subcontractors. Waiver of the temporary office requirements shall only be granted by the Engineer. Temporary office shall be removed from the site upon completion of all work and the office site restored to original conditions. The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the premises, where directed, watertight storage sheds for storage of all materials which might be damaged by weather, and shall remove them from the site at the completion of the work. Restoration of the shed site shall be done by the Contractor to the condition prior to erection of sheds. CONTRACT DRAWINGS The Contract drawings which accompany and form part of these Specifications bear the general title PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION-PHASE ONE IMPROVEMENTS ,Suffolk County, New York and separately numbered and titled as follows: A-1. A-2. A-3. P-1 WD-1 TO WD-3 COVER PAGE DEMOLITION/REMOVAL PLAN CONSTRUCTION PLAN, NOTES CONSTRUCTION DETAILS PLUMBING PLAN WATER DISTRIBUTION DRAWINGS DIVISION 1 - Page 6 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REOUIREMENTS H-01 TO H-07. FP-01 TO FP-03 E-01 TO E-06 FA-01 TO FA-03 HVAC DRAWINGS FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FIRE ALARM DRAWINGS CLEAN-UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the construction area, including storage areas used by him, free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish and prior to completion of the work, remove any rubbish from and about the premises. Upon completion of the construction, the Contractor shall leave the work premises in a clean, neat and workmanlike condition satisfactory to the Engineer. DIVISION 1 - Page 7 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY OF WORK (BY CONTRACT ITEM-CONTRACT "A"): Item No 1 - General Conditions & Site Mobilization The lump sum price for this item shall be payment for supervision and management, ongoing project-related expenses such as site health & safety, utilities, dust control, bonds and insurances, etc.. and compliance with the requirements of all regulatory agencies and utilities. The lump sum cost shall include any items specified in Division 1 of these specifications. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately based upon the following payment schedule; 50% of the lump sum cost shall be paid in the first payment requisition. The Contractor shall have a fully executed contract with the Town and shall be fully mobilized onto the project site. 25% of the lump sum shall be paid in the second partial payment requisition. The remaining 25% of the lump sum cost for this contract item shall be paid upon substantial completion of the project. Item No. 2 - Abatement The lump sum cost for this item shall include fumishing all labor, supervision, worker certification and training, tools, materials, and equipment for selected demolition and the removal and disposal of asbestos-containing materials from the building. · If any suspect materials are discovered at the work site, immediately notify the Owner's Representative. · Prepare the sites for abatement and shall furnish all labor and materials to perform work for removal of all asbestos-containing materials from each work area. · Conduct Removal and off-site disposal of all hazardous materials. · Conduct Final clearance air tests before the release of all asbestos projects, including tent and glove bag removals. Compensation under this work shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. SUMMARY OF WORK (BY CONTRACT ITEM-CONTRACT "B"): Item No 1 - General Conditions & Site Mobilization The lump sum price for this item shall be payment for supervision and management, ongoing project-related expenses such as site health & safety, utilities, dust control, bonds and insurances, etc.. and compliance with the requirements of all regulatory agencies and utilities. The lump sum cost shall include any items specified in Division 1 of these specifications. DIVISION 1 - Page 8 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Compensation under this work item shall be made separately based upon the following payment schedule; 50% of the lump sum cost shall be paid in the first payment requisition. The Contractor shall have a fully executed contract with the Town and shall be fully mobilized onto the project site. 25% of the lump sum shall be paid in the second partial payment requisition. The remaining 25% of the lump sum cost for this contract item shall be paid upon substantial completion of the project. Item No. 2 - Exterior Concrete Ramp and Handrails-Complete The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials, equipment and disposal fees associated with the clearing of existing site features to be removed and the construction of an exterior concrete ramp with railings. This item shall include the following work; Locate any underground utilities before any removals or site preparation. · Removal and off-site disposal of all asphalt and vegetation. · Construction of concrete ramp and curb.. · Installation of railings with sleeves. Compensation under this work shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 3 - Entry Door Modifications The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment associated with the removal of an existing double door and relxofitting a frame into the existing frame, and installing an ADA door with sidelite. The work associated with this item shall include the following; · Careful Removal of door (Do not damage frame). · Retrofitting new frame into existing. · Installation of new door with sidelite.. Compensation under this work shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 4 - Chair Lift The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment associated with the preparation of the existing stair to accommodate new stair chair lift. The work associated with this item shall include the following; · Removal of two handrails. · Preparation of stairs. · Installation of stair chair lift. DIVISION 1 - Page 9 of 20 DMSION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 5 - Interior Repairs/Restoration The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment associated with the interior repairs. The work associated with this item shall include the following; · Scraping and removing damaged plaster on wall or ceiling and covering entire surface area with a layer of gypsum board. · Removal of sound deadening tile from walls, scraping and painting. · Replacement of interior trim where wall surfaces are to be covered with gyp. bd. · Refurbishment of drinking fountain, removal of another. Compensation under this work shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 6 - Painting The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment associated with the interior and exterior painting. The work associated with this item shall include the following; · Scraping and removing damaged paint on wall or ceiling where not receiving a covering with a layer of gypsum board. · All walls and ceilings on first floor to receive primer and paint. · Priming/painting walls and ceilings where receiving a covering with a layer of gypsum board. · Exterior wood surfaces to be scraped, primed, and painted. Compensation under this work shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 7 - Flooring Replacement The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment associated with the replacement of flooring. The work associated with this item shall include the following; · Replacement of carpeting and underlayment. · Partial replacement of hardwood flooring at the stage procenium. Compensation under this work shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 8 - Bathroom Restorations (Men's & Women's) DIVISION 1 - Page 10 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment associated with the Bathroom Restorations. The pavement shall vary in widths as def'med on the contract drawings. The work associated with this item shall include the following; · Removing all and Replacing noted number of toilet fixtures and accessories. · Removing all and Replacing noted number of toilet partitions. · Replacing all lavatory fixtures and accessories · Matching missing floor tile where toilet removals result in gaps. · Introduce bathroom accessories. · Electrical, HVAC, Fire (See MEP). compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 8a - Bathroom Restoration at Administration Office The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment associated with the Bathroom Restoration. The work associated with this item shall include the following; · Replacing toilet and lavatory. · Replacing Accessories Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by pementage. Item No. 9 - Structural Improvements (replace valley rafter columns) The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment associated with the replacement of limited number of structural supports at the roof level. The work associated with this item shall include the following; · Replacement of 4x4 posts under valley rafters. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 10 - Insulation The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment associated with the installation batt insulation and insulated hatch cover. The work associated with this item shall include the following; · Provide R-30 batt insulation between all ceiling joists. · If space between joists are inaccessible, blown in batt insulation from ceiling plaster to underside of attic floor boards shall be substituted. DIVISION 1 - Page 11 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS · Custom fitted Rigid insulation box, over attic access opening. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by pementage. Item No. 11 - Exterior Brick Repairs/Work with Unit Ventilators The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment associated with Exterior Brick Repairs/Work with Unit ~'entilators as per the contract drawings and technical specifications. The work associated with this item shall include the following; · Carefully remove all louvers. · Carefully remove and store brick where new louvers are to be installed. · Reinstall brick where existing louver is being vacated. · Install new unit ventilators and louvers. · Repoint as needed around new or existing locations of louvers. · Patch interior wails to match surrounding wall. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 12 - Electricai-Interior Lighting The intent of this item is to replace all interior lighting fixtures where indicated in plan. The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment. The work associated with this item shall include the following: · Replacement of lighting fixtures. · Patching where removed fixture results in gaps. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by pementage. Item No. 13 - Electrical-Exterior Lighting The intent of this item is to replace all exterior lighting fixtures where indicated in plan. The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment. The work associated with this item shall include the following: · Replacement of lighting fixtures. · Patching where removed fixture results in gaps. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. DIVISION 1 - Page 12 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Item No. 14 -Electrical-Distribution, S~itches and Controls The intent of this contract item is to replace and/or install electrical distribution, switches and controls as called out on the drawings and subsequent specifications. The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment. The work associated with this item shall include the following; · Replacement of electrical distribution panels. · Replacement of switches and controls. · Replacement of outlets. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 15 - Fire Alarm Modifications The lump sum cost for this item shall include all labor, materials and equipment, to modify the alarm system. This item shall include the following; · Replacement of existing Fire Alarm system. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 16 - HVAC- Demolition The overall intent of this item is replace the HVAC system. The work associated with this lump sum item shall include the following; · Removal of existing system to prepare for installation of new HVAC system. · The contractor shall exercise caution during removals and installations so as not to damage any other structures or existing features at the site. The Contractor shall replace any feature/structure damaged during the installation at no additional cost to the Town. · Coordinate with electrical removals. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 17 - HVAC- Boiler Replacement(Oil Fired) The overall intent of this item is replace the I-IVAC system. The work associated with this lump sum item shall include the following; Installation of new HVAC system. The contractor shall exercise caution during removals and installations so as not to damage any other structures or existing features at the site. The Contractor shall replace any DIVISION 1 -Page 13 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS feature/structure damaged during the installation at no additional cost to the Town. · Coordinate with electrical removals. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 18 - HVAC- Distribution Systems The overall intent of this item is replace the HVAC distribution system. The work associated with this lump sum item shall include the following; · Installation of new HVAC distribution system. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 19 - Rooftop Fan Replacements The overall intent of this item is replace the HVAC Rooftop Fans. The work associated with this lump sum item shall include the following; · Installation of new HVAC Rooftop Fans. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 20 - Plumbing-Domestic Water Distribution and Water Heater The overall intent of this item is replace the domestic water distribution and water heater. The work associated with this lump sum item shall include the following; · Installation of new Domestic Water Distribution and Water Heater. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 21 - Fire Suppression System-Complete The overall intent of this item is replace the Fire Suppression system. The work associated with this lump sum item shall include the following; · Installation of new Fire Suppression system. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. DIVISION 1 - Page 14 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Item No. 22 - Water Service and RPZ Installation The overall intent of this item is provide a new RPZ control device for water service. The work associated with this lump sum item shall include the following; · Installation of RPZ device. · Provide water service to the building Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 23 - Gas service to Building The overall intent of this item is provide gas service to the building. The work associated with this lump sum item shall include the following; · Fumishment of gas service to the building. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percent, age. Item No. 24 - Electric Service upgrades The overall intent of this item is provide electric service upgrades to and within the building. The work associated with this lump sum item shall include the following; · Installation of electrical service upgrades to and within the building. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 25 - Communications/Network Systems The overall intent of this item is provide communication/network system upgrades to and within the building. The work associated with this lump sum item shall include the following; · Installation of communication/network system upgrades to and within the building. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. Item No. 26 - Existing Well Modifications The overall intent of this item is provide existing well upgrades to and within the building. The work associated with this lump sum item shall include the following; DMSION 1 -Page 15 of 20 DMSION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS · Installation of existing well upgrades. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. SECTION 01025 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENTS DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, appurtenances and all services necessary to perform all Work as required by the plans and specifications or as required by the Engineer, at the lump sum or unit prices for the items listed herein. ENGINEER'S ESTIMATE OF QUANTITIES The ENGINEER'S estimated quantities for unit price pay items are approximate only and are included solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids. The OWNER does not expressly or by implication agrees that the nature of the materials encountered below the surface of the ground or the actual quantifies of material encountered or required will correspond with the estimated quantities. PAYMENT ITEMS The method of payment and measurement of for each contract item shall be described in Section 01010, specifically in the "SUMMARY OF WORK" subsection, of this Division in the bid specifications. DIVISION 1 - Page 16 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SCOPE Work shall include but not be limited to the following: A. Temporary Utilities - Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service (including fax machine), water and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls - Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and water control. C. Construction Facilities - Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary buildings. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall provide at the site suitable enclosed toilet facilities for the use of construction personnel. The Contractor shall observe and enforce all sanitary regulations and maintain satisfactory sanitary conditions around and on all parts of the work. B. Adequate washing facility shall be provided for the construction personnel. C. The Contractor shall maintain, service, clean, and disinfect facilities in a satisfactory manner and enforce proper use of the sanitary facilities. D. The Contractor shall be subject to a fine and prosecution if any human excrement is deposited in or around the construction site. E. The Contractor shall pay for all expenses associated with temporary sanitary facilities during the course of the work, including furnishing all necessary permits and fees required for temporary sanitary facilities. F. Comply with all applicable codes and arrange for all necessary inspections and approvals. FIRST-AID FACILITIES AND ACCIDENTS A. First Aid Facilities and Accidents B. The Contractor shall provide, at the site, such equipment and facilities as are necessary to supply fa'st-aid to any of his personnel who may be injured in connection with the work. C. Accident 1. The Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Engineer all acdidents and. whatsoever arising out of, or in connection with, the performance of the work, DIVISION 1 -Page 17 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS whether on or adjacent to the site, which cause death, personal injury or property damage, giving full details and statements of witness. If death or serious injuries or serious damages are caused, the accident shall be repotted immediately by telephone or messenger to both the Owner and the Engineer. If any claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or a Subcontractor on account of any accidents, the Contractor shall promptly report the facts in writing to the Engineer, giving full details of the claim. WATER CONTROL Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate and maintain pumping equipment. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. Provide temporary control of surface water, stormwater mnoff and discharge from pumping in accordance with Contractor's approved soil erosion and sediment control plan. SECURITY At Provide security and facilities to protect work, and existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner. C. Furnish security during the course of the work. ACCESS ROAD Extend and relocate as work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. Co Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering public and private streets. Clean all mud and debris from construction traffic at no additional expense to the Owner. Comply with ail State and Local regulations. Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic, as directed by the Owner and Engineer. Damage to existing site roads as a result of this Contract will be the responsibility of the Contractor. DIVISION 1 -Page 18 of 20 DMSION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PARKING A. The Contractor's personnel shall not park on the main road or adjacent private side streets. B. When space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. C. Do not allow vehicle parking on existing pavement. PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site and dispose weekly in areas as designated by the Owner. REMOVAL OF UTILITIES~ FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Applications for Payment Inspections. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporat3t work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified conditions. DIVISION 1 - Page 19 of 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01501 - HEALTH AND SAFETY PROVISIONS REQUIREMENTS ho The Contractor shall be responsible to maintain a safe workplace and to monitor working conditions at all times during construction and, as necessary, to provide appropriate protective clothing, equipment and facilities for his personnel, and/or to establish work place procedures to ensure their safety, and to enforce the use of these procedures, equipment and/or facilities in accordance wit the following guidelines: Safety and Health Regulations Promulgated by the U.S. Department of Labor OSHA, 29 CFR 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, and 29 CFR 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. 2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Medical Monitoring Program Guidelines. If, at any time, the Owner or the Engineer is apprised of a safety hazard which demands immediate attention because of its high potential for harm to public travel, persons on or about the work, or public or private property, the owner of the Engineer shall have the right to order such safeguards to be erected and such precautions to be taken as necessary and the Contractor shall comply with such orders. If, under such circumstances, the Contractor does not or cannot or his representative is not upon the site so that he can be notified immediately of the insufficiency of safety precautions, the Owner may put the work into such a condition that it shall be, in his opinion, in ail respects safety, and the Contractor shall pay all expenses of such labor and materials as may have been used for this purpose by him or by the Owner. The fact that the Owner or the Engineer does not observe a safety hazard or does not order the Contractor to take remedial measures shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the entire responsibility for any costs or claims for loss, damage, or injury by or against any part sustained on account of the insufficiency of the safety precautions taken by him or by the Owner acting under au.thofity of this Section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to take appropriate safety precautions to meet whatever conditions of hazard may be present during the performance of the work, whether reasonably foreseeable or not. The Contractor is alerted to the fact that it shall be his sole responsibility to anticipate and provide such additional safety precautions, facilities, personnel and equipment as shall be necessary to protect life and property from whatsoever conditions of hazard are present or may be present. DIVISION 1 - Page 20 of 20 DMSION 2 - SITE WORK GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under the Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION NO. 2 - SITE WORK Included in this Division are the following sections: 02050 02051 02722 Site Demolition Selective Building Demolition Pavement Subbase Preparation DIVISION 2 - Page 1 of 7 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 02050 - SITE DEMOLITION AND EXCAVATION DESCRIPTION Under this Section, the Contractor shall supply all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the Demolition work and Debris removal as specified herein, shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer. SCOPE In general, the work to be done shall include but not be limited to the following: A. Removal of concrete step. DEMOLITION DESCRIPTION AND DETAIl The Contractor shall completely remove all steel, concrete and debris to allow for the proposed construction as shown on the Contract Drawings and directed by the Engineer. All materials and debris to be demolished shall be removed and disposed of off site. The Contractor shall exercise extreme care NOT to damage the existing structures and surfaces which are to remain. The Contractor shall remove from the site all cut-offs and demolished materials and replace remaining voids and previously occupied spaces with suitable granular fill material properly compacted in place. Off-site disposal for all demolished material and debris shall be at a facility approved by the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation. All costs, permits, etc., for proper disposal shall be borne by the Contractor. GENERAL SITE EXCAVATION A. The Contractor shall cut to exact elevations, grade and transport excavated materials to fill areas of the site if the material conforms to the specifications and/or as approved by the engineer. Material, which is unacceptable to the Engineer, shall be disposed of at the Contractor's expense. B. Unstable soil shall be removed and replaced with sand or gravel and shall be thoroughly compacted. C. Adequate provision shall be made to intercept or divert all surface water from the areas of construction operations and designated wetlands. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the layout and establishment of vertical and horizontal control to the project area. DIVISION 2 - Page 2 of 7 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES: A. Depth: As indicated B. Clearance: Sufficient for formwork or other work to be performed. C. Excess Depth: Carry footing and foundation walls to undisturbed soil. D. Loose Material and Debris: Keep out of excavation so footings will rest on solid, undisturbed soil. E. Protect against frost until concrete is poured. F. Soil Bearing Capacity: Do not proceed with pouring footings until nature of soil under footings has been inspected and approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 02050- SITE DEMOLITION AND EXCAVATION DIVISION 2 - Page 3 of 7 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 02051 - SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION WORK INCLUDED Under this Section, the Contractor shall supply all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the Demolition work and Debris removal as specified herein, shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer. ". The Contractor shall exercise extreme caution not to damage any parts to the structure that are to remain or be restored. Any non- demolition areas adversely affected by the Contractor shall be restored or repaired at no additional cost to the Owner. SCOPE In general, the work to be done shall include but not be limited to the following: B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Removal of bathroom fixtures, and accessories Removal of electrical outlets, switches, lights. Removal of damaged portions of ceilings and walls. Removal of partitions, trim, mouldings and portions of wainscot Removal of door assembly Removal of applied materials on walls Removal of HVAC related items Removal of paint where designated DEMOLITION DESCRIPTION AND DETAILS Do The Contractor shall selectively remove coverings on walls where indicated on the Contract Drawings and directed by the Engineer. All materials and debris to be demolished shall be removed and disposed of off site. The Contractor shall exercise extreme care NOT to damage the existing structures and surfaces which are to remain. The Contractor shall remove from the site all demolished materials. The Contractor shall remove partition consisting of drywall and wood studs, as well as cabinetry in the west storage area.. Remove paneling, surface applied drywall and other applied finishes to masonry walls. Remove loose furniture. Loose furniture shall be brought to the attention of the Town before disposing off site. G. The Contractor shall remove hung ceiling assemblies, including lighting.. Ho The Contractor shall strip or scrape palm from existing exterior brick walls to prepare substrate for applied stone veneer. DIVISION 2 - Page 4 of 7 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK L. M. N. The Contractor shall remove window assemblies and door assemblies down to existing masonry or framed openings. The Contractor shall remove electrical outlets, switches, lights, and fire protection related devices. Circuit breaker panel boxes shall be replaced as directed by the engineer. Most wiring and conduit to be left intact unless it is pointed out to the engineer that it is damaged or insufficient (V.I.F.) The Contractor shall remove wood louver assembly at the restrooms. The Contractor shall carefully remove all exterior and interior trim, and soffit material. Carefully remove and store bronze plaque. See Drawing No. 3 for any additional demolition items. The Contractor shall completely remove all debris to allow for the proposed construction as shown on the Contract Drawings and directed by the Engineer. All materials and debris to be demolished shall be removed and disposed of off site. Off-site disposal for all demolished material and debris shall be at a facility approved by the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation. All costs, permits, etc., for proper disposal shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 02051 - SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION DIVISION 2 - Page 5 of 7 DMSION 2 - SITE WORK 02722 - SUBBASE PREPARATION WORK INCLUDED The work shall include stripping and removing unsuitable materials, performing cut and fill operations, and fine grading the cut and fill to construct a subbase for the proposed paver walkway, ramps and steps in accordance with the plans, specifications and/or as directed by the Engineer. Under this Section, the Contractor shall furnish, place and compact clean granular fill material if necessary, in accordance with the plans and specifications and/or as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS (IF NECESSARY) Clean granular fill shall bc sound, hard, durable bank run sand and gravel. Gradation shall be as follows as determined by ASTM D422 Testing Methods Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 1-inch 100% No. 40 0-70% No. 200 0-10% The Engineer reserves the right to randomly test for conformance any material that arrives at the site. All costs associated with laboratory testing of the material shall be borne by the Contractor. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS A. In the area that will receive pavement, the Contractor shall strip, remove and dispose of, all concrete and unsuitable material that is not satisfactory for use for landing and ramp rehabilitation. Upon completion of the removal of the unsuitable materials to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall grade the area by cutting and filling as required. Any excess suitable excavated material shall be used for various backfilling operations. No additional payment will be made for re-handling of this material. In the event that during subbase preparation operations additional fill is required to stabilize the subbase and/or to achieve the specified grade, the Engineer will direct the Contractor to import Clean Granular Fill. B. The Engineer will be sole judge in determining if the subbase is acceptable for placement of the subsequent courses. The Contractor shall not continue until he has received approval by the Engineer. DIVISION 2 - Page 6 of 7 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK END OF SECTION 02722- SUBBASE PREPARATION DIVISION 2 - Page 7 of 7 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA, and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION NO. 3 - CONCRETE Included in this Division are the following sections: 03100 Concrete Form Work 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 3 - Page 1 of 7 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORM WORK SCOPE The work under this heading shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all concrete form work, including but not limited to the following: Forms and centering. All forms required for the work in this Section. Setting and building of all anchors, inserts, hangers, supports, ties, frames, bolts, sockets, sleeves, lintels, etc., required to be built into concrete work, except where otherwise specified. FORMS~ CENTERING AND FORM WORK AFFECTING WORKMANSHIP Forms shall conform with the lines, dimensions and shapes of concrete indicaWxl on the Drawings, for the members for which they are provided. They shall be tight to prevent any possibility of movement after concrete is poured and shall insure safety to workmen and the public. On concrete exposed to view, metal ties where used shall be detached 1-inch back from surface of exposed side and holes filled with cement mortar and robbed immediately after removal of forms. Forms for concrete work shall be plywood or composite of smooth line construction, that will produce straight, dense surface free from honeycombs, bulges and depressions. If any material is used to coat formwork to facilitate its removal, this material shall be of such nature as not to stain or injure the concrete or cause injury to finish to be applied on exposed surfaces on concrete. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before reusing. Ail wood form work, including that used in void spaces, pockets and other similar places, shall be removed. Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete has adequately hardened. Care shall be taken to avoid spalling concrete surface. WORK IN CONNECTION WITH OTHER SECTIONS AND/OR CONTRACTS Box out for pipes as directed and fill up to pipe sleeves with concrete after same are in place. B. Build in anchors, inserts or slots as required for proper anchorage. DIVISION 3 - Page 2 of 7 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE C. Set in concrete all sleeves furnished under other sections or contracts, in proper alignment and location. D. Cooperate with other trades. E. Build in concrete all forms furnished by other trades and required to be built into concrete. END OF SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORM WORK DIVISION 3 - Page 3 of 7 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SCOPE The work under this heading shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all concrete reinforcing. SHOP DRAWINGS Complete and accurate shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before any work is executed. Drawings shall show framing plans, details, bending diagrams, sizes and spacing of members, relationship to contiguous work, scale elevations of all reinforced concrete walls, and all other pertinent information. Details shall be in accordance with the A.C.I. mles. Bo Contractor shall submit one black and white print and one reproducible with each submission. Cost of all prints required from the reproducible, including prints required by the Engineer, shall be borne by this Contractor. MATERIALS Ao Deformed reinforced steel shall conform with SPECIFICATIONS FOR NEW BII J F.T-STEEL BARS FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT, ASTM A-615, GRADE 60. Deformations on deformed bars shall conform with SPECIFICATIONS FOR DEFORMATIONS OF DEFORMED STEEL BARS FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT, ASTM A-305. C. Welded wire fabric shall comply with ASTM A-185. PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT Metal supports, ties and spacers for reinforcement shall be rustproof of proper size, and strength to ensure against displacement during pouring operations. For structural slabs placed on ground, provide legs of slab bolsters and continuous high chairs with continuous plates. All reinforcement shall be bent cold. Minimum radius of bend shall be four diameters for bars 5/8 inch round or less, and six diameters for larger bars. C. At intersections, rods shall be securely wired together. Do Contractor shall exercise extreme care to prevent discoloration of exposed concrete surfaces by reinforcement. Ail reinforcement shall be inspected in the forms before concreting starts by the Engineer. Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to any pour. END OF SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT DIVISION 3 - Page 4 of 7 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REFERENCES Except as shown or specified otherwise, the Work of this Section shall conform to the requirements of Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 301-89 of the American Concrete Institute. QUALITY ASSURANCE Concrete batching plant shall be currently approved as a concrete supplier by the New York State Department of Transportation. PROPORTIONING (Amendments to ACI 301. Chaoter 3~: Compressive Strength: Minimum 3500 psi. Weight: Normal weight as indicated, Lightweight Concrete (for floor fills): Air-dry unit weight between 95 and 115 lb/cu ft. Durability: 1. Concrete shall be air-entrained. Design air content shall 'be 6 percent by volume, with an allowable tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent for total air content. Entrained air shall be provided by use of an approved air-entraining admixture. Air-entrained cement shall not be used. Slump: 3000 psi Normal Weight Concrete: Between 2 inches and 3 inches. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures in concrete unless specified or approved in writing by the Engineer. Selection of Proportions: Concrete proportions shall be established on the basis of previous field experience or laboratory trial batches, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer. Proportion mix with a minimum cement content of 564 pounds per cubic yard for 3000 psi concrete and 611 pounds per cubic yard for 4000 psi concrete. REINFORCEMENT (Amendments to ACI 301~ Chapter 5): Bar Reinforcement: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed steel bars. Fabric Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, fabricated into flat sheets unless otherwise indicated. Bar Supports: Galvanized steel or AISI Type 430 stainless steel, and without plastic tips. Tie Wire: Black annealed wire, 16-1/2 gage or heavier. DIVISION 3 - Page 5 of 7 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE PRODUCTION (Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 7) A. Provide ready-mixed concrete, either central-mixed or track-mixed. EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Do not use items of aluminum for mixing, chuting, conveying, forming, or finishing concrete, except magnesium alloy tools may be used for finishing. B. Keep excavations free of water. Do not deposit concrete in water. C. Hardened concrete, reinforcement, forms, and earth which will be in contact with fresh concrete shall be free from frost at the time of concrete placement. D. Prior to placement of concrete, remove all hardened concrete spillage and foreign materials from the space to be occupied by the concrete. FORMWORK (Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 4) A. Chamfer all exposed external corners of concrete. PLACING REINFORCEMENT (Amendments to ACI 30L Chapter 5) A. At the time concrete is placed, reinforcement shall be free of mud, oil, loose mst, loose mill scale, and other materials or coatings that may adversely affect or reduce the bond. PLACING CONCRETE (Amendments to ACI 301~ Chapter 8) A. Operation of truck mixers and agitators and discharge limitations shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94. B. Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4 feet. FINISHING FORMED SURFACES (Amendments to ACI 301~ Chapter 10) A. Finish Schedule: Except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide the finishes below: 1. 2. 3. 4. Rough Form Finish for concrete surfaces not exposed to view. Smooth Form Finish for concrete surfaces exposed to view. Smooth Rubbed Finish for exterior concrete surfaces exposed to view. Grout Cleaned Finish for interior concrete surfaces exposed to view. DIVISION 3 - Page 6 of 7 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE FINISHING SLABS (Amendments to ACI 301~ Chanter A. Slabs On Grade: Provide key type joints unless otherwise shown. Tool exposed joints. B. Finish Schedule: Except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide the finishes below: 1. Broom Finish for exterior slabs. Texture as approved by the Engineer. C. Finishing, General: Provide mo~nolithic finishes on concrete floors and slabs without the addition of mortar or other filler material. Finish surfaces in true planes, true to line, with particular care taken during screeding to maintain an excess of concrete in front of the screed so as to prevent low spots. Screed and darby concrete to tree planes while plastic and before free water rises to the surface. Do not perform finishing operations during the time free water (bleeding) is on the surface. CURING AND PROTECTION (Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 12) A. Maintain concrete surfaces in a moist condition for at least 7 days after placing, except where otherwise indicated. For surfaces of exterior slabs (on grade), apply cberoAcal curing and anti-spalling compound in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. FIF, LD QUALITY CONTROL (Amendments to ACI 301~ Chapter 16) A. The Contractor shall make (2) two test cylinders per truck load of concrete delivered to the site for testing by a testing lab. One sample shall be taken at the start of the pour and the second at the end of the pour. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing the Engineer with the test results of each concrete test cylinder tested at 7 and 14 days for each truck load. LABORATORY TESTS The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and coordinating of all testing. All laboratory costs in establishing the design mix and testing of cylinders shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 3 - Page 7 of 7 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY · GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of thc CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA, and other Contract Documents. Refer to thc Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items, which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04515 Masonry Tuck Pointing SECTION 04515 MASONRY TUCK POINTING 04515-1 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY GENERAL DESCRIPTION This section specifies requirements for tuck pointing of existing brick and interior masonry. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C67-03 .................................... Brick and Structural Clay Tile, Sampling and Testing C216-04 .................................. Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale) C. International Masonry Institute: Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. PRODUCTS TUCK POINTING MORTAR The mortar shall be composed 0lone part Portland cement plus 10 percent, by volume, of hydrated lime and of two pans sand by volume. Hydrated lime shall be in accordance with ASTM C 207, Type N. After the dry material has been thoroughly mixed, water shall be added, and the mixture shall be turned and chopped by hand or mechanical methods until a stiff mortar results. Mortar shall be mixed no more than 30 minutes prior to use. Mortar for pointing shall be mixed in the proportions of one part Portland cement to one pan sand by volume. REPLACEMENT MASONRY UNITS A. Face Brick: 1. ASTM C216, Grade SW, Type FBS. Brick shall be classified slightly effiorescent or better when tested in accordance with ASTM C67. 2. Face brick shall match facing brick of the existing building(s) that is being tuck pointed. B. Other Units to match existing. 04515-2 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY EXECUTION CUT OUT OF EXISTING MORTAR ,JOINTS A. Cut out existing mortar joints (both bed and head joints) and remove by means of a toothing chisel or a special pointer's grinder, to a uniform depth of to 19 mm (3/4-inch), or until sound mortar is reached. Take care to not damage edges of existing masonry units to remain. B. Remove dust and debris from the joints by brushing, blowing with air or rinsing with water. Do not rinse when temperature is below freezing. JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection: Protect newly pointed joints from rain, until pointed joints are sufficiently hard enough to prevent damage. B. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Tuck pointing may be performed in freezing weather when methods of protection are utilized. 2. Comply with applicable sections of "Recommended Practices for Cold Weather Construction" as published by International Masonry Industry All Weather Council. 3. Existing surfaces at temperatures to prevent mortar from freezing or causing other damage to mortar. INSTALLATION OF TUCK POINTING MORTAR A. Immediately prior to application of mortar, dampen joints to be tuck pointed. Prior to application of pointing mortar, allow masonry units to absorb surface water. B. Tightly pack mortar into joints in thin layers, approximately 6 mm (1/4-inch) thick maximum. C. Allow layer to become "thumbprint hard" before applying next layer: D. Pack final layer flush with surfaces of masonry units. When mortar becomes "thumbprint hard", tool joints. TOOLING OF ,JOINTS A. Tool joints with a jointing tool to produce a smooth, compacted, concaved joint. B. Tool joints in patch work with a jointing tool to match the existing surrounding joints. REPLACEMENT OF MASONRY UNITS A. Cut out mortar joints surrounding masonry units that are to be removed and replaced. 04515-3 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 1. Units removed may be broken and removed, providing surrounding units to remain are not damaged. 2. Once the units are removed, carefully chisel out the old mortar and remove dust and debris. 3. If units are located in exterior wythe of a cavity or veneer wall, exercise care to prevent debris falling into cavity. B. Dampen surfaces of the surrounding units before new units are placed. 1. Allow existing masonry to absorb surface moisture prior to starting installation of the new replacement units. 2. Butter contact surfaces of existing masonry and new replacement masonry units with mortar. 3. Center replacement masonry units in opening and press into position. 4. Remove excess mortar with a trowel. 5. Point around replacement masonry units to ensure full head and bed joints. 6. When mortar becomes "thumbprint hard", tool joints. CLEANING A. Clean exposed masonry surfaces on completion. B. Remove mortar droppings and other foreign substances from wail surfaces. C. First wet surfaces with clean water, then wash down with a solution of soapless detergent specially prepared for cleaning brick. D. Brush with stiff fiber brushes while washing, and immediately thereafter hose down with clean water. E. Free clean surfaces from traces of detergent, foreign streaks or stains. Protect materials during cleaning operations including adjoining construction. F. Use of muratic acid for cleaning is prohibited. END OF SECTION 04515 MASONRY TUCK POINTING 04515-4 DIVISION 5 - METALS GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION NO. 5 - METALS Included in this Division is the following Section: 05520 Galvanized Steel Guardrail and Handrail Page 1 of 3 DIVISION 5 - METALS SECTION 05520- GALVANIZED STEEl, HANDRAIL~ REFERENCES Comply with ASTM A 53 for requirements of Schedule 40 piping. Handrails shall comply with current ADA and ANSI standards. DEFINITIONS Height of Handrails: Distance measured from the top of concrete step. 34" to 38" in height. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Complete detailed drawings for each differing instance of handrail, listing all materials required and technical data such as size, weight, and finish, to ensure conformance to specifications. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions for each item specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide complete steel railing system including necessary erection accessories, fittings, and fastenings. B. Posts and rails shall be continuous without splices. STEEL COMPONENTS A. Handrails: 1. Pipe: 1.5 inches OD, 3.65 pounds per linear foot Schedule 40). B. Fasteners (Bolts) No. 316 Stainless Steel FINISHES A. Material: Caswell Inc. or approved equal. Polyurethane Powder Coating. Color: Standard Powder Coating Color, to be selected by Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION Page 2 of 3 DMSION 5 - METALS PREPARATION A. Do not begin installation of fence in areas to be cut until finished grading has been completed. INSTALLATION A. Space posts as indicated on plans. B. Setting Posts: Drill or predrill holes for post footings. Set posts in center of hole and fill hole with concrete. Plumb and align posts. Vibrate or tamp concrete for consolidation. Finish concrete in a dome shape above finish grade elevation to shed water. Install guardralls plumb and level and adjust for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage, as recommended by fence manufacturer. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. Wire brash and repair welded and abraded areas of galvanized surfaces with one coat of cold galvanizing compound. R. Powder coat 2 coats, all surfaces. END OF SECTION 05520- GALVANIZED STEEL HANDRAILS Page 3 of 3 DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTIC GENERAL The work under tl~s Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTIC Included in this Division are the following sections: 06100 Rough Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry DIVISION 6 - Page 1 of 6 DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY SCOPE A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all rough carpentry work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Wood framing, blocking, nailers, and all other rough carpentry required for work under this Section and for other trades. 2. Rough Hardware QUALITY ASSURANCE Ao Lumber grades shall conform to the grading roles of the Association having jurisdiction and shall bear the official grade and trademark of the Inspection Bureau of the Association and a mark of mill identification. Moisture content of rough lumber shall not exceed 19 percent (%). All materials of every kind entering into the construction work herein specified shall be of the best obtainable for the use required. Use only well seasoned lumber of sound stock, free from sap, shakes or any other defects which will impair its strength or appearance. Use lumber D4S free from warp that cannot be corrected in the process of nailing or bolting. DELIVERY~ STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver all lumber and plywood to the site and immediately pile in stacks to insure drainage and free circulation. Cover stacks with tarps or other watertight covering. JOB CONDITIONS Provide and maintain protection during the life of the contract for all materials and work installed under this Section and for other work requiring protection. A. Lumber: 1. Blocking and Nailers: As required for supporting or attaching accessories. 2. Framing: Douglas Fir Standard and Better grade. B. Rough Hardware: DIVISION 6 - Page 2 of 6 DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTIC 1. Provide 10 penny nails or better to secure framing in attic space. INSPECTION Carefully check, verify and compare all dimensions and conditions at the building which affect the size, construction, and installation of items or features provided under this Section with those given on the drawings. Report ail discrepancies and conflicts, including those between different materials or installations to the Architect in writing for correction and adjustment. Coordinate with other trades on details of construction of adjoining installations which have not been completed. INSTALLATION All framing shall be in accordance with details indicated on the drawings. Set framing accurately to required lines and levels. Do all nailing and spiking in a thorough manner using nails of ample sizes to secure framing rigidly in place. Provide any special flaming as required to complete work. Furnish and install all wood grounds and/or furring required for the securing in place of all finished carpentry work, interior wood finish and other items furnished by this or other contractors including trim moldings, shelving, frames, covers, stools, aprons, etc. Install suitable blocking for finish carpentry and similar work wherever necessary to provide proper nailing and fastening at the required lines or levels. END OF SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY DIVISION 6 - Page 3 of 6 DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY QUALITY ASSURANCE Mill and Producer's Label: Each lumber and panel item shall bear label indicating type, grade, mill, and grading agency on unfinished surface, or on end of material with finished surfaces. 1. Panels shall bear APA or equivalent grade-mark; each panel. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store materials and completed fabricated wood items in a dry, well ventilated area completely protected from the weather. Comply with temperature and humidity requirements for storage and installation as specified in the applicable quality standards. Protect sanded and prefinished surfaces during handling and installation. Keep such surfaces covered with polyethylene film or other suitable protective covering. PROspECT CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Maintain constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F. and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent in spaces to receive the Work of this Section. A. Lumber: Kiln-dried to 8 percent average moisture content for interior Work. B. Fastenem: Nails: Size and type to suit application; stainless steel for exterior locations, high humidity locations, treated wood, and wood to receive transparent finishes; plain finish for other interior locations. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws: Medium carbon steel; size and type to suit application; galvanized or stainless steel for exterior locations, high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry; expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete; galvanized steel or stainless steel. STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM Replacement Wood Base Portions of damaged or missing wainscott DMSION 6 - Page 4 of 6 DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTIC C. Replacement Crown, or trim high up on wails: FABRICATION Machine and sand wood surfaces to comply with the requirements of the AWI Quaiity Grade specified. Mill assemble items to largest sizes practicable, to minimize field cutting and jointing. Allow for cutting and fitting where necessary to fit at the Site. EXAMINATION Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate conditions and surfaces upon which finish Work is to be instailed. Do not proceed with finish Work until unsatisfactory substrate conditions are corrected. PREPARATION Condition the Work of this Section to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. INSTALLATION Comply with workmanship and finishing standard requirements of the AW1 Quaiity Grade specified herein. Install the Work plumb, level, and free of distortion. Shim where required, with concealed shims. Cut wood items to fit unless specified to be shop-fabricated, or shop-cut to exact size. Scribe and cut for accurate fit where Work abuts other finish Work. Drill pilot holes at comers before making cutouts. D. Distribute defects to the greatest appearance advantage possible. Trim and Mouldings: Instail in single, unjointed lengths at openings and for runs less than the maximum lumber length available. For long runs, use only 1 piece less than the maximum length available in any straight mn. Stagger joints in adjacent members. Cope mouldings at returns. Miter at comers. Attach the Work securely in place. 1. Nailing: Blind nail where possible. Use finishing nails where exposed. Set nail heads for filling, except for exterior wood scheduled to receive naturai finish (if any). 2. Anchoring: Secure the Work to anchors or to blocking which is built-into or DIVISION 6 - Page 5 of 6 DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTIC directly attached to substrates. CLEANING Clean exposed surfaces of prefinished Work. PROTECTION Protect installed Work from damage by Work of other trades. Maintain temperature and humidity requirements during the construction period in interior installation areas. END OF SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY DIVISION 6 - Page 6 of 6 · DIVISION 7 - THF~RMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDmONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA, and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and contracts for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION NO. 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Included in this Division are the following sections: 07200 Insulation 07620 Flashing & Trim 07920 Sealants & Caulking DIVISION 7 - Page 1 of 12 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07200 - INSULATION SCOPE Rolls and/or blown in R-30 Batt insulation on ceilings. Rigid Insulation Access cover. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1 2 3 4 Preparation instructions and recommendations. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Installation methods, including nailing patterns. Applicable model code authority evaluation report (ICBO, BOCA, CCMC, etc.) DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Do not allow insulation materials to become wet or soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation. Do not deliver flammable insulation materials to the project site more than 2 days ahead of the time of installation. Protect at all times against ignition. Protect insulation materials subject to deterioration by sunlight from exposure to sunlight. Do Complete the installation and concealment of insulation materials as rapidly as possible. PROJECT CONDITIONS Do not proceed with the installation of insulation on walls or under slabs until the Work which follows (and which conceals the insulation) is ready to be performed. Bo Examination of Substrate: Examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation Work is to be performed. Do not proceed with the insulation Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. MATERIALS Ao Rigid Insulation: Extruded polystyrene thermal insulation boards; ASTM C 578, Type IV, manufactured with CFC-free blowing agents. DIVISION 7 - Page 2 of 12 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Bo Aged R-Value: a. 2 Inches Thick: R = 10.8 @ 40 degrees F and 10.0 @ 75 degrees F. 2. Edges and Ends: Square or tongue-and-groove at manufacturer's option. Mineral Fiber Insulation: Glass or other inorganic fibers and resinous binders formed into flexible blankets, batts or rolls; ASTM C 665. 1. R-Value: a. 2-1/2 Inches Nominal Thickness: R = 7.0. b. 3-1/2 or 3-5/8 Inches Nominal Thickness: R = 11.0. c. 6-1/4 or 6-1/2 Inches Nominal Thickness: R = 19.0. d. 7-1/2 Inches Nominal Thickness: R = 22.0. e. 9-1/2 Inches Nominal Thickness: R = 30.0. f. 12 Inches Nominal Thickness: R = 38.0. 2. Type I - Blankets with no membrane covering. 3. Type II, Class C - Blankets with a non-reflective barrier membrane covering one principal face. 4. Type III, Class A - With a reflective barrier membrane covering one principal face. Membrane flame spread rating of 25 or less. 5. Type BI, Class B or C - With a reflective barrier membrane covering one principal face. Membrane flame spread rating greater than 25. Mineral Fiber Insulation (Option 2): Glass or other inorganic fibers and resinous binders formed into flexible blankets, batts or rolls; ASTM C 665. D. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: manufacturer. The type recommended by the insulation MANUFACTURER Ao Batt insulation: Minimum R-30 by Owens Coming or approved equal. Rigid Insulation: 2" by Owens Coming, or approved equal. Caulk Glue for Rigid Insulation approved by insulation manufacturer. INSTALLATION A. Surface Preparation - Remove dust, dirt, grease and other foreign and objectionable material. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and drawing details. 1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage. 2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report DIVISION 7 - Page 3 of 12 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION applicable to location of project. Rigid insulation glued directly to masonry wall. CLEANING A. At completion of work, remove debris caused by installation of furring and insulation. END OF SECTION 07200 - INSULATION DIVISION 7 - Page 4 of 12 DMSION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07620 - FLASHING AND TRIM SCOPE Metal flashings, trim, and related accessories that form terminations and waterproof connections. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications, installation instructions for each item specified except for shop or job formed items, solder, flux, and bituminous coating. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with applicable recommendations, details, and standards of CDA (Copper Development Association Inc.), and SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association) B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: For factory fabricated items, follow the manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions unless specifically shown or specified otherwise. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Make the roof and all uncompleted flashings watertight at the end of each work day. MATERIALS See Section 06600 Plastic Fabrications for all Trim (Fascias, Soffits, Mouldings etc.). A. Flashing 1. Prefinished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 3003-H14 alloy. a. Finish: Fluorocarbon coating (polyvinylidene Fluoride PVDF). Reverse side primed. Shipped with strippable protective tape. b. Color: White. FASTENERS Nails: "Stronghold" type large fiat head roofing nail. Hard aluminum alloy or stainless steel. Screws, Bolts, and Other Fastening Accessories: For Aluminum: Hard aluminum alloy or stainless steel. DIVISION 7 - Page 5 of 12 DMSION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION C. Anchors: Provide one of the following types: Hammer driven anchors, consisting of a stainless steel drive pin and a plastic or corrosion resistant metal expansion shield inserted thru a stainless steel disc with an EPDM sealing washer. Self-tapping, corrosion resistant, concrete and masonry screw inserted thru a stainless steel disc with an EPDM sealing washer. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALq Ao Solder: Composition of block t/n/pig lead of proportion recommended by the metal manufacturer. B. Flux: Paste or acid type as recommended by the metal manufacturer. C. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494. D. Type 2 Sealant: Acrylic Sealant, FS TT-S-00230. Type 3 Sealant: One part butyl robber sealant; Pecora BC-158, PTI 707, or Woodmont Chem-Calk 300. Type 4 Sealant: One part high temperature silicone; Dow Coming Silastic 736 RTV or General Electric RTV 106. G. Thru Wall Flashing Joint Sealant: Trowel grade asphalt roof cement. FABRICATION Where practicable, form and fabricate sheet metal Work in the factory or shop. Produce bends and profiles accurately to the indicated shapes. Where not indicated or specified, follow the applicable requirements of the reference standards listed in PART 1. A. Flashing Pipe thru-Roof: 1. Stainless Steel: 26 ga (.018 inch). B. Eave and Rake Flashing: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Copper: 16 oz. Zinc-Tin Coated Copper: 16 oz. Galvanized Steel: 24 ga (.023 inch). Prefinished Galvanized Steel: 24 ga (.023 inch). Aluminum: .032 inch. Prefinished Aluminum: .032 inch. DIVISION 7 - Page 6 of 12 · DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION C. Door and Window Flashing: Copper: 10 oz. Stainless Steel: 30 ga (.012 inch). Aluminum: .032 inch. D. Continuous Edge Strip: Copper: 20 oz. Galvanized Steel: 24 ga (.023 inch). Aluminum: .040 inch. INSTALLATION A. Isolation: Separate dissimilar metals from each other with bituminous coating. B. Tinning and Soldering: Remove ail factory applied finishes to bare metal at all areas to be soldered. Clean, flux and tin all surfaces to be soldered. Sweat solder thoroughly into seams, completely filling the seam for the full width. Upon completion of soldering, remove all traces of flux residue, and if required, apply a neutralizing wash followed by a clean water wash. Touch-Up Painting: After all prefinished galvanized steel flashings have been installed, apply the metal coating manufacturer's touch-up paint to all soldered areas and all other areas where the finish has been damaged. D. Installing Pipe Flashing: Extend the base flashing a minimum of 5 inches onto the roof surface. Terminate the bottom exposed edge with a 1/2 inch folded seam. Solder the base flashing to the tube flashing. Install the flashing after the course of shingles immediately below the pipe is installed so that the bottom side of the flashing is over the shingle and the sides and top are beneath the shingles. Nail the top and sides of the flashing only. Provide a cap flashing fabricated to slip over the tube flashing and the pipe. Lap the tube flashing a minimum of 3 inches and the pipe a minimum of one inch. Solder all seams. E. Door and Window Flashing: DIVISION 7 - Page 7 of 12 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 1. Install the flashing in one continuous length from side to side. END OF SECTION 07620 - FLASHING AND TRIM DIVISION 7 - Page 8 of 12 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS WORK INCLUDED Caulking of exterior joints formed by the intersection of different materials, such as masomy and concrete, masomy and metal, wood with masonry or metal, and adjacent dissimilar materials. B. Caulking of joints at heads, jambs and sills of door frames and windows. C. All other caulking where indicated on Drawings or required by building conditions. DELIVERY Materials delivered to the job site shall bear the quality label and the name or Ixademark of the approved manufacturer; shall be new, unopened and from fresh stock, and shall be the same products and manufacture as approved. Caulking tubes shall bear label indicating conformance to referenced Federal Specifications. MATERIALS Caulking compound for general exterior application shall be "Tremco's Dymeric", a two- part polytremdyne polymer sealant conforming to Federal Specifications TT-S-00227E as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Co., Cleveland, Ohio. Approved equivalent items of the following manufacturers any be provided: Pecora Chemical Corp., Harleysville, Pa. or Products Research and Chemical Corp., Burbank California. Caulking compound for general interior application shall be "Tremco"s CauLking Compound" an oleo-resinous caulking compound conforming to Federal Specifications TT-C598B as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Co., Cleveland, Ohio. Approved equivalent items of the following manufacturers may be provided: Pecora Chemical Corp., Harleysville, Pa., or Products Research and Chemical Corp., Burbank, California. C. Colors of Caulking Compound - As selected by the Engineer. Primer - A quick drying, non-staining liquid as recommended by the caulking compound manufacturer. Primer shall be used in all installations unless the caulking manufacturer specifically states otherwise. Back-up (Packing) Material - Polyethylene foam or hollow tubing or other approved non-staining material. INSTALLATION DIVISION 7 - Page 9 of 12 DMSION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Ao Bo Surface Preparation - Remove dust, dirt, grease and other foreign and objectionable material. Application of Caulk Joints deeper than 1/2" shall have backing material installed to within 1/4" of the face of the joint. Apply caulking compound under sufficient pressure to force out all air and to completely fill the joints, using a caulking gun with nozzles of widths as necessary to fit the various joints, except in locations where knife application is necessary. Tool joints to a neat and smooth bead of uniform width, finishing flush with adjoining surfaces or tool to a concave profile. Upon completion of caulking, jo'mts not completely filled shall have caulk roughened and then the joint shall be properly filled and tooled. 5. Adjacent surfaces soiled by caulking operations shall be cleaned immediately. END OF SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS DIVISION 7 - Page 10 of 12 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA, and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION NO. 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Included in this Division are the following sections: 08255 FRP Flush Doors 08710 Finish Hardware 08000 Glazing DIVISION 8 - Page ! of 12 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08255 - FRP FLUSH DOORS SUMMARY OF MATERIALS B. C. D. E. Door Construction: FRP with Half Lite Vision Panel Side light with 10" bottom rail, tempered glass Retrofit in existing frame to remain Push, Pull, Continuous Hinge Hardware available from FRP door manufacturer Other Hardware (See Hardware Spec Section) STANDARDS (OF DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION) A. Door Construction: 2. 3. 4. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. Stiles and Rails: Aluminum Alloy 6063-T5, minimum of 2-5/16-inch depth. Comers: Mitered. Provide joinery of 3/8-inch diameter full-width tie rods through extruded splines top and bottom as standard tubular shaped stiles and rails reinforced to accept hardware as specified. Securing Internal Door Extrusions: 3/16-inch angle blocks and locking hex nuts for joinery. Welds, glue, or other methods are not acceptable. Furnish extruded stiles and rails with integral reglets to accept face sheets. Lock face sheets into place to permit flush appearance. Rail caps or other face sheet capture methods are not acceptable. Extrude top and bottom rail legs for interlocking continuous weather bar. Meeting Stiles: Pile brash weatherseals. Extrude meeting stile to include integral pocket to accept pile brush weatherseals. Bottom of Door: Install bottom weather bar with nylon brush weatherstripping into extruded interlocking edge of bottom rail. Glue: Use of glue to bond sheet to core or extrusions is not acceptable. B. Face Sheet: Material: SpecLite Sandstone Textured FRP, 0.120-inch thickness, finish color throughout. Abuse-resistant engineered surface. Texture: Sandstone. Color: White. E. Core: Material: Poured-in-place polyurethane foam. Density: Minimum of 5 pounds per cubic foot. R-Value: Minimum of 9. DIVISION 8 - Page 2 of 12 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Go Cutouts: 1. Manufacture doors with cutouts for required vision lites, louvers, and panels. .2. Factory install vision lites, louvers, and panels. Vision Panel on Door: Half Lite kit on door with Va" on 1 ~A" muntins. Hardware: 1. Push and (SL 86 Flush) Pull Bars by Special-Lite or approved equal. 2. See hardware schedule below. Frames - Capping System Special-Lite SL-70, used with 10-30 Series Insert Frame. Sidelite: 1 ~A" x 4 V2" frame SL45 with 10" bottom rail by Special Lite or approved equal MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: 1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221. 2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 3. Alloy and Temper: As required by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, application of required finish, and control of color. 4. Color by Owner. B. Components: 1. Door and frame components from same manufacturer. 2. Louvers: Aluminum, inverted Y-type, fixed blade, 12 inches minimum from bottom of door. C. Fasteners: 1. Material: Aluminum, 18-8 stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal. 2. Compatibility: Compatible with items to be fastened. 3. Exposed Fasteners: Screws with finish matching items to be fastened. FABRICATION A. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, and profile requirements shall be as indicated on the Drawings. DIVISION 8 - Page 3 of 12 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Co Fo Coordination of Fabrication: Field measure before fabrication and show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Assembly: Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal before assembly. Remove burrs from cut edges. Welding: Welding of doors or frames is not acceptable. Fit: Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Secure attachments and support at mechanical joints with hairline fit at contacting members. Maximum Clearance 1. Top rail and hinge stile: 1/16" 2. Lock stile: 1/8" 3. Floor and saddle: 1/4" INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE A. GENERAL All finishing hardware specified in the Section 08710 of this specification entitled "Finish Hardware" shall be received, accounted for, stored and applied under this Section. Hardware shall be sorted and stored in space assigned by Contractor and shall be kept at all times under lock and key. The safety and preservation of all items delivered will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Hardware shall be carefully fitted and securely attached, in accordance with these specifications and the instructions of the various manufacturers. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware" by NBHA unless otherwise noted on Drawings. (See Door Type elevations in the Drawings.) Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish DIVISION 8 - Page 4 of 12 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS application. After completion of the finishes, re-install each item. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and tree to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. o Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered comers and hair-line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, if any. All keys used shall be constmction keys which are to be tagged with fiber discs as approved, clearly labeled with identifying inscriptions and then neatly arranged in a temporary cabinet. All construction keys shall be returned to the Owner. B. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite-type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. Final adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and re-lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION A. CLEAN-UP At regular intervals during the course of the work, all debris and excess material shall be cleaned up and removed from the site. Upon completion of installation, clean all spaces of debris caused by woodwork installation. B. PROTECTION Protect all woodwork hardware, doors and frames and finish accessories from marring, defacement or other damage until final completion and acceptance of the project by the Owner. Repair or replace all defective units prior to final inspection DIVISION 8 - Page 5 of 12 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA, and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION NO. 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Included in this Division are the following sections: 08255 FRP Flush Doors 08710 Finish Hardware 08000 Glazing DIVISION 8 - Page 1 of 13 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08255 - FRP FLUSH DOORS SUMMARY OF MATERIAL~ B. C. D. E. Door Construction: FRP with Half Lite Vision Panel Side light with 10" bottom rail, tempered glass Retrofit in existing frame to remain Push, Pull, Continuous Hinge Hardware available from FRP door manufacturer Other Hardware (See Hardware Spec Section) STANDARDS (OF DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION) A. Door Construction: 1. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Stiles and Rails: Aluminum Alloy 6063-T5, minimum of 2-5/16-inch depth. 3. Corners: Mitered. 4. Provide joinery of 3/8-inch diameter full-width tie rods through extruded splines top and bottom as standard tubular shaped stiles and rails reinforced to accept hardware as specified. 5. Securing Internal Door Extrusions: 3/16-inch angle blocks and locking hex nuts for joinery. Welds, glue, or other methods are not acceptable. 6. Furnish extruded stiles and rails with integral reglets to accept face sheets. Lock face sheets into place to permit flush appearance. 7. Rail caps or other face sheet capture methods are not acceptable. 8. Extrude top and bottom rail legs for interlocking continuous weather bar. 9. Meeting Stiles: Pile brush weatherseais. Extrude meeting stile to include integral pocket to accept pile brush weatherseals. 10. Bottom of Door: Install bottom weather bar with nylon brush weatherstripping into extruded interlocking edge of bottom rail. 11. Glue: Use of glue to bond sheet to core or extrusions is not acceptable. Face Sheet: Material: SpecLite Sandstone Textured FRP, 0.120-inch thickness, finish color throughout. Abuse-resistant engineered surface. Texture: Sandstone. Color: White. Core: Material: Poured-in-place polyurethane foam. Density: Minimum of 5 pounds per cubic foot. R-Value: Minimum of 9. DIVISION 8 - Page 2 of 13 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Cutouts: 1. Manufacture doors with cutouts for required vision lites, louvers, and panels. 2. Factory install vision lites, louvers, and panels. Vision Panel on Door: Half Lite kit on door with V:" on 1 W' muntins. Ho Hardware: 1. Push and (SL 86 Flush) Pull Bars by Special-Lite or approved equal. 2. See hardware schedule below. Frames - Capping System Special-Lite SL-70, used with 10-30 Series Insert Frame. Sidelite: 1 aA" x 4 V:" frame SL45 with 10" bottom rail by Special Lite or approved equal MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: Extrusions: ASTM B 221. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. Alloy and Temper: As required by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, application of required finish, and control of color. Color by Owner. B. Components: Door and frame components from same manufacturer. Louvers: Aluminum, inverted Y-type, fixed blade, 12 inches minimum from bottom of door. C. Fasteners: Material: Aluminum, 18-8 stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal. Compatibility: Compatible with items to be fastened. Exposed Fasteners: Screws with finish matching items to be fastened. FABRICATION Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, and profile requirements shall be as indicated on the Drawings. DIVISION 8 - Page 3 of 13 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Coordination of Fabrication: Field measure before fabrication and show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Assembly: 1. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal before assembly. 2. Remove burrs from cut edges. Welding: Welding of doors or frames is not acceptable. Fit: Fo Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Secure attachments and support at mechanical joints with hairline fit at contacting members. Maximum Clearance 1. Top rail and hinge stile: 1/16" 2. Lock stile: 1/8" 3. Floor and saddle: 1/4" INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARI~, A. GENERAL All finishing hardware specified in the Section 08710 of this specification entitled "Finish Hardware" shall be received, accounted for, stored and applied under this Section. Hardware shall be sorted and stored in space assigned by Contractor and shall be kept at all times under lock and key. The safety and preservation of all items delivered will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Hardware shall be carefully fitted and securely attached, in accordance with these specifications and the instructions of the various manufacturers. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware" by NBHA unless otherwise noted on Drawings. (See Door Type elevations in the Drawings.) Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish DIVISION 8 - Page 4 of 13 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS application. After completion of the finishes, m-install each item. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinfome the attachment substrate as neceSsary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. o Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frmnes, with mitered comers and hair-line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, if any. All keys used shall be construction keys which are to be tagged with fiber discs as approved, clearly labeled with identifying inscriptions and then neatly arranged in a temporary cabinet. All construction keys shall be returned to the Owner. B. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite-type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. Final adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made mom than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, tatum to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and m-lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. CLEAN UPANDPROTECTION A. CLEAN-UP At regular intervals during the course of the work, all debris and excess material shall be cleaned up and removed from the site. Upon completion of installation, clean all spaces of debris caused by woodwork installation. B. PROTECTION Protect all woodwork hardware, doors and frames and finish accessories from marring, defacement or other damage until final completion and acceptance of the project by the Owner. Repair or replace all defective units prior to final inspection DIVISION 8 - Page 5 of 13 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS as directed by the Architect. Any units that cannot be satisfactorily repaired in the opinion of the Architect shall be replaced with new units of same original design, at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 08255 - FPP FLUSH DOORS DIVISION 8 - Page 6 of 13 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08710 -FINISH HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Furnishing ail labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete ail work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Finish Hardware 2. Weatherstripping 3. Door Saddles QUALITY ASSURANCE Hardware shail conform to Federal Specification FF-H-106, FF-H-116 latest edition. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's latest printed literature on materiais specified herein. Obtain approvai before materials are delivered to thc job site. B. Samples: Submit samples in accordance with the Contract Conditions for the various pieces of hardware required. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver hardware and specialty items in ample time to facilitate thc work of this section. GUARANTEE Furnish to the Owner a written guarantee signed by an authorized officiai of the various suppliers for a period of two (2) years as evidenced by the date of final payment. All hardware shall be guaranteed against faulty workmanship and finish and to satisfactorily perform the functions required at the various places. PRODUCTS A. Hinges, lock and latch sets, door closers, holders, push and pull protective plates, exit devices, door stops and flush bolts, shail be as indicated in the "Hardware Schedule". B. Code Requirements: Hardware for rated doors and doors indicated as labeled shall conform to applicable requirements of the Building Code. C. Door Silencers: All door frames, except gasketed frames, shail be furnished with three silencers for single doors and four for head of frame for pair of doors. DIVISION 8 - Page 7 of 13 DMSION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Anchorage Devices: Exposed parts of screws and bolts shall be finished same as hardware they secure. Plates shall be secured with Phillips slot screws. Concealed devices shall be on non-ferrous metal, galvanized steel or stainless steel. Templates: Furnish suitable templates, together with the approved schedule to the respective trades, as required. Packing and Marking: Each item of hardware shall have fastening devices, key and instructions included in the same package as the hardware. Each package shall be properly labeled indicating contents and the part of the work for which intended. Labels shall include a marketing corresponding to equivalent designation on the approved hardware schedule. Go Hardware Requiring Shop Installation: Shall be delivered to the proper Contractor in sufficient time so as not to delay the progress of the work. Protection: Wrappings furnished by the manufacturers on knobs, handles, protective plates, kick plates, push plates and pulls, shall be of adhesive-coated paper, of a type easily removed without marring the finish of the hardware. Field Checks: The Contractor shall make periodic checks during installation of finish hardware to ascertain the correctness of the installation. After completion of the work, he shall certify, in writing, that all items of finish hardware have been installed, adjusted and are functioning in accordance with the specification requirements. Finished hardware shall include but not be limited to: butts lock and latch sets, rosettes, escutcheons, push plates, pulls, door mutes; 3 for single doors, closers, stops, holders and all other items necessary to make a complete job. Doors shall have 1-1/2 pair of butts per door minimum. All hardware for labeled doors shall conform to the requirements for labeled doors of the class as shown whether herein specified or not. C. Finished: 1. US26D Satin Chrome D. Keying Constmction Master Key System shall be provided for all locks during construction. Construction master key system shall be changed over to the building master key system upon completion of the work. DIVISION 8 - Page 8 of 13 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Keying System: The Contractor will consult with the Owner to ascertain the specified requirements for individual keying, master keying and grand master keying. Within 30 days of receipt of such information, prepare and submit a keying chart for the Owner's approval. Keys Formed of nickel silver, with change number and key control symbol stamped, thereon. Forward master keys and grand master key by registered mail, in safety envelopes, to the Owner. Furnish keys as follows, except as otherwise requested by the Owner. 1) Individual lock setting ........... 2 keys each 2) Master key setting .................. 3 keys each 3) Blanks .................................... 25 extra 4) Grand master key setting ......... 1 key MANUFACTURER A. Butts B. Locks and Cylinders C. Closers D. Overhead Stops E. Stops and Bumpers F. Exit Devices G. Kick, Mop and Armor Plates H. Push and Pulls I. Silencers J. Key Cabinet K. Thresholds & Weatherstripping INSTALLATION A. Stanley, Hager, Lawrence, McKinney Sargent, Best L.C.N., Sargent Ives, Rockwood Mfg. Ives, Rockwood Mfg. Von Duprin, Sargent, Adams Rite Rockwood Mfg., Ives Rockwood Mfg., Ives Ives, Rockwood Mfg. Telkee Pemko, Zero, National Guard Install door saddles full width of door opening scribed to frame, set in bed of caulking DIVISION 8 - Page 9 of 13 DMSION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS compound and anchored with 3/8" white bronze flush head expansion bolts 12" o.c. Provide removable cover plates of matching design where floor hinges occur. Install door weatherstripping at head and jambs with No. 8 stainless steel flat head machine screws 12" o.c. Finish Hardware Receive, store and distribute all finishing hardware and assume the responsibility for its safety. Leave the protection wrapped around pieces of hardware as it is installed, properly maintain until the final completion of the building. Do not install finishing hardware in the building until all wet work had been fully completed and dry. Apply hardware not only to the work furnished under this Section but fit and adjust to work furnished under other Sections. Accurately fit and secure hardware in place, adjust to operate perfectly and free from scratches and/or other defacement. Assume responsibility for the condition and operation of all finished hardware until the issuance of the Certificate of Final Acceptance or until the building is occupied, whichever event is sooner. Face hardware shall, after being fitted, be removed before the woodwork finish or painting is applied. Immediately prior to completion of all work, go over the entire building with the Architect and see that each piece of hardware is undamaged, in perfect working order and that the proper key for the lock in question is identified. Properly tag and identify all keys and mm over to the hardware supplier, for filing by him in the key cabinet. ADJUST AND CLEAN At time of completion of the work, the Contractor shall clean and adjust all hardware and replace any damaged parts. Setting Up: The hardware supplier shall gather together all keys and data concerning them and shall perform the actual work of setting up and putting into operation the complete key control system for the entire project. All keys shall be properly tagged, indexed and filed in the key cabinet in accord with the instructions of the manufacturer of the lock sets and as approved by the Architect. Keys shall be tumed over to the Architect, DIVISION 8 - Page 10 of 13 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS who will issue a receipt for same. SCHEDULE Ao For any doors which may be indicated on the drawings but not mentioned in the DOOR and HARDWARE SCHEDULE listed hereafter, hardware of the same kind, quality and function as that scheduled for similar proposed door shall be provided. HARDWARE SET - ALL DOORS 4. 5. 6. 7. Hinges: SL-11 Continuous Hinge by Special-Lite. Door Closer: (1) LCN overhead 4041 Series Alum. finish w! Hold-Open arm & metal cover. Push / Pull Plates: 1- Built in SL-86 Pull by Special Lite (Exterior) with Special Lite push plate. Panic Device: Von Dupren Rim Device XP-98/99 Deadbolt: (1) Sargent 4870 above Push/Pull Plates Silencers: (3) Ives SR65 Wall Stop: (I) Ives 409 Threshold: Pemko Extruded aluminum low profile (ADA compliant) END OF SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE DIVISION 8 - Page 11 of 13 DIVISION 8 ~ DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08800 GLAZING DESCRIPTION Furnishing ail labor, materiais, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete ail work including, but not limited to, the following: Tempered Glass OUALITY ASSURANCE All materiais shail be free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance and shall be of the best quaiity for the purpose specified. B. Glass shail meet Federai Specification DD-G-45 l d. C. Glazing compound shail meet Federai Specification TT-G-410. SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples in accordance with the Generai Conditions, as requested by the Architect. DELIVERY~ STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to job site in ample time to facilitate the work of this section. B. Store ail glass with due care to prevent breakage. ,][OB CONDITIONS A. Protect all glass on the project before, during, and after installation. MATERIALS Tempered Glass: Type 1-Primary Glass (anneaied float) Class 1 Transparent (Restrooms) and Transparent (West room); Quaiity q-5 Glazing B; heat strengthened by manufacturer's standard process (after cutting to finai size) to achieve a flexurai strength of 4 times normal glass strength. Provide with MANUFACTURER'S SEAL INSCRIBED ON EACH LIGHT, 1/4" thick except as otherwise indicated. B. Butt Glazing Compound: Silicone sealant. Co Glazing Gaskets: Preformed glazing gaskets formulated of a neoprene compound conforming to the requirements of ASTM C542. Gaskets shail be as detailed on the drawings and shall be as manufactured by the Standard Products Co. DIVISION 8 - Page 12 of 13 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS D. Glazing Compound: "Dap 1012" as by Dap Inc. or approved equal. Joint cleaner, primer and sealer: Recommended by the manufacturer of the primary glazing material for each specific use. F. All other materials herein specified. MANUFACTURER Unless otherwise noted above, provide products manufactured by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co., Libby-Owens and Ford Glass Co. or A.F.G. Industries, Inc. INSPECTION Examine conditions and be responsible for the proper arrangement and fit of the work. Correct discrepancies prior to proceeding with the work of this section. INSTALLATION Perform all work using mechanics skilled in their trade and execute work in a first class manner. Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam the edges. C. Cut and set sheet window glass with waves running horizontally. Set smooth surfaces of figured glass on the outside for exterior openings and on the corridor side for interior openings. Obtain and verify all measurements and size of work, accept responsibility for the correct and accurate fit of all work. Well bed and back putty glass and carefully remove all surplus glazing compound from doors, sash and adjoining work while still fresh. Finish glazing compound in tree, even lines, neat and smooth faced. ADJUST AND CLEAN Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections, replace and clean all damaged or broken glass before leaving project. END OF SECTION 08800 GLAZING DIVISION 8 - Page 13 of 13 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION NO. 9 - FINISHES Included in this Division are the following sections: 09250 Gypsum Board 09310 Ceramic Tile 09680 Carpet 09912 Painting DIVISION 9 - Page 1 of 13 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 092~0 - GYPSUM BOARD SCOPE Furnish ail labor, materiais, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete ail gypsum drywail work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Type X Gypsum Board 2. Tape & Spackle 3. Trim and Accessories DELIVERY~ STORAGE AND HANDLING Store ail materials in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. Remove damaged or deteriorated materiais from the premises. JOB CONDITIONS In cold weather and during the period of gypsum board application and joint finishing, maintain within the building a uniform temperature within the range of 55° F to 70° F. Provide adequate ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture within the building during this same period. MATERIALS Type X Gypsum Wail Board: As required, 5/8" thick unless otherwise noted, 48" wide in lengths as long as practicai to minimize number of joints. Fasteners: Type S Bugle head screws. Lengths as recommended by manufacturer for the various panel thicknesses. C. Comer Bead: Dur-A-Bead No. 103 Joint System: USG Perf-A-Tape Reinforcing Tape, with USG Ready-mixed Joint Compound All Purpose F. Other materials hereinafter specified. MANUFACTURE Above listed materiais are manufactured by U.S. Gypsum. Equivalent products of Nationai Gypsum or Georgia Pacific will be accepted. END OF SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD DIVISION 9 - Page 2 of 13 DMSION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE SCOPE Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all ceramic tile work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Partial Replacement of Floor tiles in bathrooms. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for each of the following: 1. Ceramic Tile B. Samples: Tile and Grout: Each type and color required; 6 x 6 inch sample with tile mounted on braced cement backer board and grouted. Samples: a. White background with black accent basketweave pattern. C. Quality Control Submittals: Tile Grade Certificates: Furnish tile manufacturer's Master Grade Certificate bearing the manufacturer's certification for each shipment, type and composition of tile. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed. Set and grout tile when ambient temperature is 50 degrees or higher and humidity conditions are being maintained. All work to meet material manufacturer's recommendations. MAINTENANCE Extra Materials: Furnish extra tile, equal to 3 percent of the tile installed, of each type, DMSION 9 - Page 3 of 13 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES composition, pattern, size and color of tile required. Also furnish a proportionate number of trim units. Place extra materials packaged with protective covering in storage at the site where directed. TILE A. Manufacturer: 1. Nemo or approved equal Floor - UNGLAZED BASKET WEAVE PORCELAIN MOSAIC: 1" x 2" White background with V2" x V2" (or 3/8" x 3/8") black accent basketweave pattern by Nemo or approved equal. PHOTO AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch. Face: Plain with sharpedges. SETTING MATERIALS Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. Mortar Materials- Thin Set Beds Portland Cement With Latex Additive; Thin-Set a. Description: Latex additive and site mixed Portland cement mortar. Complying with ANSI A118.4. b. Quantity: As recommended by latex additive manufacturer. c. Acceptable Products: 1. CustomCrete Latex Mortar Admix with site mixed Mortar or CmteMix Mortar by Custom Building Products. 2. 4237 Latex Thin set Mortar Additive by Laticrete. 3. Keracrete System consisting of KER 303 Latex mixed with 1:1 sand/cement blend by Mapei. 2. Dryset and Polymer Additive: Description: Two component system; factory prepared second generation high bond strength dry-set mortar and liquid polymer additive; complying with ANSI A118.4. Acceptable Products: MasterBlend Thin-Set Mortar mixed with CustomFlex Ultra- Strength Thin-Set Additive by Custom Building Products. MasterBlend Thin-Set Mortar mixed with Acrylic Mortar Admix by Custom Building Products. DIVISION 9 - Page 4 of 13 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 3) 4) 5) 6) VersaBond Bonding Mortar (Dry Polymer) by Custom Building Products. FlexBond Premium Flexible Bonding Mortar (Dry Polymer) by Custom Building Products. 4237 Latex Thinset Mortar Additive mixed with 211 Crete Filler Powder by Laticrete. 3701 Mortar Admix mixed with premium floor and thin set by Laticrete. GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex Portland Cement complying with ANSI A 108.1A, lB, 4, 5, and 7. Colors: As selected by the Engineer from grout manufacturer's standard range of colors. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed file. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A 108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. B. Protection: Protect adjacent surfaces before tile work begins. Cleaning: Clean substrate surfaces in accordance with applicable reference standards and manufacturer's installation instructions. ADJUSTING Check the tile work installation. Remove defective tile and install new tile. Leave finished installation free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. DMSION 9 - Page 5 of 13 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES CLEANING On completion of placement and grouting, clean ail ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Comply with grouting specifications and with grout manufacturer's printed instructions for materials and method. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metai surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. B. Clean and polish marble door thresholds. Remove stains and other defacement. PROTECTION Apply heavy kraft paper, or other approved heavy protective covering, masked in place over tile work to prevent staining, damage, and wear. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic on newly tiled areas for seven days after completion of installation. Before finai inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutrai cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE DIVISION 9 - Page 6 of 13 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09680 - CARPET WORK INCLUDED Furnish ail labor, materiais, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all instailation of new carpet and accessories. SUBMITTALS Submit to the Architect for written approvai, samples of materials proposed for use under this section. Instailed work shail conform exactly to approved samples. B. Submit the following samples: Submit three (3) carpet samples of at least 24" x 24" in size of each color selected by the Town for approval. These samples will be retained by the Architect for the purpose of evaluating the quaiity of the carpet delivered to the project. Any carpet manufactured for the project which is not at least equai to the quaiity of the sample retained will be rejected. 2. Obtain approval before materiais are delivered to the job site. Product Data: Copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for materials specified herein shail be submitted. JOB CONDITIONS Maintain temperatures in all rooms and/or spaces receiving carpet at 70F minimum for 24 hours before and during time of installation. Keep spaces where carpet has been laid well ventilated. GUARANTEE Pile Yam: Shail have five year wear guarantee from date of installation, provided recommended maintenance procedures are substantiaily followed. Should any of the pile yam show raveling or substantial wear within the five year period, the worn areas shail be promptly replaced with the same quality, color and pattern, without cost to the Owner. Backing: Synthetic/Jute shall be guaranteed for the life of the carpet, under the same provisions specified in Paragraph A. above. MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE A. Carpet shall be broadloom type color as per Architect DIVISION 9 - Page 7 of 13 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Ho Manufacturer: Blue Ridge Commercial Carpet or approved equal Description: 1. Face Yam: 2. Construction: 3. Backing: 4. Yam Weight: 5. Gauge: 6. Pile Height: 7. Stitches Per Inch: 8. Dye System: 9. Roll Width: 10. Density Factor: 11. Traffic Class 100% Nylon containing recycled content & treated with a stain protector and soil repellent. Minimum 3/4" stepover stitch. 100% Synthetic 28 oz. per sq. yd. 1/8" 0.120" 8 Solution Dyed 12'-0" 8400 Extra heavy commercial Fire Test Performance: 1. Rating: Class A (1) 2. Flame Spread: ASTM E 648 3. Smoke Density: 450 or less, ASTM E 662 All materials shall be new and of "first" quality and from the same dye lot. Chevroning or line-up of color will be considered a manufacturing defect and will not be acceptable. Scrouped yam will be considered a manufacturing defect and will not be acceptable. Only first quality carpeting will be accepted. Adhesive for Carpet: Release-type adhesive as recommended by the carpet manufacturer, which will allow removal without damage to the carpet; Henry #43 Contact Carpet Cement. Carpet Reducing Strip: Vinyl 1/4"x 1-1/4" bevel as manufactured by Mercer Plastic Co. Inc. or approved equal. Colors as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. Miscellaneous: Provide the type of seaming tape, thread, nails and other accessory items recommended by the carpet manufacturer and installer for the conditions of installation and use, without failure during the life of the carpet. INSPECTION Prior to insttilling carpet, inspect surfaces to receive carpet and notify Architect in writing of any serious defects or conditions that will interfere with or prevent a satisfactory carpet DIVISION 9 - Page 8 of 13 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES installation. PREPARATION Sub-floors shall be free of dust, oils, alkali, paint, grease, or other foreign matter, and shall be broom-clean. Sub-floors shall be level. Sub-floors are not considered acceptable when plane of surface varies more than 1/8" in any 6'-0" distance, or more than 1/16" in any F-fi' distance. Remove projections from sub-floors too rough for direct application of carpeting. Prime depressions with emulsified asphalt thinned to brushing consistency. Fill depressions with mixture of 1 part high early cement, 2 parts sand, 1 part emulsified asphalt tempered with water to a plastic mortar as dry as can be placed. Level as required and allow to dry hard. Contractor shall ascertain that previously applied curing compounds and existing surface conditions will have no detrimental effect upon installation of the work of this section. Do not proceed with installation until such defects or conditions have been corrected. The starting of installation shall imply acceptance of the surfaces to receive carpet. Do not begin work until the work of other trades, including prime coat of painting, has been completed. Do work before final painting is executed. Treat by priming or other means, cement surfaces showing suction or other conditions that prevent bonding. INSTALLATION Contractor shall visit the site and take all measurements and plan the layout of carpeting and seam location. Broadloom shall be free of excessive seams and necessary seams shall be carefully and properly done, as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Install carpet wall to wall, using continuous lengths and as broad widths as possible. Cut edges shall be tree and appropriately treated to form unravelling joints where exposed. Co Carpet shall mn under open bottom items such as heating convectors so that at no point shall the termination of the carpet be visible. Carpet shall be installed tight against columns, walls, and cabinets so that all portions of the floor area are covered with carpet. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly followed in locating seams. Cross seams will not be permitted except where long dimension of room exceeds normal carpet length. No seams are to occur at doorways and entries or perpendicular to DIVISION 9 - Page 9 of 13 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES doorways and entries. Seams occurring at doors, parallel to doors, shall be centered directly under door. Seams occurring at change of direction in corridors shall follow the wall line parallel to carpet direction. Make seams so pile of adjoining pieces has the same directional mn so as to be practically invisible. Fo Apply adhesive, and release agent, if any, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt carpet seams and edges tightly together, eliminate air pockets, and roll to ensure uniform bond everywhere. CLEANING AND ADJUSTING Any soiled spots or excessive adhesive on the carpet shall be removed with the proper spot remover. Upon completion of the installation of carpet remove protective paper and thoroughly vacuum, using an upright, beater type cleaner, and left in clean perfect condition, as approved by the Architect. C. All face pieces of loose yam shall be removed with a sharp scissors. All excess pieces of usable carpet shall be packaged in appropriate wrapping, labeled and delivered to the Owner at the job site. Contractor to be responsible for any repairs required to building interior or exterior resulting from delivery, movement or installation of carpeting. MAINTENANCE Contact information: www.blueridgecarpet.com/products/manuals.html END OF SECTION 09680 - CARPET DIVISION 9 - Page 10 of 13 DMSION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09912 - PAINTING SCOPE Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete ail interior painting including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Walls 2. Millwork 3. Exposed concrete floors 4. Exterior Trim APPROVED PAINT MANUFACTURERS 1. Benjamin Moore & Company 2. The Glidden Company 3. Sherwin-Williams Company 4. Or approved equal PAINT MATERIALS A. All finish paint colors used shail be as selected by the Owner and or Engineer / Architect. B. Contractor to supply and install the following: 1. Benjamin Moore Eco Sped Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel 2. Benjamin Moore Eco Sped Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 3. Benjamin Moore Latex Floor & Patio Enamel EXTRA MATERIALS A. Amount: Upon completion of the work of this section, deliver to the Owner an extra 2 gallons of each color, type, and gloss of paint used on the work. B. Packaging: Tightly seai each container and clearly label with the contents and location used. DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materiais to the job site in originai containers and packages bearing the manufacturer's name, type and brand. Paints shail be delivered ready-mixed except as otherwise approved. B. Store materials and equipment used on the job in a single designated space. Keep storage area neat and clean and floors adequately protected from paint spillage. Place cloths and cotton waste which might constitute a fire hazard in metal containers; remove DIVISION 9 - Page 11 of 13 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES at the end of each work day. PREPARATION Ao General ~ Surfaces to receive paint shall be clean, dry and free of all matter which will affect adhesion of paint or appearance of finished surfaces. Paint Removal: Contractor to remove ail layers of existing paint on ail surfaces to receive new paint as shown on the contract drawings. Paint layers to be removed using the "Peel-Away" products or equal by Dumond Chemicals. Contractor to follow manufacturer recommendations for the various surfaces. Co Fixtures: Remove lighting fixtures, canopies, switch plates, receptacle plates and the like before painting adjacent surfaces; replace after painting. Protect flush type fixtures. D. Protection of Adjoining Surfaces: Prior to application of paint, remove fixture frames, escutcheons, cover plates and other similar objects on walls and store in protected area until ready to be replac~l. Use tarps, drop cloths, masking tape and other suitable covers as required to protect adjacent and underlying surfaces which are likely to be stained, spotted or otherwise marred. PAINT APPLICATIONS A. All surfaces to be painted must be primed. All joints of dissimilar materials (i.e. base trim to gyp. wall) are to be caulked with painters caulk after the primer is dry and before the first finish coat of paint. The contractor is to follow the manufacturer's instructions when applying primer and paint. D. The contractor is to sand and clean all painted surfaces between each coat. Material for succeeding coats on any one surface shall be the product of the same manufacturer furnishing the first or primer- sealer coat for that particular surface except where metal primer is used applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Exemise care so that paint does not splatter. When splattering does occur, remove promptly. Primer and intermediate coats of paint shall be unscarred and completely integral at the time of application of each succeeding coat. Each coat of paint shall be inspected and approved before the succeeding coat is put on. Tint each coat of paint a slightly different DIVISION 9 - Page 12 of 13 DMSION 9 - FINISHES PAINTING SCHEDULE 1. Millwork, trim a. One coat b. Two coats 2. Finished gypsum board wails a. One coat b. Two coats 3. Concrete floors a. Step one b. Two coats CLEAN-UP A. shade for identification of the different coats. The number of coats hereinafter specified is in addition to any shop primer coats. Latex Primer (omit if pre-primed) Semi-Gloss Enamel Latex Primer Latex Enamel (as selected) Acid etching Floor & Porch Enamel + M67 Anti-slip aggregate Upon completion of the work, remove staging, scaffolding and containers from the site; leave storage areas in acceptable condition. Replace fixture frames, escutcheons, cover plates and other similar items which were removed during painting. Paint stops and stains shall be completely removed without damage to surface. END OF SECTION 09912 - PAINTING DIVISION 9 - Page 13 of 13 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA and other Contract Documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION NO. 10 - SPECIALTIES Included in tiffs Division are the following sections: 10150 Toilet Partitions 10800 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 10- Page 1 of 5 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10150 - TOILET PARTITIONS SCOPE This section includes Solid Plastic toilet partitions, hardware and structural accessories. SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Showing layout of toilet partitions. B. Product data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts of typical panel, pilaster, door, hardware and fastening. C. Color chips: Manufacturer's sample. Color by owner. D. Finishes: Color by owner. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Components of toilet partitions shall be sourced from one single source manufacturer who certifies that materials meet or exceed specifications. B. Installation: Installer shall have a history of completed jobs of similar size and scope, and shall be qualified. DELIVERY~ STORAGE AND HANDILING Pre-finished materials shall be delivered to the job site in original, unopened cartons or other packaging materials necessary to protect finishes. Materials shall be stored in manufacturer's packaging until installation. Partitions shall be stored in horizontal position with adequate support to ensure flatness and to prevent damage to pre-finished surfaces. PROJECT CONDITIONS Building shall be enclosed and provide complete protection from outside weather. Temperature within building shall be above a minimum of 60°F. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall provide a 5-year warranty. MANUFACTURER The partition shall be products Evertuff manufactured by Comtec Industries or approved equal. DMSION 10 - Page 2 of 5 DMSION 10 - SPECIALTIES INSPECTION Before installation, the installer shall inspect the site to ensure that no defects, or conditions exist which would result in an unsatisfactory installation of the partitions. Measurements should also be taken at this time to further ensure correct installation. INSTALLATION Install partitions, screen in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's current installation instructions. Leave partitions complete, clean and free from defects in workmanship. CLEANING All rubbish and cartons generated by installer shall be removed and area left broom clean. END OF SECTION 10150 - TOILET PARTITIONS DIVISION 10 - Page 3 of 5 DMSION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES SCOPE Ao Toilet accessories specified herein have been selected from the current catalog of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Products of equal quality, design and function, will be approved. Installation of ail equipment shall be done in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed directions utilizing the proper anchorage and attachments to the various wall finishes as designated by the manufacturer. Location of the various accessories not indicated on the Drawings shall be placed at the direction of the Engineers in the field. The Owner shall be supplied with (3) copies of all keys required to access the toilet accessories. E. Contractor shall furnish and install the electric hand dryer units in the toilets. SHOP DRAWINGS Submit complete and accurate shop drawings, details or illustrated literature to the Engineer's approval. No installation shail be made prior to approval of the Engineer. SOAP DISPENSER Soap dispenser shall be as manufactured by Bradley or approved equal. Style shall be model No. 6562, stainless steel, tank type, surface mounted, ADA compliant, with lather soap vaive. TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS Toilet tissue dispensers shail be as manufactured by Bradley or approved equal. Style shail be model No. 5402 stainless steel, surface mounted and duai roll dispenser. GRAB BARS Grab bars shall be as manufactured by Bradley or approved equai. Style shall be model No. 812 stainless steel, 1-1/2" O.D., and 36" long. MIRRORS Mirrors shall be as manufactured by Bradley or approved equal. Style shall be model 780-1830 (size 18" x 30") DIVISION 10 - Page 4 of 5 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER Paper Towel dispenser shall be equal. Model No. 227-11 as manufactured by Bradley or approved END OF SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES DIVISION 10 - Page 5 of 5 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDmONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA, and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION NO. 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Included in this Division are the following sections: 13280 Hazardous Material Remediation 13915 Fire-suppression piping DIVISION 8 - Page 1 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13280 - HAZARDOUS MATERIAL REMEDIATION PART L ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS DESCRIPTION Under this Section, the Contractor shall complete abatement and disposal of Asbestos-Containing Materials (ACM). SCOPE The specific ACM to be abated will be identified in a separate inspection report conducted by others. SECTION 1. PRE-WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable Regulations: This project is to be done in accordance with all federal and state regulations including but not limited to: 1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): a. 29 CFR 1910.1200 - Hazard Communication b. 29 CFR 1910.134 - Respiratory. Protection c. 29 CFR 1910.1001 - Asbestos d. 29 CFR 1926.1101 - Construction Industry Safety and Health Standards - Asbestos e. 40 CFR 61 Subparts A and M ~ National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) 2. New York State Regulations: a. 6 NYCRR Part 364 - Waste Transporter Permits b. 10 NYCRR Part 73 - Asbestos Safety Program Requirements c. 12 NYCRR Part 56 - Asbestos (Industrial Code Rule 56) Definitions Relative to Asbestos Abatement: Adequately Wet: A term as defined in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and EPA 340/1-90-019 that means to sufficiently mix or penetrate with liquid to prevent the release of DMSION 8 - Page 2 of 61 DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION particulates. If visible emissions are observed coming from asbestos-containing material (ACM), then that material has not been adequately wetted. However, the absence of visible emissions is not sufficient evidence of being adequately wetted. Aerosol: A system consisting of particles, solid or liquid, suspended in air. Air Cell: Insulation normally used on pipes and ductwork that is comprised of corrugated cardboard which is frequently comprised of asbestos combined with cellulose or refractory binders. Air Monitoring: The process of measuring the fiber content of a specific volume of air. Amended Water: Water to which a surfactant has been added to decrease the surface tension to 35 or less dynes. Asbestos: The asbestiform varieties of serpentine (Chrysotile), riebeckite (crocidolite), cummingtonite-grunerite, anthophyllite, and acfinolite-tremolite. For purposes of determining respiratory and worker protection, both the asbestiform and non-asbestiform varieties of the above minerals and any of these materials that have been chemically treated and/or altered shall be considered as asbestos. Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM): Any material containing more than 1% by weight of asbestos of any type or mixture of types. Asbestos-Containing Waste Material: Any material that is or is suspected of being, or any material contaminated with an asbestos-containing material, which is to be removed from a work area for disposal. Asbestos Debris: Pieces of ACBM that can be identified by color, texture, or composition, or means dust, if the dust is determined by an accredited inspector to be ACM. Authorized Visitor: The Owner, the Owner's Representative, testing lab personnel, the Architect/Engineer, emergency personnel or a representative of any federal, state and local regulatory or other agency having authority over the project. Barrier: Any surface that seals off the work area to inhibit the movement of fibers. Breathing Zone: A hemisphere forward of the shoulders with a radius of approximately 6 to 9 inches. Category I Non friable ACM: A term as defined in 40 CFR 61, Subpatt M and EPA 340/1-90-018 that means asbestos-containing packings, gaskets, resilient floor covering, and asphalt roofing products containing more than 1 percent asbestos as determined using the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Appendix A, Subpart F, Section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy. DIVISION 8 - Page 3 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Category H Non friable ACM: A term as defined in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and EPA 340/1-90-018 that means any material, excluding Category I non friable ACM, containing more than 1 percent asbestos as determined using the methods specified in Appendix A, Subpart F, 40 CFR 763, Section I, Polarized Light Microscopy, that when dry, cannot be cmmbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure. Ceiling Concentration: The concentration of an airborne substance that shall not be exceeded. Certified Industrial Hygienist (C.I.H.): An industrial hygienist certified in Comprehensive Practice by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene. Demolition: The wrecking or taking out of any building component, system, finish or assembly of a facility together with any related handling operations. Disposal Bag: A properly labeled 6-mil thick leak tight plastic bag used for transporting asbestos waste from work area to disposal site. Encapsulant: A material that surrounds or embeds asbestos fibers in an adhesive matrix, to prevent release of fibers. · Bridging Encapsulant: an encapsulant that forms a discrete layer on the surface of an in situ asbestos matrix. · Penetrating encapsulant: an encapsulant that is absorbed by the in situ asbestos matrix without leaving a discrete surface layer. Removal encapsulant: a penetrating encapsulant specifically designed to minimize fiber release during removal of asbestos-containing materials rather than for in situ encapsulation. Encapsulation: Treatment of asbestos-containing materials with an encapsulant. Enclosure: The construction of an airtight, impermeable, permanent barrier around asbestos-containing material to control the release of asbestos fibers into the air. Filter: A media component used in respirators to remove solid or liquid particles from the inspired air. Friable Asbestos Material: Material that contains more than 1% asbestos by weight and that can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry. Non friable ACM: A term as defined in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and EPA 340/1-90-018 that means any material containing more than 1 percent asbestos as determined using the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Appendix A, Subpart F, Section 1, Polarized Light DIVISION 8 - Page 4 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Microscopy, that, when dry, cannot be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure. Glovebag: A sack (typically constructed of 6 mil transparent polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride plastic) with inward projecting long sleeve gloves, which are designed to enclose an object from which an asbestos-containing material is to be removed. HEPA Filter: A High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filter capable of trapping and retaining 99.97% of asbestos fibers greater than 0.3 microns in diameter. High-Efficiency Particulate Air Filter: (HEPA) refers to a filtering system capable of trapping and retaining 99.97 percent of all mono dispersed particles 0.3 um in diameter or larger. Negative Pressure Respirator: A respirator in which the air pressure inside the respiratory inlet covering is positive during exhalation in relation to the air pressure of the outside atmosphere and negative during inhalation in relation to the air pressure of the outside atmosphere. Negative Pressure Ventilation System: A pressure differential and ventilation system. Owner's Representative: Persons designated by the Owner to act in his behalf, to include the following; architect, engineer, monitor, inspector, consultant and industrial hygienist. Personal Monitoring: Sampling of the asbestos fiber concentrations within the breathing zone of an employee. Pressure Differential and Ventilation System: A local exhaust system, utilizing HEPA filtration capable of maintaining a pressure differential with the inside of the Work Area at a lower pressure than any adjacent area, and which cleans recirculated air or generates a constant air flow from adjacent areas into the Work Area. Protection Factor: The ratio of the ambient concentration of an airborne substance to the concentration of the substance inside the respirator at the breathing zone of the wearer. The protection factor is a measure of the degree of protection provided by a respirator to the wearer. Repair: Returning damaged ACBM to an undamaged condition or to an intact state to prevent fiber release. Respirator: A device designed to protect the wearer from the inhalation of harmful atmospheres. Surfactant: A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration, thus reducing the quantity of water required for a given operation or area. DIVISION 8 - Page 5 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Time Weighted Average (TWA): The average concentration of a contaminant in air during a specific time period. The TWA is an 8-hour time weighted average of airborne concentration of fibers (longer than 5 micrometers) per cubic centimeter of ak which represents the employee's 8-hour workday as determined by Appendix A of 29 CFR 1926, Section 1926.1101. Visible Emissions: Any emissions containing particulate asbestos material that are visually detectable without the aid of instruments. This does not include condensed uncombined water vapor. Wet Cleaning: The process of eliminating asbestos contamination from building surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning utensils which have been dampened with amended water or diluted removal encapsulant and afterwards thoroughly decontaminated or disposed of as asbestos contaminated waste. Work Area: The area where asbestos related work or removal operations are performed which is defined and/or isolated to prevent the spread of asbestos dust, fibers or debris, and entry by unauthorized personnel. The Work Area is a Regulated Area as defined by 29 CFR 1926, and 12 NYCRR Part 56. Introduction: This specification calls for furnishing all labor, supervision, worker certification and training, tools, materials, and equipment for selected demolition and the removal and disposal of asbestos-containing materials from the building. The building is to be renovated. Contract Documents: All work of this section shall comply with the requirements of the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Special), with specification section, and with this specification section and with all Town of Southold requirements. The Contractor agrees to hold the Town of Southold and their representatives (i.e., construction manager, environmental consultant, air monitoring f'u'm, engineer, and architect) harmless from any and all fines, levies, or penalties including the cost of reasonable attorneys fees issued by any jurisdictional authorities as a result of any actions or work procedures used by the Contra6tor or his sub-contractors or any persons employed directly or indirectly by the Contractor. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless Town of Southold, its officers, directors, employees, agents, and servants including LK McLean Associates, PC, and any consultants from and against any and all losses (including, but not limited to, property damage and bodily injury or death resulting there from), costs, damages, claims, expenses, including attorney's fees and expenses of litigation, judgments, liens and DIVISION 8 - Page 6 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION encumbrances, arising out of or in any way connected with the Services of the Contractor or that of any subcontractor and whenever made or incurred, including any and all liability imposed by law, contract, custom upon Town of Southold, its officers, directors, employees, agents, and servants or any or all of them, whether or not it be claimed or proven that there was negligence or breach of statutory duty or both upon the part of the Town of Southold, its officers, directors, employees, agents, and servants, except where indemnity would be precluded by New York State General Obligations Law, Section 322.1, or by other applicable law. In accordance with the above, the Town of Southold shall have the right to demand that the Contractor undertake to defend the Town of Southold, its officers, directors, employees, agents, and servants against all lawsuits for which the Contractor has the duty to indemnify the Town of Southold. In the event that the Contractor indemnifies the Town of Southold for any damages, losses, costs, and expenses that result from the negligence of a third party, the Town of Southold will assign to the Contractor any corresponding cause of action, which it may have against such third parties. Materials to be Removed: Asbestos materials to be removed are identified in the Asbestos Survey conducted by others for the structure. If any other suspect materials are discovered at the work site, immediately notify the Owner's Representative. Location of the Site and Work to be Done: Former Peconic Lane School - Peconic Lane, Peconic, NY Thc former Peconic Lane School is a one-story building with a basement and attic. Hazardous building materials may be located throughoUt the interior portions of the building. The building is to be partially renovated. It is the contractor's responsibility to remove all interior asbestos containing materials that will be disturbed. All hazardous materials types, locations, quantities, and field conditions should be field verified by the Abatement Contractor prior to submitting a bid. Appropriate containment barriers and personal and waste decontamination units shall be put into place before beginning work. HEPA filtered negative air exhaust equipment shall be used to establish a vacuum inside the containment structures. Manual, wet methods shall be used to remove the asbestos materials. Clean debris; decontaminate the containment structures by HEPA-filtered vacuuming, and wet wiping of all walls and floor. All asbestos and asbestos contaminated materials must be bagged for disposal. Re- insulation is not required. All work is to be done in accordance with this specification, federal, and New York State regulations. Comply with all OSHA standards including but not limited to Lockout/Tag out, Fall Protection, Confined Space, and Respiratory Protection. DIVISION 8 - Page 7 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Removal Schedule: All work, abatement and demobilization, is to be completed within 60 consecutive calendar days. Otherwise, unless the contract is extended, the contractor shall be liable for any added costs, including the provision of Project/Air monitoring services to satisfactorily conduct air sampling and analysis and safe final clearance conditions, at the rate of actual costs. These costs represent the liquidated damages that the Owner will suffer because of delay and are not a penalty. The Contractor shall progress the abatement project without stopping to initiate another project. The Contractor is responsible for planning the removal, including scoping, timing, phasing, and removal methods to be utilized. The Contractor agrees to make no claim for damages for delay in the performance of this contract occasioned by any act or omission to act of the Owner or any of his Representatives, and agrees that any such claim shall be fully compensated for by an extension of time to complete the performance of work as provided herein. General Requirements: All work site preparations and practices shall be conducted in accordance with ail applicable regulations and in particular 12 NYCRR Part 56, the New York State Industrial Code Rule No. 56. The Contractor shall completely prepare the sites for abatement and shall furnish all labor and materials to perform work for removal of all asbestos-containing materials from each work area. A non-mandatory site visit to inspect the work areas is scheduled for a date given elsewhere in the Notice to Bidders, when representatives of the Owner or his Representative and the Engineer/Project Monitoring Consultant will be available to answer questions. It is strongly recommended that the Bidders attend the pre-bid walk through to inspect the work areas and to evaluate the extent of the required work. Final clearance air tests will be conducted before the release of all asbestos projects, including tent and glovebag removals. Satisfactory test results are required before the Owner will accept any Work Area as being completed. The clearance air tests will be conducted as specified in ICR 56. The Project/Air Monitor Consultant at no cost to the Contractor shall conduct these tests. In the event that final air tests in a Work Area are not satisfactory, any return visits by the Project/Air Monitor Consultant will be made at the Contractor's expense, and the cost of such additional visits and tests shall be subtracted from the contract amount. DIVISION 8 - Page 8 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION The Contractor must request permission from the Owner or the Owner's Representative to change the work schedule at least 48 hours in advance of the desired date of change. Whenever the Contractor desires to use any design device, material, method of operation or process covered by letters of patent or copyright, the right for such use shall be secured by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or Owner. The Contractor will pay the entire cost thereof including royalties. An exterior waste holding area shall be constructed of sufficient size to accommodate all waste until pick-up. All entrances to the work area and the waste holding area shall be locked when work is not being performed. The Contractor is responsible for maintenance of the integrity of the work area, decontamination units and waste holding area. Each contractor shall include in the bid the sum of money to be used as payment for asbestos removal and disposal. This shall cover transportation, installation, filing, overhead, profit and all other costs and expenses. The bid for this project is a lump sum bid, with the exception of the wall plaster material located on the inside of the perimeter brick walls which will be a separate unit cost line item. Contractor shall include in the bid the time required for clearance air monitoring, analysis by laboratory, and dismantling of the set-up. Pre-work Submittals: Upon award of Contract, and before the start of any preparatory work under this Contract, the Contractor shall attend a pm construction conference attended by the Owner and/or his Representative and the Project Monitor. Work will not commence until the Owner or Owner Representative has received and reviewed all required submittals. At this conference, the Contractor shall prepare and submit the following items: 1. ProjectWork Plan A detailed plan indicating the location of the asbestos control areas, showing the decontamination chambers, negative air pressure filtration system, erected barrier locations and materials, vent, drain and access sealing methods and materials, material handling methods, and routes for removal of asbestos-containing material. b. A schedule of proposed dates for said work within the Contract period. c. Written evidence that the EPA and appropriate State and Local Authorities approve the landfill for disposal for asbestos disposal. d. Identification of proposed waste hauler, and evidence of approval by State and Local Authorities. A copy of the haulers NYS Waste Transporters Permit. DIVISION 8 - Page 9 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION e. A list of the supervisor and personnel who will be assigned to this project, giving their experience, certification and qualifications in asbestos control work. f. A list of the equipment that will be used on this Contract. g. A copy of the EPA and New York State notification forms/letters, and proof of payment of the NYS notification filing fee. h. Copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all products used at the abatement site. 2. Project Health and Safety Plan A description of the Contractor's worker training program, and a list of all employees who will work on the job. Copies of all asbestos related licenses and certificates, proof of recent respirator fit test and proof of medical clearance to wear a respirator according to OSHA regulations. All supervisors and workers must have full EPA accreditation. Emergency Procedures to be followed in the event that contamination outside the work area occurs during removal and disposal of the asbestos-containing material and the asbestos contaminated debris. Emergency telephone numbers (24 hour coverage) for contractor responsible individuals in the event of a medical, mechanical or asbestos contamination outside the work area. c. Copy of the right to know presentation to employees. Notices: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency: Send written notification as required by US EPA National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) Asbestos Regulations (40 CFR 61, Subpart M) to the regional Asbestos NESHAPS Contact at least 10 days prior to beginning any work on ACM's. Send notification to the following Region 2 address: Asbestos NESHAPS Coordinator Air & Waste Management Division US EPA 26 Federal Plaza New York, NY 10278 (212) 264-2611 Include the following information in the notification sent to the NESHAPS Contact: 1. Name and address of owner or operator DIVISION 8 - Page 10 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Description of the facility being demolished or renovated, including the size, age and prior use of the facility. Estimate of approximate amount of friable asbestos material present in the facility in terms of linear feet of pipe, and surface area on other facility components. For materials less than 260 linear feet (80 linear meters) on pipes and less than 160 square feet (15 square meters) on other facility components. 4. Location of the facility being demolished or renovated. 5. Scheduled starting and completion dates of demolition or renovation. 6. Nature of planned demolition or renovation and method(s) to be used. Procedures to be used to comply with the requirements of US EPA National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) Asbestos Regulations (40 CFR 72, Subpart M). Name and location of the waste disposal site where the friable asbestos waste material will be deposited. New York State Department of Labor: Send written notification, as required by Industrial Code Rule No. 56, to the New York State Department of Labor at least ten (10) days prior to commencement of work. The notification shall be made on a form(s) provided by the New York State Department of Labor. Send notification to the following address: New York State Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health Asbestos Control Bureau State Office Campus Building 12 Albany, New York 12240 Permits and Licenses: Asbestos removal can only be performed by Contractors who are licensed to do so by the New York State Department of Labor. Workers and supervisors involved with removal of ACM must be certified. Submit copies of licensing and certifications with Pro|ect Work Plan. The Contractor's attention is directed to Industrial Code Rule 56 of New York State and all current and applicable Federal and State Laws and Regulations regarding asbestos work, safety, and health precaution. All contract work must be performed in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations. The Contractor must apply for and obtain all necessary applications, licenses, permits, certificates, certifications, any required DIVISION 8 - Page 11 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION documents, must file all documents as required by all applicable laws within the time frame as dictated by code prior to commencement of work. The Contractor shall pay all fees and any other costs associated with compliance. All workers must have their individual New York State Department of Labor Certifications displayed at the work site or they will not be permitted to work on this project. NOTE: It is a condition of final payment for the project that the contractor provide detailed landfill manifests signed by the landfill operator demonstrating that the asbestos containing materials removed from the site have been properly disposed. Posting and Filing of Regulations: Posting and Filing of Regulations: Post all notices required by applicable Federal, State and local regulations. Maintain two (2) copies of applicable Federal, State and local regulations and standards. Maintain one copy of each at job site. Keep on file in Contractor's office one copy of each. General Project Conditions: Working Space: Working space and space available for storing materials is restricted within the confines of the project and/or at locations to be designated by the Owner or his Representative. If space is not available, the Contractor shall locate and pay for off site storage space. Personal Protective Equipment: The Contractor shall provide access and personal protective equipment, as necessary, to the Owner's Representatives to visit the Work Areas to maintain and adjust building services. Equipment for site visitors shall be reserved as such and shall be available at all times. Using any piece of personal protective equipment presently in use by any of the Contractor's employees for this capacity will not be considered an acceptable practice. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner's Representative is fit tested for respiratory protection before entering the work site. Lavatory Facilities: There are no lavatory facilities at the site. The Contractor will provide and pay for portable lavatory facilities. Water Utilities: There are no water utilities at the site. The Contractor will provide for all water requirements. All water used must be contained and filtered through a system with at least 5.0-micron particle size collection capability. A system containing a series of several filters with progressively smaller pore sizes shall be used to avoid rapid clogging of the filtration system by large particles. Filtered water may be discharged to the ground. Contaminated filters shall be disposed of as asbestos containing waste. Electrical Service: There are no electrical utilities at the site. Electricity needed at the DIVISION 8 - Page 12 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION site must come from a contractor-supplied generator. General: The Contractor is to provide a weatherproof, grounded temporary electric power generator source and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics to accommodate performance of work during the abatement period. All power must be from a source outside the immediate work area and supplied to the Work Area utilizing ground fault interrupting cimuit breakers. Temporary Electrical Panel: Contractor to provide temporary electrical panel sized and equipped to accommodate ail electricai equipment and lighting required by the work. Connect temporary panel to contractor supplied generator electrical system. Protect with circuit breaker or fused disconnect. Locate temporary panel outside the work area. Power Distribution System: Provide circuits of adequate size and proper characteristics for each use. In generai, run wiring overhead, and raise vertically where wiring will be least exposed to damage from abatement operations. · Circuit Protection: Protect each circuit with a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) of proper size located in the temporary panel. Do not use outlet type GFCI devices. Temporary lighting: Instail adequate temporary lighting to provide sufficient illumination for safe work and traffic conditions in every area of work. All labor and materiai costs for connections to generator services, instailation of Ground Fault Interrupters, temporary lighting and other work necessary to bring electricity to the subject project site or sites, will be the Contractor's responsibility. Amount of Lighting: Supply sufficient lighting to provide safe working conditions. Additional lighting may be requested by the Owner's Representative to facilitate final visuai inspection. This additionai lighting will be provided at no additional cost to Owner. Temporary Wiring: In the Work Area shail be type UF non-metallic sheathed cable located overhead and exposed for surveillance. Do not wire temporary lighting with plain, exposed (insulated) electrical conductors. Provide liquid tight enclosures or boxes for wiring devices. Number of Branch Circuits: Provide sufficient branch circuits as required by the work. All branch circuits are to originate at temporary electricai panel. At minimum, provide the following: · One dedicated circuit for each HEPA filtered negative air fan unit For power tools and task lighting, provide one temporary 4-gang outlet in the following locations: Provide a separate 110-120 Volt, 20 Amp circuit for each 4-gang outlet (4 outlets per circuit). DIVISION 8 - Page 13 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION One outlet in the work area for each 2500 square feet of work area One outlet at each decontamination unit, located in equipment room 110-120 volt 20 amp branch circuits with 4-gang outlet for Owner's exclusive use while conducting air sampling during the work as follows: o One in each work area. o One at clean side of each Decontamination Unit. o One at each exhaust location for HEPA filtered fan units. 110-120 volt 20 amp branch circuits with 4-gang outlet for Owner's exclusive use for conducting final air sampling as set forth in Section 3.01 Work Area Clearance as follows: o Three inside work area. o Two outside work area in location designated by Owner's Representative. Signs: The Contractor shall post and affix signs and labels as required by OSHA regulation, 29.CFR. 1910.1001 (g). The Contractor shall post safety signs outside the work area as may be required by the Construction Manager. Further, the Contractor shall obtain two cOpies of 29.CFR. 1910.1001, Part 1926, Sec 1926.58 and 40.CFR.61, Subpart M and shall post one copy at the job site and retain one copy on file at the Contractor's office. All decontamination, entry and exit procedures will be posted in the clean area, along with a log to be signed by all upon entering and exiting. The log: The Log will directly refer to the entry and decontamination procedures. A signature in the log affirms the knowledge of these entry and decontamination procedures. Supervisor: A New York State certified asbestos supervisor is required to remain on site throughout the abatement project and have a cellular phone for communication. Contractual Exce tions: An inspector and/or Owner's Representative is authorized to bar a worker on a project who does not have his certification. The Project Monitor will notify the Contractor of this action verbally and/or in writing. The Contractor will be served with an exception letter or a notice when he is in noncompliance with the specification and/or safety regulations. This exception letter will serve as a warning. The second exception letter sent to the Contractor on noncompliance with specifications or safety regulations will be cause, if so determined by the Owner, for the Contractor to be removed from the list of approved Asbestos Contractors and prohibited from having future contracts awarded to this firm. D1VISION 8 - Page 14 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION N. Products: Respirators: Respirators shall be approved MSA/NIOSH equipment and be of the appropriate protection factor to provide the worker protection from the potential fiber release in the work area. All workers shall be respirator approved by a medical doctor. Surfactant. (Amended Water): All water for cleaning and wetting of ACM shall be amended through the addition of a surfactant. Encapsulant: After the work area has been rendered free of asbestos materials and the Area has been cleared for reoccupancy, all surfaces, which contained Asbestos, shall receive a coat of Encapsulant. Encapsulant shall be of a color, which would be visible to the naked eye. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheets required for all products used at the abatement project. SECTION 2. DETAILED PROJECT PROCEDURES A. General Work Procedures: Before actual abatement removal commences in any work area, the Contractor shall notify the Owners Representative so an inspection of all preparatory work can be made. Emergency Notification Numbers: A list of emergency numbers will be posted next to the decontamination unit point of entry. The numbers are phone numbers that will be used in the event that an emergency situation exists requiring emergency medical treatment from and off site location. Bo Workplace Preparation: The work place shall be vacated prior to work place preparation and until successful clearance air monitoring has occurred. Safe temporary power and lighting shall be provided by the contractor accordance with all applicable codes. All power to the work area shall be brought in from outside the area through ground fault circuit interrupters located at the soume. Stationary electrical equipment within the work area that must remain in service shall be adequately enclosed and ventilated. The worker decontamination enclosure system shall be installed or constructed before workers entering the containment and before cleaning or disturbing any asbestos- containing material. The waste decontamination enclosure system shall be installed or constructed before commencement of abatement. DIVISION 8 - Page 15 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION The proposed work area shall be precleaned using HEPA-filtered vacuum equipment and/or wet cleaning methods. Methods that raise dust, such as sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped with a HEPA-filtration system, are prohibited. The isolation barriers (i.e., sealing off of all openings, including but not limited to, pipe penetrations, ducts, grills, cracks in cement wails/floors, and any other penetrations of the work place) shail be installed with 2 layers of 6-mil plastic sheeting sealed with tape. All seams of other system components that pass through the work place shail also be sealed. The work areas shail be separated from the remainder of the work site by constmction of temporary structural partitions. Where applicable, construct hard wail/ceiling full containment enclosures with attached decontamination units. Any storm drains shall be sealed individually with two layers of 6-mil plastic sheeting and tape. Before required plasticizing, any pits, sumps, and large openings shall be covered with adequate plywood sheeting and secured in a manner that prevents a tripping hazard. The Work Areas shall maintain a negative air pressure environment. Negative air pressure shall be maintained by a sufficient number of HEPA-filtered negative air units discharging to the containment exterior. Discharge exhausts a minimum of (50) fifty feet from any building air intakes. Use only new ductwork except for sheet metal connections and elbows. Maintain a minimum air circulation rate of 4 complete air changes per hour until finai air sampling is performed. Ensure an adequate supply of make-up air into the containment structure and decontamination enclosure units. Only during final air sampling shall the air circulation rate be reduced to a maximum of (2) two complete air changes per hour. Do not shut down negative air machines until the clearance level is achieved as stated elsewhere in this specification. Abatement shall not commence until work place preparation has been completed and inspected by the Owner's Representative. Work Place Removal Procedures: General Method - Abatement shall be performed in accordance with this specification. and utilize a full size large project decontamination chamber. The decontamination chamber is to be constructed with hard walls and a hard ceiling, and is to be attached to the work area. Construct a hard wall and hard ceiling containment enclosure with airlocks. Construct isolation barriers (i.e., sealing off of all openings, including but not limited to, pipe penetrations, ducts, grills, cracks in cement walls/floors, and any other penetrations of the work place) shall be installed with 2 layers of 6-mil plastic sheeting sealed with tape. All seams of other system components that pass through the work place shall also be sealed. DIVISION 8 - Page 16 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Negative Air Machines shall be used to continuously exhaust the enclosed area. A minimum of 4 v. olume changes per hour is required. The integrity of the containment seals shall be smoke tested by the Contractor. The contents of the smoke tube shall be aspirated near critical and isolation barriers. Any leakage points must be taped airtight. Removal of ACM shall be by wet methods. Dry removal activities of ACM are prohibited. If pipe insulation adjacent to the section which will be worked on is damaged, or if the pipe insulation terminates 6r is jointed or contains an elbow adjacent to the work section, the adjacent insulation shall be wrapped in 6-mil polyethylene sheeting and sealed airtight with duct tape. After the insulation has been removed, the pipe shall be sprayed with amended water and brash scrubbed to remove all visible ACM. The pipe, the insulation, and the tools shall then be sprayed with amended water. Any pipe insulation ends to remain, created by this procedure, shall be thoroughly wetted, and sealed with wetable cloth end caps and bridging encapsulant immediately following asbestos removal. ACM removed shall be placed in a leak fight container. A HEPA vacuum shall be used for evacuation of the waste bags, for clean-up in the event of a spill, and for post project cleanup. The asbestos-containing waste, the clean-up materials, and protective clothing shall be wetted sufficiently, double bagged minimizing air content, sealed separately, and disposed. Upon completion of removal, all substrate and containment structure surfaces shall: · Be wet cleaned using rags, mops or sponges. · Be permitted sufficient time to dry, before HEPA vacuuming all substrates. The bagged waste shall be wet cleaned or HEPA vacuumed and then transferred outside the work area to the waste decontamination unit, double bagged, and appropriately labeled and handled before disposal. Upon barrier disturbance, loss of engineering controls, or termination of tent usage, the surfaces shall be HEPA vacuumed and wet cleaned. All abated surface shall receive a light coat of encapsulant after clearance air test results DIVISION 8 - Page 17 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION are achieved. The containment shall not be dismantled until acceptable clearance air results have been achieved. Air monitoring shall be conducted by the Owner's Representative, under contract to the Owner. Work Requirements: The scheduling of each work area is to be coordinated with the Owner, the Owner's Representative, and the Contractor's Representative. All asbestos-containing material to be removed shall be removed by first thoroughly wetting, and then by cutting, hand scraping and brushing. All material is to be maintained wet throughout the removal process. All material shall be bagged immediately as it is removed and not allowed to remain on the floor. All asbestos-containing materials removed from surfaces must be placed in properly labeled containers and sealed airtight. Polyethylene bags of 6-mil thickness or greater are sufficient if no sharp edges are present. Metal materials must be placed in rigid hard wall containers that will not puncture. The containers are then sealed airtight and labeled with a second layer. All material shall be removed from Work Areas by passing through the decontamination unit or a material/equipment airlock where the outer surface of the bags will be thoroughly cleaned by a water spray. They shall then be placed in a second clean 6-mil bag or are sealed with another watertight, airtight, labeled layer, for disposal in accordance with all regulations and as called for elsewhere in this Specification. Waste Generator Labels must be affixed to each bag. Waste generator labels are to read as follows: Former Peconic Lane School Peconic Lane Peconic, NY All surfaces from which the asbestos-containing materials are removed shall be brushed and wet wiped using amended water, left clean, and free of all visible debris. The Contractor shall protect each work area daily from the effects that may be caused by inclement weather conditions. Worker Protection: Medical Examination: The Contractor shall insure that all asbestos workers have a medical examination before employment. This medical examination must meet the DIVISION 8 - Page 18 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION minimum requirements under current OSHA regulations, 1926.1101 and 29.CFR. 1910.1001 (J),"Medical Examinations" Protective Equipment: The Contractor shall provide each asbestos worker with all items of protective clothing required by Federal, State and local regulations. The Contractor will assure that all workers are fit- tested with the particular make, model and size respirator the worker will be utilizing. The Contractor shall provide each asbestos worker with a NIOSH/MSHA approved respirator providing sufficient protection against the total fiber levels encountered during construction, as called for elsewhere in this Specification. In the case of cartridge respirators, a sufficient number of filters shall be maintained in a clean condition on site for at least two changes of cartridges for each worker for each day of actual asbestos removal. The worker must wear the respirator provided to him at all times when he is within a Work Area or is informed by the supervisor that a potential for exposure to airborne asbestos fiber exists. The worker must ensure that his respirator is fitted properly and is not worn loosely. The Contractor shall warn his employees that failure to wear the respirator or failure to wear it properly may result in dismissal or work stoppage. The Contractor shall provide the necessary clothing and approved respirators to the Owner's staff or agents as required for Work Area inspections. The outside man, a certified asbestos worker, will be stationed at all times to the entry of the site to assist those who must enter. Personnel Decontamination Unit - Large Projects: Provide a Personnel Decontamination Unit consisting of a serial arrangement of connected rooms in the following arrangement: clean room, aiflock, shower room, aiflock, dirty (equipment) room and alrlock. All persons are required, without exception, to pass through this Decontamination Unit for entry into and exiting from the Work Area for any purpose. Do not allow parallel routes for entry or exit. Do not remove equipment or materials through Personnel Decontamination Unit. Provide temporary lighting within Decontamination Units as necessary to reach a lighting level of 100-foot candles. The following procedures shall be followed during the conduct of abatement activities on large asbestos projects: The Worker decontamination enclosure systems shall be located outside the work area and attached to all locations where workers will enter or exit the work area. One system at a single location for each contained work area is preferred. When this situation does not exist, enclosure systems may be constructed or may consist of prefabricated or trailer units. Adequate heat and light shall be safely provided. DIVISION 8 - Page 19 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION The worker decontamination enclosure system shall consist of a clean room, a shower room, and an equipment room, in series, separated from each other and from the work area by airlocks and from the non-contaminated area by curtained doors. Worker decontamination enclosure systems shall be fully lined utilizing two layers of 6-mil opaque plastic sheeting at a minimum. The shower room floor shall be lined with 3 layers of 6-mil opaque plastic sheeting at a minimum. When the decontamination enclosure system is constructed outdoors or in areas with public access it shall be fully framed and plywood sheathed to prevent unauthorized entry. When located outdoors, it shall be waterproof and windproof. The Clean Room: · Provide a room that is physically and visually separated from the outdoors for the purpose of changing into protective clothing. · Construct walls and floors using a minimum of 2 layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting to seal and separate the clean room. · Locate so that access to Work Area from Changing Room is through Shower Room. Require workers to remove all street clothes in this room, dress in clean, disposable coveralls, and don respiratory protection equipment. Do not allow asbestos contaminated items to enter this room. Require Workers to enter this room either from outside the structure dressed in street clothes, or naked from the showers. · Maintain floor of changing room dry and clean at all times. Do not allow overflow water from shower to wet floor in changing room. · Damp wipe all surfaces twice afler each shifl change with a disinfectant solution. · Provide posted information for ail emergency phone numbers and procedures. Equip with a lockable, louvered door to secure the workplace during off-shift hours. The Shower Room: · Shall contain a minimum of one shower per 6 workers calculated on the basis of the largest shift. · Shall have showerheads supplied with hot and cold water adjustable at the shower. · Shall be constructed to ensure against water leakage. DIVISION 8 - Page 20 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION · Shall contain liquid bath soap, shampoo and clean, dry towels in sufficient quantity for each worker for each showering. Shower water shall be drained, collected and filtered through a system with at least 5.0 micron particle size collection capability. A system containing a series of several filters with progressively smaller pore sizes shall be used to avoid rapid clogging of the filtration system by large particles. · Filtered wastewater may be discharged to the ground in accordance with local codes and regulations. · Used filters shall be disposed of as asbestos- containing waste material. The Equipment Room: · Shall be used for storage of equipment and tools used on the job that have been cleaned previously in the work area. · May contain a limited supply of replacement filters (in sealed containers until used) for HEPA vacuums and pressure ventilation equipment, extra tools, containers of surfactant and other materials and equipment that may be required during the abatement activity. · Shall contain labeled 6-mil plastic bags for collection of disposable clothing. · Shall be used to store contaminated footwear (e.g. robber boots and other reusable footwear) and contaminated clothing for reuse for the duration of the abatement activity or until disposed. Decontamination Sequence: All personnel at the work site shall strictly observe proper decontamination procedures, as outlined in New York State Industrial Code Rule No. 56. Removal of Asbestos Containing Materials from Work Sites: The following procedures shall be followed for removal of asbestos-containing waste material and equipment during the conduct of abatement activities on all asbestos projects: · All asbestos-containing and asbestos contaminated material, including any polyethylene sheeting and supplies used in the Work Area during asbestos related work, shall be sealed in 6-mil thick polyethylene bags within the Work Area. Water shall be added to each bag before the bag is sealed, to keep the contents damp through subsequent handling. D1VISION 8 - Page 21 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION For a large asbestos project the external surfaces of contaminated containers and equipment shall be cleaned by wet wiping and/or HEPA vacuuming in the work area before moving such items into the waste decontamination enclosure system airlock by persons assigned to this duty. These work area persons shall not enter the airlock. The sealed bags and equipment shall then be passed through the waste/equipment decontamination unit. As each bag passes through the decontamination unit, it will be washed and wet wiped with water on the outside, and then placed in a second sealed 6-mil thick polyethylene bag. The cleaned containers of asbestos-containing material and equipment shall be placed in watertight carts with doors or tops that shall be closed and secured. These carts shall be used to transport the waste promptly from the Work Area to the dumpster located outdoors. The sealed bags shall be protected in such a manner as to prevent breakage of the bags and subsequent fiber release in the event of damage or dropping during transport from the Work Area. The bags shall be removed from the site at a time mutually agreed upon by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or HEPA- vacuumed at least once each day. · All bags shall be properly labeled as containing asbestos as required by OSHA and EPA regulations. The Contractor shall place a closed and lockable dumpster outside the building at a location to be agreed upon with the Owner or the Owner's Representative. It is to be kept closed and sealed at all times, except when bags are being placed in it. Asbestos Waste Shipment Record(s) (Manifest) Waste Manifest forms are to be provided for each waste shipment as specified in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and other required state waste manifest shipment records. The completed waste manifest forms, signed and dated by the agent of the landfill, shall be submitted within 7 days after date of delivery of ACM to the landfill, but not later than 35 days from the date that the waste left the site. Alternate methods of providing Decontamination facilities may be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval. Do not proceed with any such method(s) without written authorization of the Owner's Representative. Cleaning of Decontamination Units: Clean debris and residue from inside of Decontamination Units on a daily basis or as otherwise indicated by the Owners Representative. Damp wipe all surfaces at the beginning of each shift and after each shift change. Clean debris from shower pans on a daily basis. DIVISION 8 - Page 22 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Ko Signs: Post an approximately 20 inch by 14 inch manufactured caution sign in English, Spanish, and Polish at all approaches to the Work Area displaying the following with letter sizes and styles of a visibility required by 29 CFR 1926: DANGER ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD RESPIRATOR AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA Dally Log: Dally Log: The Contractor is required to maintain, on site, a daily log documenting the dates and time of, but not limited to, the following items: Meetings - purpose, attendees, brief discussion · Visitations - authorized and unauthorized · Personnel - by name, entering and leaving the work area · Special or unusual events, i.e. barrier breaching, equipment failures, accidents · Air monitoring tests and test results Documentation of Contractor's completion of the following: · Inspection of work area preparation prior to start of removal and dally thereafter. Removal of any sheet plastic barriers. · Contractor's inspections prior to spray back, lock down, encapsulation, enclosure or any other operation that will conceal the condition of asbestos-containing materials or the substrate from which such materials have been removed. · Removal of waste materials from work area. · Decontamination of equipment (list items). · Contractor's final inspection/final air test analysis. DIVISION 8 - Page 23 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Provide two (2) copies of this log to the Owner/Owner's Representative on a dally basis. Submit copies of this log at final closeout of project as a project closeout submittal. Special Reports: General: Except as otherwise indicated, submit special reports directly to Owner's Representative and others affected by occurrence within one day. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of unusual and significant nature occurs at site (examples: failure of pressure differential system, rapture of temporary enclosures), prepare and submit a special report listing chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. When such events are known or predictable in advance, advise Owner or his Representative in advance at earliest possible date. ReDortin~ Accidents: Prepare and submit reports of significant accidents, at site and anywhere else work is in progress. Record and document data and actions; comply with industry standards. For this purpose, a significant accident is defined to include events where personal injury is sustained, property loss of substance is sustained, or where the event posed a significant threat of loss or personal injury. Report Discovered Conditions: When an unusual condition is discovered during the work (e.g. leaks, termites, corrosion) prepares and submits a special report describing the discovered condition. Contingency Plan: Prepare a contingency plan for emergencies including fire, accident, power fa/lure, pressure differential system fa/lure, supplied air system fa/lure, or any other event that may require modification or abridgment of decontamination or work area isolation procedures. Include in plan specific procedures for decontamination or work area isolation. Note that nothing in this specification should impede safe exiting or providing of adequate medical attention in the event of an emergency. This plan shall be posted in or near the entrance to the personnel decontamination facility. Post: In Clean Room of Personnel Decontamination Unit: A copy of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Regulations for Asbestos, 40 CFR 61 Subparts A and M, and a copy of OSHA Asbestos Regulations, 29 CFR 1926.58. A list of telephone numbers for local hospital, location of hospital and/or emergency squad, local fire department, the building owner (or Representative), the Industrial Hygienist, · A copy of the New York State Industrial Code Rule No. 56. D1VISION 8 - Page 24 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION · A copy of ail Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for hazardous chemicals used during the abatement project. Notifications: Owner or Owner's Representative will notify other entities at the job site of the nature of the asbestos abatement activities, location of asbestos-containing materiais, requirements relative to asbestos set forth in these specifications and applicable regulations. The Contractor's on-site Supervisor is responsible for notifying emergency service agencies including fire, ambulance, police or other agencies that may service the abatement work site in case of an emergency. Notification is to include methods of entering work area, emergency entry and exit locations, modifications to fire notification or fire fighting equipment, and other information needed by agencies providing emergency services. Notifications of Emergency: Any individual at the job site may notify the Contractor's Supervisor to request emergency service agencies if necessary without effect on this contract or the Contract Sum. Asbestos Waste Shipment Records (Manifests) Final completed copies of the Waste Shipment Record for all shipments of waste material as specified in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and other required state waste manifest shipment records as specified herein are required. Detail information of all asbestos waste disposals on the "MANDATORY WASTE SHIPMENT RECORD" form in accordance with revised 40 CFR 61 Subpart M. Such completed forms signed and dated by the agent of the landfill shail be submitted within 7 days after date of delivery of ACM to the landfill, but not later than 35 days from the date that the waste left the site. Mo Respiratory Protection: Respiratory protection shall be MSHA/NIOSH approved in accordance with the provisions of 20 CFR Part 11, and all other Federal, State and Local Laws. Worker Qualifications, Training and Education: · The Contractor shall have a Supervisor with a valid NYS Supervisor certificate present at ail times when work is in progress. · The Supervisor shail be thoroughly familiar and experienced with asbestos removal and related work, and shall enforce the use of all safety procedures and equipment. He shall be knowledgeable of ail EPA, OSHA, NYS, & NIOSH requirements and guidelines. · Proof of the Supervisor's quaiifications and experience shall be available to the Owner DIVISION 8 - Page 25 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION or his Representative before the start of the project. In addition to the Supervisor, the Contractor shall furnish for each Work Area one or more foremen familiar and experienced with asbestos removal and its related work, safety procedures and equipment. Proof of the foremen's experience shall be available to the Owner or his Representative before the start of the project. · The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees, and shall not employ any person not skilled in the work assigned to him nor anyone who has not received the proper training and certification. SECTION 3. MONITORING AND ANALYSIS REQUIREMENTS A. Air Monitoring - Laboratory Services: The Owner will engage the services of an independent third-party air-monitoring firm to verify that the areas beyond the work area remain uncontaminated. A technician will be at the job site, and samples will be sent to the analytical laboratory daily (e.g., by overnight mail, or hand delivery), so that verbal reports on air samples can be obtained within 48 hours. A complete record, certified by the testing laboratory, of all air monitoring tests and results will be furnished to the owner's representative, the owner and the Contractor. Samples will be taken before any work is performed to establish a base line background fiber level. If any during abatement air sample taken outside of the work area exceeds the background level immediately and automatically, stop all work. Erect new critical barriers to isolate and decontaminate affected area. Appropriate respiratory protection shall be worn until final air clearance is attained. The Contractor shall perform personal air monitoring as required to meet OSHA Requirements for Maintenance of Time Weighted Average (TWA) fiber counts for types of reSpirator protection provided. The Owner will not be performing work area air monitoring to meet these OSHA requirements. The cost of such OSHA air monitoring shall be included in the contract sum. Clearance Air Monitoring - Clearance air monitoring shall be conducted after the following: · Removal of bagged waste from work area. · Completion of HEPA vacuuming and wet cleaning of all surfaces of the work area. · Inspection of the work area to verify the absence of asbestos containing waste material, and to ensure that the work area is dry. DIVISION 8 - Page 26 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION · Encapsulation of all abated surfaces is permitted only after clearance air fiber levels are achieved within containment. B. Release Criteria Using Transmission Electron Microscopy: TEM Sampling and analysis will not be utilized on this project. C. Release Criteria Using Phase Contrast Microscopy: PCM clearance air monitoring will be considered satisfactory when all samples taken produce results equal to or less than 0.01 fibers/cc base line. Should the Contractor fail such clearance air monitoring, the Contractor shall first, reclean and HEPA vacuum until such time 0.01 fiber/cc has been reached, and secondly, reimburse the Owner for all additional costs to retest the area which failed, including technician time and lab charges, plus 10% to cover administrative costs. Fibers Counted: The following procedure will be used to resolve any disputes regarding fiber types when a project has been stopped due to excessive airborne fiber counts. "Airborne Fibers" referred to above include all fibers regardless of composition as counted in the NIOSH P&CAM 239 or 7400 Procedures A and B. If work has stopped due to high airborne fib'er counts, air samples will be secured in the same area by the Owner for analysis by transmission electron microscopy. NOTE: DO NOT REMOVE CONTAINMENT BARRIERS UNTIL FINAL AIR CLEARANCE TEST RESULTS ARE RECEIVED AND APPROVED BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. SECTION 4. FIRE PROTECTION AND SECURITY A. Fire Protection: The Contractor shall maintain adequate fire extinguisher coverage throughout the work site. Internal combustion engines shall not be operated inside the work area. B Protection of Work, Persons and Property: See Section 24 of the Conditions of Contract (page CC-10). DIVISION 8 - Page 27 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION PART II. LEAD-BASED PAINT MATERIALq DESCRIPTION Under this Section, the Contractor shall complete abatement and disposal of Lead-Based Paint (LBP) materials. SCOPE The specific LBP materials to be abated will be identified in a separate inspection report conducted by others. SECTION 1. PRE-WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable Regulations: This project is to be done in accordance with all federal and state regulations including but not limited to: 1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): a. 40 CFR Part 745 - Lead-Based Paint (EPA) b. 24 CFR Part 35, Subpart R (HUD) Definitions Relative to Lead-Based Paint Abatement: Aritlunetic mean: The algebraic sum of data values divided by the number of data values (e.g., the sum of the concentration of lead in several soil samples divided by the number of samples). Chewable surface: An interior or exterior surface painted with lead-based paint that a young child can mouth or chew. A chewable surface is the same as an "accessible surface" as defined in 42 U.S.C. 4851b(2)). Hard metal substrates and other materials that cannot be dented by the bite of a young child are not considered chewable. Common area group: A group of common areas that are similar in design, construction, and function. Common area groups include, but are not limited to hallways, stairwells, and laundry rooms. Concentration: The relative content of a specific substance contained within a larger mass, such as the amount of lead (in micrograms per gram or parts per million by weight) in a sample of dust or soil. Deteriorated Paint: Any interior or exterior paint or other coating that is peeling, chipping, chalking or cracking, or any paint or coating located on an interior or exterior surface or fixture that is otherwise damaged or separated from the substrate. Dripline: The area within 3 feet surrounding the perimeter of a building. DIVISION 8 - Page 28 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Friction Surface: An interior or exterior surface that is subject to abrasion or friction, including, but not limited to, certain window, floor, and stair surfaces. Impact Surface: An interior or exterior surface that is subject to damage by repeated sudden force such as certain parts of door frames. Interior Window Sill: The portion of the horizontal window ledge that protrudes into the interior of the room. Lead-Based Paint Hazard: A hazardous lead-based paint, dust-lead hazard or soil-lead hazard as identified by: (a) Paint-lead hazard. A paint-lead hazard is any of the following: (1) Any lead-based paint on a friction surface that is subject to abrasion and where the lead dust levels on the nearest horizontal surface underneath the friction surface (e.g., the window sill, or floor) are equal to or greater than the dust-lead hazard levels identified in paragraph (b) below. (2) Any damaged or otherwise deteriorated lead-based paint on an impact surface that is caused by impact from a related building component (such as a door knob that knocks into a wall or a door that knocks against its door frame. (3) Any chewable lead-based painted surface on which there is evidence of teeth marks. (4) Any other deteriorated lead-based paint in any residential building or child- occupied facility or on the exterior of any residential building or child-occupied facility. (b) Dust-lead hazard. A dust-lead hazard is surface dust in a residential dwelling or child-occupied facilit2y that contains a mass-per-area concentration of lead equal to or exceeding 40 ~tg/ft on floors or 250 ~tg/ft2 on interior window sills based on wipe samples. (c) Soil-lead hazard. A soil-lead hazard is bare soil on residential real property or on the property of a child-occupied facility that contains total lead equal to or exceeding 400 parts per million ([xg/g) in a play area or average of 1,200 parts per million of bare soil in the rest of the yard based on soil samples. (d) Work practice requirements. APplicable certification, occupant protection, and clearance requirements and work practice standards are found in regulations issued by EPA at 40 CFR part 745, subpart L and in regulations issued by the Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) at 24 CFR part 35, subpart R. The work practice standards in those regulations do not apply when treating paint-lead hazards of less than: (1) Two square feet of deteriorated lead-based paint per room or equivalent, DIVISION 8 - Page 29 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (2) Twenty square feet of deteriorated paint on the exterior building, or (3) Ten pement of the total surface area of deteriorated paint on an interior or exterior type of component with a small surface area. Loading: The quantity of a specific substance present per unit of surface area, such as the amount of lead in micrograms contained in the dust collected from a certain surface area divided by the surface area in square feet or square meters. Mid-yard: An area of a residential yard approximately midway between the dripline of a residential building and the nearest property boundary or between the driplines of a residential building and another building on the same property. Play Area: An area of frequent soil contact by children of less than 6 years of age as indicated by, but not limited to, such factors including the following: the presence of play equipment (e.g., sandboxes, swing sets, and sliding boards), toys, or other children's possessions, observations of play patterns, or information provided by parents, residents, care givers, or property owners. Residential Building: A buikiing containing one or more residential dwellings. Room: A separate part of the inside of a building, such as a bedroom, living room, dining room, kitchen, bathroom, laundry room, or utility room. To be considered a separate room, the room must be separated from adjoining rooms by built-in walls or archways that extend at least 6 inches from an intersecting wall. Half walls or bookcases count as room separators if built-in. Movable or collapsible partitions or partitions consisting solely of shelves or cabinets are not considered built-in walls. A screened in porch that is used as a living area is a room. Soil Sample: A sample collected in a representative location using ASTM E1727, "Standard Practice for Field Collection of Soil Samples for Lead Determination by Atomic Spectrometry Techniques," or equivalent method. Weighted Arithmetic Mean: The arithmetic mean of sample results weighted by the number of subsamples in each sample. Its purpose is to give influence to a sample relative to the surface area it represents. A single surface sample is comprised of a single subsample. A composite sample may contain from two to four subsamples of the same area as each other and of each single surface sample in the composite. The weighted arithmetic mean is obtained by summing, for all samples, the product of the sample's result multiplied by the number of subsamples in the sample, and dividing the sum by the total number of subsamples contained in all samples. For exa,~m.2Ple, the weighted arithmetic mean of a single surface sample containing 60 ~tg/ft, a composite sample (three subsamples) containing 100 ~tg/ft, and a composite sample (4 subsamples) containing 110 ~tg/ft2 is 100 gg/ft2. This result is based on the equation [60+(3 * 100)+(4' 110)]/(1 +3+4). Window Trough: For a typical double-hung window, the portion of the exterior window sill between the interior window sill (or stool) and the frame of the storm DIVISION 8 - Page 30 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION window. If there is no storm window, the window trough is the area that receives both the upper and lower window sashes when they are both lowered. The window trough is sometimes referred to as the window "well." Wipe Sample: A sample collected by wiping a representative surface of known area, as determined by ASTM E1728, "Standard Practice for Field Collection of Settled Dust Samples Using Wipe Sampling Methods for Lead Determination by Atomic Spectrometry Techniques, or equivalent method, with an acceptable wipe material as defined in ASTM E 1792, "Standard Specification for Wipe Sampling Materials for Lead in Surface Dust." C. Introduction: This specification calls for furnishing all labor, supervision, worker certification and training, tools, materials, and equipment for selected lead-based paint demolition, repair, and debris removal and disposal from the building. The building is to be renovated. General Requirements: Other project requirements such as Conditions of Contract, Work Site Location, and Removal Schedule as identified in Part I above shall also apply. END OF SECTION 13280 - HAZARDOUS MATERIAL REMEDIATION SECTION 13915 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building: 1. Dry-pipe sprinkler systems. DMSION 8 - Page 31 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for piping outside the building. 2. Division 10 Section "Fire-Protection Specialties" for cabinets and fire extinguishers. 3. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for alarm devices not specified in this Section. 4. Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Horizontal Fire Pumps" for fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and pump controllers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. B. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic robber. C. High-Pressure Piping System: Fire-suppression piping system designed to operate at working pressure higher than standard 175 psig ( 1200 kPa). D. PE: Polyethylene plastic. E. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Underground service piping below the building. 1.4 A. 1.5 A. Co SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed air. Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open dry-pipe valve. Water then flows into piping and discharges from opened sprinklers. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig (1200 kPa). High-Pressure piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum. Fire-suppression sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. 2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: a. Automobile Parking Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. DIVISION 8 ~ Page 32 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 1.6 A. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: sq. m) area. b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: (9.5 raids over 139-sq. m) area. c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group2 Occupancy: (12.6 raids over 139-sq. m) area. d. Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: over 232-sq. m) area. e. Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: over 232-sq. m) area. f. Special Occupancy Hazard: jurisdiction. 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. (6.3 mlds over 139- 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. 0.30 gpm over 2500-sq. ft. (18.9 rnL/s 0.40 gpm over 2500-sq. ft. (25.2 mL/s As determined by authorities having Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Office Spaces: 225 sq. fi. (20.9 sq. m). Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m). Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m). Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m). Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations, unless otherwise indicated~ SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Piping materials, including dielectric fittings, flexible connections, and sprinkler specialty fittings. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. 3. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, and specialty valves and trim. 4. Air compressors, including electrical data. 5. Excess-pressure pumps, including electrical data. 6. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting, finish, and other pertinent data. 7. Hose connections, including size, type, and finish. 8. Hose stations, including size, type, and finish of hose connections; type and length of fire hoses; finish of fire hose couplings; type, material, and finish of nozzles; and finish of rack. DIVISION 8 - Page 33 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 1.7 A. 9. Monitors. 10. Fire hydrants. 11. Fire department connections, including type; number, size, and arrangement of inlets; caps and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and finish. 12. Alarm devices, including electrical data. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if applicable. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping." Welding certificates. Field quality-control test reports. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire- suppression systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." 2. NFPA 14, "Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems." 3. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances." 4. NFPA 230, "Fire Protection of Storage." DIVISION 8 - Page 34 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. 1.9 A. EXTRA MATERLM~ Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged cover, with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 2~ Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may he incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 A. DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell end and plain end. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA Cll0, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C 153, ductile-iron compact pattern. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA Cll 1, ductile- or gray-iron gland, robber gasket, and steel bolts and nuts. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C 151, with push-on-joint bell end and plain end. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C 153, ductile-iron compact pattem. DIVISION 8 - Page 35 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2. Gaskets: AWWA C 111, robber. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with factory- or field-formed, radius- cut-grooved ends according to AWWA C606. 1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems: a. Manufacturers: 1) Victaulic Co. of America. 2) Or Equal b. Grooved-End Fittings: ASTMA536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching ductile-iron-pipe OD. c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: AWWA C606, gasketed fitting matching ductile-iron-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching ductile-iron-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated robber gasket with center leg, and steel bolts and nuts. d. Grooved-End-Pipe Transition Coupling: UL213 and AWWAC606, gasketed fitting with end matching ductile-iron-pipe OD and end matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with key matching ductile-iron- pipe groove and key matching steel-pipe groove, prelubricated robber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts. e. Grooved-End Transition Flange: UL 213, gasketed fitting with key for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include flange-type, ductile-iron housing with robber gasket listed for use with housing and steel bolts and nuts. 2.3 A. STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, with factory- or field-formed threaded ends. 1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B 16.1. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3. 3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4. 4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method. 5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865. Plain-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795. ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with retainer lugs that require one-quarter turn to secure pipe in fitting. D17V'ISION 8 - Page 36 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION a. Manufacturers: 1) Anvil International, Inc. 2) Victaulic Co. of America. 3) Ward Manufacturing. Plain-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795. ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, ASME B 16.11. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. and ASMEB16.9 or Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTMA 135, or ASTM A 795, with factory- or field-formed, square-cut- or roll-grooved ends. 1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems: a. Manufacturers: 1) Anvil International, Inc. 2) Central Sprinkler Corp. 3) Ductilic, Inc. 4) JDH Pacific, Inc. 5) National Fittings, Inc. 6) Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc. 7) Southwestern Pipe, Inc. 8) Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div. 9) Victaulic Co. of America. 10) Ward Manufacturing. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching steel-pipe OD. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, pmlubricated robber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts. 2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) or ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, annealed temper; with plain ends. DIVISION 8 - Page 37 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 1. Copper fittings: ASMEB16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASMEB16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP~3 or BCuP-4. Plain-End, Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) or ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Fittings: ASMEB16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASMEB16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASMEB16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match tubing system. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball- and-socket metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 4. Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on copper water tube. a. Manufacturers: 1) T-Drill Industries, Inc. 5. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP-3 or BCuP-4. Grooved-End, Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) or ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper; with factory- or field-formed, roll-grooved ends. Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on copper water tube. a. Manufacturers: 1) T-Drill Industries, Inc. 2. Grooved-Joint Systems: a. Manufacturers: 1) Anvil International, Inc. 2) Victaulic Co. of America. Co Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M), copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting. Fittings may have ends factory or field expanded to steel-pipe OD if required for copper tube systems using grooved-end-pipe couplings. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: UL213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting equivalent to AWWA C606, but made to match DIVISION 8 - Page 38 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION copper-tube OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching steel- pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated robber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts. Use grooved-end-pipe couplings for tube and fitting that have expanded ends. 2.5 A. Bo DIELECTRIC FITTINGS Assembly shall be copper alloy, ferrous, and insulating materials with ends matching piping system. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated assembly, designed for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar materials and ends with inside threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. 1. Manufacturers: Capitol Manufacturing Co. Central Plastics Company. Epco Sales, Inc. Hart Industries International, Inc. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 175-psig (1200- kPa) minimum working-pressure rating as required for piping system. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: Components for field assembly shall include CR or phenolic gasket, PE or phenolic bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products and Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining and threaded ends and 300~psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure rating at 225 degF ( 107 deg C). DIVISION 8 - Page 39 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2.6 A. 1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working- pressure rating at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 1. Manufacturers: Perfection Corporation. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. Victaulic Co. of America. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS Flexible connectors shall have materials suitable for system fluid. Include 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating and ends according to the following: 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded. 2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged. 3. Option for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Grooved for use with grooved-end- pipe couplings. B. Manufacturers: 1. Anamet Inc. 2. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 3. Flexicraft Industries. 4. Flex-Pression, Ltd. 5. Flex-Weld, Inc. 6. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 7. Mercer Rubber Co. 8. Metraflex, Inc. 9. Proco Products, Inc. 10. Unaflex Inc. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to hose. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose. DIVISION 8 - Page 40 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless- steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose. 2.7 CORROSION-PROTECTIVE ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, PE film, 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness, tube or sheet. 2.8 A. SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG appr~)ved, with 175-psig (1200- kPa) minimum working-pressure rating, and made of materials compatible with piping. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall have 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating if fittings are components of high-pressure piping system. B. Outlet Specialty Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. c. Ductilic, Inc. d. JDH Pacific, Inc. e. National Fittings, Inc. f. Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc. g. Southwestern Pipe, Inc. h. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div. i. Victaulic Co. of America. j. Ward Manufacturing. 2. Mechanical-T and -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with gaskets, bolts and nuts, and threaded, locking-lug, or grooved outlets. 3. Snap-On and Strapless Outlet Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing or casting with gasket and threaded outlet. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded or locking-lug inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass. 1. Manufacturers: ao Central Sprinkler Corp. Fire-End and Croker Corp. Viking Corp. Victaulic Co. of America. DIVISION 8 - Page 41 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2.9 A. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet, and threaded outlet for sprinkler. 1. Manufacturers: Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. Fire-End and Croker Corp. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain outlet and sight glass. 1. Manufacturers: a. AGF Manufacturing Co. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. c. G/J Innovations, Inc. d. Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc. F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet, and seals. 1. Manufacturers: a. CECA, LLC. b. Merit. LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig (1200kPa) minimum pressure rating. Valves shall have 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system. B. Gate Valves with Wall Indicator Posts: Gate Valves: UL 262, cast-iron body, bronze mounted, with solid disc, nonrising stem, operating nut, and flanged ends. Indicator Posts: UL 789, horizontal-wall type, cast-iron body, with hand wheel, extension rod, locking device, and cast-iron barrel. Manufacturers: Grinnell Fire Protection. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. NIBCO. Stockham. C. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc. DIVISION 8 - Page 42 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. NPS 2 and NPS 24/2 (DN 50 and DN 65): Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with grooved ends. NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile-iron body with grooved ends. Manufacturers: a. NIBCO. b. Victaulic Co. of America. D. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091. 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. a. Manufacturers: 1) Global Safety Products, Inc. 2) Milwaukee Valve Company. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged or grooved ends. a. Manufacturers: 1) Central Sprinkler Corp. 2) Global Safety Products, Inc. 3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. 4) Mueller Company. 5) NmCO. 6) Pratt, Henry Company. 7) Victaulic Co. of America. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: UL312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved ends. 1. Manufacturers: a. AFAC Inc. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. c. Central Sprinkler Corp. d. Clow Valve Co. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. g. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. h. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. i. Grinnell Fire Protection. j. Hammond Valve. k. Matco-Norca, Inc. DIVISION 8 - Page 43 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 1. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. m. Mueller Company. n. NIBCO. o. Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div. p. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. q. Star Sprinkler Inc. r. Stockham. s. United Brass Works, Inc. t. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd. u. Victaulic Co. of America. v. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type. 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. a. Manufacturers: 1) Crane Co.; Crone Valve Group; Crane Valves. 2) Hammond Valve. 3) NmCO. 4) United Brass Works, Inc. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends. a. Manufacturers: 1) Clow Valve Co. 2) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 3) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 4) Hammond Valve. 5) Milwaukee Valve Company. 6) Mueller Company. 7) NIBCO. 8) Red-White Valve Corp. 9) United Brass Works, Inc. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching connecting piping. Indicator: Electrical, l15-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and threaded ends. a. Manufacturers: 1) Milwaukee Valve Company. DIVISION 8 - Page 44 of 6.1 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2) NmCO. 3) Victaulic Co. of America. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged or grooved ends. a. Manufacturers: 1) Central Sprinkler Corp. 2) Grinnell Fire Protection. 3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. 4) Milwaukee Valve Company. 5) NIBCO. 6) Victaulic Co. of America. 2.10 A. UNLISTED GENERAL-DUTY VALVES Ball Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, 2-piece copper-alloy body with chrome-plated brass ball, 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating, blowout-proof stem, and threaded ends. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 4, Class 125 minimum, swing type with bronze body, nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends. Gate Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, with bronze body, solid wedge, and threaded ends. Globe Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, with bronze body, nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends. 2.11 A. SPECIALTY VALVES Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductile-iron body with flanged or grooved ends, and 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum pressure rating. Control valves shall have 300-psig (2070-kPa) pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system. 1. Manufacturers: a. AFAC Inc. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. c. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. e. Grinnell Fire Protection. f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. g. Star Sprinkler Inc. DIVISION 8 - Page 45 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION h. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd. i. Victaulic Co. of America. j. Viking Corp. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, and fill-line attachment with strainer. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping. Dry-Pipe Valves: UL 260, differential type; with bronze seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device: UL 260, automatic device to maintain correct air pressure in piping. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping, bypass valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure, strainer, pressure ratings with 14-to 60-psig (95- to 410-kPa) adjustable range, and 175-psig (1200- kPa) maximum inlet pressure. 1) Manufacturers: a) AFAC Inc. b) Central Sprinkler Corp. c) General Air Products, Inc. d) Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. e) Grinnell Fire Protection. f) Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. g) Star Sprinkler Inc. h) Viking Corp. Air Compressor: UL 753, fractional horsepower, 120-V ac, 60 Hz, single phase. 1) Manufacturers: a) AFAC Inc. b) Gast Manufacturing, Inc. c) Grinnell Fire Protection. d) Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. e) Viking Corp. DIVISION 8 - Page 46 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2.12 A. Automatic Drain Valves: UL 1726, NPS 3/4 (DN 20), ball-check device with threaded ends. 1. Manufacturers: a. AFAC Inc. b. Grinnell Fire Protection. CONTROL PANELS Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type control panel as indicated, including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid- valve circuitry for operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries; field:wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire alarm bell; lamp test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier. 1. Panels: UL listed and FMG approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries. 2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by breakable strut. 3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut. 2.13 A. SPRINKLERS Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum pressure rating. Sprinklers shall have 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum pressure rating if · sprinklers are components of high-pressure piping system. B. Manufacturers: 1. AFAC Inc. 2. Central Sprinkler Corp. 3. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. 4. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 5. Grinnell Fire Protection. 6. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 7. Star Sprinkler Inc. 8. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd. 9. Victaulic Co. of America. DIVISION 8 - Page 47 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 10. Viking Corp. C. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following: 1. UL 199, for nonresidential applications. 2. UL 1626, for residential applications. 3. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application. 1. Open Sprinklers: UL 199, without heat-responsive element. a. Orifice: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8. b. Orifice: 17/32 inch (13.5 mm), with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2. E. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows: 1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate. 2. Extended-coverage sprinklers. 3. Flow-control sprinklers, with automatic open and shutoff feature. 4. Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon. 5. High-pressure sprinklers. 6. Institution sprinklers, made with a small, breakaway projection. 7. Open sprinklers. 8. Pendent sprinklers. 9. Pendent, dry-type sprinklers. 10. Quick-response sprinklers. 11. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon. 12. Sidewall sprinklers. 13. Sidewall, dry-type sprinklers. 14. Upright sprinklers. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint. - Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat. 2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler. DIVISION 8 - Page 48 of 61 DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2.14 A. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS Manufacturers: 1. AFAC Inc. 2. Central Sprinkler Corp. 3. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. 4. Fire-End and Croker Corp. 5. Fire Protection Products, Inc. 6. GMR International Equipment Corporation. 7. Guardian Fire Equipment Incorporated. 8. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div. 9. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 10. United Brass Works, Inc. Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum pressure rating; with corrosion-resistant-metal body with brass inlets, brass wall escutcheon plate, brass lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains, and brass lugged swivel connections. Include inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon plate with marking similar to "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE:" 1. Type: Flush, with two inlets and square or rectangular escutcheon plate. 2. Type: Exposed, projecting, with two inlets and round escutcheon plate. 3. Finish: Polished brass. Exposed, Freestanding-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 300-psig (2070- kPa) pressure rating; with corrosion-resistant-metal body, brass inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and bottom outlet with pipe threads. Include brass lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains; brass lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 18- inch- (460-mm-) high, brass sleeve; and round, floor, brass escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE." 1. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished brass. 2.15 A. B. ALARM DEVICES Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-wheel operator with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wail construction and 10-inch- (250-mm-) diameter, cast-aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory finish. Include NPS 3/4 (DN 20) inlet and NPS 1 (DN 25) drain connections. DIVISION 8 - Page 49 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 1. Manufacturers: a. AFAC Inc. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. c. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. e. Grinnell Fire Protection. f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. g. Star Sprinkler Inc. h. Viking Corp. Electrically Operated Alarm: UL 464, with 8-irich- (200-mm-) minimum- diameter, vibrating-type, metal alarm bell with red-enamel factory finish and suitable for outdoor use. 1. Manufacturers: Potter Electric Signal Company. System Sensor. Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical~supervision, paddle-operated-type, water-flow detector with 250-psig (1725-kPa) pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed. 1. Manufacturers: a. ADT Security Services, Inc. b. Grinnell Fire Protection. c. ITT McDonnell & Miller. d. Potter Electric Signal Company. e. System Sensor. f. Viking Corp. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Pressure Switch: UL 753, electrical~supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature. Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that operates on rising pressure and signals water flow. 1. Manufacturers: a. Grinnell Fire Protection. b. Potter Electric Signal Company. c. System Sensor. d. Viking Corp. DIVISION 8 - Page 50 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2.16 A. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position. 1. Manufacturers: a. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. b. Potter Electric Signal Company. c. System Sensor. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switch: IlL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position. l. Manufacturers: a. Potter Electric Signal Company. b. System Sensor. PRESSURE GAGES Manufacturers: 1. AGF Manufacturing Co. 2. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. 3. Brecco Corporation. 4. Dresser Equipment Group; Instrument Div. 5. Marsh Bellofram. 6. WIKA Instrument Co~poration. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch- (90- to l l5-mm-) diameter, dial pressure gage with range of 0 to 300 psig (0 to 2070 kPa). Water System Piping: Include caption "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face. Air System Piping: Include caption "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Report test results promptly and in writing. DIVISION 8 - Page 51 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 3.2 EARTHWORK A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.3 A. EXAMINATION Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping connections before installation. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire- and smoke-rated construction, framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are to be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.4 A. B. C. Do PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard- weight steel pipe with grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe and fittings and restrained joints. Include corrosion-protective encasement. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Type K (Type A), soft copper tube; wrought- copper fittings; and brazed joints. Include corrosion-protective encasement. 3.5 A. SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS Standard-Pressure, Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System, 175-psig (1200-kPa) Maximum Working Pressure: 1. Sprinkler-Piping Fitting Option: Specialty sprinkler fittings, NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller, including mechanical-T and -cross fittings, may be used downstream from sprinkler zone valves. 2. Copper-Tube Fitting Option: Copper, mechanically formed tee branches NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, with brazed joints, may be used downstream from sprinkler DIVISION 8 - Page 52 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION zone valves. Comply with schedule tube and branch sizes listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory." 3. NPS 1-1/2 (DN40) and Smaller: Threaded-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 4. NPS 1-I/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Plain-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; locking-lug fittings; and twist-locked joints. 5. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Plain-end, Type L (Type B), hard copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints. 6. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: SDR 13.5, CPVC pipe; Schedule40, CPVC fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 7. NPS 2 (DN 50): Threaded-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 8. NPS 2 (DN 50): Plain-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; locking-lug fittings; and twist-locked joints. 9. NPS 2 (DN 50): Grooved-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. 10. NPS 2 (DN 50): Plain-end, Type L (Type B), hard copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints. 11. NPS2-1/2 to NPS3-1/2 (DN65 to DN90): Threaded-end, black, standard- weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 12. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Plain-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; steel welding fittings; and welded joints. 13. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Grooved-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. 14. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): Plain-end, Type L (Type B), hard copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints. 15. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Threaded-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 16. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Plain-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; steel welding fittings; and welded joints. 17. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Grooved-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. Standard-Pressure, Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System, 175-psig (1200-kPa) Maximum Working Pressure: Sprinkler-Piping Fitting Option: Specialty sprinkler fittings, NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller, including mechanical-T and -cross fittings, may be used downstream from sprinkler zone valves. 2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Threaded-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 3. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Plain-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; locking-lug fittings; and twist-locked joints. 4. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Threaded-end, galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. DIVISION 8 - Page 53 of 61 3.6 A. DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 5. NPS I-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Plain-end, galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe; locking-lug fittings; and twist-locked joints. 6. NPS 2 (DN 50): Threaded-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 7. NPS 2 (DN 50): Plain-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; locking-lug fittings; and twist-locked joints. 8. NPS 2 (DN 50): Grooved-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved- end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. 9. NPS 2 (DN 50): Threaded-end, galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 10. NPS 2 (DN 50): Plain-end, galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe; locking-lug fittings; and twist-locked joints. 11. NPS 2 (DN 50): Grooved-end, galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. 12. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Threaded-end, galvanized, standard- weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 13. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Grooved-end, galvanized, standard- weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. 14. NPS2-1/2 to NPS3-1/2 (DN65 to DN90): Threaded-end, galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 15. NPS2-1/2 to NPS3-1/2 (DN65 to DN90): Grooved-end, galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. 16. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Threaded-end, galvanized, standard- weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 17. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Grooved-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. 18. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Threaded-end, galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 19. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Grooved-end, galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. VALVE APPLICATIONS Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where required by NFPA 13. a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves. Unlisted General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FMG- approved valves are not required by NFPA 13. DMSION 8 - Page 54 of 61 3.7 A. Do DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Shutoff Duty: Use bail, butterfly, or gate vaives. Throttling Duty: Use bail or globe valves. JOINT CONSTRUCTION Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanicai Materiais and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with ASME B 1.20.1. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain-end piping into locking-lug fitting and rotate retainer lug one-quarter turn. Pressure-Seaied Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure. Include use of specific equipment, pressure-seaiing tool, and accessories. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure. Drill pilot hole in copper tube, form branch for collar, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into formed-collar outlet. F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. 2. 3. 4. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Radius-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end fittings and grooved-end-pipe couplings. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated. Copper Tube: Roll-groove tubing. Use grooved-end fittings and grooved-end- tube couplings. Dry-Pipe Systems: Use fittings and gaskets listed for dry-pipe service. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with both piping materials. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smailer: Use dielectric unions, couplings, or nipples. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange insulation kits. 3.8 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING A. Connect fire-suppression piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for exterior piping. DIVISION 8 - Page 55 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-service piping. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Di ' ' " stnbut~on for backflow preventers. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service. 3.9 A. Co 3.10 A. WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION Connect fire-suppression piping to building's interior water distribution piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for interior piping. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water distribution piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply. PIPING INSTALLATION Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. Install underground ductile-iron service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with restrained joints. Encase piping in corrosion-protective encasement. Install underground copper service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24. Encase piping in corrosion-protective encasement. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger connections. DIVISION 8 - Page 56 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION H. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and located according to NFPA 13. I. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. J. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes. K. Install drain valves on standpipes. L. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building. M. Install alarm devices in piping systems. N. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials. 1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14. 2. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. O. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing. P. Drain dry-type standpipe piping. Q. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping. R. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices. S. Fill wet-standpipe system piping with water. T. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water. 3.11 A. VALVE INSTALLATION Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve. DIVISION 8 - Page 57 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Co Do Valves for Wall-Type Fire Hydrants: Install nonrising-stem gate valve in water-supply pipe. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water supply sources. E. Specialty Valves: 1. Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection. 2. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment. Air-Pressure Maintenance Devices for Dry-Pipe Systems: Install shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling; pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig (95- to 410- kPa) adjustable range; and 175-psig (1200-kPa) maximum inlet pressure. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping. Install compressed-air supply piping from building's compressed-air,piping system. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, in main supply to deluge system. 3.12 A. SPRINK! F,R APPLICATIONS Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated, use the following sprinkler types: 2. 3. 4. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent, dry sprinklers; and sidewall, dry sprinklers as indicated. Special Applications: Extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response sprinklers where indicated. Sprinkler Finishes: a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes. b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factOry-painted white cover plate. c. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon. DIVISION 8 - Page 58 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION d. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon. e. Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome. 3.13 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels and tiles. B. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. 3.14 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install wall-type, fire department connections in vertical wall. B. Install freestanding-type, fire department connections in level surface. 1. Install protective pipe bollards on two sides of each fire department connection. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards. C. Install ball drip valve at each check valve for fire department connection. 3.15 A. B. C. CONNECTIONS Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. Connect water-supply piping to tim-suppression piping. Include backflow preventer between potable-water piping and fire-suppression piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain or outside building. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and accessories. Connect excess-pressure pumps to the following piping and wiring: 2. 3. 4. 5. Sprinkler system, hydraulically. Pressure gages and controls, hydraulically. Electrical power system. Alarm device accessories for pump. Fire alarm. G. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping. DIVISION 8 - Page 59 of 61 DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION H. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring: J. K. L. M. 1. Pressure gages and controls. 2. Electrical power system. 3. Fire alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.16 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13 and in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.17 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 4. Start and mn excess-pressure pumps. 5. Start and mn air compressors. 6. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. 7. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System Acceptance" Chapter. 8. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required. 9. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. 10. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. DIVISION 8 - Page 60 of 61 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 3.18 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish. C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion. 3.19 A. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 13915 DIVISION 8 - Page 61 of 61 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA and other Contract Documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION NO. 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Included in this Division are the following sections: 14420 Wheelchair lift DIVISION 10 - Page 1 of 3 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS SECTION 14420 - WHEELCHAIR LIFT SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: the shop drawings shall show a complete layout of lift equipment detailing dimensions and clearances as required. B. Submit physical samples of all items requiring selection of color or finish. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installation: Installer shall have a history of completed jobs of similar size and scope, and shall be qualified. DELIVERY~ STORAGE AND HANDILING Item shall be delivered to the job site in original, unopened cartons or other packaging materials necessary to protect finishes. Item shall be stored in manufacturer's packaging until installation. Item shall be stored in horizontal position with adequate support to ensure flatness and to prevent damage to pre-finished surfaces. MANUFACTURER AND MODEL Savaria Concord Inc. Model No. ES-125 Type 1 Incline Platform Lift (Plus Model) DESCRIPTION OF MODEL A. It is an inclined platform lift with an aimraft cable and winding dram assembly located under the stairs. It is designed for indoor or outdoor (with optional package) applications. Where singular reference is made to lifts or lift components, such reference shall apply to number of lifts or components required to complete installation. This specification provides a broad outline of required equipment and does not describe the details of design and construction. Lifts shall be erected, installed, adjusted, tested and placed in operation by lift system manufacturer, or manufacturer's authorized installer. B. Lifts shall be in accordance with ASME A 18.1 and ADA compliant including local codes and regulations except where specified otherwise. INSPECTION DIVISION 10 - Page 2 of 3 DMSION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Before installation, the installer shall inspect the site to ensure that no defects or conditions exist which would result in an unsatisfactory installation of the partitions. Measurements should also be taken at this time to further ensure correct installation. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SUBCONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS: 1. Execute work of this section only by a company that has adequate product liability insurance. 2. Skilled tradesmen must be employees of the installing contractor approved by the lift manufacturer, with demonstrated ability to perform the work on a timely basis. B. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: 1. Fabricate and install work in compliance with applicable jurisdictional authorities. 2. File shop drawings and submissions with local authorities as the information is made available. Company pre-inspection and jurisdictional authority inspections and permits are to be made on timely basis as required. 3. Submit certification that platform lift system complies with current ADA requirements. INSTALLATION A. The following preparatory work to receive the lifts specified in this section is part of the work by others.: 1. Permanent 120 VAC 20 amp single phase power to operate lift to be provided from lockable fused/cartridge type disconnect switch. Refer to drawings for permanent power specifications and location of disconnects. Temporary power may be provided to expedite installation of lift. 2. Provide a plumb and square support wall with smooth interior surfaces. If support wall is not available, provide tread anchors for support posts. 3. Provide staircase per lift manufacturer's shop drawings. CLEANING All rubbish and cartons generated by installer shall be removed and area left broom clean. WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide at least a 30 months limited guarantee on parts. END OF SECTION 14420 - WHEELCHAIR LIFT DIVISION 10 - Page 3 of 3 DIVISION 15B - PLUMBING GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDmONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDmONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA, and other Contract Documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items, which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS - DIVISION 15B - PLUMBING 1500O 15060 15090 15411 15424 15450 15900 General Piping Hangers, Supports, Expansion and Contraction Devices Plumbing Fixtures Domestic Water Heater Sleeves and Trim Project Completion DIVISION 15B -Page 1 of 9 DIVISION 15B - PLUMBING SECTION 15000 - GENERAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS All applicable provisions of the section entitled "General Conditions" and "Special Conditions" shall apply to all work under this Contract as if written out in full, and shall be adhered to by the Contractor. WORK INCLUDED The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals to complete all plumbing work as specified herein, shown on the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. In general, the work shall include but not be limited to the following: All plumbing fixtures and trim as hereinafter specified and/or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Cutting and patching as required so that all piping shall be concealed. 3. Pipe covering as specified; sleeves and escutcheons for piping. 4. Domestic water heater. Testing and procurement of approvals for all fixtures as may be required by the Engineer, governmental authorities and utility companies having jurisdiction. SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall furnish three (3) copies of Catalogue Cut sheets of all items to be furnished by him under this Contract for approval by the Engineer. DRAWINGS Contract Drawings are generally diagrammatic, not showing every bend or offset if required to properly replace plumbing fixtures to meet job conditions, building geometry, changes in locations, work of other trades, etc. The Contractor shall furnish all such additional offsets, bends, piping, etc., at no additional cost to the Owner so that the completed installations will result in neat, workmanlike, first-class operating plumbing systems of the highest quality. Field Drawings shall be maintained by the Contractor showing actual installed locations of all equipment and materials under this Contract. The Contractor shall maintain shop drawings approved by the Engineer in a file in the field. Record Drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer upon completion of work and shall be marked "As- Built". DIVISION 15B - Page 2 of 9 DIVISION 15B - PLUMBING PERMITS AND REGULATIONS The Plumbing Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits necessary to conduct the work and complete the Contract. All work shall be performed in strict accordance with the regulations and requiremems of the various agencies having jurisdiction thereof. Upon completion of the work provided for in this Contract, and before final payment shall be made, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with any necessary certificates of approval issued by these various agencies. END OF SECTION 15000 - GENERAL SECTION 15060 - PIPING MATERIALS Ao Leader boot replacement shall be standard weight cast iron hub and spigot, conforming to ASTM standard A 74-87. The Contractor may provide "slip-on" type compression joints with gaskets as approved by the engineer. B. Match existing piping where being hooked up to new fixtures. METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION Ao Workmanship shall result in quality of the first class only. Piping shall be concealed wherever possible and shall be mn straight and direct as possible either at right angle to or parallel with walls, floors and ceilings. Where slopes are indicated for piping, such runs shall be installed at the uniform rate indicated without high points and valleys between inverts shown. Water supply connections to f'nttures shall be complete with chrome plated cast brass piping and stops. END OF SECTION 15060 - PIPING DIVISION 15B - Page 3 of 9 DIVISION 15B - PLUMBING SECTION 15090 - HANGERS~ SUPPORTS, EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION DEVICES GENERAL The Contractor shall support all above ground, above ceiling and exposed piping systems in a suitable, secure manner as approved by the Engineer. In general, all hung piping above the floor and ceiling shall be supported at 6-foot centers with threaded rod and steel pipe cradle type hangers or pipe supports capable of handling the full weighted load. Hanging devices shall be as manufactured by Grinnell, Grabler, Elcen or approved equal, and designed for the hanging method required and as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor when installing all supports shall allow for expansion and contraction of all piping as is required. All required devices to properly allow for expansion and contractions shall be incorporated by the Contractor in the construction of all piping systems. END OF SECTION 15090. HANGERS, SUPPORTS~ EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION DEVICES DIVISION 15B - Page 4 of 9 DIVISION 15B - PLUMBING SECTION 15411 - PLUMBING FIXTURES MATERIALS - GENERAL Vitreous China: First quality, smooth, uniform color and texture, with fused on glaze covering surfaces exposed to view. Surfaces shall be free of chips, craze, warpage, cracks and discolorations. Surfaces in contact with walls or floors shall be flat, with warpage not to exceed 1/16 inch per foot. 2. Color: White. Bo Fixture Trim: Brass, bronze, or stainless steel construction; consisting of supply and waste fittings, faucets, traps, stop valves, escutcheons, sink strainers, nipples, supplies, and metal trim. C. Fixture Trim Finishes: Brass or Bronze: Polished or satin finished chrome plating, 0.02 mil chromium over 0.2 mil nickel plating. Stainless Steel: Invisible welds and seams, and unless otherwise specified, polished to No. 4 commercial finish. Fixture Hold-down Bolts: Steel, plated for corrosion resistance. Cap nuts, metal polished and chrome plated. Combination Faucets: Faucets shall turn counter to each other for the on and off positions. F. Vandal Resistant Fasteners: Torx head with center pin. LAVATORY - HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE Fixture: Vitreous china, flat top, extended back ledge punched for lavatory fitting, anti- splash rim, front overflow, and lower lugs for bearing plate bolting; designed for wall mounting, 4" centers, and ADA compliant. Model No. K-2054 as manufactured by Kohler or approved equal. Lavatory Faucet: Center set unit with 4" trim plate, sensor activated, below deck thermostatic mixing valve and 120 volt box mount transformer. Model No. ETF-80 as manufactured by Sloan Valve Company or approved equal. C. Waste Fitting: 1-1/4 inch tailpiece with a cast brass flat perforated strainer grate. DIVISION 15B - Page 5 of 9 DIVISION 15B - PLUMBING D. Trap: Cast brass, nOn-adjustable P trap, i-1/4 inch tubing inlet, 1-1/2 inch ips outlet. E. Trap Nipple: Ips brass with a solid cast brass escutcheon. F. Supplies: 3/8 inch ips brass, with offset and straight key operated stops with keys. VITREOUS CHINA WATER CLOSETS Fixtures: Vitreous china, full size, ADA compliant, elongated combination toilet. Model No. K-4302 Highcrest as manufactured by Kohler or approved equal. Water Closet Operation: Fixture shall flush satisfactorily without extraordinary rise of water level in the bowl. Maximum gallons of water per flush: 1.6 gallons. C. Water Closet Floor Flange: Use with Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Cast iron, 90 ounce minimum weight. Water Closet Seat: Extra heavy duty, commercial design; Model No. K-4670-CA by Kohler, or approved equal. Color: White. Eo Flush Valve: exposed, battery operated, sensor operated, top bowl spud, 1.6gpf, and override button. Model No. 8111 G2 Optima Plus by Sloan Valve Company or approved equal. CLEANING~ FLUSHING AND ADJUSTMENT A. Clean fixture and trim. Remove grease and digt; polish surfaces but leave stickers and warning labels intact. B. Flush supply piping and traps; clean strainers. C. Adjust stops for proper delivery. D. Adjust metering faucets for proper timing. END OF SECTION 15411 - PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 15B - Page 6 of 9 DMSION 15B - PLUMBING SECTION 15424 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATER MATERIALS Water heater - shall be 40 gallon, Model RUEM PRO40-2 Professional manufactured by RUUD having a recovery rate of 21 GPH at a 90 F temperature rise or approved equal. METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION A. Water heater shall be installed with two unions, one ball valve and one relief valve. B. The water heaters shall be installed in accordance with the contract drawings and as per the manufacturer's instructions. The engineer shall approve final layout of all plumbing materials and connections. C. Water heater shall be set 8" above finish floor on solid concrete blocks. D. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for final electrical connections and power to water heater. END OF SECTION 15424 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATER DIVISION 15B - Page 7 of 9 DIVISION 15B - PLUMBING SECTION 15450 - SLEEVES AND TRIM GENERAL The Contractor shall install sleeves at all locations where pipes pass through masonry walls- if applicable. MATERIALS Sleeves - shall be galvanized steel, 16 gauge minimum, sized one inch larger than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through it. Sleeves shall be fastened in place and a surface finishing plate or escutcheon shall be installed to cover the sleeve opening but allow the pipe to pass through the plate or escutcheon. Plates or escutcheons shall be chrome-plated brass securely fastened. All sleeves shall be concealed by the plate or escutcheon. END OF SECTION 15450 - SLEEVES AND TRIM DIVISION 15B ~ Page 8 of 9 DIVISION 15B - PLUMBING SECTION 15900 - PRO,[ECT COMPLETION CLEANING AND ADJUSTING As directed, the Contractor shall finally and thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment, piping, and other exposed work. Cleaning work shall be done in stages if so ordered to facilitate the work of others. All traps, wastes and supplies shall be shown to be free and unobstructed. All valves, faucets and automatic control devices shall be carefully adjusted for proper and quiet operation. GUARANTEE The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee for a period of one year from date of final acceptance of the work, all materials and equipment furnished and installed and shall replace any work or equipment without charge which may become, as a result of defective work or materials, or which may be damaged during the correction of defective work. TESTS The Contractor shall perform and pass all required tests prior to acceptance of the work. These tests shall include but are not limited to the following: Hydrostatic Pressure Test shall be performed on all piping at a minimum pressure of 100 psi. Hydrostatic Pressure Test on all waste water drainage and soil piping when systems are filled to overflowing. Provide temporary test plugs as required. The entire plumbing system shall be subject to function under normal design operating conditions and shall be leak free and capable of withstanding actual water pressures prior to final acceptance of the work. Final payment shall not constitute release or remove obligations from the Contractor to provide an acceptable operating system. STERILIZATION All potable water lines shall be sterilized in an approved manner prior to acceptance. FINAL CLOSEOUT The Contractor shall provide operations and maintenance manuals for all materials, equipment and systems installed and instmct the Owner's designated personnel on their use. END OF SECTION 15900 - PROJECT COMPLETION DIVISION 15B - Page 9 of 9 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTIONS 15050 15055 15060 15071 15075 15081 15082 15181 15183 15194 15441 15511 15512 15732 15738 15739 15764 15768 15815 15820 15838 15855 15861 15900 15940 15990 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 15A - MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Motors Hangers and Supports Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls Mechanical Identification Duct Insulation Equipment Insulation Hydronic Piping Refrigerant Piping Gas Piping Hydronic Heating Hot Water Pumps Boilers (Gas-Fired) Cast-Iron Boilers (Oil-Fired) Water Source Heat Pump Units (Geo-Thermal) Split-System Air-Handling Units Split-System Condensing Units Radiators Unit Ventilators Metal Ducts Duct Accessories Power Ventilators Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles Air Filters HVAC Instrumentation a~d Controls Sequence of Operation Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Mechanical demolition. 9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 10. Painting and finishing. 1 I. Concrete bases. 12. Supports and anchorage. 1.3 A. C. D. E. DEFINITIONS Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical &tuipment rooms. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for robber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer robber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene robber. 1.4 SUBMfI'fALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons. B. Welding certificates. 1.5 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS Di.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.6 A. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 A. B. C. COORDINATION Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Purr2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND F1WFINGS A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.3 A. B. JOINING MATERIALS Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BcuP Series, copper-phosphoms alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, Bagl, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D 10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 2.4 A. TRANSITION FITtINGS AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 1. Available Manufacturers: Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. JCM Industries. Smith-Blair, Inc. Viking Johnson. 2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. 4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. Femco, Inc. Mission Rubber Company. Plastic Oddities, Inc. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FI'FI'fNGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder- joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zum Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. D. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.6 A. MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Available Manufacturers: Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Calpico, Inc. Metraflex Co. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel and Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.7 A. B. 2.8 A. SLEEVES Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. ESCUTCHEONS Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish. C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass. D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated, Rough brass, Polished chrome-plated and rough brass. E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish. F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish. G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate. H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. 2.9 A. GROUT Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. noncorrosive, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. MECHANICAL DEMOLITION Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 A. PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction F. G. H. I. J. K. loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. Install piping to permit valve servicing. Install piping at indicated slopes. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Install piping to allow application of insulation. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast- brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Use the following: Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or spring clips. g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide l/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Hashing and Trim" for flashing. 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" or drawing detail "Pipe Penetration at Rated Partition" for materials. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.3 A. 3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debri~ from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS 33.8. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. PIPING CONNECTIONS connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: Make 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and penpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.6 PAINTING A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting (Consumer Line Products) or Painting (Professional Line Products)." B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.7 A. CONCRETE BASES Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicate, d, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete or Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)." 3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.9 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 15050 SECTION 15055 - MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementa~ Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. B. SUMMARY This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Conn:ols" for mounting motors and vibration isolation and seismic-control devices. 2. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements for motor-driven equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Factory-Installed Motor: component of equipment. A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a 1.4 A. SUBMITTALS Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that motors, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following: 1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Motorized Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which th~ certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 1.5 A. C. Test Reports: Written reports specified in Parts 2 and 3. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For field-installed motors to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors of a single type through one source from a single manufacturer. Product Options for Field-Installed Motors: DrawIngs indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of motors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section Product Reqmrements. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 A. 1.7 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arrangIng to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: I. Notify Architect at least two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. COORDINATION Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices. Provide motors that are: 1. Compatible with the following: a. Magnetic controllers. b. Multispeed controllers. c. Reduced-voltage controllers. 2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use throughout speed range without overheating. 3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load. 4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for belt tensioning. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MOTOR REQUIREMENTS MotOr requirements apply to factory-installed and field-installed motors except as follows: 1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in another Section. 2. Manufacturer for a factory-installed motor requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase. B. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase. C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz. D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which motor is connected. E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors. F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. H. Enclosure: Open dripproof. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Standard efficiency according to NEMA MG 1, Para. 12.59 and Table 12-10. C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed. D. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated. E. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated bail bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated. G. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated. H. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or G. 2. Motors Smailer Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smailer than 7.5 hp. 1. Finish: Gray enamel. 2.4 A. POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminais in motor terminal box, suited to control method. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output. 2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation. 3. Insulation: Class H. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings, integrai condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with nonhygroscopic materiai. 1. Finish: Chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer. D. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1: 1. Measure winding resistance. 2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. 3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency. 4. Perform high-potential test. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Split-phase start, capacitor mn. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors. Source Quality Control: 'Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1: 2. 3. 4. Measure winding resistance. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency. Perform high-potential test. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive field-installed motors for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in of conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before motor installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 A. MOTOR INSTALLATION Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load transfer link. B. Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 3. 3.3 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at motor design load. 2. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation. 3. Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following: 3. 4. 5. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for compliance with requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Verify beating lubrication. Verify proper motor rotation. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: Test procedures used: Test results that comply with requirements. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 CLEANING A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. B. Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 15055 SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. B. SUMMARY This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure. 2. Division 13 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers. 3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1:4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. D. Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. 1.5 SUBMrlTALS B. 1.6 A, Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal- hanger shield insert indicated. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators. QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Pipe Hangers: a. AAA Technology and Specialties Co., Inc. b. B-Line Systems, Inc. c. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. d. Empire Tool & Manufacturing Co., Inc. e. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. f. Grinnell Corp. g. GS Metals Corp. h, Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. i. National Pipe Hanger Corp. j. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. k. PHS Industries, Inc. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 2. Channel Support Systems: a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit. c. GS Metals Corp. d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. e. National Pipe Hanger Corp. f. Thomas & Betts Corp. g. Unistmt Corp. h. Wesanco, Inc. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. PHS Industries, Inc. 2.2 A. Pipe Shields, Inc. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. Value Engineered Products, Inc. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems: Gunnebo Fastening Corp. Hilti, Inc. ITW Ramset/Red Head. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. MANUFACTURED UNITS Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types. 1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield. 3. 4. 5. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM'C 533, Type I calcium silicate. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. ForClevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees ofpipe. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-rrdxed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type2): For suspension of 120 to 450 degF pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required. 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off- center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2. 10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, N-PS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 18. Adjustable. Roller Hangers (MSS Type43): For suspension of pipes, NPS2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. 20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary. 21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to N'PS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 2. 3. 4. Steel Tumbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I- beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I- beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one oftbe following for indicated loads: Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where head room is limited. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crashing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high- density, 100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor battier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. 3.2 A. Bo HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel Systems. 1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-I.1. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum p~pe deflect~ons allowed by ASME B31.9, Budding Services P~p~ng, is not exceeded. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2:12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4:12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6:18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14:24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16toNPS24: 24inches long and 0.105 inchthick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. 3.4 METAL FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Dl.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undemut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. 3.6 A. PAINTING Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brash or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply gaivanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 15060 SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS PART 1 1.1 A. 1.2 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Housed spring mounts. 2. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases. 1.3 A. DEFINITIONS OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development for the State of California. OSHPD assigns a unique anchorage preapproval "R" number to each seismic restraint it tests. The number describes a specific device applied as tested. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device. B. Welding certificates. C. Air-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, load, and damping tests performed by an independent laboratory or acoustician. 1.5 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DI.I, "Structural Welding Code--SteeL" PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 A. B. VIBRATION ISOLATORS Available Manufacturers: Manufacturers: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund. C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, robber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 100 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. Elastomeric Hangers: Doubleqleflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color- code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and inse~ in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misaligument without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 pement of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 8. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 9. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 10. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 11. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 12. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant mbber or neoprene. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 A. INSTALLATION Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods. B. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts. END OF SECTION 15071 SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation: 1. Equipment nameplates. 2. Equipment markers. 3. Equipment signs. 4. Access panel and door markers. 5. Pipe markers. 6. Duct markers. 7. Stencils. 8. Valve tags. 9. Valve schedules. 10. Warning tags. QUALITY ASSURANCE ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME Al3.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment. 1. Data: a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. c. Labels of tested compliances. 2. Location: Accessible and visible. 3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent adhesive. 1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. 2. Data: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment. Equipment Signs: ASTMD709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures. 2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. 3. Thickness: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch for larger units. 5. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8~inch center hole for attachment. 1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact,type, permanent adhesive. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow. 2. 3. 4. 5. Colors: Comply with ASME Al3.1, unless otherwise indicated. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor barrier. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch minimum. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum. 2.3 A. DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive. 2.4 STENCILS 2.5 A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASMEA13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of lzl/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar operational instructions. Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME Al3.1, unless otherwise indicated. VALVE TAGS Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with I/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2- inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Architect. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener. 1. Material: 0.032-inch- thick aluminum. 2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. 2.6 A. VALVE SCHEDULES Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws. Frame: Finished hardwood. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness glass. 2.7 A. WARN]BIG TAGS Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Reinfomed grommet and wire or string. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE. 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL 3.2 A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment: Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if both are indicated. 1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units. 3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general categories of equipment: Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. Fire department hose valves and hose stations. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, fumaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. Tanks and pressure vessels. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment. Stenciled Equipment Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of laminated- plastic equipment markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes: Green: For cooling equipment and components. Yellow: For heating equipment and components. Orange: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components. Brown: For energy-reclamation equipment and components. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance i$ less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. b. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. c. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. d. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. e. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. f. Tanks and pressure vessels. g. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment. Stenciled Equipment Sign Option: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of !aminated-plastic equipment signs, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels. 3.3 A. PIPING IDENTIFICATION Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow. 1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit. 2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe. 3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners. 4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe. 3.4 A. Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of manufactured pipe markers, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles complying with ASME Al3.1 on each piping system. I. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconceaied locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each mn. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers. DUCT IDENTIFICATION Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 2. 3. 4. 5. Green: For cold-air supply ducts. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. ASME Al3.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow, may be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. 3.5 A. VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. Fire Protection: 1-1/2 inches, round. Gas: 1-1/2 inches, round. Steam: 1-1/2 inches, round. 2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Cold Water: Natural. b. Hot Water: Natural. c. Fire Protection: Red. d. Gas: Natural. e. Steam: Natural. 3. Letter Color: a. Cold Water: White. b. Hot Water: White. c. Fire Protection: White. d. Gas: White. e. Steam: White. 3.6 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room. 3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules. END OF SECTION 15075 SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Fimstopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through tim and smoke barriers. 2. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems. 3. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner. 1.3 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: Removable insulation sections at access panels. Application of field-applied jackets. Applications at linkages for control devices. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch square sections of each sample material. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of field-applied finish material indicated. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements. 1.4 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knanf FiberGlass GmbH. c. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc. 2.2 A. INSULATION MATERIALS Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting rosin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type lB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. 2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Fiberglass mesh with mastic. 2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq, yd.. 1. Tape Width: 4 inches. B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick. 4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick. 5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick. C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel. D. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached surface. E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface. F. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. B. Proceed with installation only after uosafisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 A. GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. K. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor- retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing. 1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic. 2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends. 3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor. For insulation indica~d to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation ends with vapor-retarder mastic. 3.4 A. MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire cimumference of ducts and to ail surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Instail anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontai ducts and sides of verticai ducts as follows: On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, aiong longitudinai centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. 4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers. 5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 6. Create a facing lap for longitudinai seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment~ Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. 7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinai seams and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-ovai duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of the same materiai used to insulate duct. Secure on aitemating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to ail surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Space anchor pins as follows: On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinai centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additionai pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontai, rectangular ducts and plenums. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. 3.5 A. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder. FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION Apply insulation to ducts and plenums as follows: Follow the manufacturers written instructions for applying insulation. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the duct and plenum surface. 3.6 A. CLOSED-CELL PHENOLIC-FOAM INSULATION APPLICATION Apply insulation as follows: Secure each layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten without deforming the insulation materials. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals. On exposed applications, finish insulation with a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic- setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish. 3.7 A. CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION Apply insulation according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands. Tighten bands without deforming the insulation material. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. SeCure inner layer with 0.062~inch, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands. On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish. 3.8 A. FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Completely.encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation. 3.9 A. B. C. FINISHES Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. 3.10 A. B. DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems: Indoor concealed supply-, retum-, and outside-air ductwork. Indoor exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner. 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Testing agency labels and stamps. 8. Nameplates and data plates. 9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems. 3.11 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts, concealed. 3.12 A. 2. 3. 4. 5. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. Thickness: 1 inch. Number of Layers: One. Field-Applied Jacket: Fiberglass mesh with mastic. Vapor Retarder Required: No. OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts. 1. Material: Mineral-fiber board. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Glass cloth. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. END OF SECTION 15081 SECTION 15082 - EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTs A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation materials and application for ducts and plenums. 2. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems. 1.3 SUBMI'I'I'ALS Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. Equipment insulation applications are more custom than for pipes and ducts. Require details for installation and application. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Field application for each equipment type. 2. Removable insulation sections at access panels. 3. Application of field-applied jackets. 4. Special shapes for cellular-glass insulation. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch- (300-mm-) square sections of each sample material. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of field-applied finish material indicated. Surface-burning characteristics specified in "Quality Assurance" Article should be verified by an independent testing agency. Where critical, require test report Submittals. Delete test reports below if not required. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Delete paragraph below if not required or available at Project location. Apprenticeship programs are usually associated with union shops. Other craft training programs are available. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Container marking is an option in ASTM standards; the default condition does not include the marking below unless specified in the Contract. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation application. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incmporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Mineral-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. c. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp. Cellular-Glass Insulation: a. Pittsburgh-Coming Corp. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: a. ArmstrOng World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd. Calcium Silicate Insulation: a. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp. b. Pabco. c. Schuller International, Inc. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS For operating temperatures higher than 850 deg F (454 deg C), change insulation below to ASTM C 612, Type llI. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type lB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. For operating temperatures higher than 850 deg F (454 deg C), change insulation below to ASTM C 553, Type V. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells, incombustible. 1. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 2. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 3. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. Flexible elastomeric thermal insulation is not suitable for temperatures lower than minus 70 deg F (minus 57 deg C) and higher than 220 deg F (104 deg C). D. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-robber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. Closed-cell phenolic-foam insulation is available in Grades 1 and 2. Grade 1 has a lower thermal conductivity than Grade 2. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1. 2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS Insulation jackets below are for field applications. Delete below if jackets are factory applied. ASTM C 921, Type 1, is for use over insulation on ducts operating below ambient temperatures at least part of the time or for where a vapor retarder is required. ASTM C 921, Type II, is for use over insulation on ducts operating above ambient temperatures or for where a vapor retarder is not required. A. General: ASTM C 921, Type i, unless otherwise indicated. A properly sealed foil, scrim, kraft-paper (FSK) jacket, common with most forms of factory-applied jackets for mineral-fiber insulation, meets vapor-retarder requirements of ASTM C 921, Type I. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. Although other thicknesses for PVC jackets are available, 25/50 flame-spread/smoke-developed ratings apply only to thicknesses of 20 mils (0.5 mm) and less. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. PVC jackets are available in several colors. Colored jackets may be used to replace field painting. Ultraviolet rays fade colors in exterior applications. Some colors (black, gray, and white) do not fade as quickly as other colors (red, orange, and green). Select from two moisture barriers below. Features are from Pabco jackets. The first moisture barrier is standard and is for corrosive atmospheres; the second moisture barrier is optional and produces lower flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings. 2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat~bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 3. Moisture Barrier: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 4. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide. 2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with M1L-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq, yd. (270 g/sq. m). 1. Tape Width: 4 inches (100 mm). B. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: 2. 3. 4. 5. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick. Brass: 0.010 inch (0.25 nun) thick. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS Products with a perm rating of 1.0 are considered vapor retarders. Ambient conditions and operating temperatures must be considered when selecting a vapor retarder. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 A. GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of equipment. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each equipment system. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges and fittings. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. Install vapor-retarder mastic on equipment scheduled to receive vapor retarders. Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal. Insulate the following indoor equipment: 1. Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated. Insulate the following outdoor equipment: 1. Aboveground water storage tanks. 3.4 A. INDOOR TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION Blankets, Board, and Block Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for I00 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. 2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joint. Stagger end joints. 3. Protect exposed comers with secured comer angles. 4. Install adhesive-attached or self-adhesive anchor pins and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. On tank and vessel, 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. in both directions. c. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. d. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and dome heads of tanks and vessels. 10. 11. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. Cut excess poRion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel bands. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 nun). Apply insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors and other elements that require frequent removal for service. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Apply insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints. 3.5 A. FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION Apply glass-cloth jacket where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (l.6-mm-) thick coats of jacket manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation. B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated. 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-retarder mastic. PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels for horizontal applications. Secure and seal seams and end joints with manufacturer's welding adhesive. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along the seam and joint edge. Aluminum Jackets: Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written instructions. Stainless-Steel Jackets: Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written instmctions. 3.6 FINISHES Coordinate paragraph below with Division 9 Section "Painting." Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements: 3.8 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. END OF SECTION 15082 SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. See Section 15734 - Computer Room Air Conditioning 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following hydronic products and systems: 1. Copper and steel piping 2. Miscellaneous piping and fittings. 3. Leak Detection equipment. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 15734 - Computer Room Air - Conditioning Units for air conditioning units. 1.3 GENERAL A. Submittals: Product Data for each type of special-duty valve indicated. B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping", for materials, products, and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Copper Tube and Fittings: 1. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B). 2. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A). 3. DWV Copper Tubing ASTM B 306, Type DWV. 4. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 5. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 6. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony. 7. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification Bag-1 (silver). B. Steel Pipe and Fittings: 1. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (furnace-butt welded), Grade A, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. 2. Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 8 (DN 65 through DN 206): ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded), Grade A, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. 3. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black steel; seamless for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and electric-resistance welded for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 4. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300. 5. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B 16.39; Classes 150, 250 and 300. 6. Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125 and 250, raised ground face and bolt holes spot faced. 7. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire reinforcing protective jacket; 150-psig (1,035-kPa) minimum working pressure and 250 degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flange or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of aA-inch (20-mm) misalignment. 8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design temperatures and pressures. General-Duty Valves: Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Section 15110 - Valves. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valve§ shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball type, 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1,035-kPa) working pressure; 225 degrees F (107 degrees C) operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8 (DN 6) discharge connection and NPS Va (DN 15) inlet connection. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective.jacket; 150-psig (1,035-kPa) minimum working pressure and 250 degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged-or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of sA-inch (20-mm) misalignment. Leak Detection System: Complete system for sensing and alarming water or glycol-water solutions in pans and troughs shown on the drawings including display, communication output and cabling. 1. Display: Termination for up to 2,000 feet of cable, a graphic display that indicates normal, cable fault, leak location, and 4-20 mA communication output. 2. Cable: UL listed, multi-conductor with polymer jacket. Cable uses resistance to sense fluid presence and locate leaks. 3. Acceptable manufacturers are: Liebert LT500Y, Raychem-Trace Tek or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. PIPING Condenser Water: Aboveground, use Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints to 2-inch, welded joints 2-1/2 inches and larger. Below ground or within slabs, use Type K (Type A) annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints below ground and within floor slabs. Condensate Drain and Humidifier Water: Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints. Unless otherwise indicated, use the following general-duty valve types for applications indicated: 1. Shutoff Duty: Ball, and butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Duty: Circuit balancing valves, TA Hydronics or Armstrong. 3. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 4. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. Unless otherwise indicated, use the following special-duty valve types for applications indicated: Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS sA (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS aA (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low pints in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS sA (DN 20) nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 (DN 50). Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports. Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of supports. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet (6 m) long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal pipIng 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 6. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: a. NPS sA (DN 20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, xA inch (6.4 mm). b. NPS I (DN 25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, IA inch (6.4 mm). c. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m)'minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). d. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). e. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). f. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m) minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). g. NPS 4 (DN I00): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). h. Nrps 6 (DN 150): Maximum span, 17 feet (5.2 m); minimum rod size, 1.2 inch (13 mm). i. NPS 8 (DN 200): Maximum span, 19 feet (5.8 m); minimumrod size, 5/8 inch(16 mm). Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: a. NPS sA (DN 20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, ~A inch (6.4 mm). b. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 6 feet (1.8 m); minimum rod size, ~A inch (6.4 nun). NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m) minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). NPS 3 (DN80): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 8. Support vertical mns at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot (3-m) intervals between floors. Pipe Joint Construction: Refer to Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods for joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping. 3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Use manual vent for initial f'flls of system. C. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections or as indicated. D. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. E. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control valves am installed, only one bypass is required. F. Install ports for pressure and temperature gauges at coil inlet connections. G. Prepare and test hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9. H. Plush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic-piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers. 3.3 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEMS A. Place piping leak detection cabling in troughs in a serpentine configuration to obtain complete coverage. Install and connect Owner-purchased Liebert unit water detection sensors at all computer room air-conditioning units. Demonstrate complete system operation with a factory representative. Schedule at the Owner's convenience. 3.4 A. COPPER TUBING Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends. 3.5 VALVES A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves. PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fitting Option: Mechanically formed tee-branch outlets and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing. 4.2 A. VALVE APPLICATIONS Drawings indicate valve types to be used. 'Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast- iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation. 4.4 JO]~Yr CONSTRUCTION Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free- alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 4.5 A. VALVE INSTALLATION Install sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following: 1. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." C. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4:72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. E. Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following: 4.7 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect domestic water piping as follows: i. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Test domestic water piping as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, · without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 4.8 A. CLEANING Clean and disinfect potable and nonpotable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below: Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. END OF SECTION 15140 SECTION 1518 3 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications. 1.3 A. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A: 1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig (2068 kPa). 2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig (3689 kPa). 3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig (3689 kPa). 1.4 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following: 1. Thermostatic expansion valves. 2. Solenoid valves. 3. Hot-gas bypass valves. 4. Filter dryers. 5. Strainers. 6. Pressure-regulating valves. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment. C. Welding certificates. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: maintenance manuals. For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and BrazYmg Qualifications." B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems." C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." 1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22. C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. Flexible Connectors: 1. 2. 3. 4. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket. End Connections: Socket ends. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment in minimum 7-inch- (180-mm-) long assembly. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig (3450 kPa). 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250degF(121 degC). 2.2 A. VALVES AND SPECIALTIES Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. Seat: Nylon. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C). B. Check Valves: 1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern. 2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug. 3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. 4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel. 5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig (3.4 kPa). 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F ( 135 deg C). C. Service Valves: 2. 3. 4. 5. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. End Connections: Copper spring. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). D. Solenoid Valves: Comply with AR1760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch (16-GRC) conduit adapter; and 208-V ac coil. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F ( 116 deg C). 8. Manual operator. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal. 2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa). 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C). Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). Superheat: Adjustable. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications). End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig (4820 kPa) G. Straight-Type Strainers: 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Socket or flare. 4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C). H. Angle-Type Strainers: 1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug. 3. Screen: 100-mesh monel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F ( 135 deg C). MoismredLiquid Indicators: 4. 5. 6. 7. Body: Forged brass. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. End Connections: Socket or flare. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F ( 116 deg C). Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 2.3 A. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated [alumina] [charcoal]. 4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications). 5. End Connections: Socket. 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 7. Maximum Pressure Loss: [2 psig (14 kPa)] <Insert value>. 8. Rated Flow: <Insert tons (kW).> 9. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C). K. Receivers: Comply with ARI 495. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve. End Connections: Socket or threaded. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F ( 135 deg C). L. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495. 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 2. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C). REFRIGERANTS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. 3. 4. Ato£ma Chemicals, Inc. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC. C. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluommethane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR L, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. 3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor. B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers. C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection. D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers. E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers. F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top. G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators. 1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location. H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15. I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube. J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for device being protected: 1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Hot-gas bypass valves. 4. Compressor. K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve. L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge. M. Install flexible connectors at compressors. 3.3 A. F. G. H. I. Jo PIPING INSTALLATION Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Refer to Division 15 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. S. T. U. V. W. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the following procedures: 1. Shot blast the interior of piping. 2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing by means of a wire or electrician's tape. 3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylane through the tube or pipe. Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt. 4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint. 5. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe. 6. Safety-relief-valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be open to allow unrestricted flow. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.4 A. B. C. D. E. PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to prevent scale formation. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry-seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. Steel pipe can be threaded, but threaded joints must be seal brazed or seal welded. Welded Joints: Constmct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 3.5 A. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6 m) long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum red size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2. NPS 5/8 (DN 18): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 3. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 4. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 5. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum md size, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 6. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 7. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 108 inches (2700 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 8. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 9. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm). D. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor. 3.6 A. B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Tests and Inspections: Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressum. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. 3.7 A. SYSTEM CHARGING Charge system using the following procedures: Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers (67 Pa). If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig ( 14 kPa). Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. 3.8 A. B. ADJUSTING Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions: 2. 3. 4. 5. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and beatings. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established. END OF SECTION 15183 SECTION 15194 - FUEL GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the. Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fuel gas piping, specialties, and accessories within the building. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution" for natural gas service piping, specialties, and accessories outside the building. 2. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating, capacity, and settings of selected models. B. Shop Drawings: For fuel gas piping. Include plans and attachments to other Work C. Retain subparagraph below if equipment includes wiring. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. E. Maintenance Data: For natural gas specialties and accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code." C. FM Standard: Provide components listed in FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" if specified to be FM approved. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A Certified Appliances and Accessories" if specified to be IAS listed. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if specified to be UL listed. 1.5 A. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify fuel gas supplier. Handle flammable liquids used by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises from end of one day to beginning of next day. 1.6 A. COORDINATION Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Gas Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: a. WaRs Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: a. Flow Control Equipment, Inc. 3. Automatic Gas Valves: a. ASCO General Controls. b. Johnson Controls, Inc. 2.2 PLYING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 A. PIPES, TUBES, FITTINGS, AND JOINING MATERIALS Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E or S; Grade B; Schedule 40; black. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASMEB16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends according to ASME B 1.20.1. 2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends according to ASME B 1.20.1. 3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel. 5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to ASME B 1.20.1. 6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.5. 8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas. 2.4 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in corrosive atmosphere. 2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy. B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector. 2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads. B. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and according to ASME B 16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping. Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section. B. Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "Prevention of Accidental Ignition" Paragraph. 3.2 A. PIPING APPLICATIONS Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fuel Gas Piping, 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or Less: Use the following: NPS 1/2 (DN t5) and Smaller: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. NPS 1/2 (DN 15) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints. Option: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints may be used for mnouts at individual appliances. 3. NPS 1/2 (DN 15) and Smaller: Tin-lined copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints. 4. N-PS 1/2 (DN 15) and Smaller: Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system and threaded joints. 5. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 (DN 20 and DN 25): Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 6. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 (DN 20 and DN 25): Hard copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints. Option: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints may be used for mnouts at individual appliances. 7. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 (DN 20 and DN 25): Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system and threaded joints. 8. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 9. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 10. NPS 2-I/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 11. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 12. Larger Than NPS 4 (DN 100): Steel pipe, steel welding fittings; and welded joints. 3.3 A. PIPING INSTALLATION Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation requirements. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside and terminate With screened vent cap. E. F. G. H. 1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings. 2. In Floors: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in floors, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Surround piping cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate. 3. In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation. 4. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls. a. Exception: 3~ubing passing through partitions or walls. 5. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective Coating" Afficle in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. a. Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers. · Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indica~:l. Unions are not required on flanged devices. K. L. M. Install corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated valve. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line pressure regulator. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger connections. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion- resistant insect screens in large end. Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gastight conduits extending minimum of 4 inches (100mm) outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide paint according to SSPC-Paint 16. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. 3.5 A. B. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch ( 10 mm). 2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch ( 10 mm). 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm). 5. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Maximum span, lO feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 5/Sinch (16 mm). 3.6 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each service meter, pressure regulator, and specialty valve. 3.7 A. B. C. D. E. F. 3.8 A. 1. Text: In addition to name of identified unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. 2. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" I'qE~LD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSI Z223.1, Part 4 "Inspection, Testing, and Purging," and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and specialties. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators. Verify that specified piping tests are complete. ADJUSTING Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices. END OF SECTION 15194 SECTION 15441 - HYDRONIC HEATING HOT WATER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following all-bronze and bronze-fitted centrifugal pumps for domestic cold- and hot-water cimulation: 1. Close-coupled, horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps. 1.3 A. SUBMIT1 ALS Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified. Include certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacifies of selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, .and dimensional requirements of domestic water pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Atficle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. UL Compliance: Comply with [IL 778 for motor-operated water pumps. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage. B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage. C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. requirements are specified in Division 3. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be inconporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 A. CLOSE-COUPLED, HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. Taco Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, overhung impeller, single-stage, close-coupled, horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; and designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally. 1. Pump Construction: All bronze. a. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded companion-flange connections for pumps with NPS 2 (DN 50) pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) pipe connections. b. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft. c. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. d. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and robber bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. e. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type. Shaft Coupling: Rigid type if pump is provided with coupling. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." 2.3 A. CONIROLS Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump. 1. Manufacturers: a. Honeywell International, Inc. 2. Type: Water-immersion sensor, for installation in hot-water circulation piping. 3. Operation of Pump: On or off. 4. Transformer: Provide if required. 5. Power Requirement: 24 V, ac. 6. Settings: Start pump at call from thermosat 2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anamet, Inc. 2. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. B. Description: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid. Include copper- tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze-welded to tubing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation. 3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION Install pumps with access for periodic m_aintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. Install close-coupled, horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps with motor and pump shafts horizontal. Install continuous-thread hanger reds and spring hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Fabricate brackets or supports as required. Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." 3.3 A. 3.4 A. B. C. CONTROL INSTALLATION Install immersion-type thermostats in hot-water return piping. CONNECTIONS Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance. Connect water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the following pumps: Separately coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps. Separately coupled, horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps. Close-coupled, horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps. Close-coupled, vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps. 2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves for domestic water piping and Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for strainers. 3. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages and gage connectors. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.5 A. STARTUP SERVICE Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Set thermostats for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps. 5, Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: Verify beating lubrication. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. 6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation. 7. Start motor. 8. Open discharge valve slowly. 9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats. 10. Adjust timer settings. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controls. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 15441 SECTION 15511 - BOILERS (Gas-Fired) PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes gas fired, condensing finned copper water tube boilers for heating hot water. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 23 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for connections to breechings, chimneys, and stacks. 2. Division 23 Section "Feedwater Equipment" for connections to condensate and feedwater system. 3. Division 23 Sections for control wiring for automatic temperature control. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished special- ties; and accessories for each model indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, and method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer installed and field installed wiring. C. Soume Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements before shipping. D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include parts list, rnaJntenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each boiler. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910,7. B. ASME Compliance: Boilers shall bear ASME "H" stamp and be National Board listed. C. ASME Compliance: Secondary heat exchanger shall meet ASME Section VIII. D. CSD-1 Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of CSD-1. E. FM Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of FM. F. IRI Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of IRI. G. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Installing contractor shall provide one year of warranty parts and labor. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor for the heat exchanger. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion on the heat exchanger. Warranty shall be non-prorated and not limited to thermal shock. Additional 21 year thermal shock warranty on heat exchanger. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years experience. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering boilers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Design: Boilers shall be CSA design certified as a condensing boiler. Boilers shall be equipped to ac- cept return water temperatures as Iow as 40°F, 4°C and operate in the condensing mode at all times. Boilers shall be designed for a minimum of 3:1 continuous turn down with constant CO2 over the turndown range. The boiler shall operate with natural or propane gas and have a I=B=R certified input rating as noted on the drawings, and a thermal efficiency rating of 94.9% at rated input and 99.1% at minimum input. The boiler shall incorporate a symmetrically air-fuel coupled such that changes in combustion air flow or flue flows affect the BTUH input without affecting combustion quality. The boiler will automatically adjust input for altitude and temperature induced changes in air density. The boiler will use a proven pilot interrupted spark ignition system. The boiler shall use a UL approved flame safeguard ignition control system using UV detection flame sensing. The design shall provide for silent burner ignition and operation. Burner shall be premix radial-type and fi re in a 360° vertical pattern. Boiler shall be able to vent a horizontal distance of 60 equivalent feet, 18.3 m. C. Service Access: The boilers shall be provided with stainless steel jacket panels, minimum 16 gauge, with push-button fasteners for easily accessing all serviceable components. Sheet metal screws may not be used in the securing of jacket panels to the boiler. The boilers shall not be manufactured with large enclosures, which are difficult to remove and reinstall. All accesses must seal completely as not to disrupt the sealed combustion process. All components must be accessible and able to adjust with the removal of a single cover or cabinet component. D. Indicating Lights: Each boiler shall include a diagnostic control panel with a full text display indicating the condition of all interlocks and the BTUH input pementage. Access to the controls shall be through a swing-access door, leaving diagnostic panel intact and not disrupted. E. Manufacturers: RBI (a Mestek Company) is the basis of design. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Combustion Chamber: The combustion chamber shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge stainless steel. Aluminum or galvanized steel is not acceptable. An access door shall be provided for ease of service and inspection of the heat exchanger. B. Heat Exchanger: The heat exchanger shall be inspected and bear the A.S.M.E. Section IV seal of approval. The heat exchanger shall be a four-pass heat exchanger with a maximum working pressure of 160 psi. The heat exchanger's vertical design shall provide equal amounts of heat transfer throughout the entire heating surface. Each heat exchanger shall have copper tubes, with an integral copper finned tube of 7/8" I.D., .064" minimum wall thickness, 7 fi ns per inch, with a fi n height of 3/8". Each end of the water tubes shall be strength rolled into the header. The heat exchanger shall be gasket-less. Each individual tube can be re-tubed without the disturbance of the surrounding tubes. A pressure relief valve of 50 lb/sq, in. shall be equipped with the boiler and factory mounted. The headers shall be of bronze construction only; cast iron shall not be acceptable. The secondary heat exchanger shall be inspected and bear the ASME Section VIII seal of approval. The heat exchanger shall have a maximum working pressure of 160 psi. Each heat exchanger shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel throughout the internal vessel and 304L stainless steel for the external shell. Secondary heat exchanges constructed if finned copper or cupronickel tubes shall not be acceptable. C. Jackets: 18 gauge brushed stainless steel D. Gas Burner: Metal fiber mat premix burner shall fire to provide equal distribution of heat throughout the entire heat exchanger. Burner composition shall be FecralloyTM. The burner shall be easily removed for maintenance without the disruption of any other major component of the boiler. Ignition electrodes shall be removed for inspection and proper alignment without removing the burner. A window view port shall be provided for visual inspection of the flame during firing. E. Ignition Components: The ignition hardware shall consist of dual Alumina ceramic insulated ignition electrodes and UV sensing tube permanently arranged to ensure proper ignition, electrode and UV alignment. Electrodes must be capable of removal while leaving the burner intact. Hot surface ignition systems of any type will not be accepted. F. Rated Capacity: The boiler shall be capable of operating at rated capacity with pressures as Iow as 2" W.C. at the inlet to the burner pressure regulator. Boilers that cannot provide full BTUH inputs at 2" W.C. will not be accepted. G. The burner shall be capable of 99~1% efficiency without exceeding a NOx reading above 20 ppm. H. The burner and gas train shall be provided with the following trim and features: 1. Burner Firing: Full modulation with 3:1 turndown @ Continuous CO2 2. Burner Ignition: Intermittent spark 3. Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishing flame, prevent opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, and allow gas valve to open. 4. Flue Gas Collector: Enclosed combustion chamber with integral combustion air blower and single venting connection. 5. Gas Train: Manual gas valves (2), main gas valve (motorized), 'B' valve, pilot gas pressure regulator, and automatic pilot gas valve. All components to be factory mounted. 6. Safety Devices: Optional high/Iow gas pressure switches, air flow switch, and blocked flue detection switch. All safeties to be factory mounted, 2.3 BOILER TRIM A. Controls: The boiler control package shall be a MTI Heat-Net or equivalent, integrated boiler manage- ment system. The control system must be integral to each boiler, creating a control network that eliminates the need for a "wall mount" stand-alone boiler system control. Additional stand-alone control panels, independent of a Building Management System (BMS), shall not be allowed to operate the boiler network. The Heat-Net control shall be capable of operating in the following ways: 1. As a stand-alone boiler control system using the Heat-Net protocol, with one "Master" and multiple "Member" units. 2. As a boiler network, enabled by a Building Management System (BMS), using the Heat-Net protocol, with one "Master" and multiple "Member" units. 3. As "Member" boilers to a Building Management System (BMS) with multiple input control methods. MASTER: A boiler becomes a Master when a resistance type 10K sensor is connected to the J10 "SYS/DHW HEADER" terminals. The sensor shall be auto detected. The Master senses and controls the header/loop temperature utilizing a system setpoint. It uses any boilers it finds "Heat-Net Members" or those defined in the control setup menus to accomplish this. The "Master" shall also have the option of monitoring Outside Air Temperature "OA" to provide full outdoor air reset functionality. Only one master shall be allowed in the boiler network. When operating as a "Master", the Heat-Net control provides a stand-alone method using a PID algorithm to regulate water temperature. The algorithm allows a single boiler "Master" or multiple "Master + Member" boilers in a network of up to 16 total boilers. The control algorithm is based upon a control band, at the center of which is the setpoint. While below the control band, boilers are staged on and modulated up until the control band is entered. Once in the control band, modulation is used to maintain setpoint. Optimized system efficiency is always accomplished by setting the Modulation Maximum "Mod-Max" setting to exploit each boiler in the network's inverse efficiency curve. The control shall operate so that the maximum number of boilers required, operate at their lowest inputs until all boilers are fi ring. Once all boilers are fi ring, the modula- tion clamp is removed and all boilers ars allowed to fi re above this clamped percentage up to 100%. This "boiler efficiency" clamp is defaulted to 80% and thus limits all the boilers individual outputs to 80% until the last boiler fires. The 80% default must be field adjuatable for varying operating conditions. All boilers modulate up and down together always at the same modulation rate. Boilers are shut down only when the top of the band is breached, or before the top of the band, if the control anticipates that there is a light load. Timers shall also be included in each control in the network to prevent any boiler from short cycling. MEMBER: Additional boilers in the network always default to the role of member. The lack of sensors connected to the JlO terminals "SYS/DHW Header" on each additional boiler shall ensure this. Each "Member" shall sense its supply outlet water temperature and modulate based on signals from a Building Management System (BMS) or "Master" boiler. When operating as a member, starting, stopping, and fi ring rate shall also be controlled by the "BMS" or "Master" boiler. When using the Heat-Net protocol, the system setpoint shall be sent from the "Master", along with the modulation value to control fi ring rate. It also receives its command to start or stop over the Heat-Net cable. Each "Member" will continuously monitor its supply outlet temperature against its operating limit. If the supply temperature approaches the operating limit temperature (adjustable), the boilers input control rate is limited and its modulation value decreases to minimize short cycling. If the operating limit is exceeded, the boiler shall shut off. Each Heat-Net control in the boiler network shall have the following standard features: 1. Digital Communications Control. A. Boiler to Boiler: Heat-Net B. Building Management System (BMS): MODBUS standard protocol. C. Building Management System (BMS): BACNET and LONWORKS optional protocols. 2. Analog 4:20 and 0-10vdc also supported. 3. Distributed control using Heat-Net protocol for up to 16 total boilers. 4. System/Boiler operating status in English text display. 5. Interlock, Event, and System logging with a time stamp. 6. Advanced PID algorithm optimized for specific boilers (KN-Series). 7. Four dedicated temperature sensor inputs for: Outside Air Temperature, Supply (Outlet) Temperature, Return Temperature (Inlet), and Header Temperature. 8. Automatically detects the optional temperature sensors on start up. 9. Menu driven calibration and setup menus with a bright 4-line Vacuum Fluorescent Display. 10. (8) Dedicated 24vac interlock monitors and 8 dedicated 120vac system monitors used for diagnostics and providing feedback of faults and system status. 11. Multiple boiler pump or motorized boiler valve control modes. 12. Combustion Air Damper control with proof time. 13. Optional USB/RS485 network plug-in to allow firmware updates or custom configurations. 14. Optional BACNET and LONWORKS interface. 15. Alarm contacts. 16. Runtime hours. 17. Outdoor Air Reset with programmable ratio. 18. Time of Day clock to provide up to four (4 night setback temperatures. 19. Failsafe mode when a Building Management System (BMS) is controlling setpoint. If communications is lost, the boiler/system shall run off the Local Setpoint. B. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated, factory set to protect boiler and piping as per schedule/drawings. C. Gauge: Combination water pressure and temperature shipped factory installed. LCD inlet/outlet temperature gauges to be an integral part of the front boiler control panel to allow for consistent easy monitoring of temperatures factory mounted and wired. D. Flow Switch: Prevent burner operation when water falls below a safe level or when water flow is Iow. Flow switch shall be factory mounted and wire. d. Provision for installation of a Iow water cut off shall be provided. E. Operating Controls: Boiler shall be provided with a Honeywell RM7895C series digital flame safe- guard. The flame safeguard shall be capable of prepurge cycles. F. Operating Temperature Control: Shall be a digital P.I.D. controller adjustable from 40° F to 240° F, 4° C to 116° C. Control shall have the capability to provide outdoor air reset function. Control shall be factory mounted and sense the inlet and outlet temperature of the boiler through a resistance sensor. G. High Limit: Temperature control with manual reset limits boiler water temperature in series with the operating control. High Limit shall be factory mounted and sense the outlet temperature of the boiler through a dry well. H. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING STANDARD TRIM: 1. Bronze headers 2. Low air pressure switch 3. Blocked flue detection switch 4. Flow switch (factory mounted and wired) 5. Modulation control 6. Temperature/pressure gauge 7. Manual reset high limit 8. Air inlet filter 9. Inlet/outlet temperature display 10. Full digital text display for all boiler series of operation and failures 11. Variable frequency drive and combustion air fan 12. FM and CSD-1 gas train 13. Condensate "P" trap 14. Bypass assembly which includes mixing valve, circulator and piping I. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING JOB SPECIFIC TRIM AND FEATURES 1. Air inlet hood for exterior termination of air intake pipe (shipped loose) 2. Vent termination hood for exterior termination of vent pipe (shipped loose) 3. FM or IRI controls and gas train 4. CSD-1 controls 5. Diagnostic keyboard display for RM7800 series control 6. Probe type Iow water cut off, manual reset (shipped loose) 2.4 MOTORS A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Motors" for factory installed motors. B. Boiler Blower Motor: Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation. There shall be no requirement to remove gas train components to remove the blower motor. Blower motor shall not exceed 1 HP and not require more than13 amps. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV. Boilers shall be test fired in the factory with a report attached permanently to the exterior cabinet of the boiler for field reference. PART3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and referenced standards. B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54. C. Support boilers on 4" (100 mm) thick concrete base, 4" (100 mm) larger on each side than base of unit. D. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted. E. Install a 3/4" drain valve on the outlet piping prior to the first shut off valve. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas train inlet with union. B. Connect hot water piping to supply and return boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. C. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain. D. Connect breeching to boiler outlet, full size of outlet. The boiler shall operate under positive (Category IV) stack pressure. Vent material must be listed AL29-4C Stainless Double Wall Stack for condensing appliances. E. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections. F. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of boilers, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Manufacturer's representative shall supply a factory authorized service technician to start up the boilers. 3.5 CLEANING A. Flush and clean boilers on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. After completing boiler installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Re- move burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions with manufacturer's stainless steel cleaner. 3.6 COMMISSIONING A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to provide startup service. Start up to be performed only after complete boiler room operation is field verified to offer a substantial load, and complete system cimulation. One year warranty shall be handled by factory authorized tech. B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 26 Sections. Do not proceed with boiler startup until Wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer. C. Complete manufacturer's installation and stadup checklist and verify the following: 1. Boiler is level on concrete base. 2. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage. 3. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber. 4. Pressure reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specified relief pressure. Adjust as required. 5. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal a~nd servicing. 6. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports. 7. Labels are clearly visible. 8. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris. 9. Pressure and temperature gauges are installed. 10. Control installations are completed. D. Ensure pumps operate properly. E. Check operation of pressure reducing valve on gas train, including venting. F. Check that fluid level, flaw switch, and high temperature interlocks are in place. G. Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners to maximum operating efficiency. 1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report. 2. Check and record performance of factory provided boiler protection devices and firing sequences. 3. Check and record performance of boiler fluid level, flow switch, and high temperature interlocks. 4. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer. H, Pedorm the following tests for each firing rate for high/Iow burners and for 100, 66, and 33 pement Icad for modulating burners. Adjust boiler combustion efficiency at each firing rate. Measure and record the following: 1. Inlet gas pressure. 2. Gas pressure on manifold. 3. Flue gas temperature at boiler discharge. 4. Flue gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration. 5. Natural flue draft. I. Measure and record temperature rise through each boiler. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as speci- fied below: 1. Operate boiler, including accessories and controls, to demonstrate compliance with requirements. 2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. 3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 4. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 5. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days advance notice. END OF SECTION 15511 SECTION 15512 - CAST-IRON BOILERS (Oil-Fired) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes packaged cast-iron boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water with the following configurations and burners: 1. Factory assembled. 2. Oil burner. 1.3 SUBMHTALS A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that boiler, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 1.4 A. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. Source quality-control test reports. Field quality-control test reports. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers, components, and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. Other Informational Submittals: I. Startup service reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements." DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10CFR430, SubpartB, Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers." I=B=R Compliance: Boilers shall be tested and rated according to HI's "Rating Procedure for Heating Boilers" and "Testing Standard for Commercial Boilers," with I=B=R emblem on a nameplate affixed to boiler. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 726, "Oil-Fired Boiler Assemblies Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. 1.6 A. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace controls and heat exchangers of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period for Controls: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. 2.2 A. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Burnham Hydronics. 2. CroWn Boiler Co. 3. Hydrotherm, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Lennox Industries Inc. 5. Peerless Boilers. 6. Slant/Fin Corp. 7. Smith Cast Iron Boilers. 8. Viessmann Manufacturing Co. (US) Inc. 9. Weil-McLain; a United Dominion Company. MANUFACTURED UN~S Description: Factory fabricated and assembled. 1. Cast-iron sections shall be sealed pressure tight and held together with tie rods; including insulated jacket and flue-gas vent connection. 2. Ship cast-iron sections disassembled with all materials and equipment, including seals, tie rods, and insulated jacket and flue-gas vent connection for field assembly. B. Cast-Iron Section Design: Number of Passes: Multiple. Sectional Joints: High-temperature sealant to seal flue-gas passages not in contact with heating medium, tapered cast-iron push nipples and held together with tie rods. Drain and blowdown tappings. Return injection tube to equalize water flow to all sections. 5. Crown inspection tappings with brass plugs. 6. Built-in air separator. Combustion Chamber: Equipped with ceramic-fiber target wall and flame observation ports, front and back. Casing: 1. Jacket: Galvanized sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures and baked-enamel protective finish. 2. Insulation: Minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat exchanger. 3. Combustion Chamber Access: Refractory lined, hinged, front. 4. Access: For cleaning between cast-iron sections. 5. Insulated base constructed of aluminized steel to permit boiler to be installed on combustible floor. 6. Mounting Frame: Steel rails to mount assembled boiler package on concrete base. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to boiler, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" when mounting base is anchored to building structure. 7. Control Cabinet: Sheet metal casing shall cover all controls, gas train, and burner. 2.3 A. BURNER Burner: Welded construction with multivane, stainless-steel, flame-retention diffuser for fuel oil. Blower: Forward-curved centrifugal fan integral to burner, directly driven by motor; with adjustable, dual-blade damper assembly and locking quadrant to set air-fuel ratio. 1. Motors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Motors." Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. Oil Supply: Control devices and low-high-low control sequence shall comply with requirements in ASME CSD-1. Oil Pump: Two-stage, gear-type oil pump integral to and directly driven by blower shall be capable of producing 300-psig (2070-kPa) discharge pressure and 15-inch Hg (50.7- kPa) vacuum. Oil Piping Specialties: a. Suction-line, manual, gate valve. b. Removable-mesh oil strainer. c. 0- to 30-inch Hg (0- to 10t.3-kPa) vacuum; 0- to 30-psig (0- to 207-kPa) vacuum- pressure gage. d. 0- to 300-psig (0- to 2070-kPa) oil-nozzle pressure gage. e. Nozzle-line, solenoid-safety-shutoff oil valve. 2.4 TRIM A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.9, "Building Services Piping." B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating and high limit. C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated. D. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch- (89-mm-) diameter, combination water- pressure and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range. E. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic. F. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 (DN 20) hose-end gate valve. 2.5 A. B. CONTROLS Refer to Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls." Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features: 1. Control transformer. 2. Set-Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable. 3. Operating Pressure Control: Factory wired and mounted to cycle burner. 4. Low-Water Cutoff and Pump Control: Cycle feedwater pump(s) for makeup water control 5. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to control burner firing rate to maintain space temperature in response to thermostat with heat anticipator located in heated space. 6. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to control burner firing rate to reset supply-water temperature inversely with outside-air temperature. At 0 degF (minus 17 degC) outside-air temperature, set supply-water temperature at 200 deg F (93 deg C); at 60 deg F (l 5 deg C) outside-air temperature, set supply-water temperature at 140 deg F (60 deg C). Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit burner operation. High Cutoff: Automatic reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler design pressure. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water. Cutoff switch shall be automatic-reset type. Blocked Vent Safety Switch: Manual-reset switch factory mounted on draft diverter. Rollout Safety Switch: Factory mounted on boiler combustion chamber. 5. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm for above conditions. 2.6 A. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiencY; perform hydrostatic test. Allow Owner access to source quality-control testing of boilers. Notify Architect 14 days in advance of testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION A. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Install oil-fired boilers according to NFPA 31. C. Assemble boiler sections in sequence and seal between each section. D. Assemble and install boiler trim. E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted. F. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect oil piping full size to burner inlet with shutoff valve and union. D. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. E. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain. F. Install piping from safety valves to drip-pan elbow and to nearest floor drain. G. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required. H. Connect breeching full size to boiler outlet. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for venting materials. I. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." J. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.4 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air-fuel ratio and combustion. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. a. Burner Test: Adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency. b. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set points of fuel supply, water level and water temperature. c. Set field-adjustable switches and cimuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Performance Tests: 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies and equipment installations, including connections, and to conduct performance testing. 2. Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by field performance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment to comply. 3. Perform field performance tests to determine capacity and efficiency of boilers. a. Test for full capacity. 4. Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated. 5. Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance. 6. Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the heat produced during tests if building systems are not adequate. 7. Notify Architect in advance of test dates. 8. Document test results in a report and submit to Architect. END OF SECTION 15512 SECTION 15732 - WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP UNITS Part 1 -- General 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Single package horizontally and vertically mounted Puron~ (R-410A) refrigerant water soume heat pumps with electronic controls. B. Equipment shall be completely assembled, piped and internally wired. Capacities and character- istics as listed in the schedule and the guide specifications that follow. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment listed in this section must be rated and certified in accordance with ARI/ISO and ETL listed to UL standard 1995. The units shall have ARI/ISO and ETL labels. B. All units shall be fully quality tested by factory run testing under normal operating conditions and water flow rates as described herein. Quality control system shall automatically perform via com- puter: triple leak check, pressure tests, evacuate and accurately charge system, perform detailed heating and cooling mode tests, and quality cross check all operational and test conditions to pass/fail data base. A detailed report card will ship with each unit displaying all test performance data. NOTE: If unit fails on any cross check, system shall not allow unit to ship. C. Serial numbere will be recorded by factory and furnished to contractor on report card for ease of unit warranty status. Units tested without water flow are not acceptable. Units shall be prewired and precharged in factory. Part 2 m Product 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. General: Units shall be supplied completely factory built for an entering water temperature range from 60 to 95 F as standard. Units may consist of rotary or scroll compressor, PSC or ECM fan motor and blower and refrigerant cimuit as indicated on the equipment schedule. Equivalent units from other manufacturers can be proposed provided approval to bid is given 10 days prior to bid closing. B. Unit Cabinets: 1. Horizontal Units: a. Horizontal units shall have one of the following airflow arrangements: left inlet/right dis- charge; right inlet/left discharge; left inlet/back discharge; or right inlet/back discharge as shown on the plans. b. Horizontal units must have the ability to be field convertible from side to back or back to side discharge with no additional parts or unit structure modification. Units will have fac- tory-installed hanger brackets with rubber isolation grommets packaged separately. 2. Vertical Units: Vertical units shall have one of the following airflow arrangements: left return/top discharge, right return/fop discharge, left return/bottom discharge, right retum/bottom discharge as shown on the plans. 3. If units with these arrangements are not used, the contractor is responsible for any extra costs incurred by other trades. 4. All units (horizontal and vertical) must have a minimum of three access panels for serviceabil- ity of compressor compartment. Units having only one access panel to compressor, heat ex- changers, expansion device, or refrigerant piping shall not be acceptable. 5. Standard cabinet panel insulation must meet NFPA 90A requirements, air erosion and mold growth limits of UL-181, stringent fungal resistance test per ASTM C1071 and ASTM G21, and shall meet zero level bacteria growth per ASTM G22. Unit insulation must meet these stringent requirements or unit(s) will not be accepted. 6. Cabinets shall have separate holes and knockouts for entrance of line voltage and Iow volt- age control wiring. 7. All factory-installed wiring passing through factory knockouts and openings shall be protected from sheet metal edges at openings by plastic ferrules. 8. Contractor must ensure that units can be easily removed for servicing and coordinate loca- tions of electrical conduit and lights with the electrical contractor. C. Compressor: 1. Compressor section interior surfaces shall be lined with 1/2 in. thick, dual density, 13/4 lb per cubic ft acoustic type fiberglass insulation. Air-handling section interior surfaces shall be lined with ~/2 in. thick, single density, 13/4 lb per cubic ft foil-backed fiber insulation for ease of cleaning. 2. Insulation placement shall be designed in a manner that will eliminate any exposed edges to prevent the introduction of glass fibers into the airstream. Units without foil-backed insulation in the air-handling section will not be accepted. 3.The compressor shall have a dual level vibration isolation system. 4. The compressor will be mounted on computer-selected vibration isolation springs to a large heavy gage compressor mounting tray plate, which is then isolated from the cabinet base with rubber grommets for maximized vibration attenuation. 5. Compressor shall be located in an insulated compartment away from airstream to minimize sound transmission. 6.Compressor shall have thermal overload protection. 7. The heat pumps shall be fabricated from heavy gage G90 galvanized steel with powder coat paint finish. Both sides of the steel shall be painted for added protection. 8. All units must have an insulated panel separating the fan compartment from the compressor compartment. 9.Units with the compressor in the airstream are not acceptable. D. Fan and Motor Assembly: 1. Blower shall have inlet rings to allow removal of wheel and motor from one side without re- moving housing. 2. The fan motor shall be 3-speed, permanently lubricated, PSC (permanent split capacitor) type with internal thermal overload protection. 3.The fan motor shall be isolated from the housing by rubber grommets. 4.The motor shall be permanently lubricated and have thermal overload protection. 5. A special dehumidification mode shall be provided to allow lower airflows in cooling for better dehumidification, The dehumidification mode shall be selectable via a jumper on the control board or may be controlled externally from a humidistat. 6. Airflow/static pressure rating of the unit shall be based on a wet coil and a clean filter in place. Ratings based on a dry coil and/or no filter, or on an ESP (external static pressure) less than 0.50 in. wg shall NOT be acceptable. E. Refrigerant Cimuit: 1. All units shall contain a Puron(~ (R-410A) sealed refrigerant circuit including a high-efficiency Copeland UltraTechTM single-stage compressor designed for heat pump operation, a thermo- static expansion valve for refrigerant metering, an enhanced corrugated aluminum lanced fin and rifled copper tube refrigerant to air heat exchanger, reversing valve, coaxial (tube in tube) refrigerant to water heat exchanger, and safety controls, including a high-pressure switch, Iow-pressure switch (loss of charge), water coil Iow temperature sensor, and air coil Iow tem- perature sensor. 2. Access fittings shall be factory-installed on high and Iow pressure refrigerant lines to facilitate field service. 3.Refrigerant metering shall be accomplished by thermostatic expansion valve only. F. Drain Pan: 1. The drain pan shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel to inhibit corrosion. This corrosion protection system shall meet the stringent 1000-hour salt spray test per ASTM B117. If plastic type material is used, it must be HDPE (high-density polyethylene) to avoid thermal cycling shock stress failure over the lifetime of the unit. 2. Drain pan shall be fully insulated. 3. Drain outlet shall be located at pan as to allow complete and unobstructed drainage of con- densate. Drain outlet for horizontal units shall be connected from pan directly to FPT fitting. No hidden internal tubing extensions from pan outlet extending to unit casing (that can create drainage problems) will be accepted. 4. The unit as standard will be supplied with solid-state electronic condensate overflow protec- tion. Mechanical float switches will NOT be accepted. 5. Vertical units shall be furnished with a PVC slip condensate drain connection and an internal factory-installed condensate trap. If units without an internal trap are used, the contractor is responsible for any extra costs to field install these provisions, and/or the extra costs for the subcontractor to install these provisions. G. Filter: 1. Units shall have a factory-installed 1 in. wide filter bracket for filter removal from either side. Units shall have a 1 in. thick throwaway type fiberglass filter. 2. The contractor shall pumhase one spare set of filters and replace factory shipped filters on completion of start-up. 3. Filters shall be standard sizes. If units utilize non-standard filter sizes, then the contractor shall provide 12 spare filters for each unit. H. Thermostatic Expansion Valve: 1. Expansion valves shall be dual port balanced types with external equalizer for optimum re- frigerant metering. 2. Units shall be designed and tested for operating ranges of entering water temperatures from 20 to 120 F. 3. Reversing valve shall be four-way solenoid activated refrigerant valve, which shall default to heating mode should the solenoid fail to function. If the reversing valve solenoid defaults to cooling mode, an additional Iow temperature thermostat must be provided to prevent over- cooling an already cold room. I. Controls and Safeties: 1. Electrical: a. A control box shall be located within the unit compressor compartment and shall contain a 50 va transformer, 24-volt activated, 2 or 3-pole compressor contactor, terminal block for thermostat wiring and solid-state controller for complete unit operation. b. Reversing valve and fan motor wiring shall be routed through this electronic controller. c. Units shall be name-plated for use with time-delay fuses or HACR circuit breakers. Unit controls shall be 24-volt and provide heating or cooling as required by the remote ther- mostat/sensor. 2. Unit Controls: a. Safety controls including a high-pressure switch, a Iow-pressure sensor, and a Iow water and Iow air temperature sensor. Access fittings shall be factory installed on high and Iow pressure refrigerant lines to facilitate field service. b. Activation of any safety device shall prevent compressor operation via a microprocessor lockout circuit. The lockout shall be reset at the thermostat or at the contractor-supplied disconnect switch. c. Units which may be reset only at the disconnect switch only shall not be acceptable. 3. Complete C Controls: The standard Complete C electronic control system shall interface with a heat pump (Y,O) wall thermostat (mechanical or electronic). The control system microprocessor board shall be specifically designed to protect against building electrical system noise contamination, EMI, and RFI interference. The control system shall have the following features: a. 50 va transformer. b. Performance Monitor (PM). The PM warns when the heat pump is running inefficiently. c. Anti-short cycle time delay on compressor operation time delay shall be 5 minutes mini- mum. d. Random start on power up mode. e. Low voltage protection. f. High voltage protection. g. Unit shutdown on high or Iow refrigerant pressures. h. Unit shutdown on Iow water temperature. i. Water coil freeze protection (selectable for water or antifreeze). j. Air coil freeze protection (check filter switch). k. Condensate overflow shutdown. I. Option to reset unit at thermostat or disconnect, Fault type shall be retained in memory if reset at thermostat. m. Automatic intelligent reset. Unit shall automatically reset 5 minutes after trip if the fault has cleared. Should a fault reoccur 3 times sequentially, lockout requiring manual reset will occur. n. Ability to defeat time delays for servicing. o. Light-emitting diodes (LED) to indicate high pressure, Iow pressure, Iow voltage, high voltage, air/water freeze protection, condensate overflow and control status. p, The Iow-pressure switch SHALL NOT be monitored for the flint 90 seconds after a com- pressor start command to prevent nuisance safety trips. q. Remote fault type indication at thermostat. r. Selectable 24-v or pilot duty dry contact alarm output. s. 24-v output to cycle a motorized water valve with compressor contactor. t. Electric heat output to control two stages of electric heat (emergency heat). u. Service test mode for troubleshooting and service. v. Unit Performance Sentinel (UPS). The UPS warns when the heat pump is running ineffi- ciently. Units not providing the 8 safety protections of anti-short cycle, Iow voltage, high voltage, high refrigerant pressure, Iow pressure (loss of charge), air coil freeze, water coil freeze, and condensate overflow protections will not be accepted, 4. Deluxe D Controls: Optional electronic Deluxe D control shall have all the features of the Complete C control with the following additional features: a. 75 va transformer. b. A removable thermostat connector. c. Random start on return from night setback. d. Intelligent reversing valve operation for extended life and quiet operation. e. Night setback control from Iow temperature thermostat, with 2-hour override initiated by a momentary signal from the thermostat, f. Dry contact night setback output for digital night setback thermostats. g. Ability to work with heat/cool (Y, W) thermostats. h. Ability to work with heat pump thermostats using O or B reversing valve control. i. Single grounded wire to initiate night setback, or emergency shutdown. j. Boilerless system control can switch automatically to electric heat at Iow loop water tem- perature. k. Dehumidistat input providing fan control for dehumidification operation via the IdealHu- midityTM system. I. Multiple units connected to one sensor providing communication for up to 3 water source heat pumps. m. Selection of boilerless changeover temperature set point. n. Compressor relay staging for dual stage units or in master/slave applications. Units not having automatic Iow sensible heat ratio cooling will not be accepted; as an alternate, a hot gas reheat coil may be provided with control system for automatic activation. J. Piping: 1. Supply and return water connections shall be copper FPT fittings and shall be securely mounted flush to the cabinet corner post allowing for connection to a flexible hose without the use of a back-up wrench. 2. All water connections and electrical knockouts must be in the compressor compartment cor- ner post as to not interfere with the serviceability of unit. Contractor shall be responsible for any extra costs involved in the installation of units that do not have this feature. K. Solid-State Permanent Split Capacitor (PSC) Fan Control Board: 1. Airflow selection shall be accomplished via 3 jumper switches on the PSC control board. Ac- tual airflow shall be indicated by the cfm LED with each 100 cfm being represented by one flash of the LED. 2. Airflow shall be automatically maintained (±5%) by the PSC motor regardless of external static pressure up to its maximum output capacity. 3. A jumper shall allow selection of a special dehumidification mode, which reduces airflow in cooling by 25% to increase the latent capacity of the unit. A terminal shall be provided on the control board to allow an external humidistat to activate dehumidification mode. L. Remote Service Sentinel (Complete C or Deluxe D): 1. Solid-state control system shall communicate with thermostat to display (at the thermostat) the unit status, fault status, and specific fault condition, as well as retrieve previously stored fault that caused unit shutdown. 2. The remote service sentinel allows building maintenance personnel or service personnel to diagnose unit from the wall thermostat. 3. The control board shall provide a signal to the thermostat fault light, indicating a lockout. 4. Upon cycling the G (fan) input 3 times within a 60-second time period, the fault light shall dis- play the specific code as indicated by a sequence of flashes. A detailed flashing code shall be provided at the thermostat LED to display unit status and specific fault status such as over/under voltage fault, high pressure fault, Iow pressure fault, Iow water temperature fault, condensate overflow fault, etc. 5. Units that do not provide this remote service sentinel shall not be acceptable. M. Special Features: 1. Cupronickel coaxial water-to-refrigerant heat exchangers for higher corrosion protection. 2. Sound attenuation (mute) package consists of high technology sound attenuating materials strategically applied to the cabinet, in addition to the standard system, to further dampen sound. 3. Extended range for units operating with entering water temperatures below dew point. Ex- tended entering water temperatures range from 20 to 120 F. 4. Two-way motorized water control valve shall operate in conjunction with the compressor to shut off or turn on water to the unit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. C. Install seismic restraints. 1.2 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance. B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." C. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. 1.3 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 1.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instmctions. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. END OF SECTION 15732 SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-HANDLING UNITS Part 1 -- General 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Indoor, packaged air-handling unit for use in commercial split systems. Unit shall have a multi- poise design and shall be capable of horizontal or vertical installation on a floor or in a ceiling, with or without ductwork. (Only vertical units are to be applied without ductwork.) B. Unit shall have a direct-expansion coil and shall be used in a refrigerant circuit with a matching air-cooled condensing unit. 1.02 QUALITY ASStYRANCE A. Coils shall be designed and tested in accordance with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, latest edition. B. Unit shall be constructed in accordance with ETL and ETL, Canada standards and shall carry the ETL and ETL, Canada labels. C. Unit insulation and adhesive shall comply with NFPA-90A requirements for flame spread and smoke gen- eration. Insulation shall contain an EPA-registered immobilized antimicrobial agent to effectively resist the growth of bacteria and fungi as proven by tests in accordance with ASTM standards G21 and 22. D. Unit shall be manufactured in a facility registered to the ISO 9001:2000 manufacturing quality standard. E. Direct-expansion coils shall be burst tested at 435 psi and leak tested at 150 psi. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Units shall be stored and handled per manufacturer's recommendations. 1.04 WARRANTY Standard warranty shall be parts only by the manufacturer and labor by the installing contractor. Warranty period shall be 1 year from startup or 18 months from shipment, whichever comes first. Part 2 -- Products 2.01 EQUIPMENT Indoor mounted, draw-thru, packaged air-handling unit that can be used with or without ductwork in a sus- pended horizontal configuration or free-standing vertical configuration. Unit shall consist of forward-curved belt-driven centrifugal fan(s), motor and drive assembly, prewired fan motor contactor, factory-installed refrig- erant metering devices, cooling coil, 2-in. disposable air filters, and condensate drain pans for vertical or hori- zontal configurations. A. Base Unit: 1. Cabinet shall be constructed of mill-galvanized steel. 2. Cabinet panels shall be fully insulated with 1/2-in. fire-retardant material. Insulation shall con- tain an EPA-registered immobilized antimicrobial agent to effectively resist the growth of bacteria and fungi as proven by tests in accordance with ASTM standards G21 and 22. 3. Unit shall contain non-corroding condensate drain pans for both vertical and horizontal appli- cations. Drain pans shall have connections on right and left sides of unit to facilitate field connection. Drain pans shall have the ability to be sloped toward the right or left side of the unit to prevent standing water from accumulating in pans. 4. Unit shall have factory-supplied 2-in. throwaway-type filters installed upstream from the cooling coil. Filter access shall be from either the right or left side of the unit. B. Coils: Coils shall consist of 4 rows of 3/8-in. copper tubes with sine-wave aluminum fins bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion. Coil tubing shall be internally rifled to maximize heat transfer. Suction and liquid line connections shall be made on the same side of the coil. Direct-expansion coils shall feature factory-installed thermostatic expansion valves (TXVs) for refrigerant control. The TXVs shall be capable of external adjustment. Motor: 1. Fan motor of the size and electrical characteristics specified on the equipment schedule shall be fac- tory supplied and installed. 2. Evaporator-fan motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings and inherent automatic- reset thermal overload protection (motors smaller than 5 bp) or manual reset calibrated circuit break- ers (motors equal or larger than 5 bp). Evaporator motors are designed specifically for Carrier and do not have conventional horsepower (hp) ratings listed on the motor nameplate. Motors are designed and qualified in the "air-over" location downstream of the cooling coil and carry a maximum con- tinuous bhp rating that is the maximum application bhp rating for the motors; no "safety factors" above that rating may be applied. 3. All evaporator-fan motors 5 hp and larger shall meet the minimum efficiency requirements as estab- lished by the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT), effective October 24, 1997. D. OPTIONAL FEATURES (TO BE SELECTED BY ENGINEER): Hot Water Coil: Coil shall be 2-row, U-bend coil with copper tubes and aluminum plate fins bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion. Coil shall be mounted in a galvanized steel housing that shall be fastened to the unit's fan deck for blow-thru heating operation. Coil shall have maximum working pressure of 150 psig. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. C. Install seismic restraints. D. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 1.2 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance. B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." C. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. 1.3 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 1.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-anthorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. END OF SECTION 15738 SECTION 15739 - SPLIT-SYSTEM CONDENSING UNITS Part 1 -- General 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Outdoor-mounted, air-cooled condensing unit suitable for on-the-ground or rooftop installation. Unit shall con- sist of a reciprocating or scroll air-conditioning compressor assembly, an air-cooled coil, propeller-type con- denser fans, and a control box. Unit shall discharge supply air upward as shown on contract drawings. Unit shall be used in a refrigeration cimuit matched with a packaged air-handling unit. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 360-2000. B. Unit construction shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 safety code latest revision and comply with NEC. C. Unit shall be constructed in accordance with UL 1995 standard and shall carry the UL and UL, Canada label. D. Unit cabinet shall be capable of withstanding 500-hour salt spray exposure per ASTM B 117 (scribed specimen). E. Air-cooled condenser coils for semi-hermetic compressor units (38ARS) shall be leak tested at 150 psig and pressure tested at 480 psig. Air-cooled condenser coils for hermetic compressor units (38ARZ) shall be leak tested at 200 psig, and pressure tested at 428 psig. F. Unit shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001:2000 manufacturing quality stan- dard. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Unit shall be shipped as single package only, and shall be stored and handled according to unit manufacturer's recommendations. 1.04 WARRANTY Extended 5 year compressor (parts only) warranty to be supplied by the manufacturer. Part 2 -- Products 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. General: Factory-assembled, single piece, air-cooled condensing unit. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, compressor, holding charge (R-22), and special fea~ tures required prior to field start-up. B. Unit Cabinet: 1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a prepainted baked enamel finish. 2. A heavy-gage roll-formed perimeter base rail with forklift slots and lifting holes shall be pro- vided to facilitate rigging. C. Fans: '1. Condenser fans shall be direct driven, propeller-type, discharging air vertically upward. 2. Fan blades shall be balanced. 3. Condenser fan discharge openings shall be equipped with PVC-coated steel wire safety guards. 4. Condenser fan and motor shaft shall be corrosion resistant. D. Compressor: 1. Compressor shall be of the hermetic scroll type (ARZ) or semi-hermetic reciprocating type (ARS). 2.Compressor shall be mounted on robber grommets. 3.Compressors shall include overload protection. 4.Compressors shall be equipped with a crankcase heater. 5. Compressor shall be equipped with internal high discharge temperature protection (38ARZ007 and 012 only). E. Condenser Coil: 1. Condenser coil shall be air-cooled and circuited for integral subcooler. 2. Coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to internally grooved seam- less copper tubes which are then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed. F. Refrigeration Components: Refrigeration circuit components shall include liquid line service valve, suction line service valve, a full charge of compressor oil, and a holding charge of refrigerant. G. Controls and Safeties: 1.Minimum control functions shall include: a. Control wire terminal blocks. b. Compressor lockout on auto-reset safety until reset from thermostat. 2. Minimum safety devices which are equipped with automatic reset (after resetting first at thermostat), shall include: a. High discharge pressure cutout. b. Low pressure cutout. c. High discharge temperature cutout (38ARZ008 and 012 only). H. Electrical Requirements: 1. Nominal unit electrical characteristics shall be __ v, 3-ph, 60 Hz. The unit shall be capa- ble of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of__ v to __ v. 2. Unit electrical power shall be single-point connection. 3. Unit control circuit shall contain a 24-v transformer for unit control. L Optional Features (TO BE SELECTED BY ENGINEER): I. Low-Ambient Temperature Control: A low-ambient temperature control shall be available as a factory-installed option or as a field-in.stalled accessory. This low-ambient control shall regulate speed of the condenser-fan motors tn response to the saturated condensing temperature of the unit. The control shall maintain correct condensing pressure at outdoor temperatures down to -20 F. 2. Gage Panel Package: Gage panel package shall include a suction and discharge pressure gage. 3. Unit-Mounted, Non-Fused Disconnect Switch: Switch shall be factory-installed and internally mounted. NEC and UL-approved non-fused switch shall provide unit power shutoff. Switch shall be accessible from outside the unit and shall provide power off lockout capability. 4. Convenience Outlet: Outlet shall be factory-installed and internally mounted with easily accessible 115-v female receptacle. Outlet shall include 15 amp GFI (ground fault interrupter) receptacle with inde- pendent fuse protection. Voltage required to operate convenience outlet shall be provided by a factory-installed step-down transformer. Outlet shall be accessible from outside the unit. 5. Hall Guard Package: Hall guard package shall protect coils against damage from hail and other flying debris. 6. Condenser Coil Grille: Grille shall add decorative appearance to unit and protect condenser coil from large objects and vandalism. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. Install seismic restraints. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static deflection of 1 inch. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints." Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 1.2 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance. B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." C. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. 1.3 A. FIELD QUAL1TY CONTROL Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 1.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.5 A. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. END OF SECTION 15739 SECTION 15764 - RADIATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Baseboard radiators. 2. Convectors. 3. Finned-tube radiators. 4. Steel radiators. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each radiator type. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Details of custom-fabricated enclosures indicating dimensions. 3. Required clearances. 4. Location and size of each field connection. 5. Enclosure joints, comer pieces, access doors, and other accessories. 6. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 7. Unit schedules to include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's coltr charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes. Maintenance Data: For radiators to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. PART 2 2.1 A. - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Baseboard Radiators: a. Burnham Corp.; Hydronics Div. b. Hydrotherm. c. Sterling Heating Equipment. d. Weil-McLain; a United Dominion Company. 2. Convectors: a. Burnham Corp.; Hydronics Div. b. Dunham-Bush, Inc. c. Sterling Heating Equipment. Finned-Tube Radiators: a. Slant/Fin. b. Sterling Heating Equipment. 2.2 A. BASEBOARD RADIATORS Heating Elements: Copper tubing mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly spaced aluminum fins, one tube end belled; with polypropylene element glides. 1. Tube Diameter: NPS 1 2. Fin Size: 4 by 4 inches. Enclosures: One piece, minimum 0.030-inch- (0.75-mm-) thick steel, with full-height back, full-length damper, end panel, end caps, comers, and joiner pieces to snap together. Front panel shall be easily removable. Enclosure Height: Finish: Factory-applied baked enamel in manufacturer's color. Element Brackets: Galvanized steel to support front panel and element glide. Capacity: As scheduled, based on 65 deg F entering air temperature, 180 deg F average water temperature. 2.3 A. CONVECTORS Convector Elements: Seamless copper tubing mechanically expanded into evenly spaced aluminum fins and cast-iron headers; steel side plates and supports; factory-pressure tested at 100 psig (690 kPa) underwater. Enclosures: Steel with exposed comers rounded; removable front panels with tamperproof fasteners braced and reinfomed for stiffness. 1. Front and Top: 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel. 2. Back and Ends: 0.0478-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick steel. 3. Insulation: l/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, fibrous glass on inside at front, sides, and back of enclosure. 4. Finish: Factory-applied baked enamel in manufacturer's color. 5. Damper: Knob-operated internal damper at enclosure outlet, if not thermostatically controlled. 6. Access Doors: Factory made, permanently hinged with Allen-head camlock fastener, minimum size 6 by 7 inches (150 by 175 mm), integral with enclosure for otherwise inaccessible valves. 7. Enclosure Style: Capacity: As scheduled, based on 65 deg F (18 deg C) entering air temperature, 180 deg F average water temperature. 2.4 A. FINNED-TUBE RADIATORS Heating Elements: Seamless copper tubing suitable for soldered fittings, mechanically expanded into evenly spaced aluminum fins. 1. Tube Diameter: NPS 1. 2. Fin Size: 4 by 4 inches. B. Heating Elements: Steel tubing mechanically expanded into evenly spaced steel fins. 1. Tube Diameter: NPS 1. 2. Fin Size: Element Hangers: Ball-bearing cradle type with unrestricted longitudinal movement on enclosure brackets. Enclosures: Galvanized steel with easily jointed components for wall-to-wall installation, rigidly supported on wall- or floor-mounting brackets. 1. Enclosures 18 Inches and Less in Height: 0.04784nch- thick steel. 2. Enclosures More Than 18 Inches in Height: 0.0598-inch- thick steel. 3. Support Brackets: Locate at maximum 36-inch spacing. 4. Finish: Factory-applied baked enamel in manufacturer's color. 5. Damper: Knob~operated internal damper at enclosure outlet, if not thermostatically controlled. 6. Access Doors: Factory made, permanently hinged with Allen-head camlock fastener, minimum size 6 by 7 inches (!50 by 175 mm), integral with enclosure for otherwise inaccessible valves. 7. Enclosure Style: Capacity: As scheduled, based on 65 deg F entering air temperature, 180 deg F average water temperature. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Factory test and rate baseboard radiators according to Hydronics Institute's "Testing and Rating Standard for Baseboard Radiation." Factory test and rate finned-tube radiators according to Hydronics Institute's "Testing and Rating Standard for Finned-Tube (Commercial) Radiation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. INSTALLATION Install radiators level and plumb. Install baseboard radiators according to Hydronics Institute's I=B=R 200, "Installation Guide for Residential Hydronic Heating Systems," and as follows: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, center heating elements under windows. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, install enclosure continuously from wall to wall, around comers, using outside and inside comer fittings. 3. Join sections with splicer plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure. 4. Install access doors in enclosures for access to valves and other fittings. 5. Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps. C. Install finned-tube radiators as follows: 5. 6. 7. Unless otherwise indicated, center heating elements under windows. Unless otherwise indicated, install enclosure continuously from wall to wall. Unless otherwise indicated, install enclosure continuously around comers, using outside and inside comer fittings. Join sections with splicer plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure. Install access doors for access to valves and other fittings. Install air-seal gasketing between wall and enclosure mounting channel. Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps. D. Install steel radiators as follows: Unless otherwise indicated, center radiators under windows. ' Connect radiators with flexible piping connections. 3.2 CONNECTIONS Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings and with requirements specified in piping systems. If Drawings are explicit enough, these requirements may be reduced or omitted. A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect hot-water units and components to piping according to Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." Install shutoff valve on inlet and balancing valve on outlet. Connect steam units and components to piping according to Division 15 Section "Steam and Condensate Piping." 1. Install shutoff valve on inlet; install steam trap and shutoff valve on outlet. 3.3 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect for damage to exposed finish. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. END OF SECTION 15764 SECTION 15768 - UNIT VENTILATORS Part 1 -- General 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Carder unit ventilators are designed for floor (vertical) or ceiling (horizontal) mounting. Units shall incorporate chilled water or direct expansion cooling and hot water, steam or electric heat as specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Units shall be tested and certified in accordance with ARI Standard 840. B. Unit shall be consm~cted and listed in accordance with ETL and ETL, Canada standards (ANSI/UL 1995-1999, second edition) (CAN/CSA C22.2 NO 236-95). C. Unit insulation and adhesive shall meet the requirements for flame spread rating of lower than 25 per ASTM E84 and smoke generation rating of lower than 50 per ASTM E84. Only closed cell insulation shall be used. The use of fiberglass insulation is not acceptable. D. Each coil shall be factory tested for leakage at 350-psig air pressure with coil submerged in water. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Units are secured to a heavy-duty wooden pallet, boxed, banded and labeled for shipment. Units must be stored and handled per manufacturer's recommendations. Part 2 -- Equipment 2.01 UNIT DESCRIPTION A. General: The unit shall be a factory-assembled bolt-together unit ventilator. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be factory-installed motor, wiring, blowers, coil(s), bearing, outdoor/return air damper, optional face/bypass damper and optional controls. Unit shall have a draw-thru design for uniform air distriburion across the coil and even discharge temperatures. B. Unit ConstrUction: 1. Unit frame shall be constructed of heavy gage galvanized steel components that form a rigid foundation and resist corrosion. 2. Unit composed of three main sub-assembled modules: Blower Module, Coil Module and Damper Module. Modules shall be removable without disassembling the unit. 3. Modules shall be externally insulated using closed cell insulation. 4. Unit back shall be insulated using closed cell insularion. 5. Exterior access panels shall be constructed of heavy gage galvanized steel that has been cleaned and pretreated before painting to maximize corrosion resistance. Exterior service access panels shall be retained by tamper-resistant fasteners. Panels are electrostatically coated with polyester powder baked on textured paint. C. 40UV (Vertical unit): 1. Unit standard depth of 217/8 in. depth, 30-in. tail cabinet with three 16-gage exposed front panels, service access panels with tamper-resistant hex socket head threaded fasteners and retainer chains for safety and ease of service. 2. Cabinet models shall have standard textured baked powder finished panels. Cabinet tops shall be charcoal bronze with a steel bar-stuck discharge grille with optionai side deflection vanes. Cabinet top shail have textured charcoal finish. 3. External access panels shail be easily removed from outside of the unit for easy access to filters and routine maintenance. Unit top shall be easily removed for routine maintenance. Bar-stock linear discharge grille shall be easily removed from top panel to reverse air direction. 4.Unit shall include leveling legs to compensate for floor irregularities. D. 40UH (Horizontal units): 1. Unit standard depth of 301/2 in. (36 in. and 40 in. depth optional; 200 size unit has standard depth of 40 in. with an optional depth of 44 in.), 165/s in. tall cabinet with two exposed service access bottom panels, with tamper-resistant hex socket head threaded fasteners and retainer chains for safety and ease of service. 2. Rated 750 to 1500 cfm units shall have standard bar-stock steel linear discharge grille and optional 2-way laterally adjustable vanes backed by screens with spaces no larger than 1/4 in. wide, anodized aiuminum double deflection discharge grille or discharge duct collar only. 3. Rated 2000 cfm units shall have an anodized aluminum double deflection discharge grille or optional discharge duct collar. 4.Un!t shall have two hinged bottom access panels for easy access to filters and routine 5. Retaining chains shail be furnished for both panels to ensure maximum safety. E. Coils: 1. Alternate #3 Chilled water and combination chilled/hot water coils shall be constructed of mechanically expanded copper tubing, minimum wall 0.016 in. inside, aluminum fins, with a minimum thickness of 0.025 in. The fin surface shall be enhanced to the maximum degree by incorporated a raised lance design. 2. Hot water coils shall be constructed of mechanically expanded copper tubing with a minimum wail of 0.016 in., inside aiuminum fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.045 in. Coils shall have a factory-mounted low limit device mounted on the leaving side of the heating coil. The device shall be single-pole, double-throw and shall activate at 38 F if the capillary device senses a temperature change along any 6 in. of the device. 3. Direct expansion (DX) coils shall be furnished with a thermal expansion valve sized to accommodate the condensing unit selected to meet the load. 4. All coils shall be pressure tested at no less than 350 psig at the factory to ensure that they are leak tight. 6. The unit must be constructed such that troubleshooting or adjustment of the controls can be done while the unit is operating normally. F. Pipe Tunnel: Rated 500 to 1500 cfm vertical units and rated 750 to 1500 cfm horizontal units shall have an integral pipe tunnel that can be used for piping across the unit. This tunnel shall be insulated, with closed cell insulation, from the unit and accessible from each end compartments to allow maximum flexibility of crossover piping installation. G. Drain Pans: 1. Unit drain pan shail be double sloped welded galvanized steel to prevent standing 2. Drain pan will be coated to prevent external condensation during cooling. 3. Drain connections shall be supplied on both ends of pan for field conversion of slope and drain hand connection if required. 4. Drain pan slope shall be field convertible without removing the coil module. 5. Heating only units shail come equipped with a double sloped drain pan for future cooling needs. 6. Horizontal units shall have drain pan connection centefline located 5 in. above the bottom to provide easy piping to condensate disposal system. H. Fans and Motor: 1. Fan and motor assembly shall be direct driven. One end of drive shaft shall be mounted in a sleeve-type or ball bearing, with other end of shaft supported by motor beatings. 2. Fan wheels shall be double-width, double-inlet with forward-curved blades, and shall operate at low speed. Fan wheels shall be mounted on a hollow one piece steel shaft. 3. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 4. Fan (blower) housings shall be constructed from heavy-gage steel and mounted to a heavy-gage galvanized steel fan deck. 5. To prevent vibration transmission to the unit frame, motor and shaft bearing shall be resiliently mounted. The drive shaft shall be connected to motor with a flexible coupling. 6. Fan motors shall be mounted outside of the airstream on a heavy-gage steel partition and removable without removing the blower module. 7. Units shall be supplied with permanently split capacitor (PSC) multi-tap transformer motors. All motors shall have integral high temperature reset and shall be protected with cartridge-type fuse(s). I. Filters: 1. Unit shall be supplied with 1-in. throwaway filter. For even loading, filter shall be positioned to filter mixed outdoor and return air. J. Dampers: 1. Unit shall contain a single outdoor-air/return-air damper with multiple sealing points. Damper shall be constructed of extmded aluminum with external closed cell insulation. The damper assembly shall include an anti-draft plate to prohibit outdoor air from penetrating the classrooms through the damper assembly. 2. A single face/bypass damper with multiple sealing points constructed of extruded aluminum shall be available. K. Controls and Safeties: 1. All controls shall be field supplied and installed by ATC contractor. END OF SECTION 15768 SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. 1.3 SUMMARY This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following: I. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall, round spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings. 3. Duct liner. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 2. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation". DEFINITIONS 1.4 A. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and - distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure. 1.5 A. SUBMITfALS Shop Drawings: Drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts, Shop Drawings shall be provided for all ductwork in scope of work. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: Ceiling suspension assembly members. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and other operating devices. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. Welding certificates. Field quality-control test reports. 1.6 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to: AWS DI.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members, and AWS Dg.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. B. NFPA Compliance: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 A. SHEET METAL MATERIALS Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having Gg0 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: galvanized sheet metal ducts. Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, l/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 A. DUCT LINER Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124. 1. Available Manufacturers: CertalnTeed Corp.; Insulation Group. Johns Manville International, Inc. Knanf Fiber Glass GmbH. Owens Coming. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to alrstream shall be coated to prevent erosion of glass fibers. a. Thickness: 1 inch. b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature. c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke- developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct. 1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall. 2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream. 3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard classification of duct liner system. 2.4 A. E. F. G. 2.5 A. SEALANT MATERIALS Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. Flange Gaskets: Butyl robber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or stmctural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installatiom Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-- Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted with zinc-chromate primer. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.6 A. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are electrolytically separated from ducts. RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class. 2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc. c. Ward Industries, Inc. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer. 2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined. 2.7 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive. Do E. F. G. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dirnensions make longitudinal joints necessary. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches frorn corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wail. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: Fan discharges. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. 2.8 A. ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct. Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." 1. Available Manufacturers: McGill AirFlow Corporation. SEMCO Incorporated. Duct Joints: Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket. Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM robber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's tolerances. a. Available Manufacturers: 1) Lindab Inc. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance. Fabricate elbows using die-~:ormed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die- formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows: 1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "I-IVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. 2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg: a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch. b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch. c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch. d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg: a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch. b. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch. c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch. d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material- handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. 7. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. 8. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch thick with 2-piece welded construction. 9. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non--elbow fittings specified above. 10. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10-Inch wg: 0.022 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following: 1. See Equipment Schedules on design drawings for system static pressure. B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel except as follows: 1. Aluminum. 3.2 A. DUCT INSTALLATION Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-- Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings. C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections. E. G. H. I. J. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fne dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction." Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex fmish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 3.3 UNDERSLAB DUCTS, SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Verify undamaged condition of ducts before enclosure with fill or encasement. B. Protect ducts from damage by equipment used in placing fill materials and concrete on or around ducts. C. Protect duct openings from damage and prevent entrance of foreign materials. 3.4 A. 3.5 A. SEAM AND JOINT SEALING Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-- Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated. 1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied. HANGING AND SUPPORTING Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.7 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports: Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of test section. Allowable Leakage, Supply Duct Systems: 1 percent of design airflow. Allowable Leakage, Return Duct Systems: 2 percent of design airflow. Allowable Leakage, Exhaust Supply Duct Systems: 2 percent of design airflow. Allowable Leakage, Supply Duct Systems, Terminals to Air Outlets: 2 percent of design airflow. ¸4. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable. 3.8 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before air balancing. 3.9 A. B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. Create other openings to comply with duct standards. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. F. Cleanliness Verification: 1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. 2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts. CLEANING EXISTING SYSTEMS Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. 1. Use existing service openings where possible. 2. Create other openings to comply with duct standards. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. Reseal rigid fiberglass duct systems according to NAIMA recommended practices. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and restore to their marked position on completion. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to the outside, use filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide operative drainage system for washdown procedures. 7. Biocidal Agents and Coatings: Apply biocidal agents if fungus is present. Apply biocidal agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. F. Cleanliness Verification: 1. Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of treatment, including biocidal agents and protective coatings. 2. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. 3. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts. Gravimetric Analysis: At discretion and expense of Owner, sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, may be tested for cleanliness according to NADCA vacuum test gravimetric analysis. If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable levels, system shall have passed cleanliness verification. If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system cleanliness verification will have failed and metal duct system shall be re-cleaned and re-verified. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning must restore coil pressure drop to within 10 percent of pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is not known, coil will be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical residue, based on thorough visual inspection. End of Section SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Ceiling fire dampers. 6. Smoke dampers. 7. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 8. Duct silencers. 9. Turning vanes. 10. Duct-mounting access doors. 11. Flexible connectors. 12. Flexible ducts. 13. Duct accessory hardware. B. Related Sections include the following: Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric damper actuators. 1.3 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Ceiling fire dampers. 6. Smoke dampers. 7. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 8. Duct silencers. 9. Turning vanes. 10. Duct-mounting access doors. 11. Flexible connectors. 12. Flexible ducts. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Special fittings. 2. Manual-volume damper installations. 3. Motorized-control damper installations. 4. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors. 5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." 1.5 A. EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A.. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. D. E. F. 2.3 A. D. E. F. G. H. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having Gg0 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063, temper T6. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. BACKDRAFT DAMPERS Available Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. CESCO Products. 4. Duro Dyne Corp. 5. Greenheck. 6. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 7. Prefco Products, Inc. 8. Ruskin Company. 9. Vent Products Company, Inc. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades of maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. Frame: 0.0$2-ineh- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded comers and mounting flange. Blades: [0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum. Blade Seals: Neoprene. Blade AxleS: Galvanized steel. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. 2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Available Manufacturers: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Air Balance, Inc. American Warming and Ventilating. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. McGill AirFlow Corporation. METALAIRE, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. Ruskin Company. Vent Products Company, Inc. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded comers; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet. 5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Angle-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded comers; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Aluminum Frames: Angle-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet. 5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze thrust or ball. 8. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 9. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum. 10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.5 A. 2.6 A. MOTORI7J~D CONTROL DAMPERS Available Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. CESCO Products. 4. Duro Dyne Corp. 5. Greenheck. 6. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 7. METALAIRE, Inc. 8. Nailor Industries Inc. 9. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 10. Ruskin Company. 11. Vent Products Company, Inc. General Description: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; minimum of 0.1084-inch- thick, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; minimum of 0.0635-inch- thick, galvanized-steel damper blades with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 1. Secure blades to l/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Provide parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable robber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D. FIRE DAMPERS Available Manufacturers: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Air Balance, Inc. CESCO Products. Greenheck. McGill AirFlow Corporation. METALAIRE, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. Prefco Products, Inc. 2.7 A. 9. Ruskin Company. 10. Vent Products Company, Inc. 11. Ward Industries, Inc. B. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to [fL 555. C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours. D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking comers. E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick as indicated and of length to suit application. 2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements. F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors. H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-sW, el closure spring. I. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated. CEILING FIRE DAMPERS Available Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. CESCO Products. 3. Greenheck. 4. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 5. METALAIRE, Inc. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 8. Prefco Products, Inc. 9. Ruskin Company. 10. Vent Products Company, Inc. 11. Ward Industries, Inc. B. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555C; comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." C. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction. D. Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation. E. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated. 2.8 A. 2.9 A. COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS Available Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. CESCO Products. 3. Greenheck. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 6. Ruskin Company. 'General Description: Labeled according to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555 for 1-1/2-hour rating. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated. Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application. F. Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two-position action. 1. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains. 2. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x 3. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F. 4. Nonspring-Retum Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf. 5. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. DUCT SILENCERS Available Manufacturers: 2. 3. 4. Industrial Noise Control, Inc. McGill AirFlow Corporation. Ruskin Company. Vibro-Acoustics. General Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencers with performance characteristics and physical requirements as indicated. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame-spread index and 50 for smoke-developed index when tested according to ASTM E 84. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.034-inch- thick, solid galvanized sheet metal for outer casing and 0.022-inch- thick, ASTM A 653/A 653M, [Gg0] [G60], perforated galvanized sheet metal for inner casing. E. Round Units: 1. Outer Casings: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90, galvanized sheet steel. Up to 24 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch thick. 26 through 40 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch thick. 42 through 52 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch thick. 54 through 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch thick. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than that indicated. 2. Interior Casing, Partitions, and Baffles: a. ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90, galvanized sheet steel. b. At least 0.034 inch thick and designed for minimum aerodynamic losses. Sheet Metal Perforations: 1/8-inch diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal. Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not less than 5 percent compression. 1. Erosion Barrier: Polymer bag enclosing fill and heat-sealed before assembly. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, raffle, or otherwise react to system pressure variations. 1. Do not use nuts, bolts, or sheet metal screws for unit assemblies. 2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints. 3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion. 4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension. Source Quality Control: Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power levels with an airflow of at least 2000-fpm face velocity. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure or 6- inch wg static pressure, whichever is greater. 2.10 TURNING VANES Co Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, single-vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Duro Dyne Corp. c. METALAIRE, Inc. d. Ward Industries, Inc. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill. 2.11 A. B. DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-l-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products. c. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. e. Greenheck. f. McGill AirFlow Corporation. g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Ventfabrics, Inc. i. Ward Industries, Inc. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows: Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and 1-inch thickness. Include cam latches. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame. D. Pressure Relief Access Door: Single wall and duct mounting; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated, latches, and retaining chain. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products. c. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Greenheck. e. KEES, Inc. f. McGill AirFlow Corporation. g. Nexus PDQ. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. E. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam robber. F. Insulation: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass. 2.12 A. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS Available Manufacturers: 1. Duro Dyne Corp. 2. Ventfabrics, Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts. D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq, yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq, yd.. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 Ibf/inch in the filling. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. F. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone robber. 1. Minimum Weight: 16 oz./sq, yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 285 lbf/inch in the warp and 185 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F. 2.13 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 3. Hart & Cooley, Inc. 4. McGill AirFlow Corporation. B. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire. 1. Pressure Rating:4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. C. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor banier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. D. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size. 2.14. A. DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions. H. Install duct silencers rigidly to ducts. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links. 4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-foot spacing. 5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. K. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: i0 inches in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter. 5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter. L. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, pressure relief access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 5 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 13 inches in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 19 inches in diameter. M. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." N. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators. O. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal strops. P. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. Q. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. R. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws. S. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action. C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." END OF SECTION 15820 SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 2. In-line centrifugal fans. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level. B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. 1.4 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. . Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Roof curbs. 7. Fan speed controllers. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 2. 3. 4. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. Ceiling suspension assembly members. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. Field quality-control test reports. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. 1.6 A. B. C. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instmctions. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessorie? 1.8 A. EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. 2. Carnes Company HVAC. 3. FloAire. 4. Greenheck. 5. Loren Cook Company. 6. Madison Manufacturing. 7. Penn Ventilation. Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, beatings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. 1. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and maintenance. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features: 1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball beatings. 3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. 4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. F. Accessories: 1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 4. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. 2.2 A. B. C. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded comers; 1-1/2-inch thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. 2. Cames Company HVAC. 3. FloAire. 4. Greenheck. 5. Loren Cook Company. 6. Madison Manufacturing. 7. Penn Ventilation. Description: In-line, direct, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, mounting brackets, and accessories. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting. Direct-Driven Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing; with wheel, inlet cone, and motor on swing-out service door. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub. Accessories: 1. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet. 2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. 3. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork. 4. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel. 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2.4 A. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating." PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers. Vibration- control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints." 1. In seismic zones, restrain suppo~ units. C. Secure roof-mourning fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs. D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. E. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.2 A. CONNECTIONS Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.3 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. E. Lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION 15838 SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. B. SUMMARY This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 2. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.3 A. DEFINITIONS Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor. C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening. 1.4 A. SUBMi'i'fALS Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following: Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of assembly of components. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in ceilings and walls. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 A. INSTALLATION Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the pane/. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. 3.4 CLEANING After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 15855 SECTION 15861 - AIR FILTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include dimensions; shipping, installed, and operating weights; required clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air filters and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions:" Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 52.1 for method of testing and rating air-filter units. D. Comply with ARI 850. 1.5 A. EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Provide one complete set of filters for each filter bank. If system includes prefilters, provide only prefilters. 2. Provide one container of red oil for inclined manometer filter gage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Air Filters, Electrostatic Air Cleaners, and Filter-Holding Systems: a. AAF International. b. Airguard Industries, Inc. c. Barnebey & Sutcliffe Corp. d. Columbus Industries, Inc. e. Continental Air Filter Div.; NiCon Filter Corp. f. Farr Co. g. Flanders Filters, Inc. h. International Air Filter, Inc. i. Koch Filter Corp. j. Research Products Corp. 2. Filter Gages: a. Airguard Industries, Inc. b. Dwyer Instruments Inc. 2.2 DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS A. Description: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, fiat-panel type, disposable air filters with holding frames. B. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive. C. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged, and with pull and retaining handles. D. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. 2.3 EXTENDED-SURFACE, DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS A. Description: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface filters with holding frames. B. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats and held by self-supporting wire grid. C. Media and Media-Grid Frame: Galvanized steel. D. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, and suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. 2.4 HEPA FILTERS A. Description: Factory-fabricated HEPA filters with holding casing. B. Media: UL 586, fibrous glass, constructed of continuous sheets with closely spaced pleats with aluminum separators. C. Frame Material: Galvanized steel. D. Media to Frame Side Bond: Neoprene adhesive. E. Face Gasket: Neoprene expanded rubber. F. Duct-Mounting Frames: Construct downstream comers'of holding device with cushion pads to protect media. Provide bolted filter-sealing mechanism to mount and continuously seal each individual filter. 2.5 FRONT- AND REAR-ACCESS FILTER FRAMES A. Framing System: Aluminum framing members with access for either upstream (fronO or downstream (rear) filter .servicing, cut to size and prepunched for assembly into modules. Vertically support filters prevent deflection of horizontal members without interfering with either filter installation or operation. B. Prefilters: Incorporate a separate track, removable from froot or back. C. Sealing: Factory-installed, positive-sealing device for each row of filters to ensure seal between gasketed filter elements to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. 2.6 SIDE-SERVICE HOUSINGS A. Description: Factory-assembled, side-service housings, constmcted of galvanized steel, with flanges to connect to duct system. B. Prefilters: Integral tracks to accommodate 2-inch disposable or washable filters. C. Access Doors: Continuous gaskets on perimeter and positive-locking devices. Arrange so filter cartridges can be loaded from either access door. D. Sealing: Incorporate positive-sealing gasket material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter cartridge frames to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. 2.7 FILTER GAGES Description: Diaphragm type with dial and pointer in metal case, vent valves, black figures on white background, and front recalibration adjustment. 1. Diameter: 2 inches. 2. Range: 0- to 4.0-inch wg. Manometer-Type Filter Gage: Molded plastic with epoxy-coated aluminum scale, logarithmic- curve tube gage with integral leveling gage, graduated to read from O- to 3.0-inch wg, and accurate within 3 percent of full scale range. C. Accessories: Static-pressure tips, tubing, gage connections, and mounting bracket. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames to substrate. C. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. D. Install filter gage for each filter bank. E. Install filter gage static-pressure tips upstream and downstream from filters to measure pressure drop through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages. F. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations. G. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections. H. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.2 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components, filter and filter-frame installation, and electrical wiring. Report results in writing. Operate automatic roll filters to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating. Correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace units that cannot be corrected with new units and retest. 3.3 A. HEPA Filters: Pressurize housing to a minimum of 3.0-inch wg or to designed operating pressure, whichever is higher; and test housing joints, door seals, and sealing edges of filter with soapy water to check for air leaks. CLEANING After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and air- distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media. END OF SECTION 15861 SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS PART 1 .- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control units by programmable thermostat. B. Local thermostats are to be installed to control operation of electric duct heaters. 1.4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 1.5 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. 1. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Programmable thermostats Temp. sensors, flow switches. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A4 Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is a certified installer of the automatic control system manufacturer foi: both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing automatic temperature- control systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems." Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC systeTM control components. Year-2000 Compliant: Computer hardware and software shall be capable of accurately processing, providing, and receiving date data from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, including leap-year calculations. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to unit manufacturer. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Replacement Materials: One replacement diaphragm or relay mechanism for each unique positioning relay. C. Maintenance Materials: One thermostat adjusting key. D. Maintenance Materials: One pneumatic thermostat test kit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Control Systems Components: a. Honeywell, Inc.; Home & Building Control. 2.2 A. SENSORS Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. 1. Thermistor temperature sensors as follows: Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. B. Equipment operation sensors as follows: 1. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5 inches wg. 2. Status Inputs for Pamps: Differential-pressure switch piped across pump with adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig. 3. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers, adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current. 2.3 A. THERMOSTATS Electric solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor. 1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 5. Short-cycle protection. 6. Programming based on every day of week. 7. Selection features include degF or degC display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on-auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display features include the following: Time of day. Actual room temperature. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: For electric duct heaters. Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, integral manual on-off-auto selector switch. Equip thermostats, which control electric heating loads directly, with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors. Dead Band: Maximum 2 deg F. C. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 2. 3. 4. 5. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. Thermometer: Concealed. Color: white Orientation: Horizontal. D. Room thermostat accessories include the following: 1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. 2. Thermostat Guards: Locking; heavy-duty. 3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws. 4. Aspirating Boxes: For flush-mounted aspirating thermostats. 5. Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch- diameter, adjustment knob. 2.4 A. DAMPERS Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.1084-inch minimum, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.0635-inch galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches. Blades shall be secured to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 inches wg when damper is being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D. 2.5 CONTROL CABLE A. Electronic and Fiber-Optic Cable for Control Wiring: "Control/Signal Transmission Media." As specified in Division 16 Section PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. I EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation. B. Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices and wiring and pneumatic piping are installed before proceeding with installation. 3.2 A. B. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. 3.3 A. INSTALLATION Install equipment level and plumb. Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate all 60 inches above the floor. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. Where indicated. Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." Install steam and condensate instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section "Steam and Condensate Piping." Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping." Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying air ducts. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media." ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media." 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness mutticonductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. B. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.5 A. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain control systems and components. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules. 2. Provide operator training on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, executing commands, calibrating and adjusting devices, resetting default values, and requesting logs. Include a minimum of 40 hours' dedicated instructor time on-site. 3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 4. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 5. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. 3.6 A. ON-SI'IE ASSISTANCE Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three Project site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in ddjusting sensors and controls to suit actual conditions. END OF SECTION 15900 SECTION 15940 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1. GENERAL 2. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 3. SUMMARY This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. Related Sections include the following: 4. Division 15 Section Computer-Room Air Conditioning Units. 5. CONTROL 1. Unit ventilators: a) During morning warm up, the minimum position will be eliminated until the room is within two degrees of the day setting. The valve will be fully open. When the room is within two degrees of day setting, the outside/return air damper will stroke to it's minimum setting and the valve will remain open. When the room is at set point, the valve will modulate closed. On'a further rise in room temperature the out- side damper will open to maintain a 60° fan discharge. Morning warm- up shall terminate by 7:00 AM. b) During the night cycle, the fan cycle off, the damper will be com- pletely closed to the outside air and the control valve will be under control of it's low limit. The controller will cycle each room to main- rain it's night set back temperature. c) A manually reset freezestat with it's capillary serpintined across the full length and breadth of the coil will stop the fan, open the valve and close the economizer if it's set point of 38° is reached. An alarm will print out on the front end whenever the freezestat trips. d) Any room that has adjacent radiation will have a separate control valve. The valve will be controlled separately from the unit vent heat- ing coil valve. 2. Bathroom exhaust fan a) All exhaust fans will be connected to the DDC for starffstop function. Unless shown otherwise on the plans, the fans will mn during the occupied cycle and be off during the unoccupied cycle. Those exhaust fans that are controlled by a space thermostat will be cycled on and off on demand of that thermostat. 3. Cabinet Heaters a) The UNT controller shall cycle the fan to maintain it's set point at the wall mounted DDC sensor. When the fan is cycled on, the control valve will open. When the fan is off, the valve will be closed. A lower set point will be maintained during the unoccupied cycle. 4. Pump Control a) There is a lead and a back up pump. The alternator switch shall select the lead pump automatically. The stand-by pump shall be off when the lead pump is in operation. During the day cycle, the lead pump shall be on whenever the outside air temperature is below 60°F (adjustable). The lead pump shall be off whenever the outside air temperature is above 60 o (adjustable) (day cycle) or 35°F (adjustable) (night cycle). The pumps shall als0 be on during the night cycle upon the call for heat from any space sensor. If the lead pump stops the stand by pump will start auto- matically by the alternator switch. END OF SECTION 15940 SECTION 15990 - TESTEqG, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. C. SUMMARY This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives, including the following: 1. Balancing airflow within distribution systems to specified tolerances. 2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities. 3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment. 4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment. 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 6. Measuring and setting water balance valves. 7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment. 2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections. DEFINITIONS Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system. K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment. L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association. O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute. P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. 1.4 A. SUBMrlTALS Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article below. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. E. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" A~ticle below. 1.5 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or NEBB. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of tasting, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, I-IVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following: Submittal distribution requirements. Contract Documents examination report. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan. Work schedule and Project site access requirements. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following: Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification." Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer. 1.6 A. COORDINATION Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate I-IVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. 1.7 A. WARRANTY General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and mn concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer Wells, flow- control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptibns, statements of design assumptions for environmental Conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed. 3.2 A. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. PREPARATION Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 3. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 4. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES p A. erform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. 3.4 A. Bo FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. D. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. E. Check for airflow blockages. F. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. G. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. 3.5 A. CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES The procedUres in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multizone, dual-duct, induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These additional procedures are specified in other articles in this Section. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressUre as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tabe traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 3.6 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION A. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. B. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.' 3.7 A. TOLERANCES Set HVAC system airflow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus I0 pement. 3.8 A. FINAL REPORT General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3- ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report. 10. Summary of contents, including the following: Design versus final performance. Notable characteristics of systems. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following: 2. 3. 4. Quantities of outside, supply, return. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. Terminal units. Balancing stations. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1, Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification· b. Location. c. Make and type. · d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class· g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore· i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size. 2. Motor Data: Include the following: Make and frame type and size. Horsepower and rpm. Volts, phase, and hertz. Full-load amperage and service factor. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: Include the following: g. h. i. k. System and air-handling unit number. Location and zone. Traverse air temperature in deg F. Duct static pressure in inches wg. Duct size in inches. Duct area in sq. ft.. Design airflow rate in cfm. Design velocity in fpm. Actual airflow rate in cfm. Actual average velocity in fpm. Barometric pressure in psig. H. Instmment Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following: 1. Report Data: Include the following: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.9 A. ADDITIONAL TESTS Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTi~ON 15990 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTIONS 16050 16060 16075 16120 16130 16140 16441 16442 16511 16720 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION Basic Materials and Methods Grounding Electrical Identification Conductors and Cables Raceway and Boxes Wiring Devices Switchboards Panelboards Interior Lighting Fire Alarm System James, LaSala & Associates, LLP ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 16 1 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL i. 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electricity-metering components. 3. Concrete equipment bases. 4. Electrical demolition. 5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 6. Touchup painting. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity-metering equipment. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and AcceSsories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70 NEC 2002 is applicable code and shall be followed. 1.5 COORDINATION Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow. 1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 1 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building. C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel. C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Comply with Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for slotted channel framing. 1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports. D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C- clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click- type hangers. E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. F. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type. G. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 2.2 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING A. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company. B. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company. 1. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 2.3 CONCRETE BASES James, LaSala & Associates, LLP BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 2 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- Place Concrete." Concrete: 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2.4 TOUCHUP PAINT A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. D. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION A.' Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components. B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system. D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load. 3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 3 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits. C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future. E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate stxength. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated: 1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails. 2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units. 3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel. a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS DI.1. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 4 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. Fasteners: Select so.the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 pemant of its proof-test load. 3.4 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT A. Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company. 3.5 A. FIRESTOPPING Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Sectibn "Firestopping." 3.6 A. CONCRETE BASES Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (I00 mm) larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.7 A. DEMOLITION Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety. Where an existing conduit and cable is required to be removed, but serves an existing piece of equipment which remains, this contractor shall re-route said conduit or provide a new source of power to this equipment as part of this contract. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish. Remove demolished material from Project site. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make. operational components indicated for relocation. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 5 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 3.8 CUTIING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved. 3.9 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Supporting devices for electrical components. Electricity-metering components. Concrete bases. Electrical demolition. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. Touchup painting. 3.10 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16050 James, LaSala & Associates, LLP BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 6 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. 1.3 SUBMITI'ALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Ground rods. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. 1.4 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1. Comply with UL 467. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground constmction, comply with IEEE C2. C. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 1 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." B. Material: Aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, and copper. C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation. D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated. F. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. G. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: 1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWO, stranded copper conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick. 4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick. H. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators. 2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions. 2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES James, LaSala & Associates, LLP GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 2 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I/MPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel. B. Ground Rods: Sectional type; copper-clad steel. 1. Size: 3/4 by 120 inches (19 by 3000 mm) in diameter. C. Test Wells: Provide handholes as specified in Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. D. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts. E. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade or bury 12 inches (300 mrn) above duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank. 3.2 A. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in James, LaSala & Associates, LLP GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 3 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a l/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6.4-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding electrode in addition to installing a separate equipment grounding conductor with supply branch-circuit conductors. 3.3 INSTALLATION Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. Interconnect ground reds with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating. Ground rods shall be installed in undisturbed earth. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding strops. G. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve. H. Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service entrance. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 4 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 3.4 CONNECTIONS Ao General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis pOssibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electmplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent futura penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces, indicating improper cleaning axe not acceptable. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings withou~ mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted- and clamped-type cOnnections between conductors and ground rods. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: James, LaSala & Associates, LLP After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 5 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. 3.6 GRADING AND PLANTING Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section. Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application of top~oil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division 2 Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated. END OF SECTION 16060 James, LaSala & Associates, LLP GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 6 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. · B. Schedule of Nomenclature: An index of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS Comply with ANSI Al3.1, Table 3, for minimum size of lette{s for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. Color: Black letters on orange field. Legend: Indicates voltage and service. Pretensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pretensioned gripping action when placed in position. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide (0.08 mm thick by 25 to 51 mm wide). D. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick (I 52 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick). 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend indicating type of underground line. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 1 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. 2.2 A. B. NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cra) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in comers for mounting. Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose- acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in comers for mounting. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32, stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 2.3 A. MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS Cable Ties: Fungns-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.3 kg) minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: According to color-coding. B. Paint: Formulated for the type of surface and intended use. Primer for Galvanized Metal: Single-component acrylic vehicle formulated for galvanized surfaces. Primer for Concrete Masonry Units: Heavy-duty-resin block filler. Primer for Concrete: Clear, alkali-resistant, binder-type sealer. Enamel: Silicone-alkyd or alkyd urethane as recommended by primer manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION James, LaSala & Associates, LLP 2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Ao Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. E. Install painted identification according to manufacturer's wtitten instructions and as follows: i. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. 2. Prime surfaces using type of primer specified for surface. 3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of enamel. Color Banding Raceways and Exposed Cables: Band exposed and accessible raceways of the systems listed below: 1. Bands: Pretensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or a combination of both. Make each color band 2 inches (5'1 mm) wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. 3. Apply the following colors to the systems listed below: a. Fire Alarm System: Red. b. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. c. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. d. Security System: Blue and yellow. e. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. f. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. g. Grounding: green Caution Labels for Indoor Boxes and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Install pressure- sensitive, self-adhesive labels identifying system voltage with black letters on orange background. Install on exterior of door or cover. H. Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Install labels externally. Exposed Boxes: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card-stock tags. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent. I. Color-Coding of Secondary Phase Conductors: Use the following colors for feeder and branch- circuit phase conductors: James, LaSala & Associates, LLP ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 3 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 1. 208/120-V Conductors: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Ground: Green e. Neutral - White 2. 480/277-V Conductors: Phase A: Yellow. Phase B: Brown. Phase C: Orange. Ground: Green with yellow stripe Neutral: Gray Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-applied, color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG: a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped tums for a distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made: Apply last two tums of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1- inch- (25-mm-) wide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches (76 mm) from the terminal and spaced 3 inches (76 ~xun) apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten to a snug fit, and cut off excess length. Power-Circuit Identification: Metal tags or aluminum, wraparound marker bands for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms. Legend: 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend corresponding to indicated circuit designations. Tag Fasteners: Nylon cable ties. Band Fasteners: Integral ears. K. Apply identification to conductors as follows: 1. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding to identify circuits' voltage and phase. 3. Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of tags, color- coding, or cable marking tape. L. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows: James, LaSala & Associates, LLP ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 4 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items. Emergency Operation: Install engraved laminated signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-) high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high lettering on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. Use white lettering on black field. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of equipment using mechanical fasteners: 1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. 2. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. 3. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. 4. Motor-control centers. 5. Disconnect switches. 6. Enclosed circuit breakers. 7. Motor starters. 8. Push-button stations. 9. Power transfer equipment. 10. Contactors. 11. Remote-controlled switches. 12. Dimmers. 13. Control devices. 14. Transformers. 15. Telephone switching equipment. 16. Clock, tprogram master equipment. 17. Call system master station. 18. TV/audio-monitoring master station. 19. Fire alarm master station or control panel. 20. Security-monitoring master station or control panel. All panelboards (existing or new) which are modified or provided during the scope of this project shall have new panel circuit directories provided. All directories shall be complete, accurate, and typed. END OF SECTION 16075 James, LaSala & Associates, LLP ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 5 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 4/2/2009 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condirions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 1.3 SUBMrlTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Available Manufacturers: James, LaSala & Associates, LLP CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS B. C. D. J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 4/2/2009 Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings. Conductor Material: Copper solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN XHHW 2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Available Manufacturers: B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THHN- THWN, single conductors in raceway. D. Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad steel jacketed cable, Type MC (as allowed by code) F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. G. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type UF multiconductor cable. H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord. I. Fire Alarm Circuits: Power-limited, fire-protective, signaling circuit cable plenum rated (even in conduit). J. Class 1 Control Circuits:. Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. K. Class 2 Control Circuits: Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes James, LaSala & Associates, LLP CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 2 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3.2 A. B. D. E. F. G. J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 4/2/2009 INSTALLATION Conceal cables in £mished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Me~heds." Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification]." 3.3 A. CONNECTIONS Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to m~tnufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least [6 inches (150 mm)] [ 12 inches (300 mm)] of slack. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Megger testing for all feeders of #6 or larger 50feet or longer. B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 3 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE ! IMPROVEMENTS 4/2/2009 Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 16120 James, LaSala & Associates, LLP CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 4 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I EVIPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. B. SUMMARY This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials and installation at penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements. 2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and identification products. 3. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service fittings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic robing. C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. E. LFlVIC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. G. R/~IC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.4 SUBMITI'ALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 1 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 A. COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 A. B. C. D. F. G. H. I. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING Available Manufacturers: Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. IMC: ANSI C80.6. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 1. Fittings: Double Set-screw (for over 1-1/4") or compression type. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. Fittings: NE/VIA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. ENT and RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. LFNC: UL 1660. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 2 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman. 2. Square D. J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA [1] [3R]. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and Other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type. F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 A. SURFACE RACEWAYS Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating. 1. Manufacturers: Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting; Wiremold Company (The). Thomas & Betts Corporation. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture and manufacturer's standard color. 1. Manufacturers: a. Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division. b. Enduro Composite Systems. c. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Device Division. d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. e. Panduit Corp. f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). g. Wimmold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceways. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 3 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 2.5 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/3O/2O09 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS Available Manufacturers Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturers standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime- coat finish ready for field painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: 1. Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC. 2. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC. 3. Underground, Single Run: RNC. 4. Underground, Grouped: RNC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: 1. Exposed: EMT. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 4 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS Ct Dt J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 2. Concealed: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type I, except as follows: a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size (DN 21). Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fitfmgs, unless otherwise indicated. Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete. 3.2 A. C. D. E. Ho James, LaSala & Associates, LLP INSTALLATION Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. Protect stub-ups from damage wher~ conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size (DN 27) parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 5 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked mns. Use facto~ elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. K. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools. L. Terminations: 1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size (DN 53) and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches ( 1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals. Q. Set floor boxes level and flush with f'mished floor surface. R. Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with fmished floor surface. S. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each comer. 3.3 PROTECTION James, LaSala & Associates, LLP RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 6 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 16130 James, LaSala & Associates, LLP RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 7 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 3. 4. 5. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters, integral surge suppression units, and isolated-ground receptacles. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches. Device wall plates. Pin and sleeve connectors and receptacles. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and desctiption of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE James, LaSala & Associates, LLP WIRING DEVICES 16140 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defmed in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacinrers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wiring Devices: Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 2. Multioutlet Assemblies: Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. Wiremold Company (The). <Panduit.> 3. Poke-Through, Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles: a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. b. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. c. Square D/Groupe Schneider NA. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation. e. Wiremold Company (The). fi <Panduit.> 2.2 RECEPTACLES James, LaSala & Associates, LLP WIRING DEVICES 16140 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: 596G, and UL 498. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C- Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter. Industrial Heavy-Duty Pin and Sleeve Devices: Comply with IEC 309-1. Duplex outlets in Dustproof (Nema 12) outlet boxes in all workshop areas. (Areas C&D) 2.3 A. PENDANT CORD/CONNECTOR DEVICES Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector, NEMAWD 6, Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, Heavy-Duty grade. 1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip. 2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-stre, ngth galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector. 2.4 A. CORD AND PLUG SETS Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.5 SWITCHES A. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20. B. Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type. C. Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster ears and removable tab connector that permit separate or common feed connection. 1. Switch: 20A, 120/277-V ac. 2. Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP WIRING DEVICES 16140 3 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. 1. Control: Continuously adjustable toggle switch; with single-pole or three-way switching to suit connections. 2. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable rotary knob, toggle switch, or slider; single pole with soft tap or other quiet switch; EMFRFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5-inch (130-mm) wire connecting leads. 3. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. 2.6 A. WALL PLATES Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 2. 3. 4. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic [0.035-inch- (l-mm-) Material for Unf'mished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. Material for Wet Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." 2.7 FLOOR SERVICE FITI'INGS A. Type: Modular, Flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. C. Service Plate: Rectangular Diecast aluminum with satin finish. D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening 2.8 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES A. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles. B. Raceway Material: PVC. C. Wire: No. 12 AWG. 2.9 SERVICE POLES James, LaSala & Associates, LLP WIRING DEVICES 16140 4 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Description: Factory-assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and data communication from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor. 1. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch- (65-mm-) square cross section, with height adequate to extend from floor to at least 6 inches (150 mm) above ceiling, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice and data communication cabling. 2. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment. 3. Finishes: [Manufacturer's standard painted finish and trim combination] 4. Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors; and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 3 or 5 voice and data communication cables. 5. Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, heavy-duty, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R units. 6. Voice and Data Communication Outlets: Blank insert with bushed cable opening 2.10 A. FINISHES Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connecmd to Normal Power System: Ivory or As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. 2. Computer Receptacles: Orange or as selected by Architect]. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines. B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. E. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting. F. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION James, LaSala & Associates, LLP 5 WIRING DEVICES 16140 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements. 2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 16140 James, LaSala & Associates, LLP WIRENG DEVICES 16140 6 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 SECTION 16441 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. RMS: Root mean square. D. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, ground-fanlt protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Qualification Data: For testing agency. James Lasala & Associates SWITCHBOARDS 16441 1 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION~ J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 D. Field quality-control test reports including the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requii:ements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section" Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overeurrant protective device. 1.5 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: .An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards through one source from a single manufacturer. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Comply with NEMA PB 2, "Deadfront Distribution Switchboards." Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. C. Handle switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1 and NECA 400. Protect James Lasala & Associates SWITCHBOARDS 16441 2 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS Installation Pathway: As required, remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous ope. ration under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m). Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: Notify Architect, District Personnel no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's, District Personnel's] written permission. 1.8 A. COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements; manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. James Lasala & Associates 3 SWITCHBOARDS 16441 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D. C. D. E. F. G. H. L J. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboard: Panel-mounted main device, panel-mounted branches, and sections rear aligned. Nominal System Voltage: 208Y/120 V. Main-Bus Continuous: 2000 A. Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Enclosure: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1 Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a mst-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of feeder sections. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard: 2. 3. 4. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily removable for drilling and cutting. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into switchboard. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables indicated, including those for future installation. K. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity with feeder circuit-breaker line connections. a. If bus is copper, use copper for feeder circuit-breaker line connections. 2. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- (6-by-50-mm-) minimum-size, hard-drawn copper of 98 pement conductivity, equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical mn. 3. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated. 4. Main Phase Buses, Neutral Buses, and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends. James Lasala & Associates SWITCHBOARDS 16441 4 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses, unless otherwise indicated, equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus are braced. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating: 105 deg C. 2.3 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES A. IEEE C62.41, integrally mounted, plug-in-style, solid-state, parallel-connected, sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules. B. Minimum single-impulse current rating shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 200,000A. 2. Line to Ground: 200,000 A. 3. Neutral to Ground: 100,000A. C. Protection modes shall be as follows: 1. Line to neutral. 2. Line to ground. 3. Neutral to ground. D. EMI/RFI Noise Attenuation Using 50-ohm Insertion Loss Test: 55 dB at 100 kHz. E. Maximum UL 1449 clamping levels shall not exceed 400 V, line to neutral and line to ground on 120/208 Vsystems. F. Withstand Capabilities: 3000 Category C surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. G. Accessories: 1. Form-C contacts, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts to reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module. 2. Audible alarm activated on failure of any surge diversion module. 3. Six-digit transient-counter set to total transient surges that deviate from the sine-wave envelope by more than 125 V; 2.4 A. OVERCuRRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. James Lasala & Associates SWITCHBOARDS 16441 5 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT/4 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip-unit circuit breakers shall have RMS sensing, field-replaceable rating plug, and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. Integrally Fused Cimuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter- style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with [5] [30]-mA trip sensitivity. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 1. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 3. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field- adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. 5. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 6. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground- fault protection function. 2.5 A. INSTRUMENTATION Instrument Transformers: NEMA EI 21.1, IEEE C57.13, and the following: Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y. Current Transformers: Ratios shall be as indicated with accuracy class and burden suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kV. 2.6 CONTROL POWER A. Control Circuits: 120 V, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-power transformer. James Lasala & Associates SWITCHBOARDS 16441 6 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Electrically Interlocked Main and Tie Circuit Breakers: Two control-power transformers in separate compartments, with interlocking relays, connected to the primary side of each control- power transformer at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. 120-V secondaries connected through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8AWG and smaller, for conductors across binges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. 2.7 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Furnish accessory set including tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1 and NECA 40. B. Install and anchor switchboards level on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base. 2. For switchboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components. James Lasala & Associates SWITCHBOARDS 16441 7 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards. E. Install ovemurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation. 1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. 3.4 A. [DEN TIIqCATION Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with engraved metal or · laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. 3.5 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in N-ETA ATS, Sections 7.1, 7.5, 7.6, 7.9, 7.10, 7.11, and 7.14 as appropriate. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments, Equipment, and Reports: 1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2) Prepare a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. James Lasala & Associates SWITCHBOARDS 16441 8 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE ! IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 3.6 CLEANING On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and. debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. 3.7 A. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 16441 James Lasala & Associates SWITCHBOARDS 16441 9 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL I.I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes load centers and panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types: 1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 2. Distribution panelboards. B. Related Sections include the following: 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. REI: Radio-frequency interference. D. RMS: Root mean square. E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, TVSS device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP PANELBOARDS 16442 1 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Qualification Data: Submit data for testing agencies indicating that they comply with qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following: Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NEMA PB 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70: 1.6 A. COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. 1.7 EXTRA MATE~ALS A. Keys: Six spares of each type of panelboard cabinet lock. PART 2 - PRODUCTS James, LaSala & Associates, LLP 2 PANELBOARDS 16442 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 2.1 A. J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co. 2.2 FABRICATION AND FEATURES A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface mounted cabinets. NEMA PB I, Type 1, to meet environmental conditions at installed location. B. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat. D. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside panelboard door. E. Bus: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. F. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. G. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box. 2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.4 LIOHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. B. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.5 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Doors: Front mounted, except omit in fused-switch panelboards; secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP PANELBOARDS 16442 3 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AFA)0033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker. C. Branch overcurrent protective devices shall be one of the following: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in cimuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. Fused switches. 2.6 A. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole conflgnrations with [5] [30]-mA trip sensitivity. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 3. Ground-Fanlt Protection: Integrally mounted relay and ~p unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination controller equipped for panelboard mounting and including the following accessories: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Individual control-power transformers. Fuses for control-power transformers. Indicating lights. Seal-in contact. 12 convertible auxiliary contacts. Push buttons. Selector switches. 2.7 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for panelboard interior, including overeurrent protective devices and other components. PART 3 - EXECUTION James, LaSala & Associates, LLP 4 PANELBOARDS 16442 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange Conductors into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. 3.2 A. 3.3 A. IDENTIFICATION Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. CONNECTIONS Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 A. C. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control cimuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified testing. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified testing. PANELBOARDS 16442 5 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case cimuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes as follows: Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. Perform load-balancing cimuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data-processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard (existing and new). Remove panel fronts so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard i 1 months after date of Substantial Completion. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies panelboards checked and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable switches and cimuit-breaker trip ranges. 3.6 A. CLEANING On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 16442 James, LaSala & Associates, LLP PANELBOARDS 16442 6 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART ! - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts. 2. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces. 3. Emergency lighting units. 4. Exit signs. 5. Accessories, including fluorescent fixture dimmers, occupancy sensors and lighting fixture retrofitting. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 2. Division 16 Section "Dimming Controls" for architectural dimming systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. Ratio of light output of a given lamp(s) operated by the subject ballast to the light output of the same lamp(s) when operated on an ANSI reference circuit. B. CRI: Color rendering index. C. CU: Coefficient of uiilization. D. LER: Luminaire efficiency rating, which is calculated according to NEMA LE 5. This value can be estimated from photometric data using the following formula: 1. LER is equal to the product of total rated lamp lumens times BF times luminffire efficiency, divided by input watts. E. RCR: Room cavity ratio. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: James, LaSala & Associates, LLP INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 1 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated parameters. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts. Lamps. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control Wiring. D. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer. E. Field quality-control test reports. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section" Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: Catalog data for each fixture. Include the diffuser, ballast, and lamps installed in that fixture. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs. 1.6 A. WARRANTY Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fall in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty' shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years. Special Warranty for Fluorescent Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP INI'ERIOR LIGHTING 16511 2 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE ! IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b, the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: Available Proddcts: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP 2.2 FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A. C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. D. HID Fixtures: Comply with LTL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 pement virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different thickness is scheduled. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule on Construction Document Set.> 2.4 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS A. Description: Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output except for emergency lamps powered by in-fixture battery-packs. 2. Externally fused with slow-blow type rated between 2.65 and 3.0 times the line current. Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with NEMA C82.11. 2. Ballast Type: Rapid start, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Programmed Start: Ballasts with two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently started lamps. 4. Sound Rating: A. 5. Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 10 pement according to NEMA C82.11. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A. 7. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7. 9. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall have the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Type: Electronic. 2. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 3. Flicker: Less than 5 percent. 4. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 4 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I EMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Electronic Ballast Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A1 locations. D. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: Temperatures 0 deg F (Minus t7 deg C) and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg Fminus 17 deg C starting temperature. 2.5 A. HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated. Type: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg FMinus 30 deg C for single-lamp ballasts. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F40 deg C. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. Automatically tums quartz lamp off when high-intensity-discharge lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise. High-Pressure-Sodium Ballasts: Solid-state igniter/starter with an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C. 2.6 A. EXIT SIGNS General: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Light-emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum of rated lamp life. 2. Additional Lamps for DC Operation: Two minimum, bayonet-base type, for connection to external dc source. 2.7 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. General: Self-contained units complying with IlL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with minimum 10-year nominal life and special warranty. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 5 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Operation: Relay automatically tums lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. Wire Guard: Where indicated, heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval when power is restored after an outage; time delay permits high-intensity-discharge lamps to restrike and develop adequate output. 2.8 A. FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Test Switch and Light-Emitting-Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with minimum seven-year nominal life. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from light fixture. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with minimum seven-year nominal life. 3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 4. Housing: NEMA 250, Class 1 enclosure. 2.9 FLUORESCENT LAMPS Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching procedure test, and yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested according to NEMA LL 1. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. T8 rapid-start[ low-mercury] lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches610 mm, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 6 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 1. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 825 initial lumens (minimum). 2.10 A. HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMPS High-Pressure-Sodium Lamps: NEMA C78.42, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900, and average rated life of 24,000 hours. Low-Pressure-Sodium Lamps: NEMA C78.41. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 65 (minimum), and color temperature 4000 . Lamps shall be frosted. Lamps shall be self extinguishing on breakage. 2.11 A. B. C. D. E. F. FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, l/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, [12 gage (2.68 mm)] <Insert wire size>. Wires For Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. 2.12 A. FINISHES Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant. 2.13 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES A. Dimming Ballast Controls: Sliding-handle type with on/off control; compatible with ballast and having light output and energy input over the full dimming range. B. Occupancy Sensors: Adjustable sensitivity and off delay time range of 5 to 15 minutes. I. Device Color: James, LaSala & Associates, LLP INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 7 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Wall Mounted: Ivory. Ceiling Mounted: White. 2. Occupancy detection indicator. 3. Ultrasonic Sensors: Crystal controlled with circuitry that causes no detection interference between adjacent sensors. 4. Infrared Sensors: With daylight filter and lens to afford coverage applicable to space to be controlled. 5. Combination Sensors: Ultrasonic and infrared sensors combined. 2.14 A. FLUORESCENT FIXTURE RETROIqT MATERIALS Comply with UL 1598 listing requirements. 1. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps, and sockets as scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. INSTALLATION Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support. 1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from fixture comers. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture comer with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4- inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or md for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. D. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. 3.2 A. CONNECTIONS Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 8 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 3.3 I~'IELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify normal transfer to battery power source and retransfer to normal. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, Observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. E. Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of corrosion. END OF SECTION 16511 James, LaSala & Associates, LLP INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 9 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for Bay Avenue School. 1.02 A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General and Supplementary General Condition and Division 1 - General Requirements shall apply to the work of this section. B. The fire alarm system shall be UL listed & approved in the configuration and components fill of materials in which it will be installed in this project. SCOPE The work covered by this Section of the Specification shall include all labor, equipment, materials and services to furnish and install a complete fire alarm system of the addressable, non-coded type. It shall be complete with all necessary hardware, software and memory specifically tailored for this installation. It shall be possible to permanently modify the software on site by using a plug-in programmer. The system shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. EST3 Fire alarm control panel. Two (2) Remote Annunciators, LCD with Graphic Map. Addressable manual fire alarm stations with non-alarmed lexan covers. Addressable analog area smoke detectors. Addressable analog duct smoke detectors. Addressable analog heat detectors. Boiler Shutdown. Audible notification appliances. Visual notification appliances. Central station alarm connection. Air handling systems shutdown. Magnetic door holder release. Ansul Hood Monitoring. B. Contractor shall coordinate with the school to install new system complete. Once new system has been tested and approved by district the existing system shall be removed by contractor. 1.03 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All equipment shall be UL listed for its intended use. NFPA Standards 72 The National Electric Code. All other local codes and authorities having jurisdiction (AH J). James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 1 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 RELATED DOCUMENTS Secure and pay for all permits and approvals prior to installation. Prior to commencement and after completion of work notify Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Submit letter of approval for installation before requesting acceptance of system. 1.05 RELATED WORK The Contractor shall coordinate work in this Section with all related trades. Work and/or equipment provided in other Sections and related to the fire alarm system shall include, but not be limited to: 1.06 SUBMITTALS Sprinkler water flow and supervisory switches shall be furnished and installed by the plumbing contractor, but wired and connected by the electrical contractor. Modification of existing sprinkler devices to accommodate monitoring by the new fire alarm system shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm system- installing contractor (if applicable). Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished, wired and connected by the electrical contractor. The HVAC contractor shall furnish necessary duct opening and install the duct smoke detectors. New air handling and smoke exhaust system fan control circuits and status contacts to be fumisbed by the HVAC Contractor and connected into the fire alarm system by the Electrical Contractor. Elevator recall control circuits to be provided by the elevator control contractor. Any shunt trip cimuit breakers and related wiring required for ANSI Al7.1 compliance shall be provided and installed by the electrical contractor (see power riser for more details). Conduit: Section 16100. Wire and Cables: Section 16100. Provide list of all types of equipment and Components provided. This shall be incorporated as part of a Table of Contents, which will also indicate the manufacturer's James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 2 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 E. F. G. part number, the description of the part, and the part number of the manufacturer's product datasheet on which the information can be found. Provide description of operation of the system (Sequence of Operation), similar to that provided in Part 2 of this Section of the Specifications. The sequence of operation shall be project specific, and shall provide individual sequences for every type of alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition which may occur as part of normal or off-nonnal system use. Provide manufacturer's ORIGINAL printed product data, catalog cuts and description of any special installation procedures. Photocopied and/or illegible product data sheets shall not be acceptable. All product datasheets shall be highlighted or stamped with arrows to indicate the specific components being submitted for approval. Provide manufacturer's installation instruction manual for specified system. Provide samples of various items when requested. Provide copy of NYS License to perform such work. Provide copies of NICET Level II Fire Alarm certifications for the two (2) technicians assigned to this project. Provide shop drawings as follows: 1. Coversheet with project name, address, SED identification number, and drawing index. General notes drawing with peripheral device backbox size information, part numbers, device mounting height information, and the names, addresses, point of contact, and telephone numbers of all contract project team members. Device riser diagram which individually depicts all control panels, annunciators, addressable devices, and notification appliances. Shall include a specific, proposed point descriptor above each addressable device. Drawing shall provide wire specifications, and wire tags shown on all conductors depicted on the riser diagram. All circuits shall have designations that shall correspond with those require on the control panel and floor plan drawings. End-of-line resistors (and values) shall be depicted. Control panel termination drawing(s) shall depict internal component placement and all internal and field termination points. Drawing shall provide a detail indicating where conduit penetrations shall be made, so as to avoid conflicts with internally mounted batteries. For each additional data gathering panel, a separate control panel drawing shall be provided, which clearly indicates the designation, service and location of the control enclosure. End-of-line resistors (and values) shall be depicted. See section 3.04 DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING for other documents relating to this section. 6. Device typical wiring diagram drawing(s) shall be provided which depict all system components, and their respective field wiring termination points. Wire type, gauge, and jacket shall also be indicated. When an addressable module is James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 3 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 used in multiple configurations for monitoring or controlling various types of equipment, different device typical diagrams shall be provided. End-of-line resistors (and values) shall be depicted. Contained in the title block of each drawing shall be symbol legends with device counts, wire tag legends, circuit schedules for all addressable and notification appliance circuits, the project name/address, and a drawing description which corresponds to that indicated in the drawing index on the coversheet drawing. A section of each drawing title block shall be reserved for revision numbers and notes. The initial submission shall be Revision 0, with Revision A, B, or C as project modifications require. Battery calculations shall be provided on a per power supply/charger basis. These calculations shall clearly indicated the quantity of devices, the device part numbers, the supervisory current draw, the alarm current draw, totals for all categories, and the calculated battery requirements (which reflect a 20% DEGRADE, for 24 Hour supervisory, 5 minute alarm operation). Battery calculations shall also reflect all control panel component, remote annunciator, and auxiliary relay current draws. Failure to provide these calculations shall be grounds for the complete rejection of the submittal package. Table of contents, product data sheets, sequences of operation, battery calculations, installation instructions, licenses, NICET certifications and B-Size (blackline) reduced shop drawings shall be provided by the fire alarm vendor as part of a single, spiral bound submittal book. The submittal book shall have laminated covers indicating the project address, SED number, system type, and contractor. The book shall consist of labeled dividers, and shall not exceed 9 V:" in width, and 11 Va" in height. No less than six (6) sets of submittal booklets shall be provided to the consulting engineer for review and comment. Additional copies may be required at no additional cost to the project. Scale drawing sets shall be submitted along with the submittal booklets. These drawings may be either D-Size or E-Size Blueline drawings and of a sufficient resolution to be completely read. Sets shall be bound and folded so as to not take up more than 100 square inches of space. No less than seven (7) sets of scale drawing sets shall be provided to the consulting engineer for review and comment. Additional copies may be required at no additional cost to the project. 1.07 WARRANTY Manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment for a period of 1 year from date of final acceptance of the system. All other warranty coverage shall be in accordance with Specification Section 01700 Contractor Closeout.pages 3 and 4 James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 4 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS The catalog numbers used are those of Edwards Systems Technology(EST)"or equal", and constitute the type and quality of equipment to be furnished. If equipment of another manufacturer is to be submitted for approval as equal, the contractor shall, at the time of bid, list all exceptions taken to these Specifications, all variances from these Specifications and all substitutions of operating capabilities or equipment called for in these Specifications and forward said list to the Engineer. Final determination of compliance with these Specifications shall rest with the Engineer, who, at his discretion, may require proof of performance. Alternate product submissions made without proof of no less than three (3) factory authorized and certified manufacturer's distributors residing within 50 miles of the project job site shall be rejected. These distributors must not only provide installation support, but must have a service organization capable of 24 hour emergency call service and MUST HAVE BEEN CONTRACTED AND DELIVERED NO LESS THAN FIVE (5) ACCEPTED PROJECTS USING THE SUBMITTED PRODUCT OVER THE PAST YEAR. Alternate product submissions based upon use of a product line considered proprietary in its distribution, design, application software, or ongoing maintenance and repair shall not acceptable. Proof of a product's non-proprietary nature shall be the burden of the contractor, and shall be in the form of written documentation. The determination of a product's compliance to this requirement shall be exclusively that of the Consulting Engineer. All products used shall be of a single manufacturer. Submission of notification appliances, auxiliary relays, or documentation from other than a single manufacturer shall not be acceptable and will be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment. Alternate product submissions must, include a correspondence from the manufacturer indicating that the submitted product will continue to be manufactured in its current form for no less than five (5) more years, and thereafter will have factory inventory support for an additional seven (7) years. No exceptions permitted. 2.02 CIRCUITING GUIDELINES James, LaSala & Associates, LLP Each addressable analog loop shall be circuited so device loading is not to exceed 80% of loop capacity in order to leave for space for future devices. The loop shall have Class B operation. Where it is necessary to interface conventional initiating devices provide intelligent input modules to supervise Class B zone wiring. Each of the following types of devices or equipment shall be provided with supervised circuits as shown on the drawings but shall be typically as follows: 1. Sprinkler Valve Supervisory Switches: Provide one (1) supervisory module circuit for each sprinkler valve supervisory switch (if applicable). FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 5 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE ! IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 When water flow and tamper switches exist at the same location, provide one (1) dual input addressable module. When odd numbers of devices exist at a single location, provide additional single input addressable modules(if applicable). Ansul or Hood Subsystem: Provide one (1) alarm input module for each pressure switch or alarm output device at the Hood subsystem, ff multiple alarm outputs exist for a subsystem, provide combinations of dual and single input addressable modules. Each of the following types of alarm notification appliances shall be circuited as shown on the drawings but shall be typically as follows: 1. Audible Signals: Provide sufficient spare capacity to assure that the addition of five (5) audible devices can be supported without the need for addition control components (power supplies, signal circuit modules, batteries, etc.) Visual Signals Provide sufficient spare capacity to assure that the addition of three (3) visual devices can be supported without the need for addition control components (power supplies, signal circuit modules, batteries, etc.) Each of the following types of remote equipment associated with the fire alarm system at: ' ' · shall be provided with orm R control relay contact as shown on the drawings, but shall be typically as follows: HVAC Fan Systems: Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for each HVAC fan system. HVAC Supply Fans: Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for each HVAC supply fan. ¸3. HVAC Return Fans: Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for each HVAC return fan. Provide a dedicated 24VDC circuit to feed all auxiliary relays required for inductive loads. This circuits shall be supervised via an end-of-line relay and addressable input module. Auxiliary relays shall not derive their power from the starter or load being controlled. Each control or data gathering panel shall have a dedicated 20Amp-120VAC feed. This feed shall come from an emergency or lighting circuit breaker panel, and shall have a locked circuit breaker. Earth grounds shall also terminate to the same circuit breaker panel from each respective control panel. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 6 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 2.03 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION The system shall identify any off normal condition and log each condition into the system database as an event. 1. The system shall automatically display on the control panel Liquid Crystal Display the first event of the highest priority by type. The priorities and types shall be alarm, supervisory, trouble, and monitor. The system shall have a Queue operation, and shall not require event acknowledgment by the system operator. The system shall have a labeled color- coded indicator for each type of event; alarm - red, supervisory - yellow, trouble - yellow, monitor - yellow. When an unseen event exists for a given type, the indicator shall be lit. For each event, the display shall include the current time, the total number of events, the type of event, the time the event occurred and up to a 42 character custom user description. The user shall be able to review each event by simply selecting scrolling keys (up-down) for each event type. New alarm, supervisory, or trouble events shall sound a audible signal at the control panel. Operation of any alarm-initiating device shall automatically: 1. Update the control/display as described above (A. 1 .) Sound all audible appliances in a Temporal-3 Pattern. ALL AUDIBLE APPLIANCES THROUGHOUT THE FACILITY SHALL BE SYNCHRONIZED WITH EACH OTHER, REGARDLESS OF LOCATION OR FIRE DOORS. Audible devices shall have the ability to be silenced. Activate all strobe appliances throughout the facility. ALL STROBE APPLIANCES THROUGHOUT THE FACILITY SHALL BE SYNCHRONIZED WITH EACH OTHER, REGARDLESS OF LOCATION OR FIRE DOORS. Visual devices shall be non-silenced unless the system is successfully reset. Operate control relay contacts to shutdown all HVAC units serving the entire building. 5. Operate control relay contacts to return all elevators that serve the building to the ground floor. If the alarm originates from the ground floor, operate control circuits contacts to r~turn all elevators to the floor above or to a level as directed by the local fire department. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 7 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Operate control relay contacts to release all magnetically held smoke doors throughout the building. Visually annunciate the individual point of alarm on all remote annunciator panels. The visual indication shall remain on until the alarm condition is reset to normal. Transmit an alarm condition, via the integral central station communicator, to central station/Local Fire Department (as required by the AHJ). Elevator smoke and heat detector sequences shall comply with the ANSI Al7.1 requirements for main/alternate floor recalls, and shunt trip activations. Activation of a sprinkler supervisory initiating device shall:(if applicable) 1. Update the control/display as described above (A. 1.) Transmit a supervisory condition, via the integral central station communicator, to central station/Local Fire Department (as required by the AHJ). Visually annunciate the individual point of alarm on all remote annunciator panels. The visual indication shall remain on until the alarm condition is reset to normal. The entire fire alarm system wiring shall be electrically supervised to automatically detect and report trouble conditions to the fire alarm control panel. Any opens, grounds or disarrangement of sYstem wiring and shorts across alarm signaling wiring shall automatically: 1. Update the control/display as described above (A.I.) Transmit a trouble condition, via the integral central station communicator, to central station/Local Fire Department (as required by the AHJ). Visually and audibly annunciate a general trouble condition, on the remote annunciator panels. The visual indication shall remain on until the trouble condition is repaired. 2.04 SUPPORT FOR INSTALLER AND OWNER MAINTENANCE Provide a coded one-man walk test feature. Allow audible or silent testing signal alarms and troubles during test. Allow receipt of alarms and programmed operations for alarms from areas not under test. Provide internal system diagnostics and maintenance user interface controls to display/report the power, communication, and general status of specific panel components, detectors, and modules. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 8 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09A~E-00033 3/30/2009 Provide loop controller diagnostics to identify common alarm, trouble, ground fault, Class A fault, and map faults. Map faults include wire changes, device type changes by location, device additions/deletions and conventional open, short, and ground conditions. Ground fanlts on the circuit wiring of remote module shall be identified by device address. Allow the user to display/report the condition of addressable analog detectors. Include device address, device type, percent obscuration, and maintenance indicator. The maintenance indicator shall provide the user with a measure of contarrfination of a device upon Which cleaning decisions can confidently be made. Allow the user to report history for alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble, smoke verification, watchdog, and restore activity. Include Facility Name, Licensee, Project Program Compilation date, Compiler Version, Project Revision Number, and the time and date of the History Report. Allow the user to disable/enable devices, zones, actions, timers and sequences. Protect the disable function with a password. Allow the user to activate/restore outputs, actions, sequences, and simulate detector smoke levels. Allow the service user to enter time and date, reconfigure an external port for download programming, initiate auto programming and change passwords. Protect these functions with a password. 2.05 UL LISTED AND APPROVED EQUIPMENT A. Fire Alarm Control Panel Requirements: The fire alarm control panel or panels shall be Edwards Systems Technology (EST) type EST3 series (or equal). All under one label "UL listed and approved" for the use of fire alarm systems in this area of the United States of America. The operating controls shall be located behind locked door with viewing window. All control modules shall be labeled, and all zone locations shall be identified. System Controllers The main controller 3-CPU shall be supervised, site programmable, and of modular design supporting up to 125 detectors and 125 remote modules per addressable Signaling line Circuit (SLC). The CPU shal support up to 10 SLC's per panel for a total system capacity of 2500 Intelligent Addressable points. The system shall be designed with peer- to-peer networking capability for enhanced survivability, with support for up to 64 nodes, each with up to 2500 points and an overall capacity of 160,000 points. The cabinets shall be steel, with a red finish. The system shall store all basic system functionality and job specific data in non-volatile memory. All site specific and operating data shall survive a complete power failure intact. Passwords shall protect any changes to system operations. The Main Controller Module shall control and monitor all local or remote peripherals. It shall support the 3-LCD Display Module, power supply, remOte LCD and zone display annunciators, strip and carriage printers, and support communication interface standard James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 9 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS James, LaSala&Associates, LLP J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 protocol (CSI) devices such as color computer annunciators and color graphic displays. The annunciator port shall be capable of supporting up to 30 remote annunciators. E. The panel shall have an interface module for remote site monitoring. The module shall have a dialer alarm communicator transmitter 3-modcom module to transmit alarm, supervisory and trouble signals to a Central Monitoring Station (CMS). The 3-medcom shall support dual telephones lines, 20 PPS 4/2 communications, and be configured for dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) or pulse modes. It shall be possible to delay AC power failure reports, auto test call, and be site programmed. The dialer shall be capable of transmitting up to 40 individual alarm conditions to central station. F. The system shall have built-in automatic system programming to automatically address and map all system devices attached to the main controller. A minimum default single stage alarm system operation shall be supported with alarm silence, event silence, drill, lamp test, and reset common controls. G. Advanced Windows-based System Definition Utility with Program Version Reporting to document any and all changes made during system start-up or system commissioning shall be used to maintain site specific programming. Time and Date Stamps of all modifications made to the program must be included to allow full retention of all previous program version data. It shall support programming of any input point to any output point. The system shall support the use of Bar Code readers to assist custom programming functions. It shall allow authorized customization of fundamental system operations using initiating events to start actions, timers, sequences and logical algorithms. The system program shall meet the requirements of this project, current codes and standards, and satisfy the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. H. The system shall support distributed processor intelligent detectors with the following operational attributes; integral multiple differential sensors, automatic device mapping, electronic addressing, environmental compensation, pre-alarm, dirty detector identification, automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment, normal/alarm LEDs, relay bases, sounder bases and isolator bases. I. The system shall use full digital communications to supervise all addressable loop devices for placement, correct location, and operation. It shall allow swapping of "same type" devices without the need of addressing and impose the "location" parameters on replacement device. It shall initiate and maintain a trouble if a device is added to a loop and clear the trouble when the new device is mapped and defined into the system. J. Each controller shall contain a RS232 printer/programming port for programming locally via an IBM PC or down loading through modems from a remote PC. When operational, each controller shall support a printer through the RS232 port and be capable of message routing. K. System circuits shall be configured as follows: Addressable analog loops Class B; Initiating Device Circuits Class B; Notification Appliance Circuits Class B; Network Communications Class B; Annunciator Communications Class B. L. Single stage operation shall be provided. M. · The system shall have a UL Listed Detector Sensitivity test feature, which will be a function of the smoke detectors and performed automatically every 4 hours. The system shall support 100% of all remote devices in alarm and provide support for a 100% compliment of detector isolator bases. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 10 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 All panel modules shall be supervised for placement and return trouble if damaged or removed. The system shall have a CPU watchdog circuit to initiate trouble should the CPU fail. The system evacuation signal rate shall be temporal 3-3-3. Audible notification appliances ~hall be affected by signal silence features. Visual signal appliance shall not be affected by signal silence features. User Interface The 3-LCD Display Module shall be of membrane style construction with a 4 line by 20 character Liquid Crystal Display. The LCD shall use super-twist technology and backlighting for high contrast visual clarity. In the normal mode display the time, the total number of active events and the total number of disable points. In the alarm mode display the total number of events and the type of event on display. Reserve 40 characters of display space for user custom messages. The module shall have visual indicators for the following common control functions; AC Power, alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble, disable, ground fault, CPU fail, and test. There shall be common control keys and visual indicators for; reset, alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, and one custom programmable key/indicator. Provide four pairs of display control keys for selection of event display by type (alarm, supervisory, monitor and trouble) and forward / backward scrolling through event listings. The operation of these keys shall be integrated with the related common control indicators to flash the indicators when undisplayed events are available for display and turn on steady when all events have been displayed. Allow the first event of the highest priority to capture the LCD for display so that arriving fire fighters can view the first alarm event "hands free". Provide system function keys; status, reports, enable, disable, activate, restore, program, and test. The module shall have a numeric keypad, zero through nine with delete and enter keys. Power Supplies The power supply shall be a high efficiency switch mode type with line monitoring to automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. The automatic battery charger shall have low battery discharge protection. The power supply shall provide internal power and 24 Vdc at 6.4A continuous for notification appliance circuits. The power supply shall be capable of providing 8A to output circuits for a maximum period of 100 ms. Auxiliary power shall be 24 Vdc at lA. All outputs shall be power limited. The battery shall be sized to support the system for 24 hours of supervisory and trouble signal current plus general alarm for 5 minutes. Network alpha-numeric annunciators shall be located throughout the facility as indicated on the plans. The system shall have the capacity to support five network annunciators in addition to five control panels. Each annunciator shall contain a supervised, back lit, liquid crystal with a minimum of 4 line with 20 characters per line. Where required, the annunciator shall include additional zonal annunciation and manual control without additional enclosures. The annunciator shall support full ability to serve as the operating interface to the system and shall include the following features; Matched appearance with other system displays Alarm, Supervisory and trouble contacts Enable/disable of system points and logics James, LaSala & Associates, LLP 11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Status, History and Sensitivity information from any network member Activate/restore system points and logics Support up to 96 front panels LED indicators and 96 front panel manual switches It must be possible to have up to 32 3 LCDANN and annunciators on a single annunciator network. Each annunciator must be capable of supporting custom messages as well as system event annunciation. It must be possible to f~lter unwanted annunciation of trouble, alarm or supervisory functions. The annunciator must incorporate a power-saving feature. The front panel lighting feature must turn off after a minimum of four minutes if there is no switch activity and no unacknowledged messages waiting. The annunciators shall be mounted in stand-alone enclosures or integrated into the network panels as indicated on the plans. 2.06 COMPONENTS Intelligent Devices--General Each remote device shall have a microprocessor with non-volatile memory to support its functionality and serviceability. Each device shall store as required for its functionality the following data: device serial number, device address, device type, personality code, date of manufacture, hours in use, time and date of last alarm, amount of environmental compensation left/used, last maintenance date, job/project number, current detector sensitivity values, diagnostic information (trouble codes) and algorithms required to process sensor data and perform communications with the loop controller. Each device shall be capable of electronic addressing, either automatically or application programmed assigned, to support physical/electrical mapping and supervision by location. Setting a device's address by physical means shall not be necessary. Intelligent Detectors--General The System Intelligent Detectors shall be capable of full digital communications using both broadcast and polling protocol. Each detector shall be capable of performing independent fire detection algorithms. The fire detection algorithm shall measure sensor signal dimensions, time patterns and combine different fire parameters to increase reliability and distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted deceptive nuisance alarms. Signal patterns that are not typical of fires shall be eliminated by digital filters. Devices not capable of combining different fire parameters or employing digital f~lters shall not be acceptable. Each detector shall have an integral microprocessor capable of making alarm decisions based on fire parameter information stored in the detector head. Distributed intelligence shall improve response time by decreasing the data flow between detector and analog loop controller. Detectors not capable of making independent alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. Maximum total analog loop response time for detectors changing state shall be 0.5 seconds. Each detector shall have a separate means of displaying communication and alarm status. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the analog loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 12 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 The detector shall be capable of identifying up to 32 diagnostic codes. This information shall be available for system maintenance. The diagnostic code shall be stored at the detector. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm which identifies and sets ambient "Environmental Thresholds" approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall continually monitor the environmental impact of temperature, humidity, other contaminates as well as detector aging. The process shall employ digital compensation to adapt the detector to both 24 hour long term and 4 hour short term environmental changes. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 80% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value. Differential sensing algorithms shall maintain a constant differential between selected detector sensitivity and the "learned" base line sensitivity. The base line sensitivity information shall be updated and permanently stored at the detector approximately once every hour. The intelligent analog detectors shall be suitable for mounting on any Signature Series detector mounting base. Fixed Temperature/Rate of Rise Heat Detector, SIGA-HRS Provide intelligent combination fixed temperature/rate-of-rise heat detectors SIGA-HRS. The heat detector shall have a low mass thermistor heat sensor and operate at a fixed temperature and at a temperature rate-of-rise. It shall continually monitor the temperature of the air in its surroundings to minimize thermal lag to the time required to process an alarm. The integral microprocessor shall determine if an alarm condition exists and initiate an alarm based on the analysis oftbe data. Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable The intelligent heat detector shall have a nominal fixed temperature alarm rating of 135°F (57°C) and a rate-of-rise alarm point of 15°F (9°C) per minute. The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 70 ft (21.3m) centers and be suitable for wall mounted applications. Photoelectric Smoke Detector, SIGA-PS Provide intelligent photoelectric smoke detectors SIGA-PS. The analog photoelectric detector shall utilize a light scattering type photoelectric smoke sensor to sense changes in air samples from its surroundings. The integral microprocessor shall dynamically examine values from the sensor and initiate an alarm based on the analysis of data. Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. The detector shall continually monitor any changes in sensitivity due to the environmental affects of dirt, smoke, temperature, aging and humidity. The information shall be stored in the integral processor and transferred to the analog loop controller for retrieval using a laptop PC or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. The photo detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 30 ft (9.1m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications. The photoelectric smoke detector shall be suitable for direct insertion into air ducts up to 3 ft (0.91m) high and 3 ft (0.91m) wide with air velocities James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 13 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 up to 500 ft/min. (0-25.39 m/sec) without requiring specific duct detector housings or supply tubes. The percent smoke obscuration per foot alarm set point shall be field selectable to any of five sensitivity settings ranging from 1.0% to 3.5%. The photo detector shall be suitable for operation in the following environment: 1. Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) 2. Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing 3. Elevation: no limit Standard Detector Mounting Bases, SIGA-SB / SIGA-SB4 Provide standard detector mounting bases SIGA-SB suitable for mounting on North American 1-gang, 3W' or 4" octagon box and 4" square box. The base shall, contain no electronics, support all Signature Series detector types and have the following minimum requirements: 1. Removal of the respective detector shall not affect communications with other detectors. 2. Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the base. Bases which must be removed to gain access to the terminals shall not be acceptable. 3. The base shall be capable of supporting one (1) Signature Series SIGA-LED Remote Alarm LED Indicator. Provide remote LED alarm indicators where shown on the plans. Duct Detector Housing, SIGA-DH Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies SIGA-DH to facilitate mounting an intelligent analog Photoelectric Detector SIGA-PS along with a standard detector mounting base. Provide for variations in duct air velocity between 300 and 4000 feet per minute (300 to 1000 feet per minute for ion-photo-heat detector). Protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. Provide an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube which extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. Provide drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing. Provide five one gang knockouts for mounting optional Signature Series modules. Finish the housing in baked red enamel. Provide Remote Alarm LED Indicators SIGA-LED. G. Intelligent Modules---General It shall be possible to address each Intelligent Signature Series module without the use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be acceptable. The personality of multifunction modules shall be programmable at site to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop Controller. Modules requiring EPROM, PROM, ROM changes or DIP switch and/or jumper changes shall not be acceptable. The modules shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input and output circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults. The module shall be suitable for operation in the following environment: James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 14 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS 3/30/2009 Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing Single Input Module, SIGA-CT1 Provide intelligent single input modules SIGA-CT1. The Single Input Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B input circuit capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 21/2" (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 V2" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with I-gang covers. The single input module shall support the following circuit types: 1. Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.) 2. Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Waterflow Switches) 3. Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.) 4. Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches) Dual Input Module, SIGA-CT2 Provide intelligent dual input modules SIGA-CT2. The Dual Input Module shall provide two (2) supervised Class B input circuits each capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 V2" (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 V2" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers. The dual input module shall support the following circuit types: I. Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.) 2. NormallyrOpen Alarm Delayed Latching (Waterflow Switches) 3. Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.) 4. Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches) Single Input Signal Module, SIGA-CC 1 Provide intelligent single input signal modules SIGA-CC1. The Single Input (Single Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B output circuit capable of a minimum of 2 personalities, each with a distinct operation. When selected as a telephone power selector, the module shall be capable of generating its own "ring tone". The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 V2" (64mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1 V2" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100mm square boxes. The single input signal module shall support the following operations: 1. Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc@ 2A, 25Vrms @50w or 70 Vrms @ 35 Watts of Audio) Control Relay Module, SIGA-CR Provide intelligent control relay modules SIGA-CR. The Control Relay Module shall provide one form "R" dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. The control relay module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 1/2" (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 V2" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 15 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Intelligent Manual Pull Stations-General It shall be possible to address each Signature Series fire alarm pull station without the use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be acceptable. The manual stations shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs mounted on their integral, factory assembled single or two stage input module. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The station shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults. The fire alarm pull station shall be suitable for operation in the following environment: Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing Manual Pull Station, SIGA-270 Provide intelligent single action, single stage fire alarm stations SIGA-270. The fire alarm station shall be of metal construction with an internal toggle switch. Provide a locked test feature. Finish the station in red with silver "PULL IN CASE OF FIRE" English lettering. The manual station shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 V:" (64mm) deep l-gang boxes and 11/2" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers. Notification Appliances - General All appliances shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective Service. All strobe appliances or combination appliances with strobes shall be capable of providing the "Equivalent Facilitation" which is allowed under the Americans with Disabilities Act accessibly guidelines (ADA(AG)), and shall be UL 1971, and ULC S526 Listed. All appliances shall be of the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Panel specified to insure absolute compatibility between the appliances and the control panels, and to insure that the application of the appliances are done in accordance with the single manufacturers' instructions. Any appliances which do not meet the above requirements, and are submitted for use must show written proof of their compatibility for the purposes intended. Such proof shall be in the form of documentation from all manufacturers which clearly states that their equipment (as submitted) are 100% compatible with each other for the purposes intended. Strobes, Genesis Series Provide strobes manufactured by EST, Cat No. Genesis Series. In - Out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. The strobes shall have a red face plate. They shall provide Multi candela flash outputs. The strobe shall have lens markings oriented for wall mounting. Temporal Horn/Strobes, Genesis Series James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 16 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Provide electronic horn/strobes manufactured by EST. In - Out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. The horn/strobe shall have a red plastic housing. Horn/strobes shall be selectable for high or low dba output. Horns shall be selectable for steady or temporal output. A synchronized temporal pattern sound output level of 97-dba average shall be provided. The strobe shall provide multi candela flash outputs. The strobe shall have lens markings oriented for wall mounting. Electromagnetic Doorholders - General Electromagnetic doorholders submitted for use must have written proof of their compatibility for the purposes intended. Such proof shall be in the form of documentation from all manufacturers that clearly states that their equipment (as submitted) is 100% compatible with each other for the purposes intended. Wall Mounted, 1504/1505/1508/1509 Series Provide flush, semi-flush or surface wall mounted electromagnetic doorholder/releases rated at 24 Vac/dc as directed by the Consulting Engineer. Finish shall be brushed zinc. STI Stopper II Lexan Guards All manual pull stations shall be provided with STI Stopper II lexan guards, equipped with non-audible alarms. They shall be surface or flush mounting, as required for each individual device. All strobe and horn-strobe shall have STI Stopper li lexan guards where indicated on the drawings. PART m - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION The entire system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner, in accordance with approved manufacturer's wiring diagram. The contractor shall furnish all conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for the complete installation. All wiring shall be plenum rated of the type recommended by the manufacturer, approved by the local Fire Department and specified with in. All penetration of floor slabs and firewalls shall be sleeved (1" conduit minimum) fire stopped in accordance with all local fire codes. End of Line Resistors shall be furnished as required for mounting as directed by the manufacturer; Devices containing end-of-line resistors shall be appropriately labeled. Devices should be labeled so removal of the device is not required to identify the EOL device. All manual pull stations shall be mounted 48 inches above the finished floor, as measured on center. All manual pull stations shall have lexan covers (non-audible) in all areas. The mounting heights reference in line item D and E (following) are written in august 2004. ADA revisions are pending and the revised heights, which will be higher, will apply if in effect at the time of construction. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 17 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 E. All audio/visual devices shall be mounted 80 inches above the finished floor, as measured on center. Devices shall be mounted no less than 6 inches from the ceiling. All audiovisual devices shall have lexan covers in all areas. F. No area smoke detectors shall be mounted within 36 inches of any HVAC supply, return air register or lighting fixture. G. No area smoke or heat detector shall be mounted within 12 inches of any wall. All detectors shall be installed in strict accordance with NFPA 72 (1999) guidelines for such devices. H. All mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, gymnasiums, wiring closets, custodian rooms, attic spaces, etc. or areas with no hung ceilings shall be piped with 3\4' conduit. All device plenum rated wiring shall be mechanically protected with conduit. All areas in public view shall be in metal V-700 wiremold (or equal).All boxes must be painted red and labeled "FIRE ALARM". I. All addressable modules shall be mounted within 36 inches of the monitored or controlled point of termination. This shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, fan shutdown, elevator recall, shunt trip, sprinkler status points, Ansul/Hood subsystems, or door release. Label all addressable modules as to their function. J. All low voltage wiring terminated to the fire alarm system shall be PLENUM RATED with no exceptions and no less than No. 18 AWG in size, and solid copper. K. All line voltage (120VAC) wiring shall be no less than No. 12 AWO in size, and solid copper. This shall include all system grounding. FACP must have a DEDICATED 20 Amp circuit marked back at the power panel NO EXCEPTIONS. L. All wiring shall be color-coded red throughout, to National Electrical Code standards. M. Power-limited/Non-power-limited NEC wiring standards SHALL BE OBSERVED. N. All junction box covers shall be painted federal safety red and labeled FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ONLY in black letters. O. Fire alarm system wiring shall not co-mingle with any other system wiring in the facility. Conduits shall not be shared under any circumstance. Only when fire alarm wiring enters the enclosure of a monitored or controlled system will co-habitation be permitted (i.e. at fan starters or elevator controllers). THIS WILL BE FIELD INSPECTED BY THE PROJECT ENGINEER. P. Fire alarm control panel enclosures shall have engraved labels indicating, "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM", and the areas of the building served by that panel. Q. Auxiliary relays shall be appropriately labeled to indicate "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, and their specific function (i.e. FAN S-1 SHUTDOWN). R. All fire alarm wiring shall be continuous and unspliced. Terminations shall only occur at fire alarm devices or control panel enclosures under terminal screws. All other splicing methods are specifically disallowed.(i.e, plastic wirenuts) S. All fire alarm wiring shall be installed using a dedicated system of supports (i.e. bridle rings). Fire alarm wiring shall not be bundled or strapped to existing conduit, pipe or wire in the facility. THIS WILL BE FIELD INSPECTED BY THE PROJECT ENGINEER hung from building steel or structure. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 18 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 All fire alarm wiring shall be sleeved when passing through any wall, using conduit sleeves (1" min.) with bushings, and fire stopped in accordance with Code. The system shall be arranged to receive power'from one three wire 120 Vac, 20 A supply. All low voltage operation shall be provided from the fire alarm control panel. AIl fire alarm devices shall be accessible for periodic maintenance. Should a device location indicated on the Contract Drawings not meet this requirement, it shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to bring it, in writing, to the attention of the project Engineer. Failure to bring such issues to the attention of the Project Engineer shall be the exclusive liability of the installing Electrical Contractor. The existing fire alarm system shall remain in operation throughout project. The installing Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the upkeep of the existing system. Label new off line devices as such until turned on and all old off line devices the same until removed. The installing Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of existing fire alarm control panel, fire alarm devices and existing annunciator. The End-User reserves the fight to retain any existing fire alarm system components, upon their request. All existing fire alarm system components requiring special handling for disposal (due to radioactivity) shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor. Written proof of proper disposal by the installing contractor shall be required prior to release of outstanding retainage. Removal/blanking of bells, extensions of pull stations down, back boxes and extensions to accommodate lexan covers, etc. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.03 TESTS The system shall be installed and fully tested under the supervision of a trained manufacturer's representative. The system shall be demonstrated to perform all of the function as specified. The installing contractor or fire alarm equipment vendor shall have no less than two (2) NICET Level II fire alarm technicians dedicated to this project. The Installing Contract and the Fire Alarm System Vendor shall, upon the request of the Consulting Engineer or End-User, attend any and all project meetings for the purpose of accurately determining progress. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to assure that construction debris does not adversely affect any sensing devices installed as part of this project. Should it be deemed necessary by the Consulting Engineer, End-User or AHJ, the installing contractor shall be responsible for the cleaning of all smoke detectors prior to final acceptance. A. The tim alarm system vendor shall test the system in accordance with the manafacturer's requirements and NFPA 72 7-3 (1999). The vendor shall provide completed NFPA 72 7- 3 (1999) reports to the Consulting Engineer for review and approval prior to final acceptance. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 19 PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS J&L PROJECT # 09AE-00033 3/30/2009 Each individual system operation on a circuit-by-circuit basis shall be tested for its complete operation. The procedure for testing the entire fire alarm system shall be set forth with the consent of the code enforcement official, the Engineer and the manufacturer. 3.04 DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING 2. END OF SECTION The contractor shall compile and provide to the owners three (3) complete manuals on the completed system to include SITE SPECIFIC operating and maintenance instructions, catalog cuts of all equipment and components, as-built wiring diagrams and a manufacturer's suggested spare parts list. In addition to the above manuals, the Electrical Contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's trained representative for two (2)separate calendar days for a period of four (4) hours per day to instruct the owners' designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of the entire system. An EST3 End-User Training Video shall be included as part of the system documentation. As-built drawings shall consist of the following: 1. Complete revision of all previously submitted drawings. Point-to-point depiction of all device wiring on the device layout floor plans. James, LaSala & Associates, LLP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720 20 T SITE LOCATION PLAN SCALE: 1"=150' REH DRAWINGS FOR NIC SCHOOL ILITATION - PH IMPROVEM PECONIC, SUFFOLK CO., NEW YORK PREPARED FOR THE NORTH LOCATION MAP SCALE: 1"=5,000'+ T1. COVER PAGE A1 DEMOLITION / REMOVAL PLAN ONE CONSTRUCTION PLAN, NOTES CONSTRUCTION DETAILS Pl PLUMBING PLAN WD1 PROPOSED WATER DISTRIBUTION PLAN WD2 PROPOSED WATER DISTRIBUTION DETAILS WD3 PROPOSED WATER DISTRIBUTION DETAILS S-1 SITE UTILITY PLAN H-01 HVAC LEGEND & NOTES PLAN H-02 HVAC BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN H-03 HVAC FIRST FLOOR PLAN H -04 H-05 H-06 H-07 FP-01 FP-02 FP-03 E-01 E-02 E-03 E-04 E-05 E-06 MEP ENGINEERS FA-01 FA-02 FA-03 JAMES, 11 OVAL DRIVE LASALA & SUITE 129 ASSOCIATES, ISLANDIA, NY 11749 LLP TELEPHONE: 631.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631.252.1536 JLA JOB# 09AE-00033 HVAC DETAILS PLAN 1 OF 3 HVAC DETAILS PLAN 2 OF 3 HVAC DETAILS PLAN 3 OF 3 HVAC SITE PLAN FIRE PROTECTION LEGENDS, NOTES AND DETAILS FIRE PROTECTION DETAILS FIRE PROTECTION BASEMENT/FIRST FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL LEGEND & NOTES PLAN ELECTRICAL POWER BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL LIGHTING BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL POWER FIRST FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL LIGHTING FIRST FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAM/PANEL SCHEDULES PLAN ELECTRICAL FIRE ALARM LEGENDS & NOTES PLAN ELECTRICAL FIRE ALARM BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL FIRE ALARM FIRST FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTE THE PROJECT IS BEING BID WITH ONE CONTRACT FOR ALL ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS AND ONE CONTRACT FOR ALL OTHER WORK, INCLUDING ARCHITECTURAL, HVAC, PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL, FIRE ALARM, AND FIRE SUPPRESSION. ANY REFERENCES TO PLUMBING, ELECTRIC, HVAC OR ANY OTHER CONTRACTORS SHALL MEAN THE SOLE CONTRACTOR WHO WAS AWARDED THE CONTRACT. 5/7/09 UPS ISSUED FOR BIDS CFD DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE ONE IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 COVER PAGE L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. DRAWING Designed By: MPS $cole: AS NOTED Drown By: MPS Dote: APRIL 2009 T 1 Approved By: CFD File No.: 09011 KEYED DEMOLITION NOTES I SHUT DOWN WATER AND DRAIN. UP 2R AUDITORIUM./ CAFETERIA CLASSROOM DEMOLITION/REPAIR PLAN SCALE: YG" = 1'-0" STAGE PLATFORM BOY'S 7 gIRL'S TOILET i.©<' TOILET ....... JC LIBRARY 4R T UP 2R CLASSROOM UP 4R CLASSROOM KEYED DESCRIPTION GENERAL TO BUILDING UP ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS- AN ASBESTOS SURVEY IS REQUIRED TO ACCURATELY QUANTIFY THE ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS (ACM) TO BE ABATED. ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS- LEAD PAINT. IT NAS BEEN DETERMINED THAT THE INTERIOR CONTAINS LEAD. AN ABATEMENT OF FLARING OR LOOSE PAINT SHALL BE PERFORMED. ALL OTHER AREAS CAN BE ENCAPSULATED WITH ADDITIONAL PAINTING. PREPARE ALL FIRST FLOOR WALLS FOR REPAINTING. DEMOLISH THE PARTITION WALL SEPARATING THE PASSAGE AREA FROM THE OFFICE. PATCH DISTURBED AREAS. DEMOLISH THE PARTITION WALL AND SHELVING UNIT IN THE STAGE PROSCENIUM. CAREFULLY REMOVE PORTIONS OF DAMAGED FLOORING. CAREFULLY CUT OUT PORTIONS OF PLASTER CEILINGS THAT HAVE SUSTAINED DAMAGE. IF NECESSARY, CAREFULLY REMOVE COVE MOULDING. REINSTALL AND/OR SUPPLEMENT., CAREFULLY CUT OUT PORTIONS OF PLASTER WALLS THAT HAVE SUSTAINED DAMAGE. CAREFULLY REMOVE DAMAGED PORTIONS OF WAINSCOTBNC. REMOVE CORK TILE WALL COVERINGS THROUGHOUT, SCRAPE WALL IN PREPARATION OF PAINTING, CAREFULLY REMOVE MOULDINGS FOR REINSTALLATION, ASSUME 10~. REMOVAL OF WALLS AND CEILINGS, TO BE PATCHED, REMOVE ALL EXISTING WATER CLOSETS (5 TOTAL). REMOVE TOILET PARTITIONS (INCLUDING THOSE FRAMING THE ENTRANCE TO THE RESTROOM), AND EXISTING TOILET ACCESSORIES. REMOVE EXISTING LAVATORIES AND PLUMBING FROM WALL OUT, AND ASSOCIATED ACCESSORIES, REMOVE REMAINING PORTIONS OF PLASTER CEILING. CAREFULLY REMOVE COVE MOULDING FOR REINSTALLATION. CAREFULLY REMOVE WOOd BASE MOULDING FOR CARPET REMOVAL (IF NECESSARY). WOOD MOULDING TO BE CAREFULLY STORED FOR REINSTALLATION. REMOVE ALL NON WOOD MOULDING. CAREFULLY REMOVE WOOD BASE MOULDING WHERE NEW RADIATOR IS TO BE INSTALLED. THESE WILL BE RELOCATED TO AREA LEFT VOID BY RADIATOR REMOVAL, GENERAL NOTES 1, ALL PICTURE MOULDINGS (THOSE APPROXIMATELY 18" DOWN FROM TOP OF WALL) TO REMAIN. MAINTAIN NATURAL WOOD. ALL PAINTING OF WALLS TO BE CAREFULLY PERFORMED WITH RESPECT TO MAINTAINING ALL NATURAL WOOD MOULDINGS. (INCLUDING BASE, WAINSCO~r, CHAIR RAILS ETC, GENERAL NOTES PATCH/REPAIR WALL AND /OR CEILING REMOVE ALL RESTROOM ACCESSORIES INCLUDING WALL MOUNTED SOAP CONTAINER (BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR) ALL URINALS TO REMAIN. REMOVE DOUBLE DOOR AND THRESHOLD AT NORTH END OF HALLWAY. PREP EXISTING FRAME TO RECEIVE INSERT FRAME. REMOVE CARPETING AND UNDERLAYMENT. REMOVE ALL BULLETIN BOARDS IN HALLWAYS. REMOVE HANDRAILS ON SIDE OF STAIR ASSEMBLY WHERE CHAIR LIFT IS TO BE INSTALLED. PREPARE SURFACES FOR INSTALLATION. REMOVE HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING UNIT. (SEE HVAC DRAWINGS), REMOVE UNIT VENTILATORS (SEE HVAC DRAWINGS). WHEN NEW THROUGH WALL UNITS ARE READY TO BE INSTALLED, REMOVE AND STORE BRICK TO INFILL WHERE PREVIOUS UNIT LEAVES A VOID. ] REMOVE ALL 1 X 2 MOULDING AT EYE LEVEL IN HALLWAYS. REMOVE SURFACE MOUNTED WATER COOLER AND CAP BEFORE REPLACEMENT. TEMPORARILY REMOVE FOLD UP TABLE ASSEMBLY FROM WALL WHERE CORK TILES ARE BEING REMOVED, REINSTALL IMMEDIATELY AFTER REMOVAL OF TILE. I~ CLEAR GRADE FOR NEW RAMP. I~ REMOVE DUCTS IN ATRC. REMOVE VERTICAL DUCT TO CUPOLA, INCLUDING MECHANICAL DEVICE FOR DAMPER CONTROL. CAP OPENING AT THE BoTroM OF CEILING JOISTS WITH PLYWOOD AND PROVIDE AN AIR TIGHT SEAL BETWEEN CONDITIONED AND NON CONDITIONED SPACE. (INSULATION TO FOLLOW). WHEN REMOVING EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES, CAP ANY ABANDONED PIPING IF NEW FIXTURE WILL NOT BE INSTALLED AT THIS LOCATION. MODIFY EXISTING WALLS AND/OR FLOORS TO ACCOMODATE REVISED LOCATION FOR NEW FIXTURE. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL PATCHING OF WALLS & FLOORS AS RESULT OF DEMOLITION & NEW PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION. ANY TEMPORARY BRACING NECESSARY TO SECURE STRUCTURES TEMPORARILY AFFECTED BY REMOVALS, AND ANY FENCING NEEDED TO ASSURE SAFETY AND PROTECTION, TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR. MEP ENGINEERS JAMES, 1 1 OVAL DRIVE LASAI,A & SUITE 129 ASSOCIATES, ISLANDIA, NY 11749 LLP TELEPHONE: 631.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631.232.1536 JLA JOB# 09AE-00033 DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV, BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE ONE IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 DEMOLITION/REMOVAL PLAN b. K. McLEAN A880ClATiG, P.O. Designed By: MPS Scale: AS NOTED DRAWING Drawn By: MPS Approved By: CFD Dote: APRIL 2009 File No.; 09011 A1 FLOOR MOUNTED OVERHEAD BRACED PARTITIONS TYPICAL AUDITORIUM/ CAFETERIA ®@@ uP ® 2R UP 4R CLASSROOM. ®® @ @ ] I FLOOR PLAN SCALE: ~" = 1'-0" MIRROR - 40" A.F.F. (BO]q-OM EDGE OF REFLECTIVE SURFACE) MAX. ADA FIXTURE MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS NOT TO SCALE STAGE PLATFORM ®@@ JC LIBRARY up 4R T UP 2R 3'-0" Ii 12" FOR KEYED RESTROOM DESIGNATIONS, SFF ENLARGED BATHROOM PLAN, DWG. A-3 J L CLASSROOM ®® KEYED COSTS DESCRIPTION GENERAL TO BUILDING 4R UP CLASSROOM. ®® @ @ 54" MIN. FROM W,~LL 3'-6" LONG ,L 36" IMAX, MIRROR · FROM WALL PAPER DISPENSER 11" MIN. LEG CL~-AR~,NC~ J~ I 17" MIN. FIXTURE DEPTH~ ,I PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION NOTES: INSTALL (3) NEW FLOOR MOUNTED TOILETS AND FLUSH VALVES TO COMPLY WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS. WHERE WATER CLOSETS ARE REMOVED. FURNISH AND INSTALL TILE WHERE REMOVED FIXTURE WAS PREVIOUSLY LOCATED. INSTALL SAME BASKETWEAVE TILE AND PA~q'ERN. INSTALL ALL NEW TOILET ACCESSORIES. FURNISH AND INSTALL STAINLESS STEEL GRAB BARS. FURNISH AND INSTALL SOLID PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS, AND VANDAL RESISTANT TOILET ACCESSORIES. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES WITH PRIMES. EVERTUF BY COMTEC INDUSTRIES OR APPROVED EQUAL. FURNISH & INSTALL NEW LAVATORIES, COMPLETE WITH NEW FAUCETS, PLUMBING FROM THE WALL OUT, AND NEW ACCESSORIES. SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FURNISH AND INSTALL ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES AS SHOWN ON ACCESSORY SCHEDULE. INSTALL NEW 3'-0" X 6'-8" FRP DOOR, SIDELITE AND FRAME. INCLUDING HARDWARE (SEE DOOR TO RECEIVE NEW ALUMINUM THRESHOLD, SPECIALITE OR APPROVED EQUAL, INSTALL NEW CARPETING AND UNDERLAYMENT WHERE CARPETING HAS BEEN REMOVED, (~ FURNISH AND INSTALL INCLINE PLATFORM LIFT OVER EXISTING STAIRS AS SHOWN IN PLAN.(NOT IN CONTRACT) INSTALL CUSTOM FIT A~FIC HATCH COVER BOX MADE OF2Y2-- THICK RIGID INSULATION. (~) PATCH DAMAGED PORTIONS OF CEILING (PLASTER OR GYPSUM SEE PLAN BOARD). FOR ROOMS. CAREFULLY REMOVE COVE MOULDING AND REINSTALL. IF ADDITIONAL MOULDING IS NEEDED MATCH ADDITIONAL WITH EXISTING CLOSELY. SUBMIT SAMPLE TO ENGINEER. (~ CAREFULLY REMOVE PORTIONS OR ALL OF COVE MOULDING AND REINSTALL. IF ADDITIONAL MOULDING IS NEEDED MATCH ADDITIONAL WITH EXISTING CLOSELY. SUBMIT SAMPLE TO ENGINEER. (7~) REPLACE ENTIRE CEILING IN OFFICE (PLASTER OR GYPSUM BOARD). CAREFULLY REMOVE COVE MOULDING AND REINSTALL. IF ADDITIONAL MOULDING IS NEEDED MATCH ADDITIONAL WITH EXISTING CLOSELY. SUBMIT SAMPLE TO ENGINEER. PATCH DAMAGED WALL AND AREAS LEFT VOID BY REMOVALS. CAREFULLY REMOVE MOULDING FOR REINSTALLATION. IF ADDITIONAL MOULDING IS NEEDED MATCH ADDITIONAL WITH EXISTING CLOSELY. SUBMIT SAMPLE TO ENGINEER. WHERE THE REMOVAL OF CORK TILE LEAVES NO WALL SURFACE, PROVIDE GYP. BOARD WALL SURFACES. KNOX BOX: CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY AND INSTALL, MODEL AND LOCATION AS PER TOWN OF SOUTHOLD AND FIRE DEPARTMENT REPLACE BASE MOLDING IN HALLS WITH STAINED NATURAL WOOD 8" WOOD MOULDING WITH SHOE MOLD. REINSTALL ALL WOOD MOULDINGS IN ROOMS WHERE REMOVED. REPLACE PORTIONS OF DAMAGED WAINSCOTTING IN OFFICE. APPROXIMATELY 30%. PROVIDE NEW WATER FOUNTAIN TO REMAIN. INSTALL NEW HVAC UNITS. SEE AND PATCH WALL AS NEEDED. MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE NEW STAINED NATURAL A,F.F.) OTHER WATER FOUNTAIN WHERE RADIATORS HAVE BEEN REMOVED, PROVIDE A STAINED NATURAL CLOSELY MATCH SURROUNDING WOOD WAINSCOTTING. INCLUDE QUARTER CONCAVE PERIMETER MOULDING. WHERE RADIATORS HAVE BEEN REMOVED, RELOCATE PORTION OF WALL WHERE NEW RADIATOR REMOVAL OF EXISTING RADIATOR. JANITOR'S CLOSET: PATCH WOOD CHAIR RAILS THROUGHOUT HALLWAYS (AT 42" WOOD PANEL TO ROUND EXISTING WOOD MOULDING FROM IS INSTALLED TO AREA LEFT VACATED BY WALL, PAINT SINK. PAINT ACCESS LADDER TO HATCH. WHERE DUCTS HAVE BEEN REMOVED CAP OPENING AT THE BoTroM OF CEILING JOISTS WITH PLYWOOD AND PROVIDE AN AIR TIGHT SEAL BETWEEN CONDITIONED AND NON CONDITIONED SPACE. INSULATION BETWEEN JOISTS WITH FIBERGLASS INSULATION. PROVIDE CLOSET DOOR IN SAME FRAME. (N.I.C.): TOWN TO INSTALL EXTERIOR ADA COMPLIANT RAMP WITH HANDRAILS. SEE DWG. A3 (N.I,C.): TOWN TO PAINT ALL WALLS, CEILINGS, INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR TRIM, DO NOT PAINT OVER NATURAL WOOD MOULDINGS OR WAINSCOTT. PAINT ALL METAL DOOR FRAMES AND WOOD DOOR FRAMES THAT WERE PREVIOUSLY PAINTED. PAINT PREVIOUSLY PAINTED SHELVES, COAT HOOK BOARDS, ETC. GENERAL NOTES PATCH/REPAIR MEP ENGINEERS WALL AND /OR CEILING SPECS). JAMES, 11 OVAL DRIVE LASALA & SUITE 129 ASSOCIATES, ISLANDIA, NY 11749 LLP TELEPHONE: 631.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 6,31.232.1536 JLA JOB/f 09AE-00053 DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE ONE IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE i,,,i:,j SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 PLAN, CONSTRUCTION NOTES L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. Designed By: MPS scal~: AS NOTED DRAWING Date'. APRIL 2009 A9 File No.: 09011 Drawn By: MPS Approved By: CED 4'-11' TOILET ACCESSORY LEGEND TAG # DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. (OR APPROVED EQUAL) <~' WASTE RECEPTACLE/TOWEL DISPENSER BRADLEY NO. 227-11 STAINLESS STL-SURFACE. ~ TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER 3RADLEY NO. 5402 STAINLESS STL, ~> FRAMELESS TILTING MIRROR BRADLEY NO. 780-1830 ~ GRAB BAR - 36" BRADLEY NO. 821 STAINLESS, lY2" DIAM. ~) GRAB BAR - 42" BRADLEY NO. 821 STAINLESS, 1)~" DIAM. ~ SOAP DISPENSER BRADLEY NO. 6562-13 STAINLESS ~> COAT HOOKS (@ STALL DOORS) COAT HOOKS (@ STALL DOORS) <~, PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER NOTE: ALL ITEMS TO BE VANDAL RESISTANT. DN q ENLARGED BATHROOM PLAN MEN AND WOMEN RESTROOMS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 2'-11" SMALL BATH AT OFFICE SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" /,8? 1 Contrd ~e~tim pmel 9 ~ble ~d 2 H~d ~[s 10 ~mtt 7 icon ~d pl~'~ 15 Self ~up~ ~st IMll-out force on support wall Is apprommately 670 lb O kdq). Adequate structural suplx)rt must l~ provided at top landing bottom landing and throughout the strppor[ing wall along Ibc sMil:¢. i I F L mm 34.00 (864) CONTROLLER AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY NOT REQUIRED, INSTALL PLUS SYSTEM IN LIEU OF CONTROLLER AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY. CHAIN AND SPROCKET SYSTEM. MOTOR AND CONTROLL LOCATED IN TOP LANDING CABINET INCLINE PLATFORM LIFT DIAGRAMS NO SCALE ~ND INFILL SEE DWG. H-01. H-03, AND DETAIL 1. ON H-05 {1) 3"x3"~/g' STEEL ANGLE WI4" BEARING FOR BRICK COURSE AND (2) 3"x3"x~" STEEL ANGLE WI4" BEARING FOR CONCRETE BLOCK ABOVE NEW THROUGH WALL DUCTS EXTERIOR ELEVATION SHOWING RECONFIGURATION OF AIR HANDLERS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" REINSTALL DMITED ACCESS PLATFORM OVER 2X 4'S PLACED ACROSS JOIST. 36" WIDE PLATFORM FROM ACCESS OPENING TO MAIN AIR HANDLER UNIT INACCESSIBLE ROOF SURFACES (BLOWN IN FIBER. RIGID WITH CAUKING OR COMBINATION) REMOVE A~rlC PLATFORM pLACE BATT INSULATION AFTER PROVIDE HORIZONTAL SEPARATION WITH INSULATION ABOVE INSULATE PIPES, WALL OF CHIMNEY FACING A~FIC, AND NEW HVAC AFTER INSTALLATION R~EINSTALL LIMITED ACCESS PLATFORM OVER 2X 4'S PLACED ACROSS JOIST. 36" WIDE pLATFORM FROM ACCESS OPENING TO MAIN IR HANDLER UNIT REMOVE ATTIC PLATFORM PLACE BATT INSULATION AFTER ATTIC INSULATION C~EN HANDRAILS PLAN OF EXTERIOR RAMP LEADING TO SIDE ENTRANCE DOOR SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 4,, MAINTAIN 36" MIN. CLEAR BETWEEN HANDRAILS COMPACTED CLEAN FILL MATERIAL 1 1/2" FROM EDGE OF CURB OR LOW WALL 1 1/2" O.D. 14 GA. STEEL TUBE RAIL POWDER COATED x 4" CURB 4 REINFORCING RODS 12" C.C. EACH DIRECTION 500 PSI, 28 DAY CONCRETE 4" MAX. SLUMP MOIST CURE BROOM FINISH PROVIDE SLEEVE FOR PIPE. FILL SURROUND WITH HYDRAULIC CEMENT. ALL POSTS AND HOLES TO BE 5" MIN. AWAY FROM EXISTING (TYPICAL) POURED CONC. RAM .ECTION SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" [30 LANDING EL. -0'-6" T.O. RAMP EL. -0'-0'~l_ EQ. EQ. EQ. EO. 1'-0" M I. JN~-~ LONGITUDINAL SECTION OF RAMPQ SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" NOTIN CONTRACT ALL DUCT SEAMS AND OPENINGS (EXCEPT SUPPLY REGISTERS), PENETRATIONS. AND HOLES HIDDEN FROM VIEW SHALL SE SEALED WITH MASTIC AND ALL VISIBLE DUCT SEAMS SHALL BE SEALED WITH SILICONE. A MIN. OF R-8 BLANKET DUCT INSULATION SHALL BE PROVIDED AT ALL UNCONDITIONED SPACES. TAPE IS NOT TO BE USED. SEALING OF THE SUPPLY SYSTEM INCLUDES THE SEALING OF THE SUPPLY PLENUM, ITS ATTACHMENT TO THE AIR HANDLER OR FURNACE SHOULD BE SEALED WITH MAST[C. RETURN SYSTEMS SHOULD BE "HARD" DUCTED AND SEALED WITH MASTIC IN ORDER TO SE AIRTIGHT. BUILDING CAVITIES SHOULD NOT BE USED AS RETURNS. INSULATE ALL DUCTS WITH R-8 MIN. BLANKET BA%rS. -TYPICAL BA%r INSULATION BETWEEN JOISTS if~] II :ESS OPENING WIDE PLATFORM (TYP.) 1L Jf ATTIC LAYOUT SCALE: 1/16" = 1'~0" CAVITIES. INCLUDING VERTICAL SURFACES W/AIR TIGHT SEAL (BLOWN IN FIBER, RIGID WITH CAUKING OR COMBINATION) PROVIDE AIR TIGHT IOISTS WITH INSULATION ABOVE; HOWEVER NO VERTICAL SURFACES TO SOUNDRY NON CONDITIONED SPACE WITHOUT BORDERING INSULATION STYROFOAM STYROFOAM BAFFLE VENTING BETWEEN RAFTERS ATTACHEE SHEATHING FAN FOLD OR BACKER BOARD FOAM CAULKED IN PLACE, TO EXTEND SHEATHING GR RIGID INSULATION UP TO TOP PLATE, RIGID INSULATIOIq WITH FOAM CAULK OVERALL EXTERIOR STUDS AND PLATES. NOTIFY ENGINEER WHERE INACCESSIBILE FOAM CAULK FIRST FLOOR DATE BY MEP ENGINEERS JAMES, 1 1 OVAL DRIVE LASALA & SUITE 129 ASSOCIATES, ISLANDIA, NY 11749 LLP TELEPHONE: 631.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 651.232.1536 JLA JOB# 09AE-00033 DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE ONE IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y, 11971 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. DRAWING ay:MPS Sco~e: AS NOTED Drawn By: MPS Date: APRIL 2009 A5 Approved By: CFD File No.: 09011 PLUMBING PLAN (BASEMENT) SCALE: ~" = 1'-0" PIPINg UP TO BOTH NEW AND EXISTIN6 PLUMBING FIXTURES - EXISTING 2" INCOMING DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE -- REPLACEMENT HOT WATER HEATER J [ GENERAL PLUMBING NOTES: 1. ALL PLUMBING SHALL CONFORM TO THE PLUMBING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE AND ALL LOCAL CODES. 2. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING THE PLUMBING PERMIT AND COORDINATING ALL REQUIRED INSPEOTIONS. 3. THE PIPING IS SHOWN SCHEMATICALLY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO RUN PIPING IN MOST EFFECTIVE MANNER CONFORMING TO THE CODES. 4. NO HUBIESS OR PLASTIC PIPING BELOW CONCRETE SLABS. 5. WATER CLOSET FLUSH VALVE INSTALLATION - CONSULT FLUSH VALVE MANUFACTURER FOR ADA ALTERNATE INSTALLATION OF SUPPLY LINE SO AS NOT TO CONFLICT WITH THE REQUIRED GRAB BAR. 6, VERIFY SIZE OF EXISTING PIPE TO WATER CLOSETS. NEW FLUSHOMETERS MAY REQUIRE A PIPE SIZE THAT DIFFERS FROM EXISTING PIPE SIZE. HOT WATER SUPPLY ~ ISOLATION GATE VALVE OYP) ELECTRIC WATER HEATER DRAIN RN. FLO0~~'~ '?.~'~, FLOOR THERMOMETER PosmONED TO BE READ FROM FLOOR (RANGE O-200'F) ~ P~'T REUEF VALVE ~-- (sen'lNG BY MFR. OF HEATER) J~ · FULL SIZE OF VALVE OUTLET J~Il' ' ROUTE TEMPT. ANB PRESS, VALVE OUTLET TO 15 CM OFF FLOOR OR TO FLOOR DRAIN WHEN AVAILABLE MOUNTED ELECTRIC WATER HEATER N.T.S. PLUMBING NOTES: REPLACE HOT WATER HEATER IN SAME LOCATION. Q DISCONNECT AND CAP EXISTING WATER LINES TO WELL WATER SOURCE. HOOK UP EXISTING WATER LINE TO NEW WATER CLOSETS. HOOK UP EXISTING WATER LINE TO NEW LAVATORIES. VERIFY EXISTING SIZES TO MATCH. MAINTAIN WATER LINE TO URINALS. FIRESTOP PIPING AT CONCRETE FLOOR. CARRIER PIPE(TYP.) INSULATION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THE SAME PERFORMANCE AS THE F'IRESTOPPING C PIPE MASONRY WALL OR FLOOR STEEL PIPE SLEEVE PIPE INSULATION AS REQUIRED(TYpO NOTE: PIPE SLEEVE SHALL BE SIZED TO PROVIDE 1/4" ALL AROUND CLEARANCE. D ETAI L TYPICAL CONCRETE FLOOR N,T.S. FOR REFERENCE ONLY MEP ENGINEERS JAMES, 11 OVAL DRIVE LASAI,A & SUITE 129 ASSOCIATES, ISLANDIA, NY 11749 LLP TELEPHONE: 631.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631.232.1536 JLA JOBf~ 09AE-00053 DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION- PHASE ONE IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N,Y. 11971 PLUMBING PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. Des;gned By: MPS s=om AS NOTED DRAWING Drawn By: kiPS Dote: APRIL 2009 P 1 Approved By: CFD File No.: 09011 KEY MAP N TS SOURCE: USGS SOUHOLD QUADRANGLE MAP 1956 LOCATION: EAST SIDE OF PECONIC LANE 0,2 MILES NORTH OF RT 2:5 SOUTHOLD NEW YORK SITE DATA: SCTM # SITE ARFA BUILDING AREA: NOTES: 3 1000-75-1-13 4,3 ACRES EXISTING 6~000 SF PROPOSED 0 SF NO EXISTING SURFACE WATERS / WETLANDS WITHIN 100L 4" COMBINED DOMESTIC AND FIRE SUPRESSION PUBLIC WATER SUPPLY FOR THE EXISTING PECONIC SCHOOL BUILDING iS PROPOSED FROM SUFFOLK COUNTY WATER AUTHORITY OWNED 12" WATER MAIN CURRENTLY PRESENTON PECONtC LANE ~SEE SCWA MAP #20-P) THE EXISTING PRIVATE WATER WELL TO BE ABANDONED BY FILLING THE WELL CASING WiTH GROUT OR EQUAL MATERIAL AS PER NYSDEC REQUIREMENTS AFTER THE COMPLETION OF PUBLIC WATER SERVICE CONNECTION TO THE EXISTING SCHOOL BUILDING ~UFFOLK COUNTY WATE~ AUTHORITY ~'~8Y t DESCRIPTION L APPROV BY DATE RF/ISIONS PECONIC LANE SCHOOL REPAIRS PECONiC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 PROPOSED WATER 31STRIBUTION PLAN L K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. ~: YD stole: AS NOTED By YD ~,t, MARCH 2008 WD1 ADr*ro,,,o ~ CFD/RGD ~o.: 09011.000 BACK FLOW NOTES: VAULT AND BY-PASS PIPING NOTES: 1. VAULT, VAULT PIPING AND BY-PASS TO BE INSTALLED BY OWNER AS SHOWN (SEE DETAIL THIS SHEET). WA]ER AUTHORITY. 5. ALL VALVES TO OPEN COUNTERCLOCKWISE (RIGHT HANDED VAL'v*ES), 24' DIA~ ~ ~R MANHOLE FRAME AND COVER: CAMPSELL #1007-116 OR POTENTE & SONS #JEP-1B-36 FLANGE OR EQUAL MA~ (2) MORTAR, {VAR. TO GRADE, NOT TO EXCEED 28' FROM FINAL GRADE TO FIRST STEP 8' , WATER METER {FINAL SIZE AS PER S.C~W.A. METER DEPARTMENT D'- ~ ~RMiNATION) GRADE FLOAT44MBARS_~ ALUMINUM STEP - ALCOA #1EO27B, COPOLYMER PLASTIC MANHOLE STEP OPS2-PF OR EQUAL 0'- ~ 3' raZE) VAULT ELEVATION - TRAFFIC NTS RPZ HEATED ENCLOSURE NOTES: 1, RPZ DEVICE MUST BE PROTECTED AGAINST FREEZING. ADEQUATE ELECTRIC POWER NECESSARY GFI REQUIRED WITHIN THE SOX FOR (HEAT TRACE TAPFJSPACE HEATER) 3. TEST COCKS MUST HAVE 30' MIN. CLEARANCE ONCE BOX IS OPENED TO FACILITATE TESTING 4. ENCLOSURE MUST HAVE AR ADEQUATELY SIZED SCREENED WEEP HOLES FOR CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SLAB, RPZ INETALLATION, ENCLOSURE. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND CONNECT THE ELECTRIC FOR THE RPZ HEATER, PROPOSED RPZ DEVICE INSIDE OF THE HEATED ENCLOSURE GRADE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL THE WATER LINE FROM SCWA TO BUILDING, i-CONTINUE 4" I~l pLAS~li WATER LINE TO EXISTING PECONIC SCHOOL BUILOING DIRECTION OF FLOW L END DUCTILE IRON PiPE AND CONTINUE SITE WATER PIPING W)TH C§0D~LASS 150 PLASTIC PIPE - TONE WIRE AND WARNING TAPE SHALL SE CONTINUOUS ALONG ENTIRE LENGTH OF MAIN HOT BOX ENCLOSURE MODEL HB4FEM OR APPROVED EQUAL FESCO MODEL 880V- 4' REDUCED PRESSURE ASSEMBLY OR APPROVED EQUAL WITH OS&Y GATE VALVES LLIFTINGHANDLES -- 13' - TYPICAL VAULT TOP SLAB NTS ~#SBARS(~6' O.C, BOTH WAYS- TYPICAL WALL MOUNTED AS PER MANUFACTURER ('FYP. OF 2) 3,500 PSI Ifc) MIN. FROM SCWA SUPPLY 4" DIA WATER SE RVICE TYPICAL MASTER METER DETAILS NTS ENCLOSURE INSIDE LXW = 41' x41' vALVE MIN. DIRECTION OF FLOW ~ ~> ELEVATION VIEW HOT BOX ENCLOSURE MODEL HB4FEM OR APPROVED EQUAL FEBCO MODEL 880V- 4' REDUCED PRESSURE ASSEMBLY OR APPROVED EQUAL WITH OS&Y GATE VALVES (TYP OF 2) VALVE [TYP.) PROPOSED ONE 3" COM METER (FINAL SIZE AS PER S.C,W.~ METER DEPARTMENT DETERMINATION) TYPICAL S.C.W~',. WATER METER VAULT. METER VAULT TO SE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE TO SCWA STANDARDS I~ TO EXISTING PECONIC SCHOOL BUILDING o _Ts' PASS FEBCO 880V - 4" REDUCED PRESSURE ASSEMBLY INSIDE OF THE HOT BOX ENCLOSURE MODEL HB4FEM NTS TYPICAL WATER SERVICE DETAIL PROPOSED ONE 3" COMPOUND WATER METER (FINAL SIZE AS PER S,C.W~ METER DEPARTMENT DETERMINATION) 4" MAiN 4' MAIN NTS VALVE & BOX DIRECTION OF FLOW OWNER INSTALLED AND ~ MAINTAIN ED PiPE TO METER io EXIST. GRADE NOTE' ALL VALVES, BENDS AND FITTINGS TO SE PER THE LATEST A~NA AND SCWA STANDARDS. VAULT '1 4" MAIN VAULT AND BY-PASS PIPING DETAIL NTS DUCTILE IRON PiPE HEAl'ED ABOVE GROUND ENCLOSURE THE SCWA SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE[ FOR CONNECTION TO WATER MAIN, CURB STOP, WATER METER. ASSOCIATED PIPING AND CONNECTION TO OWNER INSTALLED PIPE -- END DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND CONTINUE SITE WATER PIPING WITH C90S"CLASS 150 PLASTIC PiPE - TONE OUTLET SIDE 05/25/09 DATE ~ -. (HINGE SIDE OF COVER) '.,. .,, - , PLAN VIEW SUFFOLK COUNTY WATER AUTHORITY BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES x I'PR(tYAL OF PLANS REVISIONS AS PER SCWA 03/20/09 COMMENTS ICFO/RGD APP ROV. BY DESCRIPTION REVISIONS PECONIC LANE SCHOOL REPAIRS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 PROPOSED WATER DISTRIBUTION DETAILS L K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. YD A5 NOTED YD ~le: MARCH 2008 s~. CFD/RGD R,,~ .o.: 09011.000 JT EXISTING PAVEMENT ALONG METALLIC WARNING TYPICAL UTILITY TRENCH BOTH SIDES OF UTILITY TRENCH - TYPICAL TAPE - CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS TONE WIRE 6" WATER MAIN -- PROPOSED TELEPHONE -- PROPOSED COMMUNICATIONS (COAXIAL CABLE) TYPICAL UTILITY TRENCH NTS NOTE: · I. UTILITY TRENCHING IN AREAS OF EXISTING PAVEMENT SHALL BE SAWCUT ON BOTH SIDES OF THE TRENCH PRIOR TO EXCAVATION. 3. THICK TYPE 8 ASPHALT TOp SHALL RESTORE TRENCH SURFACE AND MEET EXISTING GRADES ON BOTH SIDES OF TRENCH. BACKFILL MATERIAL MUST BE COMPACTED WITH A MECHANICAL COMPACTOR AT 8" LIFTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR TRENCHING AND RESTORATION WITH EACH UTILITY INSTALLATION. THE CUSTOMER'S DOMESTIC WATER LINE AND/OR FIRE LINE SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF TEN (10) FEET, RUNNINNG PARALLEL, FROM ANY UNDERGROUND UTILITY (ELECTRIC, GAS, TELEPHONE, CABLE T.T. AND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE) AND OIL STORAGE TANL, STORM DRAIN OR CATCH BASIN, DRIVEWAY CURB~ LIGHTENING POLE, ELECTRIC TRANSFORMER, TREES, OR ANY LARGE OBSTRUCTIONS. NOTES ,1.WATER MAIN PIPE TO BE BLUE BRUTE PIPE, CLASS ,150 AS MANUFACTURED BY IPEX INC. OR APPROVED EQUAL. PIPE SHALL MEET AWWA STANDARD C900 AND ASTM STANDARD D2241-89. PVC PIPE SHALL BEAR THE APPROVAL OF THE NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION, 2. ALL FI'I-rINGS SHALL BE BLUE BRUTE AWWA C907 AS MANUFACTURED BY IPEX INC. OR APPROVED EQUAL. 3. ALL MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW. NO USED MATERIALS SHALL BE INCORPORATED INTO THE WORK. 4. ALL PIPE FI'I-rING CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MECHANICAL JOINTS. ALL PIPE CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE USING FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC SLIP ON JOINTS MEETING ASTM STANDARD 03139-89. 5. PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS, AWWA MANUAL M23 AND THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SUFFOLK COUNTY DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES. 6. A CONTINUOUS AND UNIFORM BEDDING SHALL BE PROVIDED IN THE TRENCH FOR ALL BURIED PIPE. BACKFILL MATERIAL SHALL BE TAMPED IN 6" LAYERS. STONES SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE TRENCH FOR A DEPTH OF AT LEAST 6" BELOW THE BoTroM OF THE PIPE. 7. MINIMUM COVER FOR ALL WATER PIPING SHALL BE 54". ALL TEES, BENDS AND PLUGS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH REACTION BLOCKING OR TIE RODS TO PREVENT MOVEMENT. 9. ALL TYPES OF INSTALLED PIPE SHALL BE PRESSURE TESTED AND LEAKAGE TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF AWWA STANDARD C600. ,10. WATER MAINS SHALL BE DISINFECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWVVA STANDARD C-651-86 OR THE LATEST REVISION. 11. BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSES OF WATER SAMPLES COLLECTED AFTER DISINFECTION ARE REQUIRED AT LOCATIONS SPECIFIED BY THE SUFFOLK COUNTY DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES. GENERALLY, A BACTERIOLOGICAL SAMPLE IS REQUIRED FOR EVERY ,1,000 LINEAR FEET OF WATER MAIN OR PORTION THEREOF. THRUST BLOCK SCHEDULE MINIMUM SQUARE FEET BEARING AREA ON SOIL FOR THRUST BLOCK PIPE SIZE TEES, CAPS, & PLUGS 90° BENDS 45° BENDS 22.5° BENDS 6" OR LESS 2 3 I 1/2 3/4 8" 3 1/2 5 2 3/4 I 1/2 10" 5 1/2 7 3/4 4 1/4 2 1/4 NOTES i. ALL THRUST BLOCKING TO EXTEND TO UNDISTURBED EARTH OR ROCK WITH MIN. BEARING AREA AS SPECIFIED IN SCHEDULE BELOW. 2. ALL THRUST BLOCKS TRANSIT MIXED 2500 PSI CONCRETE. TYP. PLUG TYP~ 90° TYP. 45° OR CAP BEND TYP. TEE BEND TYP. 22.5" BEND THRUSTBLOCK 8" x B" x 24" L. CCA TREATED LUMBER PVC GASKE'{ WATER MAiN C.L.D,I. CLASS 250 MECH. JOINT FITTING WITH RETAINER GLAND --CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK TO UNDISTURBED SOIL PVC WATER MAIN -- TYPICAL CURB STOP (VALVE) SHOULD BE BROUGHT TO GRADE --PVC WATER SERVICE [ MINIMUM BURIAL 54" ~- TAPPING SLEEVE TYPICAL WATER SERVICE - LARGER THAN 2" NTS GROUND SURFACE ANITARY LINE 18" MINIMUM O WATER MAIN 18" MINIMUM Y LINE SECTION SANITARY & STORM SEWER VERTICAL CROSSINGS NTS C MARKING TAPE 32" MAX. (TYPICAL) SURFACE 1'-REMOVE UNSUITABLE MATERIAL IF ENCOUNTERED~ WITH SUITABLE EXCAVATED MATERIAL A.O.B.E. COMPACT BACKFILL IN 6" LIFTS. PROPOSED WATER MAIN 'EMPORARY SHEETING AS PER O.S,H.A. REQUIREMENTS WHERE NO GROUND WATER EXISTS WATER MAIN EXCAVATION DETAILS NTS 10'-0" MIN. pLAN VIEW 10'-0" DR~AINAGE MIN. - ~CT ~RE SEWER LINE SEPARATION NTS DATE bY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC LANE SCHOOL REPAIRS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 PROPOSED WATER DISTRIBUTION DETAILS L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.O. DRAWING Designed By: YD AS NOTED Drawn Dy: YD Date: MARCH 2008 W D 3 Approved By; CFD/JFC uo.~ 09011,000 TYPICAL THRUST BLOCK DETAIL NTS KEY MAP N.T.S. SOURCE: USGS SOUHOLD QUADRANGLE MAP. 1956 LOCATION: EAST SIDE OF PECONIC LANE 0.2 ~ LES NORTH OF RT 25 SOUTHOLD NEW YORK S~TE DATA: SCTM #: S~TE AREA: 1000-75-1-13 4.3 ACRES BUILDING AREA: EXISTING: 6,000 SF :ROPOSED: 0 SF NOTES: 1. NO EXISTING SURFACE WATERS / WETLANDS WITHIN 100'. 4" COMBINED DOMESTIC AND FIRE SUPRESSION PUBLIC WATER SUPPLY FOR THE EXISTING PECONIC SCHOOL BUILDING IS PROPOSED FROM SUFFOLK COUNTY WATER AUTHORITY OWNED 12" WATER MAIN CURRENTLY PRESENT ON PECONIC LANE (SEE SCWA MAP #20-PI. THE EXISTING PRIVATE WATER WELL TO BE ABANDONED BY FILLING THE WELL CASING WITH GROUT OR EQUAL MATERIAL AS PER NYSDEC REQUIREMENTS AFTER THE COMPLETION OF PUBLIC WATER SERVICE CONNECTION TO THE EXISTING SCHOOL BUILDING 05/25/09 YD RE/ISIONS AS PER SCWA 0Z/20/09 COMMENTS CFD, RGD DATE I BY I DESCRIPTIO~ APDROV. B' REV SONS PECONIC LANE SCHOOL REPAIRS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD. NoY. 11971 SITE UTILITY PLAN L K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.O. Soole: AS NOTED Drown By: YD Date: APRIL 2009 Aooroveo 3y CFD/RGD File NO 09011.000 S-1 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE (ALTERNATE #1 &: AIR HANDLER FAN COOLING HOT WATER COIL ELECTRICAL DATA E.A.T. E.A,T, EWT UNIT AREA DB/WB TOTAL 3ENSIBIr DB/WE TOTAL 180'F MAX. CIR. TAG SERVED LOCATION CFM E.S.P. HP ('F) MBH dBH (°F) MBH GPM VOLTS/II/HZ MCA BKR. AMPS MFG'R MODEL REMARKS AH-1 CORE ATrlC 2300 1.0 $ 95/75 72.4 55.2 47/43 137 9.1 208/3/60 6.5 15 CARRIER 40RM-O08 UNIT CTRL BY PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT. AIR COOLED CONDENSER TOTAL UNIT UNIT HEAT E.A.T. L.A.T. TOTAL NO. FANS MAX. CIR. TAG SERVED LOCATION REJECTION CF) ('F) CFM S.P, ¢OLTS/~/HZ MCA BKR. AMPS MFG'R MOOEL REMARKS CU-1 UV-1 WEST WALL 56 MBH 95 - I 208/3/60 12.9 20 CARRIER 24ACB336AO03 PROVIDE LOW AMBIENT KIT CU-2 UV-2 WEST WALL 36 MBH 95 - 1 208/3/60 12.9 20 CARRIER 24ACB356AO03 CU-3 UV-3 EAST WALL 36 MBH 95 - 1 208/3/60 12,9 20 CARRIER 24ACB336AO05 CU-4 UV-4 EAST WALL 36 MBH 95 - 1 208/3/60 12.9 20 CARRIER 24ACB336AOOS CU-5 UV-5 EAST WALL 36 MBH 95 - 1 208/3/60 12.9 20 CARRIER 24ACB336AO03 CU-6 UV-6 EAST WALL 36 MBH 95 - 1 208/5/60 12.9 20 CARRIER 24ACB336AO03 CU-7 ur-7 WEST WALL 56 MBH 95 - 1 208/3/60 12.9 20 CARRIER 24ACB336AO03 CU-8 UV-8 WEST WALL $6 MBH 95 - - 1 208/5/60 12.9 20 CARRIER 24ACB336AO03 CU-9 AH-1 WEST WALL 72 MBH 95 - - 1 208/3/60 30.6 35 CARRIER 38ARZO07 FAN COIL/VENTILATOR UNIT SHEDULE (CARRIER AS STANDARD) COOENG HEATING MOTOR DATA AIR TOTAL EWT QUANTITY TOTAL SENS. MBH 180'F TAG MODEL CFM MBH MBH (EAT 6OF) GPU HP VOLT/PHS FLA/CKT. BKR MIN D.A. REMARKS uv-t,2,~, 40U 1000 53.5 24.6 75.1 5.0 1/5 115 / I 3.7 / 15A 200 HOT WATER HEATING/REFRIGERANT COOUNG 4.5.6.7.8 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP UNIT SCHEDULE (ALTERNATE t/~5 CEO-THERMAL) AIR HANDLER FAN COOENG HEATING ELECTRICAL DATA E.A.T. LINIT AREA DB/WB TOTAL SENSIBLE DB/WB TOTAL MAX. CIR. rag SERVED LOCATION CPM E.S.P. HP ('F) MBH MBH (*F) MBH GPM VOLTS/~II/H2 MCA BKR, AMPS MFG'R MODEL REMARKS AH-1 CORE ATrlC 2300 1.0 1 95/75 78,8 54.5 47/43 79.4 12,4 208/3/60 31.4 50 CARRIER 50PSV070 UNit CTRL. BY PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT. ~H-2 CLASSROOM ATTIC 1600 1.0 1 95/75 68.0 48.0 47/43 67.2 11.3 208/3/60 26.9 40 CARRIER 50PSV060 AH-5 CLASSROOM ATTIC 1600 1.0 1 95/75 68.0 48.0 47/43 67.2 11.3 208/3/60 26.9 40 CARRIER 50PSV060 ~,H-4 CLASSROOM ATTIC 1600 1.0 1 95/75 68.0 48,0 47/43 67.2 11.3 208/3/60 26.9 40 CARRIER 50PSV060 }.H-5 CLASSROOM ATTIC 1600 1.0 1 95/75 68.0 48.0 47/43 67.2 11.3 208/5/60 26,9 40 CARRIER 50PSV060 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS GENERAL: FURNISH AND INSTALL A COMPLETE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM AS MANUFACTURED BY RGBS ENTERPRISES INC. (718) 981-0734 OR APPROVED EOUAL. EXHAUST FANS: FAN EF-1.2 ON/OFF STATUS WILL BE CONTROLLED BY TIMECLOCK. GENERAL NOTES 1) ALL WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE PERFORMED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL NATIONAL, New YORK STATE CODES AND REGULATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL Be RESPONSIBLE TO eNsuRe THAT ALL HVAC WORK IS PROVIDED AND INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS. 2) DO NOT SCALE FROM THESE DRAWINGS. 5) THE EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS OF ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FIELD VERIFIED AND COORDINATED WITH ALL OTHER MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS, ALTERNATES #1 & 2 LEGEND NEW FD,AD AIR HANDLER: 4) THE FINISH AND COLOR OF THE AIR DEVICES, AND ALL OTHER EXPOSED HVAC EQUIPMENT SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE AH-1 TO BE A SPLIT SYSTEM UNIT WITH HOT WATER COIL ARCHITECT. DURING OCCUPIED MODE UNITS WILL BE IN "COOL" OR "HEAT" MODE. IN COOL MODE FAN WILL RUN CONTINUOUSLY AND THE 5) VERIFY ALL EQUIPMENT VOLTAGES WITH THE ELECTRICAL COMPRESSOR WILL CYCLE TO MEET COOLING SET POINT OF 75'F. CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ORDERING EQUIPMENT. IN HEAT MODE FAN WILL RUN CONTINUOUSLY AND THE S-WAY VALVE ON THE H.OT WATER COIL WILL MODULATE TO MEET HEATING 6) PROVIDE DISCONNECT SWITCHES FOR ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT CD SET POINT OF 72 F. DURING UNOCCUPIED MODE THE COOLING SET POINT WILL BE 80'F AND THE HEATING SET POINT WILL BE 65'F. FLOOR MOUNTED WITch_ FACTORY ENCLOSURE. INCLUDING WEATHERPROOF UNITS AS REQUIRED. CR NOTE:3' [~ FACTORY MOUNTEO 2 PIPE 3 WAY HEATING MODULATIG VALVE ASSEMBLY. 7) THE FINAL LOCATION OF AIR DEVICES MUST BE COORDINATED CFM FACTORY MOUNTED DX COIL UNITS MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR MORNING WARM UP A MINIMUM ~i 21-7/8" DEEP CABINET, OF 1 HOUR PRIOR TO OCCUPIED MODE. WITH ALL OTHER MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, SPRINKLER, WMS HORIZONTAL UNIT WITH INLET AND DISCHARGE GRILLE ARCHITECTURAL, AND STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS. 6. PROVIDE W/ FACE & BYPASS DAMPER CONTROL UNit VENTILATORS: 8) DUCT WORK SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF GALVANIZED SHEET BOILER SCHEDULE (ALTERNATE #1GAS/OIL) FIRING INPUT OUTPUT FLOW RATE J WEIGHT (LBS) REMARKS UNIT MAKE/MODEL FUEL MODE MBH MBH (GPM) B-1 GAS RBI FUSION 500 NATURAL GAS MOD W/RESET 500 490 50 J 566 PROV DE OUTDOOR AIR RESET CONTROLLER UV-I TO BE SPLIT SYSTEM FLOOR UNITS WITH HOT WATER COIL STEEL IN STRICT COMPLIANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF THE DURING OCCUPIED MODE UNITS WILL BE IN "COOL" OR "HEAT" MODE. IN COOL MODE FAN WILL RUN CONTINUOUSLY AND THE COMPRESSOR WILL CYCLE TO MEET COOLING SET POINT OF 75'F. IN HEAT MODE FAN WILL RUN CONTINUOUSLY AND THE S-WAY VALVE ON THE HOT WATER COIL WILL MODULATE TO MEET HEATING SET POINT OF 72'F, DURING UNOCCUPIED MODE THE COOLING SET POINT WILL BE 80°F AND THE HEATING SET POINT WILL BE 65'F. UNITS MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR MORNING WARM UP A MINIMUM OF 1 HOUR PRIOR TO OCCUPIED MODE. BOILER SYSTEM: BOILER WATER TEMPERATURE TO BE CONTROLLED FROM A "HEAT TimeR" OUTDOOR AIR RESET MODEL HWR, WATER TEMPERATURE WILL BE SET FOR 180'F AT O'F OUTSIDE AIR AND 120'F AT 60'F OUTSIDE AIR. FIELD CONDITIONS MAY ALTER THESE SETTINGS. BOILERS TO ALTERNATE STARTING. IF ONE BOILER CAN NOT MAINTAIN THE SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE THE SECOND BOILER WILL START. UPON START OF BOILER PUMP P1 TO START WATER CIRCULATION. PUMPS WILL STOP AT BOILER CUT OUT OF OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE OF 60'F. ALTERNATE #3 AIR HANDLERS[ AH-1,2,5,4,5 TO BE WATER SOURCE UNITS. DURING OCCUPIED MODE UNITS WILL BE IN "COOL" OR "HEAT" MODE. IN COOL MODE FAN WILL RUN CONTINUOUSLY AND THE COMPRESSOR WILL CYCLE TO MEET COOLING SET POINT OF 75'F. IN HEAT MODE FAN WILL RUN CONTINUOUSLY AND THE COMPRESSOR WILL CYCLE TO MEET COOLING SET POINT OF 72'F. DURING UNOCCUPIED MODE THE COOLING SET POINT WILL BE 80"F ANB THE HEATING SET POINT WILL BE 65'F. UNITS MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR MORNING WARM UP A MINIMUM OF 1 HOUR PRIOR TO OCCUPIED MODE. ASHRAE, NFPA, AND SMACNA GUIDE RECOMMENDATIONS. ALL DUCTS TO HAVE PITTSBURGH TYPE LOCK FOR LONGITUDINAL SEAMS AND DRIVE SLIP / "S" SLIP FOR TRANSVERSE JOINTS. "DUCT-MATE" JOINT SYSTEM IS ACCEPTABLE IN LIEU OF PRIOR SEAM SYSTEMS. SIZES AS SHOWN INDICATE INSIDE CLEAR DIMENSIONS OF THE AIR PASSAGE. DUCT WORK SHALL BE iNSULATED AS PER APPLICABLE CODES AND WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS. 9) DUCT SIZES MUST BE VERIFIED FOR CLEARANCES AT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO FABRICATION. DIMENSIONS MAY BE CHANGED TO ACCOMMODATE CONSTRUCTION AS LONG AS EFFECTIVE CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA iS MAINTAINED. DUCT TRANSITIONS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED WITH A SLOPE OF 1" TO 4% ALL DEVIATIONS FROM ORIGINAL CONTRACT DRAWINGS SHALL BE REVIEWED BY ENGINEER DURING THE SHOP DRAWING PROCESS. 10) PROVIDE ELBOWS OR TEES WITH TURNING VANES FOR ALL CHANGES OF DUCT DIRECTION. 11) PROVIDE MANUAL BALANCING DAMPERS AS REQUIRED TO PROPERLY BALANCE EACH INDIVIDUAL AIR REGISTER. 12) PROVIDE FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS AT ALL DUCT CONNECTIONS TO VIBRATING EQUIPMENT. THESE CONNECTORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO SUCH EQUIPMENT. 15) SYSTEM BALANCING SHALL BE PERFORMED IN STRICT COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES, REGULATIONS, AND WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS. PLANS 14) CONTRACTOR SHALL INSULATE DUCTWORK AS REQUIRED TO MINIMIZE NOISE, CONDENSATION AND HEAT LOSS WHERE DUCTS ARE LOCATED IN UNCONDITIONED SPACES. 15) MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONTROL WIRING FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM. (MC) TO PROVIDE ALL THERMOSTATS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE OPERATING SYSTEM. COORDINATE WITH THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS THAT WILL BE POWERED BY (NC). 16) MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ACOUSTICALLY LINING ALL DUCTWORK UP TO 15 FEET TO AND FROM A/C UNITS. A 1" THICK ACOUSTICAL LINING IS REQUIRED. 17) PROVIDE INSULATION ON ALL HWS/R PIPING, 03.09.09 JLA DATE BY JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 651.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 6.7,1.252.1556 JLA JOB# 09AE-00033 HEATING BURNER FIRING RATE IBURNER MOTORI CAPAClTY(MBH) I MANUF. MODEL J J2 OIL (OP") ELECTRICAL I 258 CARUN 201CRD 2.6 2.1/1.1 SMITH UNIT B-1 OIL BOILER SCHEDULE ALTERNATE BURNER MODEL MODEL WEIOHT (LBS) REMARKS LOlgA-W-3 1717 PROVIDEwATER LEvELBOILER& CONTROLSALARMS W/ OUTDOOR AIR RESET. HIGH/LOW HEATING UNIT CAPACITY (MBN) B-2 OIL 783 MANUF. MODEL WEIGHT (LBS) REMARKS SMITH LORTS/HE-4 4215 PROVIDEwATER LEvELBOILER& CONTROLSALARMS W/ OUTDOOR AIR RESET, HIGH/LOW POWERFLAME Cl-O t2 OIL) FIRING RATE I BURNER MOTOR f2 OIL (GPH)I ELECTRICAL 8.0 2.1/1.1 MFG'R MODEL REMARKS FLOFAB 600-3x3-5-4 PUMP TO RUN AT BOILER START FLOFAB 600-3x3-5-4 REDUNDANT PUMP PUMP SCHEDULE UNIT LOCATION P-1 B~qrUrNT P-2 BA~£U;MT FT MTR. 1/4 50 13 1750 HP GPM HEAD RPM 1/4 50 13 1750 FAN SCHEDULE AREA EXTERNAL MIN Fla/ VOLT UNIT SERVED S.P./IN. CFM RPM BHP H.P. MAX. BKR. /PHASE MFG'R MODEL REMARKS PROVIDE DISCONNECT SWITCH GRAVITY EF-1 JANITOR 0.5 75 1779 0.23 1/4 5,8/15 120/1 GREENHECK DSO-70 DAMPER, VIBRATION ISOLATION KIT AND SPUN ALUMINUM GRAVITY VENTILATOR EF-2 BATH 0.5 75 1779 0.23 1/4 5.8/15 120/1 GREENHECK BSQ-70 ON ROOF. DIFFUSER/GRILLE SCHEDULE ROUND NECK TAG MANUFACTURER MODEL SIZE DESCRIPTION SIZE MAX. CFM CEILING DIFFUSER, ROUND NECK, LOUVERED FACE FRAME TYPE 6' 150 CD-A TITUS TDCA 24x24 1 FOR SURFACE MOUNTING. 8' 300 CEILING DIFFUSER, ROUND NECK, LOUVERED FACE FRAME TYPE I0" 490 CD-B TITUS TDCA 12x12 1 FOR SURFACE MOUNTING. 12' 700 CElUNG RETURN, BORDER TYPE 1 FOR SURFACE MOUNTING. CR-A TITUS 350R. 24x24 3/4" BLADE SPACING. WHITE FINISH, OR APPROVED EQUAL CEIUNG RETURN, BORDER TYPE I FOR SURFACE MOUNTING, CR-B TITUS 350FL 12x12 5/4' BLADE SPACING. WHITE FINISH, OR APPROVED EQUAL SUPPLY REGISTER, BORDER TYPE ! FOR SURFACE MOUNTING. SR-A TITUS 3BOFL 12x10 3/4" BLADE SPACING. WHITE FINISH, OR APPROVEO EQUAL NEW DUCTWORK: CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS IN FIELD. DUCTWORK SHOWN WITH DASHED INNER LINE IS TO BE INTERNALLY LINED. SIZES SHOWN ARE CLEAR INTERNAL DIMENSIONS. CURVED SINGLE LINE IS FLEXIBLE CONNECTION. NEW SUPPLY REGISTERS AS SHOWN ON SCHEDULE. NEW RETURN REGISTER AS SHOWN ON SCHEDULE. NEW VOLUME DAMPER NEW FIRE DAMPER & ACCESS DOOR CEILING DIFFUSER-SEE SUPPLY REGISTER CEILING RETURN-SEE RETURN REGISTER CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE WIRE MESH SCREEN THERMOSTAT REMOTE THERMOSTAT SENSOR MOTORIZED DAMPER LIGHT FIXTURE, SHOWN FOR INFORMATION ONLY. ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y, 11971 HVAC LEGEND & NOTES PLAN b K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD,, BROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 Des;gned By: MPS Soo~: AS NOTED t DRAWING Da[e:APRIL 2009 IH-°1 File No: 09011 Drawn By: MPS Approved By: CFD ALTERNATE ~11 CONNECT NEW 2# GAS UNE TO METER INSTALLED BY NATIONAL ,,; .w /R TO UV-2 ]1 1 "HWS/R/ 1-1/4'HWS/R~ 7" FLUE VENT (OIL) ALTERNATE 10" FLUE VENT (OIL) ALTERNATE AIR 2"HW$ GAS LINE ALTERNATE ~1 1-1/2#HWS/j ] r AIR LOUVER (OIL) ALTERNATE ~1 ,t. 2 2"HWS/Ry B-1 B-2 TANK 6" AIR FLUE VENT ALTERNATE ~1 BOILER RM. ~ 1 CONNECT EXISTING OIL UNE TO NEW OIL BOILE £XTE ID AS REOUIR[g ~ [~~j L1-1/2'HWS/R 1-1/4"HWS/R ; IT/O4;HH_W1S/R 1" HWS/R~ UP TO UV-3~ I r I1 L1 "HWS/R ~I-1/4'HWS/R 1-1/4'HWS/R~ 1 'HWS/R~t h up, ~_1 · HWS/R UP TO UV-6 ~I-1/4"HWS/R 1" HWS/R/ UP TO UV-7-' 1 'HWS/R ~_1' HWS/R UP TO UV-8 BASEMENT FLOOR HVAC PLAN (ALTERNATE #1 &: #2) 1/8"=1 '-0" DEMOLITION NOTES: REMOVE EXISTING STEAM BOILER AND ALL ASSOCIATED STEAM PIPING IN THE BUILDING. DEMOLITION NOTES: ALL ASSOCIATED STEAM PIPING IN FROM WELL THE BUILDING. r ...... '1 BOILER RM, 0,3.09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS ~ PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - g PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE ~ SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 =?o, MEP ENGINEERS ~ .~ I HVAC o o JAMES, , g l [ I ~'--,~,~r , ,, 11 OVAL DRIVE BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN ,~ ~ L~L~ SUITE 129 ~ -- <go°, ~ , ~ ASSOCIATES ISLANDIA, NY 11749 , , L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. o-~ BASEMENT FLOOR HVAC PLAN (ALTERNATE #,.3 GEO-THERMAL LLP LEPHONE. 651.592.2660 ~ :~[ (1)1/8": 1'-0" ) I rAOS,M,,E: 6,1.=~=.1~,6 I ~_l JLA JOBl~ 09AE 0003,5 ° '-' I - I :::o.?:0:,°°' INSULATED REFRIGERANT 7/8' SUCTION 1/2' UQUID TYP. CU-1 AND CU-2 CU-1 CU-2 CU-E CU-5 CU-9 INSULATED REFRIGERANT 1-1/8' 1/2' TYP. CU-6 AND UP 2R UV-1 UV-2 ~1 REFRIGE PIPING 'I-'1/8" SUCTION 1/2' UOUID CO-A CD-A 200 UP 200 4R CFM-- 10x6 > NEW 12"~ FRESH AIR DUCT TO INTAKE LOUVER LOCATED IN COPULA (500 CD-A CD~ILD $00 1 IVD EXISTING EXHAUST FANS REPLACE ANY WORN, NON-WORKING PARTS AND ADJUST FAN TO NEW CFM INDICATED. OUTSIDE AIR GRILL TYP. 8 UV-5 UV-4 ~1 CLASSROOM CD-A 200 200 UP -- CFM -- ¢ R CFM 1 Ox6 REFRIGERANT PIPING 7/8' SUCTION 1/2' UOUID TYP. CU-4 AND CU-S --I CU-4 CU-3 CU-7 CU-S INSULATED REFRIGERANT PIPING SUCTION '1/2' MOULD CU-7 AND CU-8 CLAS UV-5 UV-6 CD-A 20O UP SR-A 300 Ii I ROOM UV-7 UV-S T UP 2R DEMOLITION NOTES: ~'1. REMOVE EXISTING UNIT VENTILATORS, RADIATORS AND ALL ASSOCIATED PIPING. 2. REMOVE ALL DUClWORK FROM COPULA IN ATTIC DOWN TO ALL ROOMS IN BUILDING. CONNECT NEW 12"# FRESH NEW 12"~ FRESH AIR EXISTING EXHAUST FANS NEW 12'# FRESH AIR IHTAKE DUCT TO INTAKE LOUVER DUCT TO INTAKE LOUVER REPLACE ANY WORN, NON-WORKING INTAKE DUCT TO INTAKE LOUVER LOCATED IN COPULA (450 CFM LOCATED IN COPULA (500 PARTS AND ADJUST FAN TO NEW CFM LOCATED IN COPULA (450 CFM) INDICATED. 400 , ,, CD~A 40O CFM -- AH-2 CD-A 300 CFM 400 400 C D.-~6_ILET CFM -- 1 400 -- 400 400 400 WS/R WS/R TO BASEMENT AH-3 WS/R UP 2R 10x6 CD-A 200 CFM -- IVD eR 10x6 200 CFM ~_UP 2R __CD-A' CD-Al CD-A -- I ' 'ICD=~__ 200 400 400 400 400 SR~A CFM SRTA -- CFM -- CFM _~0_.~ CFM CFM VD VD ", ~0~A C4Do~A LIB RY OFFICE 4o0 ' 400 CFM,, CFM,I UP =ONNECT NEW 12"# FRESH AIR INTAKE DUCT TO INTAKE LOUVER m COPULA (450 CFM) AH-4 WS/R CONNECT NEW 12"~ FRESH AIR INTAKE DUCT TO INTAKE LOUVER IN COPULA (450 CFM) uP 2R DEMOLITION NOTES: '"~1. REMOVE EXISTING UNIT VENTILATORS, RADIATORS AND ALL ASSOCIATED PIPING. 2. REMOVE ALL DUCTWORK FROM COPULA IN ATTIC DOWN TO ALL ROOMS IN BUllnlNG. O FIRST FLOOR HVAC PLAN (ALTERNATE #.3 GEO-THERMAL) I/8"=1 '-0" JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 651.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 651.252.1556 JLA JOB# 09AE-00053 03.09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV, BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 HVAC FIRST FLOOR PLAN b K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD., RROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 DesTgned By. MPS Scole: AS NOTED DRAWING Drown By: MPS Approved 8¥: CFD Dete: APRIL 2009 FTle No.: 09011 H-03 CONDENSING UNIT LIQUID LINE SOLENOID VALVE O.A. DUCT--. FILTER LIQUID REFRIGERANT LINE FROM CONDENSING UNIT, SEE HVAC PLAN FOR PIPE SIZE. RETURN AIR PLENUM WITH 1" ACOUSTIC LINING FLEXIBLE PIPE (TYPICAL) SHUT OFF (TYPICAL) SERVICE VALVE~ REFRIGERANT SUCTION LINE CONDENSING UNIT. SEE HVAC PLAN FOR PIPE SIZE. .~3/4" CONDENSATE PUMP DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE O.A. DUCT~ FILTER WELL WATER SUPPLY LINE RETURN AIR PLENUM WITH ACOUSTIC LINING FLEXIBLE PIPE (TYPICAL) WATER RETURN LINE OFF VALVE (TYPICAL) .~ BALANCING VALVE GAUGE -THERMOMETER ~3/4" CONDENSATE PUMP DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE (TYPICAL) AIR 1/2" THREADED ROD W/ SPRING ISOLATOR CONNECTED TO STRUCTURE. (TYPICAL FOR 4) WATER SENSING CABLE MOUNTED IN BOTTOM OF PAN WITH HOLD DOWN CLIPS, PROVIDE 18 GA. AUXILLARY DRAIN PAN TO EXTEND 6" FROM UNIT ON ALL SIDES WITH 2" HIGH HEMMED LIP, AND SOLDERED WATERPROOF JOINTS. STRAP HANGERS SUPLY AIR DUCT WITH 1" ACOUSTIC LINING 1 1/2" 16 GA (4 TYP) 15 FT. FROM UNIT DOUBLE LOCK NUT & WASHER (4 TYP) SPLIT SYSTEM INSTALLATION DETAIL (HORIZONTAL REFRIGERANT) NOT TO SCALE AIR 1/2" THREADED ROD W/ SPRING ISOLATOR CONNECTED TO STRUCTURE. (TYPICAL FOR 4) WATER SENSING CABLE MOUNTED IN BOTTOM OF PAN With HOLD DOWN CLIPS. PROVIDE lB GA, AUXILLARY DRAIN PAN TO EXTEND 6" FROM UNIT ON ALL SIDES WITH 2" HIGH HEMMED LiP, AND SOLDERED WATERPROOF JOINTS. STRAP HANGERS 1/2" 16 GA (4 TYP)-- SUPLY AIR DUCT WITH 1" ACOUSTIC LINING 15 FT. FROM UNIT DOUBLE LOCK NUT & WASHER (4 TYP) SPLIT SYSTEM INSTALLATION DETAIL (HORIZONTAL WATER SOURCE) NOT TO SCALE VOLUME DAMPER RECTANGULAR TO ~ \ ROUND DUCT TRANSITION METAL TIGHTENING CLAMPS SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER TOP VIEW SUPPORTS TO UNDER SIDE OF STRUCTURE 6'-O" MAX. LENGTH FLEX DUCT METAL CLAMPS SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER RECTANGULAR TO ROUND DUCT TRANSITION VOLUME DAMPER~ ROUNDED SHEET METAL SUPPORT SADDLES ELEVATION ROUND NECK DIFFUSERS NOT TO SCALE 1" THICK-$ PCF COATED SURFACE OF INSULATION TO AIR STREAM SEPARATE SPEED CLIP TYPICAl STUD-WELDING PINS AND SPEED CLIP WASHER DOWN OVER PiN TO LINING ALL ENDS OF LINER COATED WITH ADHESIVE ADHESIVE OVER COMPLETE SURFACE OF DUCT NOTES: 1. OMIT PINS AND WASHERS FOR DUCTS LESS THAN 8" WIDTH OR DEPTH, 2, ADHERE LINING TO SHEET METAL SURFACE WITH FIREPROOF ADHESIVE. 5. DIMENSIONS OF LINED DUCTWORK ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS AFTER LINING HAS BEEN INSTALLED. EXIST. STRUCTURE~ SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATOR OR SPRING HANGER BUILDING STRUCTURE- SHEET METAL_ SCREWS 1 1/2" FLAT STEEL STRAP HANGER FOR DUCTS OVER 49" WIDE TURN UNDER BOTTOM OF DUCT AND FASTEN &~_ LIGHT FIXTURE 1/2" ROD r/ ~%~ I~1 (TYP. FOR 4) ~ LINE OF FINISHED CEILING FAN UNISTRUT P-lO00 HANGER STRAP SCHEDULE DUCT SIZE HANGER SIZE SPACING UP TO 2 sq. ff 1" x 1/16" 8'- 0" 2 TO 4 sq. ff 1" x 1/8" 8'- 0" 4 TO 10 sq. ff 1" x 1/8" 6'- O" OVER 10 sq. ff 1" x 1/8" 4'- O" SOUND LINING INSTALLATION DETAIL ~ FAN MOUNTING DETAIL ~ STRAP HANGER DETAIL 03.09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JL/k DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 651.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631.252.1556 JLA JOB# 09AE-00055 REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 HVAC DETAILS PLAN 1 OF 5 L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD,, BROOKHAVE~, NE~V YORK 11719 Designed By: MPS Scale. AS NOTED DRAWING Dote: APRIL 2009 H-04 File Nax 09011 JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP Drawn By: MPS Approved By: CFD PRO'DE CONTINUOUS SEAL ALONG BACK FLANGES __ W1NDOWS ABOVE SHELVING UNIT / GRILLES NEW GALVANIZED DUCT SLEEVE BY M,C. - -- SIZE TO O.A. OPENING FILTER NEW OUTDOOR AIR GRILLE OVER WALL FIN. FLOOR -- 21-1/4" SUBBASE W/SRLITTER AND DAMPERS CONCRETE "CANT" BY M.C. -- BRICK WALL FACE (BY WALL CAVITY CONCRETE BLOCK (BY G.C,) SHUTTER INSTALLATION THREADED SUPPORT ROD TIED INTO BOILER / MACHINE RM. STRUCTURE / RM. TYP. FOR FIBERGLASS PIPING INSULATION NEW CLEVIS HANGER (SIZE AS REQ'D. FOR 1/2"~ THROUGH ¢-"~ PIPING) TYP. FOR FIBERGLASS PIPING IN HEAVY GAUGE STEEL INSULATION SHIELD HEAVY GAUGE STELL INSULATION SHIELD PROVIDE CALCIUM SILICATE RIGID PIPING INSULATION UNDER HEAVY GA. STEEL SHIELB NOT TO SCALE LEGEND HOT WA~R COIL DIRECTION OF AIR FLOW 3-WAY CONTROL VALVE TO BE MOUNTED ABOVE CEILING HOT WATER REFURN PIPING HOT WATER SUPPLY PIPING BALANCING VALVE/SHUTOFF TO BE MOUNTED ABOVE CEILING THERMOMETER WELL TO BE MOUNTEO ABOVE CEILING PRESSURE GAUGE W/COCK TO BE MOUNTED ABOVE CEILING GATE VALVE TO 8E MOUNTED ABOVE CEILING PIPING UNION DRAIN VALVE TO BE MOUNTED ABOVE CEILIRO AUTOMATIC AIR VENT 2 TER COIL PIPING DETAIL PRESSURE GAUGE HAMMOND IB423 VALVE __/4" BACKFLOW PREVENTER /~W/ FUNNEL DRAIN / BY PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TACO 409 AIR VENT~ TO PUMP ) SUCTION HEADER, ,.2" ! .:" 6" HIGH HOUSEKEEPING PAD~ 8511 BALL VALVE (TYP) PRV: TACO 555 TO 4 PSI GREATER THAN SYSTEM STATIC PRESSURE g" MULTI-ANGLE THERMOMETER (TYP) ~x~TACO ACF AIR SEPARATOR ~Xx~HAMMOND 710 DRAIN VALVE 2" VALVE & CAP FOR INITIAL SYSTEM FILL t ~ ~ FROM BOILER · SUPPLY HEADER NOT TO SCALE JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 651,592,2660 FACSIMILE: 631,252,1536 JLA JOB.~ 09AE-00035 03.09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 HVAC DETAILS PLAN 2 OF 3 b K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD,, BROOKHAVER, NEW YORK 11719 Designed By: MPS Scale: AS NOTED DRAWING Date: APRIL 2009 H-05 File No.. 09011 Drawn By: MPS Approved By: CFD NOTE: PROVIDE SOIL BORING TO 100' AND GRAI]q ANALYSIS FOR WELL DEVELOPMENT AND CONSTRUCTION. DIFFUSION Sanitary Seal WE~ / 4-6 ff Trench ¥ ~ Size Pitless Adapter (fyp) Well Da,a ._~J~__ Ft Depth _tbd___ Ff S,afic Note: 6 Jrt. Pipe__5_!n_:__ Type Pipe__H_D._P_E ..... P1 Screen Specification - TBD DIFFUSION SUPPLY Material___~S__ Maferia SS Size__6 ..... in. Size 6 [~Lengfh_fb_d___ff Length f_b_d___ft Slot Size__TBD_ Slot Size_2JlD__ fyp. 0.010 SUPPLY WELL '6fl+ Trench Size Pipe_5_ ..... Type Pipe. HDPE Well Data _~5.__rf Depth fbd Ff Static 85 gpm _fbd____Well Draw Dwn Return Pipes are in the Same Trench WX250 Pressure Tank set 85 pslg , 208V Separation_ >200 .ff. Ph SUBMERSIBLE Dlz¢oonect by Electrician Screen design for 0.1 fps supply and 0.025 fps PUMP Well performance data to be recorded here offer testing GRUNDFOS 75s75-12 (7,5 HR) WELL SCHEMATIC DETAIL (ALTERNATE #5 GLO-THERMAL) NOT TO SCALE PVC 8O 3" PVC 8O > lB" BELOW GRADE ~1/2" STEELBOLT WELDED TO STEEL WELL CASING FOR ELECTRICAL GROUNDING OF BUILDING S TBB, WAS.ER LOCK WASHER NUT DETAIL A ~ ELECTRICAL EARTH BOND BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 1. ELECTRIC EARTH BOND WIRE SIZE BY ELECTRICAL WIRE PER NEC SECTION 250 2. EXOTHERMIC WELD (OPTIONAL) 3. DAISY CHAIN; DO NOT LOOP 4. COMPLETELY ENCASE WITH WATER PROOF MASTIC OR AUTOMOTIVE SPRAY UNDERCOATING RETURN FROM HEAT PUMPS 3" PVC 80J Test Bypass See DeNol 2 AIR & DIRT SEPARATOR TACO 4960 SERIES OR EQUIV PRESSURIZED SUPPLY TO HEAT PUMPS I~-I SPIN DOWN FILTER SEE NAS-3 FOR CONFIG ISOLATION/ BALANCING VALVE THERMOMETER PRESSURE GAGE CHECK VALVE COMPOUND PRESSURE GAUGE -34" fo 1SO psi PRESSURE GUAGE 0-100 psi THERMOMETER +25"f TO lO0"f PRESSURE SUSTAINING VALVE DANFO$S FLOMATIC MODEL C 6" ~ALVCON B64WOIo-sS/LCR SO0 CHECK VALVE, SEE PIPE SIZES ]DF-1EUSCO SPINDOWN FILTER, 2" PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE ~ PR 3" PVC80 \ Test //~Flowmefer Blue While 25-175 GPM F452-17SL MANIFOLD DETAIL (ALTERNATE #3 GLO-THERMAL) NOT TO SCALE 1/2" PRESSURE TANK WX 250 SUPPLY MANIFOLD CPVC-80 3 Inch INSIDE FOUNDATION LINE RETURN MANIFOLD PORTANT AIl are Equal Height FOUNDATION LINE WELL RETURN LINE GEOTHERHAL DRILLING SERVICES MILLER ENVIRONMENTAL GROUP,/nc DAVID REARDON 538 EDWARDS AVENUE CALVERTON, NY 11933 (631)369-4900 X-208 JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 631.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631.25,2.1556 JLA JOB~ 09AE-00055 03.09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 HVAC DETAILS PLAN 5 OF :5 L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD,, BROOKHAVEN~ NEW YORK 11719 Designed By: MPS Scale: AS NOTED Drawn By: MPS Approved By: CFD Dote: APRIL 2009 File Ne.: 09011 WELL NTS Screen Yield Supply Casing/ Casing/ Openings offer Pump HDPE Pump Return And Well # Depth Depth Static Screen Screen Supply surge How Pump Srze Set Drop Return Level Rate- Off Set E=Esf Now- Planned- Feet Feet Slze-ln =0.10 fps GPM Used E=Esf Depth Length Riser A=Acfual Peet Feet <Refurn0.05 fp~Depfhand gpm Pipe slze: A:Acfual (ft.) (f1.) I[n,)D[am' S E "-85 20'E fbd 6 SUPPL' 68 5" 7,5E R E ~-,85 20'E tbd 6 DIFF 68 3" 3" SCHEDULE lATE #5 GEO-THERMAL) I I N 50° 17' W 150.00' 6" SUPPLY WELL~ FINAL LOCATION TBD '"~F~ W&F 6" DIFFUSION WELL~ FINAL LOCATION TRD CD CD ~N 30° 29' 00" W 311.00' P CONIC SITE PLAN (ALTERNATE #5 GEO-THERMAL) GEOTHERHAL DRILLING SERVICES MILLER ENVIRONMENTAL GROUP, Inc DAVID REARDON 538 EDWARDS AVENUE CALVERTON, NY 11933 (631)369-4900 X-208 LANE JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 651.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 6;~1.252.1556 05.09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLB, N.Y. 11971 HVAC SITE PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RO., RROOKHAV£N, NEW YORK 11719 Designed By' MPS Scale: AS NOTED DRAWING Drawn By: MPS Date: APRIL 2009 H-07 JLA JOBtt/ 09AE-00055 Approved ay: CFD FTle NO: 09011 MINIMUM CEILING HOLE SIZE: 2-1/8" DIA, MAXIMUM CEILING HOLE 3~_1/4,. SIZE: 2-1/2" DIA. MIN. 1" MAX. MINIMUM SIZE; MAXIMUM SIZE: ro 4B" FINISHED CEILING CEILING HOLE 2-1/8" DIA. CEILING 2-1/2" DIA. MIN. 1" ~. FINISHED CEILING MAX. 1-5/8" SPRINKLER MAIN DRY PENDENT RECESSED SPRINKLER HEAD NOT TO SCALE EXISTING STEEL MEMBER STEEL RESTRAINING STRAP 'C' CLAMP ROD (SIZE AS REQUIRED) Pipe *CLEVIS HANGER CLEVIS HANGERS REQUIRED ON PIPING LARGER THAN 1% GENERAL PURPOSE HANGERS MAY BE USED ON PIPING 1" OR SMALLER TYPICALPIPE HANGER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE -- BUILDING STRUCTURE NEW OR EXISTING FIRE RATED PARTITION, CONSTRUCTION VARIES, VERIFY IN FIELD , ESCUTCHEON PLATE PIPE SLEEVE SHALL BE TWO SIZES LARGER THAN PIPE PIPE U.L. LISTED FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL WITH EQUIVALENT RATING TO PARTITION PENETRATED PER SPECIFICATION NEW OR EXISTING FIRE RATED PARTITION, CONSTRUCTION VARIES -- BUILDING STRUCTURE FIRE STOPPING 1. ALL CONTRACTORS SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING THAT EXISTING AND NEW PENETRATING ARE PROPERLY FIRE STOPPED WITH THE FOLLOWING: A. THE FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY 3M NO SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE PERMITTED. B. METAL PIPES OR CONDUIT THROUGH BLOCK WALL USE UL SYSTEM NO. CAJ1044 AND 3M PRODUCT CP25 WB & CAULK. C. METAL PIPES OR CONDUIT THROUGH GYPSUM WALLS USE UL SYSTEM NO. WL 1001 AND SM PRODUCT CP 25 WB & CAULK PIPE PENETRATION AT RATED PARTITION NOT TO SCALE LEGEND: NEW SPRINKLER SUPPLY BRANCH OR MAIN PIPING SIZE PER DRAWING NOTES DENOTES CHANGE IN PIPING HEIGHT. FPC PC Op FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR PLUMBING CONTRACTOR FLOW SWITCH AIR PRESSURE SUPERVISORY SWITCH VALVE TAMPER SWITCH CONCEALED PENDANT SPRINKLER HEAD. 165'F. 1/2" ORIFICE. VICTAULIC V 3618, MEA# 275-99E PENDANT SPRINKLER HEAD. 165'F, 1/2" ORIFICE. VICTAULIC V 3606, MEA# 275-99E UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD. 165°F, 1/2" ORIFICE. VICTAULIC V 3602, MEA # 275-ggE FIRE LOCK VICTAULIC FIRE LOCK MEA# 248-gB-E NXT, SERIES 768 GENERAL NOTES: THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM AND ALL DEVICES RELATED TO THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM HAVE BEEN SHOWN IN THESE DRAWINGS FOR DESCRIPTIVE PURPOSES, SO THAT THE CLIENT MAY OBTAIN ACCURATE BIDS. THESE ARE SPRINKLER DESIGN DRAWINGS TO BE USED FOR COST. ADDITIONAL DESIGN DRAWINGS WITH HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT BY A LICENSED SPRINKLER DESIGNER AND CONTRACTOR. THE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL BE LICENSED iN THE STATE OF NEW YORK, THE TOWN OF SOUTHHOLD AND THE LOCAL MUNICIPALITY. FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR (FPC) TO SUBMIT HYDRAULIC DESIGNED PLANS TO LOCAL TIRE MARSHAL FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. FPC TO COORDINATE ALL PIPE ROUTING WITH OTHER TRADES. ALL PIPING TO BE PROTECTED FROM FREEZING. ALL FITTINGS TO BE VICTAULIC FIRELOCK EZ RIGID COUPLINGS OR EQUAL. JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 631.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631.252.1536 JLA JOBt 09AE-O0033 1. THE INSTALLATION COMPONENTS, SIZING, SPACING, MATERIALS LOCATION CLEARANCES, POSITION AND TYPe OF SYSTEM SHALL CONFORM TO NFPA 1S AND/OR NFPA 1SR AND NYS UNIFORM FIRE PREVENTION BUILDING CODE LATEST EDITION. 2. SPRINKLERS SHALL BE PROTECTED AGAINST FREEZING AND INJURY AS PeR NFPA CODE. 5. INSPECTION AND TESTS OF SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BE CONDUCTED AS SPECIFIED IN NFPA CODE. 4. WATER SUPPLY TEST PIPES AND GAUGES SHALL BE PROVIDED AS SPECIFIED IN PLANS AND CALCULATIONS CHAPTER, WATER SUPPLY INFORMATION OF NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 1SR. 5. PIPING SPECIFICATIONS, PIPE SCHEDULES, SYSTEM TEST PIPES, PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION, DAMAGE FITTINGS, VALVES, HANGERS, SPRINKLERS, GUARDS AND SHIELDS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 3 OF NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 13R, LATEST EDITION. 6. STOCK OF EXTRA SPRINKLERS WILL BE FURNISHED AS PER SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND HARDWARE CHAPTER Of NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 13R (REQUIRED FOR EACH TEMPERATURE RATING). 7. SPRINKLER ALARMS WILL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 1.3 AND/OR NFPA 13R. 8. SPACING, LOCATION AND POSITION OF SPRINKLERS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER OF NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 13R. 9. ALL BLIND SPACES EXCEEDING 6 INCHES IN WIDTH OR DEPTH WHICH CONTAIN COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL SHALL BE SPRINKLERED. 10. ALL PIPING PASSING THROUGH WALLS SHALL COMPLY WITH NFPA FOR FIRE PROOFING. 11. DISTANCE OF SPRINKLERS FROM HEAT SOURCES SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE TEMPERATURE RATINGS OF SPRINKLERS BASED ON DISTANCE FROM HEAT SOURCE OF NFPA 15 AND/OR NFPA 13R. 12. PROVIDE LOCAL WATER UTILITY A WATER SUPPLY LETTER WITH FLOW TEST DATA. 15. ALL PIPES PASSING THROUGH FOUNDATION WALLS TO BE PROTECTED. 14. ALL VALVES SHALL BE IDENTIFIED AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 15 AND/OR NFPA 1SR. 15. DRAINAGE TO CONFORM TO THE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER, DRAINAGE SECTION OF NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 1SR. 16. A ONE PIECE REDUCING FITTING OF GOOD DESIGN SHOULD BE USED WHEREVER A CHANGE IS MADE IN THE SIZE OF PIPE AS PER FITTINGS CHAPTER OF NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 13R. 17. ALL VALVES ON CONNECTIONS TO WATER SUPPLIES AND IN SUPPLY TO SPRINKLERS SHALL BE APPROVED O.S.&Y. OR APPROVED INDICATOR TYPE WITH TAMPER SWITCHES. 18, DRAIN VALVES AND TEST VALVES SHALL BE APPROVED TYPE AS PER SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND HARDWARE CHAPTER, VALVES SECTION OF NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 13R. 19. HANGERS SHALL BE OF A TYPE APPROVED FOR USE WITH THE PIPE OR TUBE INVOLVED, SPRINKLER PIPING SHOULD BE BE SUPPORTED BY ADJUSTABLE HANGERS PER NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 13R, HANGER, BRACING, AND RESTRAINT OF SYSTEM PIPING CHAPTER, HANGERS SECTION. 20. PROVISIONS SHOULD BE MADE TO FACILITATE FLUSHING SYSTEM PIPING BY PROVIDING FLUSHING CONNECTIONS CONSISTING OF A CAPPED NIPPLE 4" LONG ON THE END OF THE CROSS MAIN, AS PER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER, PROVISION FOR FLUSHING SYSTEMS SECTION OF NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 1SR. 21. SPRINKLER SHALL BE AN APPROVED TYPE AS PER SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND HARDWARE CHAPTER, SPRINKLERS SECTION OF NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 13R, 22. TEMPERATURE RATING SHALL COMPLY WITH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER, TEMPERATURE RATINGS SECTION OF NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 1SR. 23. CLEARANCES BETWEEN SPRINKLERS AND STORAGE OR PARTITIONS AS PER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER, CLEARANCE TO STORAGE SECTION NFPA 15 AND/OR NFPA 1SR. 24. SPACING AND LOCATION OF SPRINKLER SHALL COMPLY WIth INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER OF NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 1SR. 25. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH OTHER TRADES. 26. HEAT IS TO BE PROVIDED THROUGHOUT THE ENTIRE AREA THAT PIPING, EQUIPMENT AND HEADS ARE INSTALLED, 27. ONLY EXPERIENCED SPRINKLER MECHANICS TO WORK ON THE SYSTEM. 28. ALL PIPING TO BE A MINIMUM OF 1" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 29. PROVIDE WATER SHIELDS OVER ALL / SURFACE MOUNTED ELECTRIC PANELS AND EQUIPMENT IN ELECTRICAL ROOMS PER NFPA & LOCAL FIRE MARSHALL REQUIREMENTS. SO. PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW TO LOCAL FIRE MARSHALL, WITH HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS TO INSURANCE UNDERWRITER AND ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 31. ALL EQUIPMENT APPROVED/LISTED FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE. 32. ALL REQUIRED SIGNS MUST BE PROVIDED. 33. THE CONTRACTOR'S MATERIAL AND TEST CERTIFICATES FOR ABOVE GROUND AND UNDERGROUND PIPE SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE FIRE MARSHALL PRIOR TO APPROVAL OF THE INSTALLATION. 34. UNDERGROUND PIPING INCLUDING WHERE IT ENTERS THE BUILDING WILL BE SUPPORTED AS SPECIFIED NY NFPA-24 PERTAINING TO RODDINO, CLAMPING AND THRUST BLOCKING OF THE PIPE. 03.09.09 JLA DATE BY ISSUED FOR REVIEW DESCRIPTION JLA APPROV, BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 FIRE PROTECTION LEGENDS, NOTES AND DETAILS L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD,, BROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 DesT§ned By: MPS scole= AS NOTED DRAWING Dot.: APRIL 2009 Fp-~',v File No.: 09011 Drawn By: MPS Approved By' CFD BRANCH LINE FINISH FLOOR " 45' ELBOW ~BUSHING W/ 1/2" SMOOTH BORE COEROSION RESISTANT OUTLET 1" GLOBE VALVE PLUG - FOR TESTING REMOVE AND INSTALL TEMPORARY CONNECTION 1 TEST CONNECTION DETAIL PRODUCT LEGEND Series 768 Firelock NXT Dry Valve (see Bulletin SO.BO) Vic Quick Riser FireLock Rigid CouplinBs 005, 009 Series 705W Bufledlv Valve Drain Swing Check Valve Drip Cup System Sensor EPSIO-2 Alarm Pressure Switch 7 Series 729 Drip Check Valve 8 Diaphragm-Charge-Line Ball Valve (normally open) 9 Sfrainer/Check/Restrictor Assembly 10 Series 760 Water Motor Alarm Or Electric Bell 11 12 Diaphragm-Charge-Line Pressure Gouge 13 Series 749 Auto Drain 14 Series 746 Dry Accelerator Assembly 15 Series 776 Low Pressure Actuator 16 Air Manifold 17 19 20 21 EPS-40-2 Supervisory Switch System Pressure Gauge (0-80 psi/O-552kPa with retard) Water Supply Main Drain Valve - Flow Test Water Supply Pressure OauBe Drain Connection Kit 22 Gouge Valve 2S System Main Drain Valve 24 Defies 745 Ball Check Valve 25 28 Air reed Valve Assembly (not shown) 27 System Air Line Strainer (not shown) 28 29 50 Auto Vent for 776 Low Pressure Actuator 51 Series 720 Testmaster 52 Upright Sprinkler - Victaulic Model V2705/V2704 SS Fire ProtecUon Control Panel (specifed by ADT) 34 35 Fire Protection Control Panel 36 8" Supervisory Bell: System Sensor SSM24-8, 24VDC, Polarized 57 6" Trouble Bell: System Sensor SS24-6, 2AVDC, Polarized 38 Horn/Strobe: (Weferflow) System Sensor P1224MC (RED), 24VDC, Polarized 39 40 Air Maintenance Device Victeulic 757/757P with pressure switch 41 (Optional Series 75D Water Column Drain Kit) not shown 42 Firelock Tee 002 SEE VICTAULIC PUBLICATION I0.01 FOR DETAILS OF APPROVALS UL/FM APPROVED NYC MEA-248-gB-E Volume 3 F- _J DRY VALVE NOT TO SCALE C To Sprinkler System 120 VAC LEFT SIDE C E1 FRONT VIEW A~ IlD From Source D1 A1 Nominal Size WITHOUT WITH Inches A A1 B 51 C D D1 E E1 F F1 D H J K TRIM TRIM J 2-1/2" 12.61 16.51 LO.SC 40.50 12.50 15.50 19.50 5.00 9.00 9.00 11.00 17.50 E.gO 1S.50 6.95 41,0 Lbs 65.0 Lbs. I ~ 5" 12,61 16.51 30.5C 40.50 12.50 13.50 19.50 5.00 9.00 9.00 I1.00 17.50 3.90 10,50 6.95 41.0 Lbs 65.0 Lbs, 4" 15.05 19.79 E3.2~ 46.25 15.25 15.50 16.00 5.50 8,75 10.50 10.75 21,50 6.24 9.63 5.47 59.0 Lbs 95.0 Lbs. VIEW 6" 16.00 22.01 33.7~ 45,50 15.75 16.75 22.00 6.25 8.75 11.25 11.25 20.75 6.20 9.63 B.S5 80.0 Lbs 116.0 Lbs. 8" 17.50 23.10 ES.5C 45.50 7.00 19.75 26.50 8.75 9.00 12.75 13.90 16.50 6,25 9.41 10.22 122.0 Lbs 158.0 Lbs. ASSEMBLY DETAIL FIRE PROTECTION PANEL TROUBLE & ALARM ANNUNCIATORS NOTES: FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH FIRE ALARM VENDOR FOE ALL SERVICES. REFER TO RISER DIAGRAM FOR AIR COMPRESSOR MAKE & MODEL. SERIES 765 DRY VALVE WITH SERIES 776 LOW PRESSURE ACTUATOR. JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP RISER MOUNT OIL-LESS COMPRESSORS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ALL PIPING AND WIRING TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE STATE, LOCAL AND NATIONAL CODES & SHOULD BE APPROVED SY AHJ CONNECT TO REQUIRED MULTiPLECHECK SYSTEM TRIM V^LVES IN FEED UNES CAN RESULT 112" MINIMUM, LARGER IF REQUIRED- BY CODE. *** GENERAL AIR PRODUCTS, INC RECOMMENDED AG~ MINIMUM, - ..... p~N p12D2Mp ^uTo~T,C D,*,..,. ~.-~ RECOMMENDED ON DRIP LEG ACCELERATOR WARNING! DO NOT INSTALL IN AREAS EXPOSED TO TEMPERATURES BELOW 40 DEGREES F OR AREAS EXPOSED TO WEATHER, CONSULT FACTORY FOR WEATHERPROOF OPTIONS. ~IAGN ETIC STARTER REQUIRED FOR ALL 3 PHASE UNr~S AND SINGLE P~E UNITS 1 HP ^ND PART NUMBERS LISTED ARE FOR ACCESSORY ITEMS RECOMMENDED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. CONSULT YOUR LOCAL DISTRIBUTOR FOR AVAILAB~LOY CHECK VALVE SIZE AS SHOWN ON PLANS -- AUTOMATIC BALL DRIP BUILDING WALL LOCAL JURISDICTION APPROVED BRASS WALL PLATE AND SIAMESE NNECTION. PROVIDE IN ACCORDANCE WITH TOWN AND LOCAL FIRE MARSHALL REQUIREMENTS. TO GRADE GRADE FIN, FLOOR 4 DETAIL AT BUILDING WALL MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 651.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 651.252.1556 JLA JOB# OgAE-O0033 03.09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 FIRE PROTECTION DETAILS L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD,, 9ROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 Designed By' MPS Soel.: AS NOTED DRAWING Drawn By: MPS Approved By: CFD Date: APRIL 2009 File No.. 09011 :P-02 1' DOWN TO INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION. TEST SPIGOT TO DRAIN TO THE OUTSIDE UP 2R 1# II 12'-0" · -I/4' AUDI ERIA 2m 12'-0' 3' CHAIRLIFT 1-1/2' 1-1/2" 12'-0" 12'-0" $- -1/4" CLASSI 2" FIRST 12'-0" 12'-0" , t", 12'-0" 12'-0' ;ROOM CLASS 1-1/4" 1" 1" FROM KNOX BOX 52D0 SERIES ON WALL. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH FIRE DEPARTMENT DEPT. CONNECTIO FINAL LOCATION T UP W/ FIRE 2R DEPARTMENT FIRE PROTECTION PLAN FLOOR 4'-0"~ 12'-0" DRAIN UNE TO DRY WELL IN FINAL LOCATION IN FIELD 12'-0" 12'-0" 1" 1" & 1" 1" 1# SERIES 768 S" FIRELOCK NXT DRY VALVE VIC QUICK RISER (TYP) WITH IN-UNE CONPRESSOR 1-1 1" t" I-1/4" B~iLER RM, 12'-0" I-1/2" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0' 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 3" S" 3" S' S" S" 1" 1-1/2" 1" 1-1/2' 2" I 12'-0" ~ 12'-0" 12'-0" 1" 1" 1' 12'-0" 1' 1" 1" ,I, _- 1-1/4" TO SIAMESE UP [# DOWN TO INSPECTOR'S ' 'I" TEST CONNECTION 1" DOWN UP~ 1I* [# 1# 1# 1# pi Fi NOTES: FPC TO INSTALL THE NFPA 13. PIPING AND HEADS IN THE All'lC AS PER JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 6..'31.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 651.252.15.7,6 JLA JOBt¢ 09AE-00055 0,3.09.09 JLA JSSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N,Y. 11971 FIRE PROTECTION BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH ROUNTEY RD., 8ROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 Designed By: MPS sool.: AS NOTED t DRAWING Drawn By: MPS Date: APRIL 2009 ~'p~ r'- Approved By: CFD F,~ No.: 09011 POWER LEGEND: DUPLEX ELECTRIC RECEPTACLE. WALL MOUNTED 18" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR (A.F.F.) UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED (U.O.N,) TO DENTERLINE. SPECIFICATION GRADE. DOUBLE DUPLEX ELECTRIC RECEPTACLE. WALL MOUNTED 18" A.F.F. (U.O.N.) TO CENTERLINE. SPECIFICATION GRADE. (~GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT RECEPTACLE DUPLEX JUNCTION BOX, WALL MOUNTED lB" A.F.F. (U.O.N.) TO CENTERLINE, CABLE FOR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION BY OTHERS. DUPLEX JUNCTION BOX, Wall MOUNTED 18" A.F,F. (U.O.N.) TO CENTERLINE, CABLE FOR DATA INSTALLATION BY OTHERS. DUPLEX JUNCTION BOX, WALL MOUNTED lB" A.F.F. (U.O.N.) TO CENTERLINE, CABLE FOR DATA/TELEPHONE INSTALLATION BY OTHERS. JUNCTION BOX (WALL MOUNTED-RECESSED), AS SPECIFIED. [] JUNCTION BOX (CEILING MOUNTED-SURFACE), AS SPECIFIED. ~,8~/.~PP1-2 WIRING/CIRCUITING DESIGNATIONS: NUMBER OF ARROWS INDICATES NUMBER OF HOME RUNS TO ELECTRIC PANEL AND CIRCUIT AS NOTED. #8 ''~-~. ,NDICATES WIRE SIZE: IF NO ,NDICATION, USE ~'~HASH WITH POINT: iSOLATeD GROUND CIRCUIT IF NO INDICATION, USE ONE HOT AND ONe NEUTRAL MOTOR CIRCUITS - LARGE MOTORS SIZES ~()~v~~' SHOWN iN CENTER OF SYMBOL, FRACTIONAL SIZES NOT SHOWN. COORDINATE WITH HVAC DRAWINGS. COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER, SEE ONE LINE [] DIAGRAM FOR SIZE AND TYPE. DISCONNECT SWITCH, SEE ONE LINE DIAGRAM FOR SIZE, WP eP WT IG FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH, SEE ONE LINE DIAGRAM FOR SWITCH AND FUSE SIZE. INDICATES DEVICE TO BE WEATHER-PROOF (NEMA 3 OR 3R). INDICATES DEVICE TO BE EXPLOSION-PROOF (NEMA 7 OR 9). INDICATEB DEVICE TO BE WATER-TIGHT (NEMA 6Pi. ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES OR CIRCUIT SEPARATE GROUNDINB CONDUCTOR SHALL BE RUN WITH CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS, IN ADDITION TO THE EQUIPMENT GROUND. GENERAL POWER NOTES: 1) ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH THE RULES OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE AND THE ELECTRICAL CODE OF THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 2) THE MINIMUM SIZE WIRE SHALL Be #12 AWG COPPER AND ALL WIRE SHALL BE ENCLOSED IN A MINIMUM 5/4" CONDUIT. :~) THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH THE RESPONSIBLE TRADES TO CUT/PATCH/REPAIR ALL WALL, FLOOR, AND CEILING PENETRATIONS AS NEEDED AND TO MATCH EXISTING FINISH. 4) ALL FIRE RATED WALL PENETRATIONS MUST BE FiRE STOPPED, INCLUDING CONDUIT, CABLE TRAYS, ETD. 5) PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED PULLBOXES AND MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE FOR ALL CONDUIT RUNS. ALL CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE PROPERLY SUPPORTED. 6) ALL EQUIPMENT IS NEW UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7) BALANCE PANELBOARD LOADS EQUALLY OVER (3) PHASES. 8) UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED INDOORS SHALL HAVE A NEMA I RATING AND ALL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED OUTDOORS SHALL HAVE A NEMA 5R RATING. g) PROVIDE LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT CONNECTIONS FOR ALL EQUIPMENT SUBJECT TO VIBRATION. 10) ALL PANELBOARDS AND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH PHENOLIC NAMEPLATES INDICATING THE PANEL NAME. 11) ALL EXISTING LIGHTING/EQUIPMENT/DEVICES AND ASSOCIATED CIRCUITRY NOT SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS SHALL REMAIN UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CONTRACTOR SHALL REWORK EXISTING WIRING TO MAINTAIN SERVICE TO EXISTING DEVICES NOT AFFECTED BY THIS WORK. 12) CIRCUIT NUMBERS SHOWN ON PLANS ARE fOR RefeReNCE PURPOSES ONLY. 1x) REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. 14) PROVIDE ADDITIONAL #12 AWG GREEN COATED EQUIPMENT GROUND FOR ALL New 20A AND 15A SINGLE POLe BRANCH CIRCUITS. 15) THe eleCTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL AT THEIR OWN DISCRETION COMBINE HOME RUNS. 16) THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR (MC) PROVIDES DISCONNECT AND CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLE FOR ALL ROOF TOP EQUIPMENT TO BE WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (ED). 17) THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (ED) IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONTROL WIRE CONDUIT WITH DRAG LINES. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR (MC) IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONTROL WIRING FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. (MC) TO PROVIDE ALL MOTOR STARTERS, RELAY CONTROL WIRING, TIMeCLOCKS, THERMOSTATS, AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE OPERATING SYSTEM. COORDINATE WITH (MC) FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS TO BE POWERED BY (ED). 18) ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED AS SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER. LIGHTING LEGEND: SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING SYSTEM, SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR TYPE AND MOUNTING HEIGHT. A NEW LIGHT FIXTURE, UPPER CASE LETTER REFERS TO TYPE - SEE LIGHTING SCHEDULE. NUMBER DESIGNATES CIRCUIT. LOWER CASE LETTER DESIGNATES SWITCHING GROUP. CEILING OR WALL MOUNTED ILLUMINATED EXIT LIGHT. BHADED SECTION INDICATES LIGHTED FACE WITH LETTERS, ARROW INDICATES DIRECTIONAL EXIT SIGN. ALL EXIT FIXTURES SHALL BE POWERED BY REGULAR POWER WITH BATTERY BACK-UP. ALL EXIT FIXTURES TO BE CENTERED ON EXIT WAY UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL EXIT FIXTURES SHALL BE MOUNTED WITH CENTERLINE AT 7'-6" ABOVE FINISHED flOOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. SEE LIGHTING SCHEDULE FOR MANUFACTURERS INFORMATION. HVAC SUPPLY DIFFUSER: SHOWN roe INFORMATION ONLY, HVAC RETURN REGISTER: SHOWN FOR INFORMATION ONLY. NEW LIGHT SWITCH, CENTERLINE MOUNTED AT 48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, MAXIMUM. "5" DENOTES 3-WAY SWitCH "M" DENOTES MASTER SWITCH "D" DENOTES DIMMER SWITCH LOWER CASE LETTER DENOTES SWITCHING (SEE CORRESPONDING NUMBER IN LIGHT FIXTURE SYMBOL) 'E' DENOTES EXISTING TO REMAIN UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. WALL MOUNTED MOTION SENSOR - LEVITRON MODEL OSSNL-IDW OR APPROVED EQUAL CEILING MOUNTED MOTION SENSOR - LeVITRON MODEL ODCOS-iIW OR APPROVED EQUAL GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES: I) NO DEVIATION IN THe LIGHTING PLACEMENT WILL BE PERMITTED WITHOUT THE APPROVAL OF JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP. 2) GENERAL LIGHTING: THE ITEMS SPECIFIED ESTABLISH THE STANDARD FOR THE SCOPE OF WORK TO EXPEDITE THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL MAY BE SUBMITTED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO ARCHITECT FOR DISTRIBUTION TO JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP FOR REVIEW AND CONSIDERATION. NO SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN APPROVAL OF JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES. 3) THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL AT THEIR OWN DISCRETION COMBINE HOME RUNS, HOWEVER ALL CIRCUITS SERVING FLUORESCENT LIGHTING SHALL HAVE INDEPENDENT NEUTRALS. LIGHTING SCHEDULE FIXTURE TYPE SYMBOL DESCRIPTION WATTAGE VOLTS MANUFACTUREI MODEL NO. NOTES A L~ PENDANT MOUNTED lx4 FIXTURE 128 120 HE WILLIAMS XT-CBC-4-4-32-EB4-12D ~ SURFACE MOUNTED B lx4 FIXTURE 12B 120 HE WILLIAMS 16-4-5-32-FA-12125 -EB3-120 WALL MOUNTED C ~ WALL PACK 1D0 120 ACCULITE DS 150PSWT-PCFMBD SURFACE MOUNTED D o INCANDESCENT FIXTURE 100 120 COOPER LIGHTING 248-DB-16-WC/2/60- 120VMWM REPLACE BULB AND CONFIRM E o EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE THE FIXTURE IS IN GOOD OPERATING CONDITION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED BATTERY POWERED EM I~ WALL BACK 20 120 BIG BEAM BBEM-6 X ~) LED EXIT LIGHT 6 120 BIG BEAM EDXL JAMES, LASAI,A & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 6.31.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631.252.1556 JLA JOB# 09AE-00053 O3.09.D9 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 ELECTRICAL LEGEND & NOTES PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.O. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD., BROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 DesTgned By: MPS Scol.: AS NOTED t DRAWING Da~: APRIL 2009 JR_01 File No.: 09011 Drawn Oy: MPS Approved By: CFD BE BASEMENT FLOOR POWER PLAN UP TO E LRP-20 EXISTING Dr~ GENERATOR ~ mY'/-HOOK-UP TO LEE B~ OIL ~ /BE REMOVED / ,- -- ~-. ELECTRICAL ROOM 9-2 OIL /' ,~ ~N ! ~LAYOUT (NEW) DETA L L I ~' ir I// THiS SHEET HV LRP MDP EXISTING PANEL TO BE REMOVED SWITCH 400A DISCONNECT JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 631.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631.252.1556 JLA JOB~ 09AE-00055 03.09.09 JLA JSSUED FOR REVIEW DATE DY DESCRIPTION JLA APPROV. DY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N,Y. 11971 ELECTRICAL POWER BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.O. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD., BROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 DesTgned By: MPS Scale: AS NOTED DRAWING Dat.: APRIL 2009 E-02 File No.: 09011 Drawn By: MPS Approved By: CFD f r-~ i I BASEMENT FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN BOILER RM, NOTES: ALL CIRCUITS REFER TO PANEL LRP. JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 6,51.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 651.232.15.36 JLA JOB# 09AE-0003.3 03.09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 ELETRICAL LIGHTING BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.O. CONSULTrNG ENGINEERS 457 SOUTH COUNTRY RD., BROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 Designed By: MPS stole: AS NOTED Drown By: MPS Dote' APRIL 2009 Approved By: CFD File No.: 09011 DRAWING E-05 CU-! ~ CU-6 ~ CU-B ~ CU-9 UP 2R ,~' 4,6 HV- 14, p_7~ 6,18 HV-15, '~' 17,19 HV-25, 27,29 HV-26 HV-28 AUDITORIUM/ CHANGE TO CAFETERIA IN-FLOOR RECPETACLES J-BOX EXISTING PANEL TO BE REMOVED 4R LRP-1S J-BOX LRP-8 CLASSROOM HV-S4 HV-36 ,#12 UV-6 FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN BOY'S GFI-- HV-31, ATnC ;OVER LIBRAR' E UP eR UP 2R EXISTING PANEL BE REMOVED OFFI( LRP-IO 20A HV-B, HV-30 HV-$2 Hv-g, HV-lg, COVER J-BOX LRP-11 HV-20, J-BOX CLASSROOM HV-38 .f12 20A CU-4 CU-3 CU-7 CU-8 . UP SCOPE OF WORK: 1) DEMO EXISTING WIRING. 2) CONNECT EXISTING/NEW RECEPTACLES AS NOTED, RE-USE EXISTING CONDUIT WHERE POSSIBLE. 3) PROVIDE LIGHT SWITCH AND GFI RECEPTACLE IN ATTIC, COORDINATE LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT. ALTERNATE COORDINATE LOCATIONS AND FOR MORE DETAILS REFER TO MECHANICAL HVAC DRAWINGS 1) PROVIDE POWER TO THE GEOTHERMAL PUMP S PHASE 30 AMP CIRCUIT FROM THE HV PANEL 2) PROVIDE POWER FOR A $ PHASE 50 AMP CIRCUIT TO AH-1 FROM THE HV PANEL 3) PROVIDE POWER FOR A $ PHASE 40 AMP CIRCUIT FOR EACH OF THE FOLLOWING: AHU-2, AHU-3, AHU-4, AND AHU-5 FROM THE HV PANEL JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 6.91,592.2660 FACSIMILE: 6.91,2.92.1536 JLA JOB# 09AE-00055 03.09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 ELECTRICAL POWER FIRST FLOOR PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.O. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD., BROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 DesTgned By: MRS DRAWING Scsi": AS NOTED Dote: APRIL 2009 File No.: 09011 Drawn By: MPS Approved By: CFD E-04 uP FIRST FLOOR 1 I 1 1 1 1 AU B(~SRIUM / CAFETERIA 1 1 1 1 I 1 CHAIRLIFT A A A A A A 6 6 6 6 6 6 CLAS~LROOM 6 6 6 6 6 6 A A A A A A 4 4 4 4 4 4 CLASx~EOOM UP 2R LIGHTING PLAN SCOPE OF WORK: 1) DEMO EXISTING CIRCUIT. 2) CIRCUIT FIXTURES AS SHOWN, RE-USE EXISTING CONDUIT WHERE POSSIBLE. 3) FIXTURES SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH ARCHITECT/OWNER. 4) ALL CIRCUIT NUMBERS ON THIS PLAN REFER TO LRP PANEL. 5) EXTERIOR LIGHTING IS TO BE CONTROLLED VIA TIMECLOCK (LRP-14), Fl EL____D NOTES: UP ~R REPLACE EXISTING WITH SCHOOL HOUSE I~m~ELECTRIC MODEL# WILLAMETTE 6 PD-10-1-6 SHADE MODEL~ 0P-22§5-11-6 JAMF, S, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 1174.9 TELEPHONE: 631.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631,232.1536 JLA JOB# 09AE-00035 03 09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING FIRST FLOOR PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD., BROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 Designed By: MPS Scale: AS NOTED DRAWING Drown By- UPS D.te: APRIL 2009 E-05 Approved By: CFD File No.: 09011 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULE: LRP PANEL NAME: THREE PHASE PANEL NO DESCRIPTION [J DESCRIPTION NO. 1 LIGHTING 1~200 ~20 1 ~ 201 1200~ LIGHTING 2 $ LIGHTING ~ 1200 ~ 20 1 1 20 ~ 1200 ~ LIGHTING A 5 LIGHTING ~ ~200 I 2O 1 1 2O ~ 1200 I LIGHT~NG 6 9 GENERAL EEOEPTACLES ~ 1200 ~ 20 1 1 20 ~ 1200 ~ GENERAL RECEPTACLES 10 11 GEM[hAL E~CEPTACL[S ~ 1200 ~ 20 1 1 20 ~ 1200 ~ GENERAL RECEPTACLES 12 13 CHAIR LIFT ~1000 ~20 1 ~ 20~ ~00~ TmM~ CLOCK 1~ ~LTA~E (I~H/3~):( 120~208 ) NE~:60 WlE~=4 lC: FEB F~M:MDP ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULE: HV PANEL NAME: THREE PHASE PANEL NO, DESCRIPTION ~ DESCRIPTION NO. A c A c 1cu-1 I~oAs ~2o ~ B 2ol ~4B~ ca-2 2 ~ - ~IBAB I .... ~ ~B481 0 7 co-3 I~ ~~o ~ ~ ~ol ~~ cu-, ~ ~ cu-s I~s ~~o ~ ~ =ol ~a~ co-~ . ~,cu-~ I~" ~~o ~ ~ ~ol ~~ ~u-s ~o SUB TOTAL ~ · RIg~ VOLTAGE (IPH/3~}:( 120~08 ) HE~=60 ~lEE$:4 lC: FED ~M:MDP SOUD NEU~ HEIGHT: WIDTH: DE~: G~UND L~A~ON:BASEMENT MAIN BUS AM~:2OOA ~N ~:200A MNN B~: ~UFA~URER ~ ~$L NO,: SQUARE 'O' NQOD NEW INCOMING SERVICE FROM UPA 400A 3P MDP MANUAL /-~tRANSFER · /SWITCH ok 120/208 SP 4 WIRE 200A 3P LEP SEE PANEL SCHEDULES 200A 3P HV SEE PANEL SCHEDULES tA BELOW IS THE PANEL SCHEDULE FOR ALTERNATE ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULE: HV PANEL (ALT ~5) PANEL NAME: THREE PHASE PANEL NO DESCRIPTION ~ ~ DESCRIPTION A B C ~ ~? ~ ~ A B C SUBTOTALS' ~ ~B320 JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 651.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 651.252.1556 JLA JOB# 09AE-00035 03.09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAM/ PANEL SCHEDULES PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.O. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD,, BROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 Deskjned By'. MPS Scale: AS NOTED Drawn By: MPS Approved By: CFD Date: APRIL 2009 File No.: 09011 DRAWING E-06 F RE ALARM LEGEND FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER [] MANUAL FIRE ALARM PULL STATION FIRE HORN/STROBE COMBINATION FIRE STROBE ~E PHOTO-ELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR R "ER" DENOTES ELEVATOR RECALL ~) HEAT DETECTOR "~=D DUCT DETECTOR, SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND WIRED BY FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR, ELEVATOR RECALL INTERFACE RELAY FLOW SWITCH TAMPER SWITCH REMOTE FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL FIRE SPRINKLER PANEL RELAY, POWER AND MONITOR SPRINKLER SOLENOID 10" WATERFLOW BELL CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH SHUNT TRIP GENERAL FIRE ALARM NOTES: 1) ALL CIRCUITS MUST BE CHECKED FOR OPENS, GROUND FAULTS AND SHORTS BEFORE CONNECTING TO CONTROL PANEL. 2) ALL DETECTION, AUDIBLE/VISUAL AND INITIATION DEVICE CIRCUIT WIRES MUST BE SUPERVISED. THEREFORE, NO PARALLEL BRANCHING OF NON-ADDRESSABLE CIRCUITS IS PERMISSIBLE. $) DETECTORS SHALL NOT BE LOCATED (WITHIN $ FEET) IN DIRECT AIR STREAM FROM SUPPLY AIR OUTLETS. 4) ALL SHIELDS TO BE CONTINUOUS AND ISOLATED FROM GROUND. 5) ALL FIRE ALARM WIRING SHALL BE IN MINIMUM 5/4" EMT. 6) ALL DETECTION WIRING SHALL BE CLASS "A". 7) CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PERMITTING AND APPROVAL DOCUMENTATION. 8) CONTRACTOR AND VENDOR ARE JOINTLY RESPONSIBLE FOR FINAL TESTING AND SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE. 9) CONTRACTOR SHALL BID THIS JOB TO CODE. 10) CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY SHOP DRAWINGS FOR BIDDING, PRICING AND PERMITTING PURPOSES. 11) CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL A FULLY COMPLIANT FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. SEQUENCE Of OPERATION: 1) A SMOKE DETECTOR ACTIVATION WILL INITIATE THE FOLLOWING: A) AN ALARM AT THE FIRE ALARM PANEL, B) AN ALARM SIGNAL TRANSMISSION TO THE FIRE DEPARTMENT HEADQUARTERS, C) DISPLAY ALARM AT THE FIRE ALARM PANEL. B) ACTIVATE AUDIBLE/VISUAL DEVICES. E) FAN SHUTDOWN WITH MANUAL RE-START. 2) AUDIBLE/VISUAL ALARMS WILL ACTIVATE ON ANY ALARM CONDITION EXCEPT SUPERVISORY. I I NEW 120V ~ FACP ~ MANUAL PULL STATION SMOKE DETECTOR HEAT DETECTOR DUCT DETECTOR FA SYSTEM LOW BATTERY OPEN CIRCUIT GROUND FAULT NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT SHORT CONTROL UNIT ANNUNCIATION NOTIFICATION JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 651.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631.252.1536 JLA JOB# 09AE-00035 O3.O9.O9 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV. BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 ELECTRICAL FIRE ALARM LEGEND &: NOTES PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD., BROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 Designed By: MPS Stol.: AS NOTED Drown ay: k4PS Date: APRIL 2009 Approved By: CFD File No.: 09011 DRAWING --A-01 E~ 0 I~) BOILER RM. ] F~ I F EC TO REMOVE ] [ I BASEMENT FLOOR FIRE ALARM PLAN 1/8"= 1'-0" JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 6.31.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631,232.1536 JLA JOB# 09AE-00035 03.09.09 DATE PECONIC ISSUED FOR REVIEW DESCRIPTION dLA JLA BY APPROV. BY REVISIONS SCHOOL REHABILITATION - PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y. 11971 DRAWING Designed By: MPS Scale: AS NOTED Drawn By: MPS O.te: APRIL 2009 --0~ Approved By: CFD File No,: 09011 ELECTRICAL FIRE ALARM BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.C. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 SOUTH COUNTRY RD., RROOKI{AVEN, NEW YORK 11719 E~ OO LJP 2R FIRST AUDITORIUM/ CAFETERIA STAGE PLATFORM BOY'S TOILET UP ,~i~EC TO REMOVE TO REMOVE CHAIRLIFT DN CLASSROOM LIBRARY UP 4R UP 2R FLOOR FIRE ALARM PLAN OFFICE EXISTING J-SOX ~INSTALL PHOTO SMOKE ~'E CLASSROOM UP REMOVE CLASSROOM SCOPE OF WORK: 1) REMOVE EXISTING FACP & DACT. 2) INSTALL NEW FACP & DACT, 5) REMOVE ALL NON COMPATIBLE EXISTING DEVICES. 4) REPLACE/INSTALL NEW DEVICES AS REQUIRED OR AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS, JAMES, LASALA & ASSOCIATES, LLP MEP ENGINEERS 11 OVAL DRIVE SUITE 129 ISLANDIA, NY 11749 TELEPHONE: 6,.'31.592.2660 FACSIMILE: 631.252.1556 JLA JOB.~ 09AE-00033 03.09.09 JLA ISSUED FOR REVIEW JLA DATE BY DESCRIPTION APPROV, BY REVISIONS PECONIC SCHOOL REHABILITATION PHASE I IMPROVEMENTS PECONIC LANE SOUTHOLD, N.Y, 11971 ELECTRICAL FIRE ALARM FIRST FLOOR PLAN L. K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES, P.O. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 4S7 SOUTH COUNTRY RD., RROOKHAVEN, NEW YORK 11719 DesiGned By' MPS Scale: AS NOTED Drawn By: MPS Approved By: CFD APRIL 2009 File No.: 09011 DRAWING